JP2022168776A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine preventing connection of joint members, a board and connectors from easily getting unstable.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises an electronic component 4001 including joint members for joining connectors, mounted thereon, the connectors electrically connecting at least one of a power supply, a ground or respective types of signals. The joint members 4001x(S) are disposed on a board 4000 to be attached to a prescribed place in a vertical direction in such a manner that terminal pieces 4006 projecting from one lateral face 4005 of a resin body 4004 are aligned in the vertical direction, and at least one of the joint members 4001x(S) is connected to a pad 4000p formed on the board 4000, with the terminal pieces 4006 turned downward.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 174N

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

A gaming machine is provided with a control section (also called a "main control section" or a "control device") for controlling a game, for example. This control unit is made up of a large number of circuit components (electronic components) mounted on the component mounting surface of the board. ) is enclosed in a transparent synthetic resin substrate box (see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-10-24146

The circuit components of the control unit include those that generate high heat, such as electronic components (PMOSFETs and driver ICs) that drive driving sources (e.g., solenoids) of production devices that have movable parts (hereinafter referred to as "high heat generation configuration (Also referred to as “parts”).
Therefore, when the game machine is in operation, the inside of the board box may become hot due to the heat emitted from the high-heat-generating components, causing the inside of the board box to overheat and the moving parts of the production device to malfunction. there was a risk of
As a countermeasure against overheating in such a board box, many techniques including Patent Document 1 have been developed. .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a highly reliable gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above objects, the present invention
A game machine comprising a board box for holding a board controlling the lottery, wherein a lottery is held based on the establishment of a starting condition, a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, and a board for controlling the lottery is housed,
The substrate box has a vertical surface portion formed by bending an end of the upper surface portion vertically upward when installed in the game machine, and a connector opening is provided through the vertical surface portion,
The circuit board accommodated in the circuit board box is designed so that components that generate a large amount of heat are arranged above the circuit board and below the upper surface of the circuit board box, and are connected to an external device further above the circuit board. is provided, and the connector member protrudes to the outside from the connector opening of the vertical surface portion.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a highly reliable gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a cylinder in a conventional pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the lock from the front, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the cylinder lock of (a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is a cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a main part of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). It is a cross-sectional view showing the. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front lower part. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is in the upward movement end position; is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where has moved to the raised position. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) is a connection between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). FIG. 10C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching portion is provided between the plate units, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of the same. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit. , and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the outer layer of the two-color molding is made opaque in the door frame; Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a closed state; It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. It is a top view of a main body frame. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B2-B2 in FIG. 98A. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B3-B3 in FIG. 98A. FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line B4-B4 in FIG. 98A. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper part of a main body frame from the back. It is a rear side perspective view of the upper part of the body frame showing a state in which the tank unit is disassembled and a game board for mounting is arranged on the front side. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) including a cross-sectional view of the essential parts of FIG. 100(a); It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is a perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging, seeing from behind the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of another embodiment. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the tank rail etc. of a) from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107; 109(a) and 109(b) are sectional views showing another form in which the protective walls of FIG. 109 are provided on the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of the tank rail. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of another tank rail or the like corresponding to the cross-section taken along the Keke line of FIG. 107(a). FIG. FIG. 98B is a sectional view of another form of tank rail, etc., corresponding to the B4-B4 line section of FIG. 98A. It is a perspective view of the ball stop member of another form. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of tank rail or the like cut near the bent portion. FIG. 116 is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of tank rail or the like showing a state in which the ball stop member of FIG. 115 in the retracted position is moved to the projecting position; 115. (a) is a sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. Figure 2 is a viewed perspective view; 118(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118(a) viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 118B is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118(a) being exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118(a) being exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the squeak line in FIG. 118 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ku line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view in (a). It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by Keke's line. 118(a) is a bottom view showing a part behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 118(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which a center member and the like are made opaque; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 126 from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 126 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the center member and the like made transparent; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 126; FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 126; It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. FIG. 10 is a front view of the front structural member showing a state in which the partitioning member is separated into a first partitioning member and a second partitioning member; It is a front view of a first partition member. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st division member from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st division member from the back surface side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the 1st division member from the rear surface side. FIG. 137D is a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 137C; FIG. 11 is a perspective view seen from the front side showing another form of the first partitioning member; FIG. 11 is a perspective view seen from the rear side showing still another form of the first partitioning member; 137I is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 137I; FIG. It is a front view of a 2nd division member. It is a perspective view which makes a part cross-section and shows a 2nd division member seeing from a front side. FIG. 137K is a cross-sectional view along line BB of FIG. 137K; FIG. 137K is a cross-sectional view along line CC of FIG. 137K; FIG. 4A is a cross-sectional view of the essential parts showing the state before joining, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view of the essential parts showing the state after joining. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of the starting unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is the starting unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and front unit in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of a center member in the front unit, and (b) is a perspective view of an upper component forming the upper part of the center frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a center member and the opening part of a game panel. (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center member, the game panel, and the back left decoration of the back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). (a) is a plan view of a third sorting device in the center member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the third sorting device in the center member. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 3rd distribution apparatus of a center member, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 3rd distribution apparatus of a center member, and was seen from the front lower part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in the 3rd distribution apparatus in a center member. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the protrusions provided in the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center member, and (b) is the second V winning opening and the third It is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the game ball when the loss opening is not provided with a protrusion. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow path of the game ball of the right side in a front unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second ball passage portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the third ball passage portion. FIG. 149B is a cross-sectional front view of the main part of the game board showing another embodiment of the bouncing ball receiving part of FIG. 149A; 149B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 149B; FIG. 149B is a cross-sectional front view of the main part of the game board showing an example in which the bouncing ball receiving part of FIG. 149B is applied to the embodiment of FIG. 126; FIG. 149D is a perspective view of FIG. 149D; FIG. 149E is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 149E; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls received in the accessory winning opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third sorting device in (a) from above, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the second sorting device in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the timing of operation|movement of the prize winning opening, 1st distribution device, and 2nd distribution device according to the kind of "small hit." (a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). 149A to 149D are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion different from those in FIG. 149A; (e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing further different embodiments of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion. It is a front view of the back unit in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate effect unit from the front; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the arrangement of each decorative substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front effect unit in the back unit, the sub state indicator and the right part of the center member in the left side cross section; FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front effect unit in the unit, the sub-state indicator, and the right portion of the center member. FIG. 11 is a wiring diagram showing wiring of some of the sub-status LEDs on the back right decorative substrate; (a) is a front view of an out-ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit, and (d) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit and the out-ball detection unit as seen from the lower right front position. It is a figure and (g) is the perspective view which looked at the out-ball detection unit from the lower right rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detecting unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the state in which the out-ball detecting unit is in contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side assembled to the game board and cut vertically at the center of the outlet right sensor. It is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in a state assembled to the game board. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the second pattern. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the first pattern. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing the connection configuration of each board, motors, etc. in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the front view seen from the back which shows a back board unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows a back board unit. 174D is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 174D; FIG. FIG. 174C is a cross-sectional view along line AA of FIG. 174C; FIG. 174C is a cross-sectional view corresponding to line AA of FIG. 174C showing another embodiment; FIG. 174C is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 174C; It is a front view of the pachinko machine seen from the back, showing a state in which the back board unit is mounted. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back, showing a state in which the back board unit is mounted. FIG. 11 is a front view of the main part seen from the back of the back board unit showing another form; FIG. 4 is a side view of a joint member that is a specific electronic component; FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a joint member that is a specific electronic component; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state looking up at a joint member connected to a pad of a substrate; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a substrate showing a bonding member connected to a pad; FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a main part of a substrate showing a state in which a bonding member is arranged under an electronic component (bonding member); FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state looking up at a joint member connected to a pad of a substrate; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 175B is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIGS. 175A and 175B; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 181. FIG. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of power-on of the payout control unit subsequent to FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a first starting opening passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hit determination processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; (A) is a win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, (B) is a big win symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins, and (C) is types of small wins. It is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small-hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the process during a small hit performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is an example of an error notification mode. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing timings of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing timings of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing timings of volume control and sound output suppression of a predetermined frequency band; It is a table showing winning probabilities and the like according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing setting values; It is a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second ball passage portion is provided with a right detection sensor. It is a concrete example of the effect at the time of execution of the warning effect using the right detection sensor. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion; It is a concrete example of the effect at the time of execution of the warning effect using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes are provided in the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion; FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes are provided in the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port is provided near the entrances of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port is provided near the outlet inside the second ball passage portion; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of computation when an abnormality occurs; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution state of computation when an abnormality occurs; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port and a third out port are provided separately from the out port; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of execution of computation when a second outlet and a third outlet are provided separately from the outlet; 3 is a luminescence color pattern table in which luminescence color patterns of a light guide plate are set; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a plurality of decorations are provided around the display area of the effect display device; It is a concrete example of the effect with the light guide plate and the plurality of decorations when the light emission effect is executed. This is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. It is a concrete example of the effect in the light guide plate and the effect display device when the imitation effect is executed. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of setting information determination processing executed by a main control MPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value holding suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of image data in which a display mode of a pending notice effect and a display mode of a setting value pending suggestion effect are combined; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of setting value continuous suggestion production|presentation. It is a table showing winning probabilities and the like according to the setting values of the gaming machine. It is a table showing winning probabilities and the like according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud during setting change of setting values; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when the fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting value is being changed; FIG. It is a front view of a game board of a modification. It is an example of a table used in lottery processing. This is a modified example of setting value suggestion effect. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; It is a perspective view of a main control unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit; FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of another form of main control unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of another form of main control unit; FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of main parts of a main control unit of another form; FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a principal part showing a rotational operation state by a setting key of a main control unit of another form; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of another form of main control unit; FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of main parts of a main control unit of another form; FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a principal part showing a rotational operation state by a setting key of a main control unit of another form; FIG. 11 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a principal part showing a rotational operation state by a setting key of a main control unit of another form; It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. FIG. 2 is an enlarged partial front view of a main part of the main control unit; FIG. 264 is a cross-sectional view taken along line ZZ of FIG. 263; 264 is an enlarged fragmentary front view of the main control unit showing a state in which the change suppressing means has changed from FIG. 263 to the second state; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit; FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part of the main control unit; FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part of the main control unit; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). 3 is an exploded perspective view of a control unit (main control unit); FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a control unit (main control unit). 4 is an enlarged vertical cross-sectional view of a main part of the control unit (main control unit); FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a control unit (main control unit). It is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a main part showing a boundary portion between vertically arranged control units (main control unit, peripheral control units). It is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). It is the rear view which abbreviate|omitted the outer frame which shows the lower half part of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a control unit (main control unit). FIG. 279 is a perspective view showing a form of the control unit (main control unit) different from that in FIG. 279 ;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 89) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and the player can operate the performance operation unit 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side and a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501; I have it.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which game balls B are driven by a player's operation to play a game, a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board (hereinafter also referred to as “main control unit”) 1310 and a setting change board 1311 attached to the rear surface, and a game situation based on control signals from the main control board 1310 , a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a predetermined effect image arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. A displayable effect display device 1600, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state. Incidentally, the main control unit 1300 and the peripheral control unit 1400 are collectively referred to simply as "control units".

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 that provide (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout). The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a normal winning opening 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. Thereby, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. Thus, the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 195 .

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a light guide plate effect unit 3100, a back side, or a The effect unit 3200 or the like can perform a light emission effect to entertain the player.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a right side from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends short in the direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a abuts on the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. Lateral fixing portion 23b, flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the rear side of horizontal fixing portion 23a, and from the rear side of upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends short to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain board by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside is transmitted to the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 at the . As a result, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the balls are discharged from the port member 47 to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and to other players wandering around in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, since the effect sound can also attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect sound with a deeper bass, and it is possible to amuse the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door, a handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the tray unit 200. A door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. A speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end when viewed from the rear at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and the rear surface of the door frame main relay board 104. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the view, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame secondary relay. A door frame relay board cover 107 covering a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 shoots the game ball B in the upper tray 201 by operating the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery. The device 540 is used to play a game in which the player hits the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view. .

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. In this manner, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42). A cylinder insertion hole 101d into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a in the front-rear direction, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b in a front view. and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front-rear direction and exposes the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 forward.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 82). and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decoration board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4; It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101 d of the door frame base 101 .

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to rotate with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can support.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. Fig. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the back and front, and (c) is a conventional pachinko machine. 2 is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 2, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a). Fig. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and Fig. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in Fig. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Fig. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34(a) from the front, and Fig. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of Fig. 34(a). It is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock, (c) is explanatory drawing of a cylinder lock shown in the state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body. It is used for opening and closing with the frame 4 . The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular keyhole 132 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 attached rotatably about an axis in the front-rear direction at a portion below the cylinder body 131 in the upper end side rotates at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 A band plate-shaped first arm 136 that is rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at the lower end side of the center of rotation of the second cam member 135, and the upper end side is the first cam member 134 that rotates. a strip-shaped second arm 137 which is rotatably attached at a portion below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135; ing.

Also, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder main body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from behind except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets that rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to 115 and the upper and lower end sides of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139 and .

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. is doing. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a cylindrical shaft portion 138a that protrudes outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the rear cover 138. The shaft portion 138a is engaged with the L-shaped engagement slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115. It is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of.

In this cylinder lock 130, the cylinder mounting frame 115, the cylinder body 131, the rotation transmission member 133, the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are made of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder main body 131 which passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end of which is attached to the front piece. there is A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131. 34(a) and 34(b), etc., a rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131. As shown in FIGS.

In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 positioned at the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The upper and lower end sides of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower portions of the rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 by the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It will happen. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the second arm 137 has its upper end side attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is reversed from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate it in the clockwise direction.

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that acts upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is generated by the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the portion where the first cam member 134 is attached. 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance from the center of rotation. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. greater power to do so.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136 . , mainly via the second arm 137, the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the action opposite to the above is performed. It will work.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is used to rotate the first cam member 134 clockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 from the normal state, the upper end side of the first cam member 134 rotates to the right of the center of rotation. As the first arm 136 attached to the side moves downward, the second arm 137 attached to the lower end of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, so that the second cam member 135 is rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. Almost no force acts to rotate in the direction of .

Thus, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. It rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135 . The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. , and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 in the horizontal direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 that tends to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases. The arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 .

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from the normal state, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137 . Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned clockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the operation is reversed to that described above. It will be done.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, in which the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are phased at an angle of 90 degrees to each other, are attached. , so that at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is engaged regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132). , the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 can be provided at a different position, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with high decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be used. cost increase can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who has knowledge of the structure may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool, the door frame 3 may be opened to commit a fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131, a tool can be inserted behind the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, since the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated, and the door frame 3, the body frame 4, etc. are opened. can be prevented from occurring.

Further, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. A straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 at the part attached to one of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 of the one arm 136 or the second arm 137 Even when positioned above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. be in a state where Therefore, by positioning one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 , the rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135 . Since the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 even if it cannot be transmitted, the rotation of the first cam member 134 The key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be smoothly rotated without a large resistance to rotation, and unlocking/locking can be easily performed, and the key inserted in the keyhole can be forcibly rotated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Even if one of the arms is damaged, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, the tip of the tool may be hooked on the teeth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. Since the arm 136 and the second arm 137 have a rod shape with a smooth surface, it is possible to prevent the tip of the tool from being caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, thereby preventing the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 from moving. It is possible to prevent the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from being unlocked due to illegal operation of the locking unit 650.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but not limited to, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using a plurality of gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt , and so on.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the discharge solenoid 542 by the discharge control section 633b (see FIG. 173) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball extracting member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being caught in the partition portion 143a. You can prevent bouncing.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to let the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the portion with a narrowed shape, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, through which the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200 are communicated. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is moved by the player's operation. It can be driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 to be described later; A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. a front lens 185;

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, and the handle 195 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end as viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handlebar cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d can be inserted into the three grooves 181c. is inserted, the handle base 181 is brought into a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291 .

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b radially extending outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the portions 195b, and two ring portions extending in an arc around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. A slit 195d and a locking projection 195e projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 195d and locking the other end side of the handle return spring 190 are provided. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and clockwise around one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotated). Two spokes 195b extend counterclockwise from 120 degree angles. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. there is The mounting stays 196b of the three handle guides 196 are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196a are positioned behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference. (see Figure 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I'm trying

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and a peripheral control board (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control unit ), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into five groups according to the command. Each set of ten LEDs 184a can be illuminated with an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the wiring cable to be connected, can be individually (in this case, assembled). Since it is possible to control each unit, the number of electric wires can be reduced, and the configuration of electric wiring can be simplified.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance, and the handle 195 rotates. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with strength according to the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195, and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. To detect. Then, when the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button can be pressed. By canceling the pressing operation of 193, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 193 is operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side of the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. An inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200, an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface, An annular board cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration board 293 from the front and a handle cover 295 covering the outer periphery of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylindrical portion 291a whose inner diameter decreases forward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a tubular rear tubular portion 291c penetrating through the intermediate wall portion 291b and extending in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter allowing insertion of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181; and the inner periphery of the rear tubular portion 291c. A plurality of (here, three) projections 291d are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylindrical portion 291a, and a portion extending from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylindrical portion 291a. a cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward to the front cylinder portion 291f; and an opening 291h penetrating at the lower portion of the portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, a U-shaped guide portion is formed. A guide piece 291g can be positioned within 196a to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front cylindrical portion 291a with a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. .

The inner member 292 has an annular base portion 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c that are cut from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center. divided (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with 3 systems for a total of 18 systems so that each group can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 has two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, commands from the peripheral control board 1510 and A wiring cable made up of four wires, one control signal line for receiving signals such as addresses and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. there is Then, when the LED driver 293b of the handle cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address through the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), it is divided into six groups according to the command. The 12 LEDs 293a can be made to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The substrate cover 294 includes an annular front plate portion 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and the front plate portion 294a. and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b with an outer peripheral edge of the cylindrical side plate portion 294b extending short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at its front end, and has a spindle frustum (kamakura type or bowl type) that bulges toward the rear. , etc.), and a plurality of (here, four) notch openings 295b are provided in the circumferential direction by notching forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. , circular and radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. A portion behind the handle cover unit 290 is inserted, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, and the like are positioned on the front side of the handle cover unit 290. As shown in FIG. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 sandwiches the portion of the handle cover unit 290 that closes the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 is mounted. 101b.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported while its movement in the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, and the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293 is made to emit light. In addition to the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 being decorated with light, the interior of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light.

The handle cover unit 290 has cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, so that when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 is positioned on both the left and right sides and on the lower side. It is possible to make it look as if a hole communicating with the inside of the front tubular portion 291a is open. As a result, the player is relieved from the mental anxiety of sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. can be done.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted is positioned below the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it passes through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed into the outer frame base assembly of the outer frame 2, as shown in FIG. It is provided on the extension line of the slanting direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the three-dimensional structure 40. As shown in FIG. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the opening portion 291h, the cutout portion 292c, and the cutout opening portion 295b to the front cylinder. It can be made to enter into the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player is rotating the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B) by sticking his/her fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291), the main body frame speaker By vibrating the 622 and blowing air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, the player can be surprised, and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Further, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the right cutout opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, thereby opening the door frame 3 and the like. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring portion 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by placing a finger on the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b of the handle 195. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant strength even without continuing to twist the hand. In this way, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in a variety of ways, so the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the left side is provided to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer circumference connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is provided. A handle 195 and a handle cover unit 290 in a form never seen before can be seen at the site where the player is, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. At the same time, the player can be motivated to play the game with the pachinko machine 1, and the player who is playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grips the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine for the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained and entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling. can be suppressed.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to output the production sound, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to be output. The air inside the enclosure 624 due to the box 623 vibrates, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 through the inner space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47 causes the sound pressure to rise. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 is transmitted to the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover by the plurality of vanes 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Sound pressure stimulation can be applied to the player's finger operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Accordingly, sound pressure from the port member 47 is supplied to the player's fingers inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a. , the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the steering wheel operation can be changed, which can entertain the player and prevent the player from getting bored. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h. The interior of the unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving the stress on the player and suppressing the loss of interest in the game. can.

In addition, as described above, the handle 195 and the handle 195 may be pressed against the finger of the player operating the handle 195 while inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 on which the handle cover unit 290 is provided is applied to the grill member 46. Since stimulation is applied by guiding by a plurality of blades 46b, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor) provided on the handle 195 are reduced compared to the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device. 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-shot button operation sensor 194, etc.) and the bearing mechanism, etc., and the handle unit 180 can be made difficult to break. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile. Although the appearance is greatly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the pachinko machine can be played without hesitation. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, a notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which the player's fingers can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. is provided, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through the opening 291h and the lower notch opening 295b. Since it is possible to give a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, it is possible to reduce the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290, and the player is relieved. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened forward, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward through the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the liquid discharged downward from the cutout opening 295 b and the opening 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handlebar 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub portion 195a can be grasped and operated in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portion 195b can be operated with only fingers, and the outer ring The portion 195c can be operated like a steering wheel of an automobile, the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b can be gripped by a finger, or the handle cover unit can be operated by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing an operation such as pinching the inside and outside of the 290 with fingers and capable of various game ball B hitting operations (handle operation). Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player is less likely to get bored. It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, fingers may be hung between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 to grasp them, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by fingers while straddling the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to perform a handle operation that cannot be performed with a conventional pachinko machine, so that a variety of handle operations can be provided to the player. , making it difficult for the player to get bored by entertaining the steering wheel operation.

Further, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The appearance can be such that the 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved in appearance to attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary. By suppressing the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward, it is possible to avoid narrowing of the game area 5a, and it is possible to relatively enlarge the game area 5a, The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by the large game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even if the player operates the handle 195, the luminous decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not blocked by the player's hand, and the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c are conspicuous. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

A handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a notch opening 295b is provided at a portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports an outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and a flange portion 291e for restricting movement in the front-rear direction, and A guide piece 291g is provided, and even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c can be restricted by the guide piece 291g or the like. 195c and spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, after detecting that the player is touching the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, since the operation of the handle 195 is received and the game ball B is hit, only the spoke portion 195b and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c are used. The game ball B can be hit even if the handle 195 is operated in a touched state. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B in a state in which the handle 195 is not touched, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . Mounting base (illustration omitted) protruding forward attached to the mounting base, Dish unit relay board (illustration omitted) attached to the right of the mounting base, and ball attached to the top surface of the mounting base A rental operation unit 220, an upper tray ball removal pre-unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray ball removal pre-unit, It has

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed in the production operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and an operation part base 315. A ring-shaped effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface, an outer periphery board cover 325 covering the upper side of the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. and a partial relay board unit 330 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit 350, which can protrude upward from the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 is provided, and the operation unit base 315, and is attached to the effect operation unit 350. A production operation part elevating mechanism 360 that supports the part unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward projection force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. there is

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. A guide passage portion 201a (Fig. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 extends from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, the outer diameter of the game ball B is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish ball feeding port.

In addition, the guiding passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball B static electricity can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing a main part; The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided in front of the center axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the game ball B is guided straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by the lower tray ball supply port 211j, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, Since the plate ball extraction hole 202b and the lower plate ball supply port 211j are provided in the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate 202, there is a possibility that the game balls B are concentrated in the region on the right side of the center of the lower plate 202. There is Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B flow from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 toward the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full-tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room left in the lower tray 202. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower dish ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely forward left. More specifically, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow. It is tilted diagonally to the left and forward so that it becomes a distance.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned to the left of the center axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. are moving to

As a result, the lowest portion of the lower plate 202 (the portion of the lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is moved leftward by moving the lower plate ball removal hole 202a to the left. In the state where 202a is closed, it is possible to reduce the concentration of game balls B stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray balls are supplied. Since the left side wall of the port 211c extends obliquely and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower plate 202 through which the game ball B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper plate ball The game ball B released from the post-extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guide path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extending left side wall and released. , and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area for storing the game balls B in the lower tray 202 .

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. It has a main body 212 and a plate unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and an upper plate ball attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220. It has a pre-extraction unit (not shown) and an after-extraction upper tray unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the pre-extraction upper tray unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. and an upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) extending vertically and having an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212 .

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed opening, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the upper tray. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball feed guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the post-ball removal unit 240 and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feed opening is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210 , and is located inside the upper tray 201 . A game ball B is supplied from the ball receiving opening of the upper tray ball extraction unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning cash or a prepaid card thrown into the machine after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball ejection button 222 located near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and a button on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the upper tray ball extraction button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball rental operation base 223, a ball rental display unit 226 arranged in the rear lower part of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental button 224 on the outside of the base unit 221. A volume control button 227 arranged in front and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is for adjustment. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern is applied to the part of , as if the sound is coming out of the speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle. A pattern of a light bulb is applied to the part of . The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the sound volume and the amount of light are adjusted using the contact operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation portion 301, the player participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation portion 301 is not executed. Sometimes, the effect operation unit 301 is operated appropriately to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, etc. on the effect display device 1600, and after selecting an item to be adjusted, the contact operation unit 302 is operated. Since the volume of the sound and the brightness of the amount of light have to be changed, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the light amount can be directly adjusted. can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
Mainly referring to FIG. 49, a detailed description will be given of the unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 . The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging B to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be vertically slidable. , a spring (not shown) that urges the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball. A ball feeding guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward; A ball removal guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward from the position and then guiding it rightward in rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port is opened forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving opening and the ball feeding guiding path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper disk ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the operation receiving portion. and a projecting operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward. The lower end of button 222 abuts. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the post-upper-disc-ball-extraction unit 240, the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper-movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242 moves through the operation receiving portion of the upper-disc-ball-extraction slider 242. The pull-out button 222 is positioned at the end of upward movement. In addition, since the upper disk ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball ejection button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242 moves downward and hits the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl ball ejection slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the contacting ball extracting member 143 can move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143, and the partition portion 143a moves toward the entrance 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b from the upper plate 201, is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b opening below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises, and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c which is engaged, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240. can do.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. and a lower front decorative portion 252b that protrudes forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a production operation unit attachment portion to which the production operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid. 265 closes the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

When the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed to move the lower tray ball removal lid 265, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a remains open. , and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pressed rearward and then released. returns to its normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 includes a left plate decoration body 271 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and which has translucency, and a left plate decoration which has translucency penetrating the left plate decoration body 271. It is provided with a lens 272 and a left plate decorative substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decorative lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 has a semi-circular arc projecting forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The right plate decoration unit 275 includes a right plate decoration body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends in the left and right direction and has translucency, and a right plate decoration that has translucency penetrating through the right plate decoration body 276. A lens 277 and a right plate decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right plate decorative lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the center axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are lit, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger on the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side swelling portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). Fig. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and Fig. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from front and lower. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upper movement end position, and (b) is a effect operation from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the part unit has moved to the raised position; FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. (vibration) so that the player can participate not only in the operation of hitting the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the plate unit 200 at the center in the left-right direction and has a spherical outer shape, and the production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the outside and is attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and an effect operation unit provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). An outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315. 330 and.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes the effect operation unit 350 having the effect operation unit 301, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the effect operation unit 350, and the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projection force. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular shape having an insertion opening 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and through which the production operation section 301 is inserted. and a unit top cover 312 . The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled on the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral board cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operation part relay board unit 330 covers the board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body part 315a of the operation part base 315, the operation part relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation part relay board 332 from behind. and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 as shown.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the production operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322), button outer decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, inside button decoration board 364, and operation buttons. It relays connection between the elevation drive motor 367 , the pressure detection sensor 373 , the elevation detection sensor 374 , the protrusion force detection sensor 375 , the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 .

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303. is.

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed tubular button body 351 whose upper end side is closed, a disk-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 351 from below. A cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to move up and down by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and arranged above the button base 354 and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. a contact sensor body 358 connected to and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353 .

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a tubular portion 351b. and a locking portion 351c protruding downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a portion of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 has flat plate-shaped downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central portion of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 can be satisfactorily controlled. It can be decorated with light emission in a normal state.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351. can be done. In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 has a disc shape with a diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351 . The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a center hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and protruding from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. and a pair of guide pins 354c. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor main body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352 . In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button main body can be detected with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. It is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351 . Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310, and the effect operation is performed. The unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation portion 303. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and enters a non-detection state. . Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the pressing force. It is detected by sensor 373 . Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the effect operation section unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal with the button main body 351, when the contact operation section 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button main body 351 is touched. As a result, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to the plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation unit 302 . Further, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 , by forming minute unevenness or a plurality of streaks on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351 , an arbitrary tactile sensation can be given to the contact operation part 302 . can be provided, the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation unit 302 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player more can be provided.

Although the button body 351 is transparent in the above description, the button body 351 is not limited to this. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button main body 351 can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED 355a of the button outer decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decoration board 364 provided below. can entertain.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can move the effect operation unit unit 350 up and down. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylinders arranged symmetrically, the lower ends of which are attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the upper ends of which extend upward through the operating portion base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362 and a disk-shaped upper base 363 which connect the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and have an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and are mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 363 to direct light upward. and a button interior decoration board 364 on which a plurality of irradiable LEDs 364a are mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and urging the button base 354 upward. and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363 .

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operating button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating drive motor 367. a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lift cam drive gear member 370 having a central shaft 366 therethrough and rotatably mounted thereon.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is connected at the lower end to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366. When rotated, the elevating cam raises and lowers the button base 354. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 is attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 373 attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detecting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and an elevating mechanism base 361 attached to the elevating cam driving gear member 370. (Elevation cam member 371) up-and-down detection sensor 374 that detects the up-and-down of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the rotation position, and the elevation mechanism base 361 attached to the elevation mechanism base 361 and the elevation undersprung holding member of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 A projecting force detection sensor 375 that detects the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 and lifting springs that penetrate the base body 361a. and a pair of through holes 361c through which 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 . A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower protrusion into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 . can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see FIG. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The lift cam member 371 is configured so that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the lift cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b. is formed in The elevation cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 by the cam portion 371a by rotating, and the button base 354 (the effect operation portion unit 350) which is urged upward by the elevation spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 forms a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 . be able to.

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 from the normal state. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower movement end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 354. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370 c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 , thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371 f that is connected to the connection portion 370 b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370 . is detected.

The protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in the front-rear direction, and the button base 354 is lifted by a pair of elevating springs 365. The effect operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through it. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 rotates the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 to move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310. can be made In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging section 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a)). ). In this normal state, the effect operation unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation is performed. The part unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section unit cover 310 and the upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation section unit 350 match, and the effect operation section unit cover 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (state in which the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, the elevation drive gear 368 is engaged. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The button base 354 moves slightly downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c while rolling from the 371c to the left part of the engaging portion 371c of the first cam 371b.

Then, when the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. can. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 is lifted with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. Can be protruded into position.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is positioned between the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam portion 371d of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 is above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312. also protrudes upwards.

When the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the effect operation unit 350 , and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372 . When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation section unit 350 (the pressing operation section 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the button main body 351 ( Pressing of the pressing operation portion 303) is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

In addition, when returning the effect operation section unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the urging force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also increases. It is possible to reduce the load applied to the operation button elevation drive motor 367 that rotates the elevation cam member 371, thereby reducing damage (failure) of the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the effect operation section unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in the effect operation section elevation mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to the first cam 371b ( An example has been described in which the button base 354 (the button main body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving from the engaging portion 371c) to the second cam 371d. In a normal state where the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of the 371 and is moving to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a plan view. You may make it rotate in the direction of rotation. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. will move upward along the When the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, if the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped, the button body 351 can be protruded upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pushed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can be pushed downward. can function as

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button main body 351 can be reduced.

Thus, depending on the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, it is possible to change the amount of projection of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), depending on the game state (for example, the first start opening 2002 and By varying the amount of projection of the button body 351 according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2004, the player can be made to suggest the degree of expectation for the game.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a concave portion is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the concave portion so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 stops the elevation cam member 371 from rotating. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward, thereby causing the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) to protrude upward ( projection force) can be changed. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, and a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and the gear portion 384a. An adjusting screw 384, which has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported, and an adjusting screw 384, the pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and the lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 are in contact with each other.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 includes a main body portion 385a extending in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, and a front and rear portion of the main body portion 385a. It has spring holding recesses 385c which are provided at both ends and which are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and flat detection pieces 385d which extend upward from the front end of the body portion 385a. . The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can rotate the adjusting screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 . The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 rotates the adjustment screw 384 by the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, thereby vertically moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 through the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c is moved upward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lift spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lift spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 that urges the effect operating unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. As a result, the urging force that urges the effect operation section unit 350 upward by the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lift unsprung member 385 upward, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 moves the lift unsprung member 385 upward. By stopping the upward movement of 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 can be prevented.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body. Detecting the contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, a player's finger, etc.) to 351, the production operation unit unit 350 is projected by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the object to be detected. Sometimes, the vertical position of the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 may be appropriately selected to vary the projecting force of the button body 351 . As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the strength applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so that if the button body 351 strongly abuts, something good will happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not possible, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game. Therefore, according to the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004), the button By increasing or decreasing the projecting force of the main body 351, it is possible to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation section unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it is impossible to use a force different from the original use. A large amount of stress acts on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal structure will deteriorate and break at an early stage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force ( Since the urging force) is adjusted, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. It can be made to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button external decoration board, and button internal decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) that can project upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button main body 351 of the effect operation part unit 350 is in the state of the effect. It matches the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310 . Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 has a production operation unit peripheral decoration board 320 arranged below a unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer circumference of the pressing operation unit 303 (production operation unit unit 350). , an annular button external decoration substrate 355 and an inner button decoration substrate 364 are arranged on the inner side near the outer edge of the pressing operation portion 303 . The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, it is translucent. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The effect operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the effect operation portion peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the center portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light emission by the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, By sequentially emitting light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation portion 303 . Further, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, light is emitted from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, and light is emitted from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that converges.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position where the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit top cover 312, as shown in FIG. 58(a). state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable contact operations in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participatory effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs voice, sound effects, and the like. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, so that the player recognizes that the contact operation has been accepted. The touch operation unit 302 may be given an operational feeling. At this time, the degree of expectation for the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) is given to the player by means of the emission color, emission brightness, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351. You may suggest it.

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game. good.

In addition, as an effect in the normal state (player participation type effect), an effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to prompt the user to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300, or a voice, sound effect, etc. is output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (effect operation unit unit 350). The urging force of the spring 365 protrudes (pops up) upward. More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), the button base 354 and the effect operation unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation unit 303) vigorously protrude upward due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised. It can attract a lot of attention.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) is activated. When the button body 351 moves downward, the upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 , and the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 . As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

In addition, during the above effects, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude. may be suggested. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the moving range (within the projecting range) of the button body 351 projecting upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351 so as to suggest the player's expectations for the game based on the strength of the projection force.

In addition, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like is outside the projecting range of the upward projecting button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351. The button main body 351 (the production operation section unit 350) may be projected upward when it is detected that the player approaches the . As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the projecting force of the button body 351 is strengthened or weakened by the projecting force adjusting mechanism 380, and the degree of expectation for the game is suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like. You can do it.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound surprises the player. can be done. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects quietly, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the projection of the button body 351. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

As an effect after projecting the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) is generally operated. It is also possible to execute an effect such that a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button is performed. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect such as contacting the projecting button body 351 may be executed. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the protruding button body 351 can be made difficult to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation 302) can be easily operated.

In addition, as an effect for projecting the effect operation unit 350, in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction so that the button base 354 The guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button is lifted and lowered. The drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in the clockwise direction in plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam member 371 in the middle of the third cam 371e. may be stopped so that the upward projection of the button body 351 is stopped at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

Thus, even when the button body 351 is protruded halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player-participation type production. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain the player.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the projected effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), after projecting the effect operation unit 350, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. be minimized. As a result, since the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the effect operation section unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation is improved. can entertain. In addition, as an effect for pressing the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351), the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is set at an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the result of the special lottery, and the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is set. may be any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the effect operation unit 350, and more diverse An effect can be presented, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

In addition, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, a contact detection body is provided so that the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at a plurality of contact stages (approach stage). A plurality of stages of threshold values corresponding to the capacitance of 352 may be provided, and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases as the player's finger or the like approaches the button body 351 (contact detection body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. may be provided to detect in multiple stages and be utilized for production. Specifically, for example, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are away from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage where the player's fingers or the like are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 and are not in contact with the button body 351, By dividing the stage into stages in which a player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the performance according to each stage, even one contact detection sensor body 358 presents a variety of performances to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 385 has been moved upward, but this is not a limitation, and as shown in FIG. It may be in a state of being moved downward. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

As described above, according to the production operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player participation type production, the player can be entertained with various productions, and the player is bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and the effect operation part outer periphery A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation section unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decoration board 320 . In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the effect operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode ) approaches the production operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inside decoration board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield connected to the ground (GND) is provided between the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punching metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 or the inside button decoration board 364 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is moved by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down. , and between the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board 364, a shield connected to a ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 allows the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320 and the button middle decoration board It is possible to reduce the influence of the change in capacitance due to the approach of the decorative substrate 364 inside the button, and to prevent erroneous detection in the main body 358 of the contact detection sensor.

[3-5 f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operating unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operating unit of the effect operating unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, and (b) shows the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a). and (c) is a representation in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like; FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button main body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. A left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, on the top surface of the button body 351, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor main body 391L becomes detection, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detection. becomes. Then, when the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button main body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body to change. Both right 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detection, and the static electricity of the right contact detection body 390R The capacitance has changed and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R and the pattern of the change, the movement of the player's fingers etc. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with more diverse movements, and to present to the player a player-participation-type effect that allows the contact operation unit 302 to perform various contact operations. , the player-participation-type effect that operates the contact operation unit 302 can be more enjoyable. If more contact detectors are added, more complex motions can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact of a human body or the like at any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of mutually different locations. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, the A contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and the accuracy of detecting contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be used as a part of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a part where the player may get injured, or where there is a risk of causing annoyance to other players). A certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent conduct, etc.) may be provided so that when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switching mechanism that connects only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor body 392 between one contact detection sensor body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393. This is an example in which a portion 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). . The switching unit 394 may be "switched by a switching circuit using relays or transistors", "switched by other electronic circuits", or "a movable member (for example, a movable dish left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c)"). The unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are switched along with the movement".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type production is executed such that the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is switched in the order of touching by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 detects whether or not the player's finger or the like touches. good. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 are configured to move forward and backward, the front side of the effect operation unit 300 is the first When the contact detection body 393a is provided and the second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation unit 300 and the like are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. You may make it switch so that it may carry out.

As a result, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. to As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 or the like from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby avoiding the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

On the other hand, if the effect operation unit 300 or the like is projected forward, a gap may be formed behind the effect operation unit 300 or the like. If the operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, and the finger or the like is released from the rear side of the effect operation unit 300 or the like. is notified to the player, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is in a non-detection state, the effect operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the effect operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), a contact detection body 395 for detecting contact of a player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but is circular, polygonal, geometrical, a shape imitating a predetermined character, or a shape imitating a predetermined item. A shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, or the like may be used. Thereby, the contact detection body 395 that can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this. It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, or the like, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. It should be noted that the contact detection body is preferably provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so as not to be directly touched by the player's fingers or the like. can be smooth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the inside button decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. A contact detection body 397 may be provided under the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided therebelow. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and in a normal state, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 prevents the decorative body 398 provided below from being visually recognized. Alternatively, the decoration 398 can be visually recognized through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 by detecting contact with the surface member 396 or the like. good.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot recognize the contact detection body 352, it does not detect the contact of the player's finger or the like or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player-participation type effect is executed and the player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By causing the player to notice the existence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation part 302) for the first time, the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. Figure 62 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421. A door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422 a are mounted vertically and arranged at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side base 421 are attached to the lower front surface of the door frame left side base 421. The front side of the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface are covered. A left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides forward the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and an upper and lower light guide member 427 in the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. From the left side middle light guide member 428 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and the first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction on the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the inner layer 3a is partly outside. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a). ). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 422b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided at the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit full-color light from the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 15 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power for driving the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 423b is mounted. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, and from the seventh to ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups in full color. Thus, one set is controlled by a total of 21 systems, ie, 3 systems.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. are connected. Then, in the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and corresponds to the first LED 422a. A tubular holding tube 424b extending in the front-rear direction is formed at the position. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 holds the light-guiding shaft 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light-guiding shaft 427a of the left-side upper light-guiding member 427, which will be described later. is. This holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding tube 424b, the second light guide plate of the door frame left upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a is formed. The light from the LED 422b irradiates the light guide shaft portion 427a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides, thereby avoiding the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426. be able to.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a faces forward. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. Thus, the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the holding tube 425b, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, which faces the door frame more, irradiates the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 426. - 特許庁

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . In these openings 426a, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429, are inserted from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 further includes a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a constant shape recessed in an arc so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. is doing.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left-side upper light guide member 427 guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . This left side middle light guide member 428 guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 by the light guide shaft portion 428a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a. , made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are vertically spaced at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening portion 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426. It will match the surface of the side decoration 426 . The left side lower light guide member 429 guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be brightly illuminated.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the handle cover 295 . In addition, the color of the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same as the color of the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the part below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end thereof is below the door window 101a and located on the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. is located above the speaker mouth 211b in the . The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door-frame left-side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the door-frame left-side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decoration substrate 423 are placed at a certain distance rearward from the front surface of the door-frame left-side decoration 426 . is provided, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the door frame The left side decoration body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward. is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle light guide member 428 on the left side, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower light guide member 429 on the left side. As a result, the portion of the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Also, the first LED 422 a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 , the first LED 423 a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 , the light guide shaft portion 427 a of the left side upper light guide member 427 , and the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a irradiate the light with an even amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 is evenly distributed. It can be decorated with light emission in a plane.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b projects the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, , Since the decorative portion 426b is provided at the portion where the shadow is projected, the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a can be made difficult to understand, and the left side of the door frame The appearance of the luminous decoration of the side decorations 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is the perspective view which looked at the door-frame right side unit from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface and arranged vertically at regular intervals, and a door frame right side base 431. A door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and a door frame right side lower A right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the decorative substrate 433, and a door frame right side attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration 435 is provided.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 includes a right-side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward the light from the first LED 423a of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and a right-side lower decorative board 433 of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board. A right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from one LED 433a forward is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of ornamental holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. The left side decoration 438 is provided between the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side base 431 so as to close the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A light-transmitting right side left lens 439 having a fitting decorative portion 439a, and a plurality of light-transmissive right side left lenses 439 and a right side base 431 of the door frame are mounted so as to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431, and penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A translucent right-side right lens 441 having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close the decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. The door frame right side base 431 has a rear end extending vertically over the entire height, and a front end extending substantially straight downward from the upper end to near the center in the vertical direction, and then curved rearward. After extending diagonally rearward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 439). A plurality of reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end are provided at a portion of the height where the decorative portion 441a) of 441 is provided. These reflector portions 431a have rear end sides that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 is provided with a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a which are provided behind the front-back direction center in the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is a , penetrates in the left and right direction (they are recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431 reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of a door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c of a door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to the fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to the eighth from the top. divided. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. and the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 21 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems. He is trying to control a total of 24 systems|strains of 3 systems|strains for 1 group above the 3rd LED433c divided into 2 groups.

Although not shown, this door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires, one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510, is connected. Then, in the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 4, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 3 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group out of the grouped groups can be caused to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs are mounted: 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in the upper-lower both sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. At least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two in order from the top. In addition, the twelve second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top, three from the fourth to sixth from the top, and from the seventh to ninth from the top. , and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. and the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, respectively, there are 27 systems in total, 3 systems for one set. On the other hand, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum. Among them, the upper one set of 3 systems is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front side first LED 433a and second LED 433b, and the rear side third LED 433c ) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although illustration is omitted, this door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two LEDs for supplying electric power for driving a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and an LED driver 433d. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A clock line and a distribution cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. Then, in the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, when a command addressed to the address is received via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board), three sets of Six first LEDs 433a divided into four sets, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four sets, and two third LEDs 433c of the lower set of the two sets, each set It is possible to emit light with an appropriate color and intensity every time.

The right side reflector 434 is formed with through holes 434a penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. In addition, a cylindrical holding tube 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a abuts on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front surface of the through hole 434a. Around the sides it is shaped like a dish widening forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a columnar light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434. , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are held straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a projecting forward through the holding cylinder 434b, the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 facing through the through holes 434a on both upper and lower sides thereof, The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame irradiates the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further includes a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction in a certain arcuate recessed shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. is doing.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a. , made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side upper light guide member 436 guides the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a. , made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The surface of the decorative body 435 is matched. This right side lower light guide member 437 guides the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a, and can irradiate it outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be brightly illuminated.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is two-color-molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, in the same manner as the handle cover 295 and the door-frame left-side base 421 described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a, when fitted into the decorative hole 438a, matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration. Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decoration 438. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 439a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 . The door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . In addition, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed such that the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b follows the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 .

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 includes the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b in the same manner as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface to form a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, and protrudes rightward to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is located on the right side of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration Light from the third LED 433c of the substrate 433 can be used for decoration.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side right side decoration 440. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a that is decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are the same as those of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned portion of the side base 421, and is outside the circular or radial patterns of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. is formed in the same color as that of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height portion of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door frame right side unit 430, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 has a substantially half-height portion that protrudes forward greatly from the top, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a. By making it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions that are somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 . is provided, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and is irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435, so that the door frame The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 432 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration body 435 rearward. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, and the door frame The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433, so that the reflector portion of the door-frame right-side base 431 is illuminated. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 that is attached can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the left and right sides of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 (portion of the decorative portion 439a and the decorative portion 441a) can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be used by other players. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be made conspicuous and has a high appeal to the players.

Further, according to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the front-side LED 432b on the front side of the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b illuminate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side. Together with the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative substrate 433, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration 435 are decorated with light. Therefore, due to the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b is emitted from the rear door. The frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are illuminated to be decorated with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiates the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front side. luminous decoration or prevent it. As a result, the right-side door-frame decoration 435 and the right-side left-side door-frame decoration 438 and right-side right-side door-frame decoration 440 on the rear side can be made completely independent of each other to be decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are irradiated with a uniform amount of light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from behind, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 has a door-frame right-side decoration 435 with a decoration portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b causes the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a to be projected onto the door frame right side decorative body 435, the shadow is not projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided at the portion where the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a are located, the shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a can be obscured. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the bottom end of the.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right sides of the pair of top center speakers. A side speaker (not shown), a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top central speaker and the top side speaker, and the front of the door frame top base 451 A door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451 above. there is

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 extends laterally in a semicircular arc along the front end of the top upper cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 , a door frame top left decorative board 456 , a door frame top right decorative board 457 , a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame secondary of the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front toward the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . It is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, Fig. 10 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate left decoration 271 and a plate right decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, a unit upper cover 312 and a button main body 351 of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a unit upper cover 312, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration 453 are the left plate decoration board 273, the right plate decoration board 278, the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, and the door frame. Since the right side upper decoration board 432, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, these decoration boards are arranged. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, and the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical effect operation unit 300 is positioned in the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced. The operation unit 303) can be conspicuous.

In addition, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation section 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere. , the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be made difficult to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) can be operated. This pachinko machine can be made to recognize that it is a pachinko machine 1 different from a pachinko machine, can strongly attract the interest of the player, can enhance the appealing power to the player, and can be used as a pachinko machine to play. It is possible to facilitate the selection of the machine 1.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300, the effect operation section 301 (the contact operation section 302 , and the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic sphere provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the production operation section 301 can easily see the entire production operation section 301, and the production operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly feel that he or she wants to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation section 301, and to heighten expectations for execution of the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加At the same time, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the operation of the performance operation unit 301 allows the player to enjoy the player participation type performance. A decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows a door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed in two colors using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded with two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. Circular and radial patterns are formed by appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a can be seen, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 molded in two colors as part of the exterior, the decorative portion 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration portion 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the color of resin), light transmittance, etc., it is possible to greatly change the appearance even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed on the island equipment, thereby providing a colorful feeling to the players. It is possible to enhance the appeal to

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward from the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and a polka dot decoration is formed by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is applied to the decoration body at the same time. There is no need to apply a desired decoration by painting or the like after forming the substrate in a flat shape.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are light-transmissive. When the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are formed in the same color with different ratios, since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b have the same color, the polka-dot circles are difficult to see, and the appearance looks as if the polka-dot decoration is not applied. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka dot circle is colored white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is colored pink, the color difference between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b causes The polka-dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka-dots. Thus, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin to be used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. Cost can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decoration, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment is made colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of exerting a strong impact on the players who are playing in the game hall and attracting the players.

Further, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances on a portion of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are provided, so that the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorations to improve the appearance. can be done.

In addition, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Thus, the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layers 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. In order to prevent the inner layer 3a from being seen through from the outside, the inner layer 3a can be seen through by using a synthetic resin having a high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b at the time of a model change. Thus, it is possible to greatly change the way of looking at the decoration of the decoration, and it is possible to easily change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decoration.

In addition, as described above, the outer layer 3b having a low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so that the surface of the inner layer 3a has a pattern (pattern by shape, painting, printing, attaching a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using such a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decoration can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decoration. , it is possible to suppress the increase in cost for model change.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board that can irradiate light inside the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. 433, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided inside the door frame 440 emit light, the inner side of the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 The portion of the layer 3a (portion of polka dots) can be decorated with bright light, and the outer side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light, thereby improving the appearance and allowing the player to see the right side of the door frame. The luminous decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also illuminate the outer layer 3b. The entire side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are displayed neatly and the game is played. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the attention of players.

In addition, as described above, the decoration of the decorative bodies such as the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Since it is formed by molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the LED is not lit can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is illuminated, and the change in the decoration can strongly attract the player's interest. In detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED is caused to emit light. Without it, only the surface-exposed portions of the inner layer 3a are visible. On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the portion of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the part exposed to the surface and the part of the hole in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and the decoration different from that when the LED is not illuminated can be seen. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a portion and the outer layer 3b portion of the surface are luminous decoration. The part to be illuminated can be varied, and the decoration to be illuminated can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by causing the LED to emit light according to the game state, the change in the decoration of the decorative body informs the player of the arrival of a chance or the change of the hitting operation (for example, "right hitting"). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suggesting and capable of various performances.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, Since the pachinko machine 1 can give different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the left front and from the right front, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Even if the player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1 once, when the player approaches the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that of the previous excursion, thereby attracting interest in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be made to attract players who are wandering around the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. .

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in a front view for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

In the handle 195, the front side of the central hub portion 195a is covered with a handle front lens 185, and between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided. is provided. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

The number of handle decoration substrates 184 is 1 in the center, 3 in the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and 6 at regular intervals in the circumferential direction along the outer circumference, for a total of 10. LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a row on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. It is divided into 6 groups, 2 on the bottom right and . The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a in each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that the light is emitted to rotate around the handle 195, and the light is emitted toward the center of the handle 195. A player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated and a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加Also, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decorative body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decorative body 435 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration 271, the plate right decoration 276, the door frame left side decoration 426, the door frame right side decoration 435, and the door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. Since it is formed, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decoration 435 A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, four LEDs 273a are mounted on the front surface of the plate left decorative substrate 273 in a row in the horizontal direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the plate right decorative substrate 278 to be described later to emit light. (illustration is omitted). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

The plate right decorative board 278 has four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically at regular intervals, and two LEDs 422a are vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. It has eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for driving a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The eight second LEDs 422b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 422c. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two of each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It has 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, four first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a on the front surface. It has eight mounted second LEDs 432b and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 emits light from a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. LED driver 432d. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by a dashed line in FIG. 72, the upper two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eight from the top. It is divided into three sets of three pieces up to the first one. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LED 432a divided into two groups, the second LED 432b divided into three groups, the third LED 432c divided into two groups, and the third group divided into two groups in the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 A set of third LEDs 433c on the upper side of the LEDs 433c is controlled by 24 systems by an LED driver 432d. It can emit light in full color.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two LEDs arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a on the front surface. 12 mounted second LEDs 433b, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface with a gap in the vertical direction, the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the lower two third LEDs 433c. and an LED driver 433d for emitting light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three LEDs from the first to the third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top. , 3 from the 7th to 9th from the top and 3 from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. 6 first LEDs 433a divided into 3 groups, 12 second LEDs 433b divided into 4 groups, and 2 third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the 2 groups , LED driver 433d, and the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c of each set can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 423 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are used. The substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are formed in a shape asymmetrical with respect to the lateral center of the door window 101a. In addition, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

The door-frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door-frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative board 433 are mounted on the respective front surfaces. While the numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b are the same, the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. 72 A system connected by a chain line or a two-dot chain line) is provided symmetrically. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effects.

On the door frame top center decorative board 455, there are six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, LEDs 455a, LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for emitting light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, And the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 passes through the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the left side lower guide. The light guide shaft portion 429 a of the light member 429 , the light guide shaft portion 436 a of the right side upper light guide member 436 , and the light guide shaft portion 437 a of the right side lower light guide member 437 form the opening of the door frame left side decorative body 426 . The light is guided to 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, in front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the player can see a light emitting effect of emitting bright light in a dot shape, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines. A player can be surprised by a light-emitting effect of flashing spot light.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, and the door frame left side lower Second LED 423b of decorative board 423, second LED 432b of door frame right side upper decorative board 432, second LED 433b of door frame right side lower decorative board 433, LED 455a of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board The LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated to light-embellish the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or to perform light emission so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to or played by the player.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. In FIG. 72, the system of the LEDs connected by the dashed line allows the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 to perform planar light emission (surface light emission). can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 427a. By the shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is guided to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and forward from there. Therefore, compared with the general surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated brightly with high brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 And even if the part of the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 is spot-lighted with high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare, and the game is played through the door window 101a. The game ball B, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and spot light is emitted with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 projecting forward (connecting the front ends projecting forward in an arc shape in plan view). Since it is provided on a straight line in the vertical direction, the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player side by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and is emitted behind the door window 101a. The inside of the game area 5a is not difficult to see, and by emitting spot light with high brightness, other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at substantially the same position as the vicinity of the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. As a result, when the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are spot-lighted, even other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the high-intensity spot light. Therefore, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the players can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine in the game hall can be used to select the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of attracting players who are wandering around to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, on both sides of the spot LED (first LED 422 a, first LED 423 a, first LED 432 a, first LED 433 a) for spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) preferably belong to the same system. As a result, both sides sandwiching the light guide pins (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED Since the surface LEDs have the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the upper surface. A performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 is provided. This performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operating section peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner periphery, and 3 are spaced apart on the circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. , and the remaining nine are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322, four are provided on the circumference near the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided midway between the inner circumference and the outer circumference. They are spaced on the circumference, and the remaining six are spaced on the circumference near the outer circumference, three by three near the ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. are divided into three sets of one piece each, and three sets of three pieces each of the nine pieces on the outer circumference in the circumferential direction, for a total of nine sets. The 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decoration board 322 are connected by a dashed line in FIG. There are 3 sets of 3 pieces each, and 2 sets of 3 pieces near each end of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference, totaling 7 sets. That is, on the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 groups are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and the LEDs 320a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

According to this effect operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, light emission effect such that light rotates in the effect operation unit 301, and light emission such that light is concentrated at the center. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the door frame 3 extends vertically along the door window 101a to the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other in the left-right direction so that the amounts of protrusion in the front-rear direction are different from each other. A door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration are provided. Door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted and door frame left side lower decorations on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted behind each of 435 A substrate 423, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forward Light guide shaft portion 427a of left side upper light guide member 427, light guide shaft portion 428a of left side middle light guide member 428, light guide shaft portion 429a of left side lower light guide member 429, right side upper light guide member. 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437, the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative substrate 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right side of the door frame. The second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame emit light, so that the left side decoration 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame are illuminated. It is possible to make planar light emitting decoration (surface light emission), and the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward passes through the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 by the portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. In the frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 The portions corresponding to the tip of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be decorated with dot light (spot light emission). can.

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side upper decoration board 422, the door frame left side lower decoration board 423, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432, and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 are The second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b are caused to emit light appropriately, so that the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the game area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting decorated in a plane, or a part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 may be light-emitting, or the left side of the door frame may be decorated. The entire side decoration body 426 and the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner and a part thereof can be decorated in a point manner, so that the player can see various lighting effects. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are divided, and the door frame right side The system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decoration board 432 and the lower right side decoration board 433 of the door frame are divided into left-right symmetry, and in each Since the plurality of first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the plurality of second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are different systems, the door frame left side Lighting patterns of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decorative body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side. , for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 may be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the left side of the door frame decoration 426 and the door frame Since it is possible to create data with the same flow on the right side decorative body 435 side, it is possible to simplify the labor involved in creating lighting pattern data (with the same creation time ) It becomes easier to construct more complicated lighting pattern data, and it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects of the lighting pattern, and at the same time, it is possible to show the player various light emitting effects with high effects. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting a sufficient performance effect for the light emission performance of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the left and right outer sides of 101a.

In addition, since the two second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are the same system. , so as to sandwich the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, the light guide shaft portion 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LEDs 423b, 2nd LEDs 432b, and 2nd LEDs 433b provided in the are always turned on at the same time, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b light guide shaft portion 427a and guide shaft portion 427a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to cancel out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435. The shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly decorated with light.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, and the second LED 433b. The first LED 432a and the first LED 433a light-embellish the portions corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portions 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a dot-like manner. As a result, it is possible to show the player a lighting effect that could not be seen in previous pachinko machines, such as a planar light and a partial light in a dot shape, and the light is bright in a dot shape. The player's interest can be strongly attracted by the light emission effect, etc., and the player can be surprised by the light emission effect, in which spot light is emitted in a dot shape, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower side on the other side (right side). Since the decorative substrates 433 are asymmetrical to each other, at first glance, the left side of the door frame upper decorative substrate 422, the lower left side of the door frame decorative substrate 423, the upper right side of the door frame decorative substrate 432, and the right side of the door frame. Since the side lower decorative board 433 can be identified, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame to be assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid mistaking the lower right side decorative substrate 433, improve the workability of assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative substrate 273, the plate right decorative substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the door frame right side are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The upper side decoration board 432, the lower door frame right side decoration board 433, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. I'm trying As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected forward, so that the decorations and the like in the front can be illuminated brighter, and the front (player side) is reflected. This makes the decorative substrate inconspicuous.

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decorative boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification unit 7 includes a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numerals, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74). and have

More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the dish left decorative board 273 has the character "lower left", the dish right decorative board 278 has the character "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the character "upper left". , the letters "lower left" on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the letters "upper right" on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the letters "lower right" on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The characters are "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "upper left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "upper right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is not provided on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to hinder the soldering of LEDs and the like mounted on the decorative substrate. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decoration board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but various The decorative substrate may also be provided with identification portions 7 such as the character identification portion 7a and the color identification portion 7b.

In the above-described embodiment, the identifying section 7 includes both the character identifying section 7a and the color identifying section 7b. Alternatively, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to make a decoration board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made white as much as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board The light is reflected forward on the front surface of the decoration board, so that the front decorative body or the like can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), thereby improving the appearance. can do better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b as the identification portion 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, the desired (desired color) can be obtained just by looking at a part of the decoration board. ) can be recognized as a decorative substrate. Therefore, even when a plurality of kinds of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, the desired decorative substrate can be easily found. can be simplified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is made different for each decoration board, when preparing the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 at the time of assembly, the same color can be used. When there is a decorative board provided with the identification portion 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient. Therefore, it is possible to surely prepare the required number of decorative substrates, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up at the time of assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification portion 7a as the identification portion 7 for distinguishing from the other substrates is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the operator can read the characters of the character identification portion 7a. Thus, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface, the decoration provided in front of the decoration board is highly transparent. Also, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), the appearance of the decoration can be improved, and the light from the LED is reflected forward by the white front surface of the decoration board. is possible, the decorative body can be decorated with brighter light emission, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance with high performance effect, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration board so that the functional parts cannot be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to being visible, and improve the appearance of the decoration (game machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by being provided on the back surface of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. It is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 by omitting the trouble of coloring the functional parts.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The body frame 4 is an assembly of the following units, etc., and a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. , and is attached to the left upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. and a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the lower end of the main body frame base unit 500 on the left side in front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 . a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to which is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending back and forth. ing.

[4-1a. Body frame base (1)]
The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the horizontal direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 in the left, right, and rearward directions.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the front-rear right side of the portion 501e in the front view, and a substrate unit in which the board unit is penetrated in the front-rear lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620, and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base 501 has a body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is mounted. there is When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

On the main body frame base 501, a game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to a longitudinally extending axis at a position below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at the end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 through the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. In this state, when the handle 195 is rotated, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

[4-6a. Payout basis]
The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 .
The dispensing base 551 is made of a transparent synthetic resin as a whole, and has a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction. A left side plate portion 551b extending downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a and a right side plate portion extending short downward with a width substantially the same as the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. 551c, a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and approximately rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end with a constant width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and a left side plate portion. A bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front portion of the lower side of 551b to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. and a portion 551h. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of a groove that opens upward. It has a tank unit consisting of a tank rail 553 that is attached. Therefore, the top plate portion 551a, the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper back plate portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 are formed on the body frame 4 for mounting the tank unit including the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. compose the department.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member attached to the upper edge of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. 556, and a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the tank rail 553 at the downstream end when viewed from the front.

[4-6b. Sphere tank (1)]
The sphere tank 552 that constitutes the tank unit is made of an opaque black synthetic resin having conductivity, and is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a.
The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.
In the embodiment, as shown in the broken line in FIG. 98A (top view), and in FIG. 98D (cross-sectional view) and FIG. A through-hole-shaped fitting opening cutout 551ah is formed in a part of the tank unit, and the fitting opening cutout 551ah is covered with the tank unit.
A total of two attachment opening cutouts 551ah are provided in each of a portion of the tank unit that overlaps the tank rail 553 and a portion of the tank unit that overlaps the connecting portion between the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 . are formed.
Since the partition between the tank unit and the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is partially eliminated at the portion where the attachment opening cutout 551ah is provided, the attachment opening cutout 551ah corresponding to the connection portion of the tank unit , the space for housing the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is substantially expanded toward the tank unit side, and on the other hand, the mounting opening cutout 551ah corresponding to the tank rail 553 provides a space for installing the tank rail 553, In other words, the vertical space for providing a drop in the flow of game balls is substantially expanded toward the back unit 3000 side.

In addition, the mounting opening cutout 551ah on the side corresponding to the connecting portion of the tank unit can be used as a means for substantially expanding the space for accommodating the rear unit 3000 as described above, and can also be used as a space for installing the tank unit. It can also be used as a substantial extension of
98B, the enlarged view of FIG. 100(b), and the enlarged view of FIG. A projecting piece 553d for a joint that supports the bottom surface of the ball tank 552 projects from the right end of the ball tank 552 toward the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball tank 552 from settling alone due to the ball pressure, and prevent the joint with the tank rail 553 from forming a step. On the other hand, however, such a projecting piece 553d forms a protrusion for a joint on the flat bottom surface of the tank unit, and if such a protrusion abuts against the top plate portion 551a constituting the tank unit mounting portion, the sphere tank will be deformed. Since the load of the game ball filled in 552 concentrates on the protruding portion (protruding piece 553d), the stress may crack or damage the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, in the embodiment, since a through-hole-shaped attachment opening cutout 551ah is formed in a part of the portion overlapping the connecting portion between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, even if the tank unit side is not provided with a projecting piece 553d. Even if there is a protrusion for the joint, contact can be avoided. Therefore, the load of the game ball applied to the tank unit is distributed in the plane direction by the bottom surface of the tank unit and the top surface of the tank unit mounting portion (top plate portion 551a). can be distributed in

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 98D and 99B, the tank unit mounting portion (top plate portion 551a) of the embodiment has a T-shape that continuously intersects the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout 551ah in a linear fashion, as shown in FIGS. 98D and 99B. A stepped rib 551ar is formed. The stepped rib 551ar can increase the rigidity of the edges of the tank unit attachment portion and the attachment opening cutout portion 551ah. In addition, since the ribs are stepped instead of the general ridges, the high side (top plate portion 551a) of the stepped ribs 551ar and the bottom surface of the ball tank 552 of the tank unit can be in surface contact, so that the ball tank The load of game balls accumulated in 552 can be dispersed. Furthermore, the gap formed between the lower side of the stepped rib 551ar and the bottom surface of the tank unit can be used as an exhaust (exhaust heat) passage connecting the attachment opening 551ah and the outside.
Although the stepped ribs 551ar of the embodiment are linearly formed in the horizontal direction of the body frame 4 , they may be linearly formed in the longitudinal direction of the body frame 4 . In this case, the upstream side with respect to the flowing direction of the game balls in the ball tank 552 is the high side of the stepped rib 551ar, and the downstream side is the low side of the stepped rib 551ar.

By the way, transparent synthetic resin is generally considered more expensive than opaque resin. The space for accommodating the rear unit 3000 is substantially expanded, and similarly, the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the rear unit 3000 can be obtained. should be formed. For example, when the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, in addition to the above effect, the state of the game ball rolling in the tank rail 553 can be confirmed from the front of the game machine through the mounting opening cutout 551ah. be able to.
Further, when the ball tank 552 is configured so as to be visible through the opening cutout 551ah of the mounting portion, the ball tank 552 is preferably made of a conductive resin and electrically grounded. Game balls flowing into the ball tank generally store high-voltage static electricity. It is possible to minimize the emission of electromagnetic noise due to In other words, the influence on the electronic circuit provided on the game board 5 can be suppressed.
It should be noted that the tank rail 553 is not limited to the sphere tank 552, and the tank rail 553 may be made of a conductive resin. All you have to do is take a peek.

Here, in relation to the mounting portion opening cutout portion 551ah provided in the tank unit mounting portion, the fact that the rear box opening cutout portion 3010h is also formed in the later-described rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 will be described.
That is, as shown in FIG. 99B, the back unit 3000 is attached with a transparent box-shaped back box 3010 covering the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the back box 3010 is equipped with an effect display device and a mechanical movable effect. A production device including a unit 3600 and the like is assembled.

The back box 3010 has a rear wall 3010f facing a back cover 640 on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 at a close distance, and a top wall 3010g on the upper surface, in the state of FIG. is close to the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
As shown in FIGS. 98C and 99B, the ceiling wall 3010g of the back box 3010 is formed with a ceiling wall bent portion 3010z that bends in an obtuse-angled crest shape. It is close to the inner surface of the mounting portion and is gradually separated from the tank unit mounting portion by an obtuse gentle slope. Normally, the tank unit mounting portion is generally flat to receive the bottom surface of the sphere tank 552. Therefore, between the top wall 3010g of the back box 3010 and the tank unit mounting portion, the top wall bending portion 3010z is the starting point. , or if one surface of the top wall bent portion 3010z is sandwiched between the tank unit mounting portion and parallel to the tank unit mounting portion, the top wall bent portion 3010z is used as a starting point to gradually expand in one direction. A gap is provided in the form of a flare.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 99B, the ceiling wall 3010 of the embodiment has a ceiling wall bending portion 3010zz that bends in a valley state with an outer obtuse angle in addition to the ceiling wall bending portion 3010z. The top wall bent portions 3010z are formed in different directions (for example, the ceiling wall bent portion 3010z is substantially in the front-rear direction, and the ceiling wall bent portion 3010zz is in the oblique direction). It has a polyhedral structure.
Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 98D, the back box 3010 has a part of the top wall 3010g protruded into the mounting opening cutout 551ah of the tank unit mounting portion, and is temporarily thinned by a slight thickness of about the plate thickness. Even if it is a quantity, it is designed to expand the capacity. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the movable portion 3600g of the movable effect unit 3600 is improved.

In addition, the back box 3010 of the embodiment is positioned along the rear edge of the top wall 3010g so as not to vertically overlap the mounting opening cutout 551ah, and in a state where it straddles the top wall bent portion 3010z. A back box opening cutout 3010h is formed. In addition to the top wall bent portion 3010z, the top wall bent portion 3010zz also intersects with the back box opening cutout portion 3010h from a different direction, as shown in FIG. 99B. The strength of the box opening notch 3010h (shape stability of the opening) is also enhanced.
As shown in FIGS. 98D and 99B, the back box opening cutout portion 3010h is located within the opening region of the movable effect unit 3600 in plan view. It is at a position where it can be seen from above, and the upper part of the movable part 3600g of the movable effect unit 3600 is at a height position where it can be touched with a finger from the back box opening cutout 3010h. Therefore, the movable effect unit 3600 can be moved by inserting a finger or, for example, a bar-shaped tool from the back box opening cutout 3010h to the game board 5 that is not attached to the main body frame 4 (removed from the main body frame or is new). (Links, gears, etc.) 3600g can be cleaned, lubricated, etc., and maintenance and operation can be checked. intermediate gear), it is possible to directly access the movable portion 3600g of the transmission system and check the operation through the transparent back box 3010. It is also possible to temporarily fix by engaging a stopper or the like, thereby preventing a damage accident due to vibration or impact during transportation.
By the way, as shown in FIGS. 98C and 99B, the back box opening cutout 3010h of the embodiment has a substantially inverted L shape extending over the top wall 3010g and the upper part of the rear wall 3010f. A wider opening (a larger opening on the top wall 3010g side and a smaller opening on the rear wall side 3010f) can be obtained in a state where it is not attached to the top wall. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4 (during assembly work or inspection at the factory), the total of the large opening on the top wall 3010g side and the small opening on the rear wall 3010f side is the movable portion. You can access the 3600g from various angles and perform careful confirmation work. On the other hand, when the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4 (such as when used in a game hall), the large opening on the top wall 3010g side is covered with the tank unit mounting portion to prevent unauthorized access to the inside. However, only a small opening on the rear wall 3010g side is left to enable only minimal maintenance of the movable part 3600g with the back cover 640 of the body frame 4 opened. This makes it possible to achieve both ease of maintenance and security against unauthorized access.
Further, the back box opening cutout 3010h is not limited to a single hole shape, and may be configured by an assembly of a plurality of opening cutouts. In this case, with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, only the portion corresponding to at least the main movable portion 3600g among the plurality of lined opening cutouts is covered with the tank unit mounting portion or the back cover 640. You should be able to do it. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the tank unit mounting portion and the body frame 4 (the back cover 640) is improved compared to the configuration in which the entire back box opening cutout portion 3010h is covered.
In the back box 3010, the top wall 3010g may be deformed stepwise, or the boundary between the top wall 3010g and the rear wall 3010f may be obliquely deformed. The visible back box opening cutout 3010h can be seen as the top wall 3010g side, and the rest can be seen as the rear wall 3010f side.

In addition, the movable effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 protrudes from all horizontal imaginary straight lines (see one-dot chain line L in FIG. 98C) that can intersect the upper edges of the left and right sides in the front-rear direction of the back box opening cutout 3010h. not in position.
In general, a plurality of game boards 5 are packed into one box and transported. For example, if the balance is lost due to the weight when the boxes are packed in order from the top, there is a possibility that the game panel 1100 of the later game board 5 will accidentally hit the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 that has been inserted earlier. be.
However, even in such a case, the game board 5 of the embodiment stops when the lower side of the other game panel 1100 hits the upper edge of the left and right sides of the back box opening cutout 3010h, so that the movable effect unit 3600 below it can move. It does not hit part 3600g. This is the same as that the back box opening cutout 3010h is substantially covered with the virtual face plate on which the virtual straight lines L are arranged, and the installation possible area of the movable part 3600g is equivalent to the plate thickness of the back box 3010. can be extended upwards.
A stepped portion 3010t higher than the back box opening cutout 3010h may be provided in the vicinity of the back box opening cutout 3010h of the top wall 3010g, as indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 99B. In such a case, even if some object collides with the back box 3010 from above against the game board 5 that is not attached to the main body frame 4, most of it hits the stepped portion 3010t and hits the back box opening cutout 3010h. Since it does not hit, the safety of the movable effect unit 3600 can be further improved.
This stepped portion 3010t may be provided on the left side in FIG. 99B as indicated by the imaginary line, or may be provided on the right side near the rear box opening cutout 3010h. Even in such a case, even if some object collides with the back box 3010 from above against the game board 5 that is not attached to the main body frame 4, most of it hits the stepped portion 3010t and hits the back box opening cutout 3010h. , the safety of the movable effect unit 3600 can be improved.
Here, the location of the stepped portion 3010t in the vicinity of the rear box opening cutout portion 3010h may be determined by selecting a position that is advantageous in securing a heat radiation passage portion. 99B, the stepped portion 3010t can be replaced with a back box in FIG. It is preferable to provide it on the right side near the opening cutout 3010h.

Also, when the game machine is in operation, the heated air in the back box 3010 rises and is released from the back box opening cutout 3010h above the back box 3010 toward the main body frame 4 side. At this time, in the embodiment, a gap is formed between the top wall 3010g of the back box 3010 and the tank unit mounting portion so as to gradually widen in the horizontal direction starting from the top wall bent portion 3010z as described above. Moreover, since the back box opening cutout 3010h straddles the ceiling wall bent part 3010z, the heat generated in the back box 3010 gradually spreads from the back box opening cutout 3010h, and the gap is used as an air passage for the main body. It is discharged to the frame 4 side. Therefore, the ceiling wall bent portion 3010z of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 is brought as close as possible to the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame 4 to increase the capacity of the back box 3010 (expand the internal space), and the inside of the back box 3010 It is also possible to improve the heat dissipation performance.
Part of the heat discharged from the back box opening cutout 3010h of the back box 3010 is discharged to the outside of the main body frame 4 through the gap on the right side in FIG. On the other hand, the heat passing through the gap on the left side in FIG. 2, 7, 12, 78, and 98C) and the right side of the frame 4 in front view. Normally, the heat in the body frame 4 is radiated to the outside through the heat radiation slit 641 (see FIGS. 7, 12, 78, and 98C) of the back cover 640. A part of the body frame 4 is preferably made of metal such as aluminum or iron, which has excellent thermal conductivity. In particular, in the embodiment, a large amount of heat discharged from the back box opening cutout 3010h rises along the inclination of the inner surface of the tank unit mounting portion in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game balls, so that the ball tank 552 The right side 4r of the main body frame 4 corresponding to the upstream side of the main body frame 4, that is, the whole or upper part of the right side 4r in the front view of the main body frame 4 is made of metal with excellent heat conductivity, so that the back box 3010 and the main body frame 4, the exhaust heat measures can be effectively performed.

[4-6c. Tank rail (1)]
The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 .
In addition, the tank rail 553 is provided with a shooter-like step that rapidly descends from the ball tank 552 side toward the tank rail 553 side by using the attachment opening cutout 551ah at the joint portion with the ball tank 552. Further, from the joining portion, the flow path is changed obliquely rearward at the first corner, and is formed in a crank shape in plan view so that the flow path is oriented in the left-right direction at the second corner.
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98E, the tank rail 553 has a gutter shape in which a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y are raised in front of and behind the passage bottom wall 553z. An arcuate portion 553r having an inner radius is formed on the upstream side of the ball stop member 557 at the corner, and a corner portion 553t having a substantially right angle valley fold shape is formed at the corner on the rear side of the passage bottom wall 553z. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) fall ports 553h capable of discharging foreign objects are formed on the rear side of the bottom wall 553z in an extended state to the lower edge of the gutter rear wall 553y.

It should be noted that it is possible to freely set how many such drop openings 553h are to be formed in the front and rear corners. For example, all of the drop ports 553h are formed in the rear corners, or a plurality of drop ports 553h are alternately formed in the rear and front corners, or the drop ports 553h provided in the front corners are maximized. At least the most upstream drop port 553h is preferably formed at the corner 553t facing the arc-shaped portion 553r.
This is because even if there is foreign matter on the arc-shaped portion 553r of the tank rail 553, the air does not easily stagnate on the arc surface, so it is easy to move along with the air current accompanying the flow of the ball. Since foreign matter tends to move toward the opposite corner 553t along the rounded surface of the portion 553r, the foreign matter eventually gathers at the rear corner 553t and is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h. Therefore, foreign matter that has entered the tank rail 553 moves from the arc-shaped portion 553r formed in the upstream portion to the corner portion 553t, and the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the most upstream drop port 553h provided in the corner portion 553t. Therefore, the residence time of the foreign matter in the tank rail 553 can be shortened as much as possible. Moreover, at the junction between the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, there is a shooter-like step 553u (Fig. 98A, 98B) is provided, and the step 553u is likely to vibrate, and the vibration further promotes the fall of the foreign matter from the drop port 553h.
Also, the drop opening 553h of the tank rail 553 is preferably formed at the corner portion of the crank (preferably on the outcourse side where the moving foreign matter makes a large turn due to inertia) as shown in FIG. 98A. By doing so, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail 553 tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner portion of the crank of the tank rail 553 due to inertia, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port 553h provided there. .

The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end connected to the ball tank 552, and the width in the front-rear direction is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to about one depth. After extending in this direction, the width in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B.例文帳に追加
The tank rail 553 is inclined such that the passage bottom wall 553z is lowered toward the left side, and furthermore, a square vertical short cylinder portion 553s extends from the left end, and the rail exit 553p is at the lower end of the short cylinder portion 553s. is open, and the rail outlet 553p communicates with the guide inlet 570p that opens at the upper end of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

In the tank rail 553, the height of the trough front wall 553x and the trough rear wall 553y, which extend straight to the left, is 4 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball B from the passage bottom wall 553z on the ball tank 552 side. While it is about twice as large, it is about the diameter of the game ball B at the left end (flowing end), and is inclined so that the left end is lower at a steeper angle than the passage bottom wall 553z.
A part of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is aligned with a passage seat portion 551z (see FIG. 98E) having a substantially L-shaped cross section formed on the top plate portion 551a.
In addition, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556 on the upper surfaces of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y, which extend straight to the left. A ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface on the left end side.

[4-6d. technical means]
The embodiments herein correspond to technical means A to E as follows.

[4-6d-1. Technical means A1]
a game board comprising a game panel having a game area on its front surface and a back box covering the rear surface of the game panel;
a tank unit comprising a ball tank for storing game balls and a tank rail for guiding the game balls in the ball tank downstream;
a tank unit mounting portion located above the back box of the game board and mounting the tank unit on the upper portion of the body frame,
A part of the tank unit mounting portion overlapping the tank unit is formed with a through hole-shaped mounting portion opening cutout, and the mounting portion of the tank unit mounting portion is located above the back box of the game board. The game machine is characterized in that a through-hole-shaped back box opening cutout is formed at a position not overlapping the opening cutout in the vertical direction.
According to such a game machine, since the partition between the tank unit and the back unit is partially eliminated by providing the tank unit attachment portion with the opening cutout, the space for accommodating the back unit of the game board is replaced by the tank unit. The space for installing the tank unit is substantially expanded to the back unit side, and in addition, by providing the back box opening cutout in the back box of the game board, the inside of the back box and the tank unit mounting part are separated. Since the partition between them is partially eliminated, the capacity of the rear unit is substantially expanded into the tank unit mounting portion. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the rear unit increases.
In addition, the mounting part opening cutout is provided in a state where it is hidden in a plan view in the part overlapping the tank unit, and the air heated in the back box of the game board flows through the mounting part opening cutout from the back box opening cutout. Since it passes through and is discharged to the outside from the gap with the tank unit, there is almost no risk of dust or foreign matter entering from the opening of the mounting part. By forming the box opening notch, there is almost no risk of the foreign matter entering the inside of the back box where important parts are densely packed.
Furthermore, since the openings that may cause a decrease in strength are dispersed in the tank unit mounting portion and the back box, the strength of the tank unit mounting portion and the back box is less likely to decrease while having a wide opening in total.
In addition, the mounting part opening cutout may be formed so as to correspond to the front wall and the bottom wall of the ball tank located on the side closer to the player.
By doing so, it is possible to provide a larger storage space connected in an L shape toward the front wall side and the bottom wall side of the ball tank.

[4-6d-2. Technical means A2]
A performance device having a mechanical movable performance unit is provided in the back box of the game board, and at least a part of the movable performance unit is positioned in the opening area of the back box opening cutout in plan view. The gaming machine according to the technical means A1, characterized by:
According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform maintenance of the movable effect unit or temporarily fix the effect device during transportation from the back box opening cutout of the back box of the game board.

[4-6d-3. Technical means B1]
a tank unit comprising a ball tank for storing game balls and a tank rail for guiding the game balls in the ball tank downstream;
A game machine having a tank unit mounting portion that mounts the tank unit to the upper part of the body frame,
A part of the tank unit mounting portion that overlaps the connection portion between the ball tank and the tank rail is formed with a through-hole-shaped mounting opening cutout, and the entire mounting opening cutout is covered with the tank. A gaming machine characterized by being covered with a unit.
Generally, in a tank unit in which a sphere tank and a tank rail are separately molded and connected, a bulge for a joint may be formed at the connecting portion. When such a protrusion comes into contact with the tank unit mounting portion, the load of the game balls filled in the tank unit concentrates on the protrusion, which may cause cracks or damage to the tank unit mounting portion. There is
On the other hand, in the game machine of the present invention, since a through-hole-shaped attachment part opening cutout is formed in a part of the part overlapping the connection part between the ball tank and the tank rail, the tank unit can be attached even if there is a protrusion for the joint. Therefore, the load of the game ball applied to the tank unit can be widely distributed between the bottom surface of the tank unit and the top surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
On the other hand, the mounting part opening cutout opened in the tank unit mounting part is entirely covered with the tank unit, and the air heated by the back unit from the mounting part opening cutout flows through the mounting part opening cutout and into the tank. Since the space between the unit and the unit is discharged toward the outside, it is difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter.

[4-6d-4. Technical means B2]
The technical means B1 described above is characterized in that a linear continuous stepped rib is formed in the tank unit mounting portion, and the stepped rib and the edge of the mounting portion opening cutout portion are made to intersect. game machine.
According to such a game machine, the stepped rib can increase the rigidity of the edge of the tank unit mounting portion and the opening cutout portion of the mounting portion. In addition, by making the ribs stepped instead of the general ridges, the high side of the stepped ribs and the tank unit are in contact with each other, so the load of the game balls accumulated in the ball tank can be dispersed. . Furthermore, a gap may be formed between the lower side of the stepped rib and the bottom surface of the tank unit to form an exhaust (exhaust heat) passage connecting the opening of the mounting portion and the outside.

[4-6d-5. Technical means C1]
In a game machine having a detachable game board,
The game board is
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a back box covering the rear surface of the game panel;
a mechanical movable effect unit provided in the back box or an area surrounded by the back box,
A through-hole-shaped back box opening cutout is formed in the upper part of the back box, and at least a part of the movable performance unit is positioned within an opening area of the back box opening cutout in plan view. A game machine characterized by
According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform maintenance, etc. of the movable effect unit from the back box opening cutout of the back box of the game board.

[4-6d-6. Technical means C2]
A game machine according to the technical means C1, wherein a part of the movable effect unit positioned in the opening area of the back box opening cutout in plan view is a movable part of a transmission system connected to a drive source. .
According to such a game machine, it is possible to directly access the movable part of the transmission system from the back box opening cutout to check the operation, and furthermore, when the game board is transported, the movable production unit can be temporarily fixed (at the transportation stage) damage prevention) can also be performed.

[4-6d-7. Technical means D1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a back box covering the rear surface of the game panel;
A game machine detachably provided with a main frame and a game board having the back box or a movable effect unit provided in an area surrounded by the back box,
Forming a through hole-shaped back box opening cutout at a position corresponding to the movable part of the movable effect unit with respect to the ceiling wall constituting the upper part of the back box,
The movable part of the movable effect unit does not protrude from any horizontal imaginary straight line that can intersect the upper edges of the left and right sides in the front-rear direction of the back box opening cutout and passes through the back box opening cutout from the outside. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged so as to be accessible.

In general, game boards are packed in a single box and transported, but recent game boards are heavy because they are equipped with large movable effect units with multiple movable parts. If the balance is lost due to the weight when packing from empty boxes, there is a possibility that the upper surface of the back box of the previously inserted game board may accidentally hit the game panel of the later game board.
However, even in such a case, the game board of the present invention stops when the lower edge of the other game panel hits the upper edges of the left and right sides of the back box opening cutout, so that it does not hit the movable part of the movable effect unit below it. do not have.
In addition, since the movable part of the movable effect unit is arranged to be accessible from the outside of the back box through the back box opening cutout, the movable effect unit can be operated by inserting a finger or a tool through the back box opening cutout of the back box. Confirmation, maintenance, etc. can be performed, and furthermore, the movable part is temporarily fixed by engaging a separate stopper, etc. from the opening of the back box, thereby preventing damage accidents due to vibration and impact during transportation. It is also possible to
In addition, when the game machine is in operation, the heated air in the back box rises and is released from the back box opening cutout at the top of the back box, so it is useful as a countermeasure against the rise in temperature inside the back box.

[4-6d-8. Technical means D2]
The game machine according to technical means 1, wherein the back box is transparent.
In the game board of such a game machine, since the movable production unit in the back box can be seen from the outside, the movable part can be manually operated from the back box opening cutout to check the state of the movable production unit inside while checking the operation and performing maintenance. It can be performed.

[4-6d-9. technical means E1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a back box covering the rear surface of the game panel;
A game machine detachably provided with a main frame and a game board having the back box or a movable effect unit provided in an area surrounded by the back box,
a ceiling wall forming an upper portion of the back box and having a ceiling wall bent portion bent at an obtuse angle;
and a through-hole-shaped back box opening cutout formed in the ceiling wall.
According to the game board of such a game machine, by forming the top wall bent portion on the top wall, the top wall has a polyhedral structure, so that the strength is improved. Gain strength. In addition, when the top wall of the back box faces the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame in a state where it is attached to the main body frame of the game machine, the top wall bending portion is the starting point between the tank unit mounting portion and the flat tank unit mounting portion. Since a ventilation path (gap) whose height changes gradually can be secured, heat generated inside the back box can be easily released to the body frame side through the ventilation path through the opening cutout of the back box. . Therefore, the ceiling wall of the back box of the game board can be brought as close as possible to the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame to increase the capacity of the back box and improve the heat radiation performance inside the back box.

[4-6d-10. technical means E2]
The game machine according to technical means E1, wherein the back box opening cutout is opened in a state of straddling at least one of the top wall bent portions.
According to the game board of such a game machine, the rigidity of the back box opening cutout can be increased by opening the back box opening cutout so as to straddle at least one ceiling wall bent portion.
In addition, when the top wall of the back box faces the tank unit mounting portion of the main frame while being attached to the main body frame of the game machine, the height between the tank unit mounting portion and the flat tank unit mounting portion starts from the bent portion of the top wall. Since it is possible to secure a ventilation path (gap) with a shape that gradually changes in height, the heat generated inside the back box can be easily released to the body frame side through the ventilation path through the opening cutout of the back box. Become. Therefore, the top wall bent portion of the back box of the game board can be brought as close as possible to the tank unit mounting portion of the main body frame to increase the capacity of the back box and improve the heat radiation performance inside the back box.

[4-6d-11. technical means E3]
The top wall of the back box is formed with a plurality of top wall bent portions in different directions, and the top wall bent portions intersect with the back box opening cutout from different directions. The gaming machine according to means E2.
In the game board of such a game machine, the strength of the top wall is increased by forming a plurality of top wall bent portions in different directions, and the top wall bent portions are arranged to intersect the back box opening cutout from different directions. The strength of the opening of the back box is also enhanced by this.
The high-rigidity structure of the ceiling wall or back box opening cutout portion by the technical means E1 to E3 is also effective in protecting the movable production unit when combined with the technical means D1 and D2.

[4-6e. First rail cover and second rail cover]
The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached like lids to the upper ends of the trough front wall 553x and the trough rear wall 553y of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are fixed to the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the depth (width) of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y is To prevent widening and narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553, prevent the game ball from jumping out from the tank rail 553, and prevent foreign matter from entering the tank rail 553 from the outside. also prevent

[4-6f. Ball straightening member]
The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, as shown in the partially enlarged view of FIG. A rocking shaft 556b is supported on the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y corresponding to the ends, or it is not shown but is extended from the first rail cover 554 in the form of a cantilever to enable rocking. installed. The ball rectifying member 556 has a fin-shaped rectifying piece 556 a protruding into the tank rail 553 on its lower surface. When the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B flowing in the tank rail 553 in two layers overlaps with the lower surface of the rectifying piece 556a, an appropriate load (resistance) due to its own weight is applied to the game ball B. (See the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 91), thereby delaying the flow so that the game balls B on the upper side can easily fall (merge) between the game balls B on the lower side. , in this way, it is rectified in a line-by-line manner so that ball clogging is less likely to occur. Also, if ball clogging occurs in the state of upper and lower two stages, the ball straightening member 556 is pushed down with a fingertip to pressurize the game ball B on the upper side with the straightening piece 556a, thereby breaking the balance between the balls. It is also possible to remove ball clogging.

[4-6g. ball stop member]
The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail 553 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. By closing the passage leading to the rail exit 553p of 553 and the guide entrance 570p of the guide passage 570a, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream. By doing so, maintenance such as cleaning, replacement, and repair of the guide passage 570a and the dispensing device 580 on the downstream side can be easily performed.

Specifically, the ball stop member 557 is a sliding base portion that is slidably supported through a support cylinder 553m vertically provided outside the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 through its own long hole 557b. 557c, a ball stop piece 557d which is substantially beak-shaped in front view and protrudes leftward from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c, and a ball stop piece 557d which protrudes rightward from the right end of the sliding base portion 557c. and an elastic lock piece 557f in the shape of a cantilever leaf spring formed inside the operation knob 557e.
The elastic lock piece 557f is formed by engaging the mountain-shaped anchor portions 557g with the left and right side slopes of the inverted bulging portion 553q projecting from the lower surface of the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553, thereby locking the ball stopper member 557. are moored at a protruded position and a retracted position, which will be described later, thereby preventing blind movement of the ball stop member 557 .

The ball stopper member 557 can be switched between the projecting position and the retracted position by sliding the ball stopper member 557 in the left-right direction by putting a finger on the operation knob 557e. Like a cam follower in contact with a direct-acting cam, the anchor portion 557g is bent and slid in a bowed manner while contacting the inverted bulging portion 553q. match. The engagement and disengagement of the anchor portion 557g of the elastic lock piece 557f with the side slope of the inverted bulging portion 553q imparts a clicking feeling to the switching operation of the ball stop member 557. FIG.

The ball stop member 557 is arranged on the upstream side of the passage bottom wall 553z (ball tank 552 side) and the downstream side of the passage side wall 553w (rail exit 553p side) forming the short cylindrical portion 553s. ) and a ball stopper slit 553v formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front. 101) and a short The retracted position (see the solid line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 101) that retracts the ball stop piece 557d from the cylindrical portion 553s to open the flow path of the game ball B, and the operation knob 557e and the elastic lock piece 557f. can be switched instantly.
Although the ball stopper member 557 is supported by the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, it may be supported by the dispensing base 551 of the body frame 4, for example.

[4-6h. External terminal plate (1)]
Further, the payout base unit 550 has an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the part extending in the left and right direction of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 includes a box-shaped guide unit base 571 which has a guide passage 570a extending in the vertical direction along which the game ball B winds down in a meandering manner, and which is open forward, and a front side of the guide unit base 571. a plate-shaped guidance passage front cover 572 closing the guidance passage 570a, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B flowing through the guidance passage 570a, and by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573, the inside of the guidance passage 570a A ball cutting detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence or absence of the game ball B is provided (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a has a guide inlet 570p near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571 and opens upward. , bends to the right, extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding over the width of the guide unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the guide inlet 570p at the upstream end of the guide passage 570a communicates with the rail outlet 553p at the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is It communicates with the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580 a of the dispensing device 580 . In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

As is clear from the description so far, the guide passage 570a and the tank rail 553 as a whole constitute a ball dispensed passage section that is bent in a substantially inverted L shape. A ball tank 552 provided in the body frame 4 and a payout device 580 provided on the side of the body frame 4 are connected. Therefore, although the bent portion K of the payout ball passage portion is located on the tank rail 553 in the embodiment, it may be located on the guide passage 570a side. In this case, the downstream end of the tank rail 553 extends up to this side of the bent portion K, while the guide passage 570a is shaped like a periscope with its upper portion bent at the bent portion K, and has a ball stopper slit 553v and a The ball stop member 557 is provided on the guide passage 570a side.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 89).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball route unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting a back cover 640 thereon.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full by voice (for example, ``Please remove the ball! stop temporarily until

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 96) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The rear cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .
As shown in FIG. 98E, the rear cover 640 has an upper edge that covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion (upper portion 551d of the back plate of the dispensing base 551) of the body frame 4. On the other hand, a ridge 551t capable of covering the upper edge of the back cover 640 like an eave is formed on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
As a result, the foreign matter ejected from the drop opening 553h of the corner 553t on the rear side of the tank rail 553 hits the ridge 551t and falls or accumulates on the ridge 551t. Almost no foreign matter enters the inside of the body frame 4 from the overlapped portion of the mounting portion. Incidentally, since the foreign matter contains metal powder as described above, it is not preferable because it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic components inside the body frame 4 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Further details of the configuration of the upper part of the body frame 4 described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98A to 105. FIG.
98A is a plan view of the body frame, FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view cut along line B1-B1 in FIG. 98A, FIG. 98D is a cross-sectional view cut along line B3-B3 in FIG. 98A, and FIG. 98E is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B4-B4 in FIG. Fig. 99A is a perspective view of the upper part of the body frame as seen from behind, and Fig. 99B is a rear side perspective view of the upper part of the body frame showing a state in which the tank unit is disassembled and a game board for installation is arranged in front. . FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) including a cross-sectional view of the essential parts of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to part of the upper edge of a gutter front wall 553x and a gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554 A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. , a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper edges of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553, a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a dispensing base A payout device 580 is attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of 551 and pays out game balls B to the player side.

[4-11a. ball tank (2)]
The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, respectively, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. formed. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

[4-11b. tank rail (2)]
The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . .
The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In addition, as shown in FIG. 98A, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to about 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side in plan view. After extending, it extended obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it went leftward, and then extended to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. It is shaped like a crank.
The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the rear outside of the body frame 4 . As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed.
In addition, since the tank rail 553 and the tank unit mounting portion (withdrawal base 551) to which it is mounted are made transparent, the back side of the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 is passed through the tank rail 553 from the rear outside of the main body frame 4. Since the side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized, when a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, while the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, It is possible to check the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc., and it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.
In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98E, the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 is chamfered, and the outer side of the arc-shaped portion 553r is also rounded. Further, when the game board 5 is removed from the front surface of the main body frame 4, the tank unit mounting portion can be seen from the front surface side as indicated by the arrow in the figure.
Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 and replaced, it is possible to visually check the appearance of foreign objects and game balls in the tank rail 553 through the tank unit mounting portion from the front side of the main body frame 4, thereby reducing maintenance. Easy to do. In particular, since the boundary between the gutter front wall 553x and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553 is chamfered, the inside can be clearly seen, so the accuracy of the visual check is improved. When the tank unit mounting portion is made of opaque synthetic resin, a window hole may be provided in the corresponding portion.

As shown in FIGS. 98A, 99A, and 99B, the body frame 4 has an overflow surface portion 501m along the front side of the sphere tank 552. On the other hand, the sphere tank 552 has a left side wall 552d on the overflow surface portion 501m. A detour passage 552g is provided for communication.

[4-11c. Overflow face of body frame]
The overflow surface portion 501m extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction as the downstream side (left side in front view) extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined to be higher.
Further, the overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 as shown in FIG. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The rear surface of the base body 501a has a flat plate shape extending from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper side of the rear surface. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

[4-11d. Sphere tank detour (1)]
The detour passage 552g extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and the rear end side is lowered. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m is removed. It is guided to the bulging portion 553 b of the tank rail 553 .

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. and a discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is overflowed. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

[4-11e. Body frame base (2)]
The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

[4-11f. Sphere tank detour (2)]
The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion 552i extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

98A and 104, the detour passage 552g extends obliquely to the left-right direction so as to move rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIGS. When the game ball B is released from the tank rail 553 side, the diagonally extending rear end makes the game ball B wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow. It can be discharged to the upstream side, and by discharging it to a wide portion, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slugs in the tank rail 553 .

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )is doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

[4-11g. External terminal plate (2)]
The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

[4-11h. Flow of game balls above the body frame]
Next, mainly the flow of game balls in the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are inclined so that the rear right corner and the rear left corner are respectively lowered. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment such as a tank rail]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553, the ball stop member 557, the ball passage portion, etc. in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of another embodiment of a pachinko machine having a tank rail or the like, which is viewed from behind and shows an enlarged portion of the tank rail. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of Fig. 107 as seen from the front, and (c). 2 is a rear perspective view of the tank rail and the like in (a). FIG. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the front, and Fig. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. FIGS. 111(a) and 111(b) are cross-sectional views showing another form in which the protective walls of FIG. 109 are provided on the gutter front wall and the gutter rear wall of the tank rail. FIG. 112 is a cross-sectional view of another tank rail or the like corresponding to the cross-section taken along the Keke line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of another form of tank rail, etc., corresponding to the cross-section taken along line B4-B4 of FIG. 98A. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of another form of ball stopper member. FIG. 115 is a vertical cross-sectional view of another form of tank rail or the like taken near the bent portion. Fig. 116 is a longitudinal sectional view of another form of tank rail or the like showing a state in which the ball stopper member of Fig. 115 is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z1-Z1 of FIG. 115, and FIG. 117(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z2-Z2 of FIG. is.
In addition to the tank rail 553A, the tank rail 553A and the like of an embodiment different from the above includes a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, a ball straightening member 556A, and a ball stop member 557A. , the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stop member 557, but the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and the description is omitted. There is also

[4-12a. Different form of tank rail (meandering part and protection wall)]
The tank rail 553A of another form straightens the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A has a first rail cover 554A and a second rail cover 555A provided to the left of the first rail cover 554A in front view so as to cover the upper ends of the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y. And, a ball straightening member 556A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A is attached, and a ball stop member 557A capable of blocking the circulation of the game ball B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A. ing.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protective walls that extend upward from the front and rear ends of the cover portion 555a on the upstream side from the center in the left-right direction in a fence shape. 555b and an opening 555c penetrating through the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A at the portion where the meandering portion 553c is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball straightening member 556A is attached to the upstream end side so as to be vertically swingable by a swing shaft 556b projecting forward and backward. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b, penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A, and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. It has fin-shaped rectifying pieces 556a. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A, thereby swinging while applying an appropriate load to the game balls B. The steps are broken to make it easier to align in a row, and the game balls B on the upper side are restrained from moving rapidly to the downstream side to prevent the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A. there is

According to this modified tank rail 553A, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective walls 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A. there is Specifically, the protective wall 555b is formed by a wire Y (Fig. 106 ) is set to a height that does not enter the swinging region of the ball rectifying member 556A, so that the electric wire Y can be prevented from contacting from above.
If the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire Y prevents the game ball B from contacting the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. There is a possibility that the member 556A will not be able to swing upward, and there is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game balls B by the ball rectifying member 556A will not be sufficiently exhibited.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from contacting the electric wire Y connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from above. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can swing upward, and the rectifying action is sufficiently exerted to allow the ball to move within the tank rail 553A. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball biting and ball clogging.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. If in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages, the upper game ball B is affected by the ball pressure etc. from the upstream and the lower game ball B If the game ball B is first moved downstream in such a manner as to climb over the ball, for example, the game ball B is caught between the inner surface of the second rail cover 555A and the game ball B below, and ball biting is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present another form, as described above, since the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is suppressed that the upper game ball B moves to the downstream side first. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

In addition, as described above, the protection wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wire Y from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. The terminal board (for example, the external terminal board 558) to which the electric wire Y is connected and the control board are arranged near the tank rail 553A, and the terminal board and the control board to which many electric wires Y are connected are arranged near the tank rail 553A. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging the tank rail 553A (the ball tank 552), the terminal plate, and the like.

Although the protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A of the tank rail 553A, as shown in FIG. may be formed by extending upward, or may be provided on the body frame 4 (specifically, the dispensing base 551) as shown by the imaginary line in FIG.
Further, the protection wall 555b of the different form has a front-rear width approximately equal to the interval between the gutter front wall 553x and the gutter rear wall 553y of the tank rail 553A, but as shown in FIG. , the protective wall 555b corresponding to the gutter rear wall 553y side may be displaced rearward from the gutter rear wall 553y. The same applies when the protective wall 555b is provided on the second rail cover 555A instead of the gutter rear wall 553y.
According to this configuration, the upper space of the ball straightening member 556A expands in the width direction (front-rear direction) by the amount that the protective wall 555b is displaced to the rear side. Even if it rides on B and stops, the reset operation such as pushing it back with a fingertip can be performed without any inconvenience.
In addition, in the above another embodiment, two protective walls 555b are provided at the same height in front of and behind the ball straightening member 556A. 111(b), or only on either the gutter rear wall 553y or the gutter front wall 553x (not shown). good. Even in such a case, the desired effect can be achieved by appropriately setting the height and shape.

[4-12b. Another type of tank rail (mounting structure)]
In the tank rail 553 of the embodiment described in [4-6c] above and mainly with reference to FIG. 98E, the portion extending straight leftward is a passage seat portion having a substantially L-shaped cross section formed on the top plate portion 551a. 551z in alignment.
On the other hand, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 112, the tank rail 553A of another form is provided on the opposing surface between the body frame 4 (specifically, the passage seat portion 551z of the dispensing base 551) and the tank rail 553A. A gap SS is provided.
Such a mounting structure of the tank rail 553A can produce the following effects in comparison with the tank rail 553 having no clearance SS.

First, in recent years, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, such as an image display device, has become larger, and the amount of protrusion to the rear has increased.
As the amount of projection of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 increases, the amount of rearward projection of the body frame 4 surrounding it also increases. It extends and projects below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 . Therefore, the overlapping portions of the body frame 4, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are increased.
Needless to say, the back unit 3000 of the current game board 5 is an assembly of electric parts such as an image display device and a motor, and generates heat during operation. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from the inside of the body frame 4 to the outside. Since heat tends to be trapped, the inside of the body frame 4 may become hot.
On the other hand, like the tank rail 553A of another form, by providing the gap SS on the surface facing the main body frame 4, the heat emitted mainly from the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 to the inside of the main body frame 4 is reduced. Since it is released to the outside through the gap SS, it is difficult for it to stay inside the body frame 4. - 特許庁Further, by providing the gap SS between the opposing surfaces of the tank rail 553A and the body frame 4, even if the tank rail 553A is distorted or the like, rattling will not occur as long as it is within a range that can be absorbed by the gap SS. There is also the effect that the accuracy in forming the tank rail 553A can be relaxed.
It should be noted that the gap SS is preferably provided on the entire surface of the tank rail 553A facing the main body frame 4, but for example, the gap SS may be provided only on a part of the surface of the gutter front wall 553x facing the main body frame 4 to improve the heat dissipation performance. is effective in improving

[4-12c. Another form of delivery ball passage (foreign matter discharge bypass passage)]
As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98E, the tank rail 553 of the embodiment explained in [4-6c] above and mainly with reference to FIG. 3) drop ports 553h are formed.
However, if the drop port 553h for dropping foreign objects faces the outside, there is a possibility that part of the electric wire Y wired on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 may enter the inside of the tank rail 553 from the drop port 553h. , Depending on the degree of penetration, there is a risk of interfering with the flow of game balls.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 113, the tank rail 553A of another form is provided with a drop port 553h on the front side of the passage bottom wall 553z and is provided on the trough rear wall 553y to receive the foreign matter falling from the drop port 553h. In addition, a foreign matter discharge detour portion 5531 is provided which can be discharged to the outside from a discharge port 5530 that opens rearward.
According to the tank rail 553A, the drop port 553h does not directly face the outside on the rear side, and the sideways foreign matter discharge bypass passage portion 5531 is interposed between the drop port 553h and the outside on the rear side. Even if part of the electric wire Y of the pachinko machine 1 enters the discharge port 5530 of the foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531, it passes through the drop port 553h behind the foreign matter discharge bypass passage 5531 and reaches the inside of the tank rail 553A. hardly ever reached. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the electric wire Y or the like will interfere with the flow of the game ball on the tank rail 553A.
It should be noted that this foreign object discharge bypass passage portion 5531 can also be applied to the guide passage 570a that constitutes the payout ball passage portion. It may be configured with
That is, in FIG. 113, the trough front wall 553x is not extended downward from the drop port 553h, and instead, the passage seat portion 551z, which is a part of the dispensing base 551, is discharged while leaving the space of the foreign object discharge detour passage 5531. You may make it guide a foreign material to the exit 5530. FIG. Alternatively, the part corresponding to the bottom surface of the foreign object discharge detour part 5531 formed by the gutter front wall 553x may be formed so that the member located thereunder, for example, the back cover member 640, extends to the passage seat part 551z. Alternatively, the top surface of the case member of the device located below may be used.

[4-12d. Another form of ball stop member]
The ball stop member 557 of the embodiment described above in [4-6g] and mainly with reference to FIG. a sliding base portion 557c slidably supported by the sliding base portion 557c; a ball stop piece 557d projecting leftward from the left end of the sliding base portion 557c; The tank rail 553 is composed of an operation knob 557e projecting rightward from the right end of the tank rail 557c, and a cantilever leaf spring-like elastic lock piece 557f formed inside the operation knob 557e. A ball stopper piece 557d is moved in and out of a short cylindrical portion 553s of a tank rail 553 from a ball stopper slit 553v opened in a substantially inverted L shape in front view starting from a bent portion K to open and close a game ball flow path. It is a thing.
On the other hand, a ball stopper member 557A of another form shown in FIG. 114 is provided on the rear end of the ball stopper piece 557d and the passage bottom wall 553z of the tank rail 553A in the plunge position shown in FIG. 114 to 117, a flow cutoff space 557h into which foreign matter can fall is formed between the leading end of the ball-stopping slit 553v and the ball-stopping slit 553v. A crank-shaped detour portion 557i is provided between the ball stop piece 557d and the sliding base portion 557c to form the flow-blocking space portion 557h.
Since the detour portion 557i shown in the figure does not have a bottom, the flow-blocking space portion 557h has a bottomless shape penetrating the ball stopper member 557A in the vertical direction. A flat receiving bottom portion (not shown) is provided between the ball stop piece 557d and the sliding base portion 557c to form the flow cutoff space portion 557h in a bottomed form so that foreign matter can accumulate there. good.

In comparison with the ball stopper member 557 of the embodiment that does not have the flow-blocking space portion 557h, the ball stopper member 557A of the different form can exhibit the following effects.
First, in the tank rail 553, foreign substances such as metal powder generated by rubbing between game balls and resin powder generated by rubbing between game balls and cleaning pellets are present. Some of the foreign matter drops from the opening 553h and is discharged, but some of the foreign matter may reach the edge of the starting end of the ball-stopping slit 553v.
101, the ball stopper member 557 is switched from the retracted position indicated by the solid line in the cross-sectional view of FIG. , the force causes the surroundings to vibrate, and the vibration causes the foreign matter stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball-stopping slit 553v to fall into the ball-stopping slit 553v and travel along the upper surface of the ball-stopping piece 557d. There is a risk of dropping near the center of the short cylinder portion 553s.
On the other hand, in another form of ball stop member 557A, when the ball stop member 557A is in the retracted position shown in FIG. Even if it falls into the ball-stopping slit 553v due to the vibration when switching to the protruding position, there is a flow-break space between the rear end of the ball-stopping piece 557d and the starting end of the ball-stopping slit 553v. Since 557h is facing, it passes downward without being placed on the ball stop piece 557d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of foreign matter at the edge of the starting end of the ball-stopping slit 553v entering the vicinity of the center of the short cylindrical portion 553s of the tank rail 553A.
If the flow-blocking space portion 557h of the ball stop member 557A is made bottomless, foreign matter passes through the flow-blocking space portion 557h and is discharged to the outside. The ball stop member 557A is less likely to become dirty even when the use of .
On the other hand, if the flow-blocking space portion 557h of the ball stop member 557A is formed with a bottom, for example, the density of the parts below the tank rail 553A is high, and if foreign matter enters or adheres to the control board, it will cause damage. Even if there is no other choice but to place the electronic parts that may cause the flow cutoff space 557h directly below, the foreign matter will accumulate on the receiving bottom of the ball stop member 557A and will not be discharged to the outside. A hole for heat radiation can be opened in a board box for housing a board without worrying about the intrusion of foreign matter.

[4-13. Technical ideas included in the above embodiment and the above another form]
The above-described embodiment and the above-described alternative form include the following problems and the following technical ideas as means for solving the problems.

[4-13-1a. Issue: Discharge of foreign matter]
It has been known for a long time that foreign matter such as metal powder and resin powder enter the delivery ball passage. It was provided open (see Patent Document 2).
However, in the conventional tank rail, both the front and rear corners of the bottom wall of the passage are substantially perpendicular to each other in a valley-folded shape, which makes it difficult to smoothly discharge foreign matter.
That is, inside the tank rail, air currents are generated by the movement of the game ball, and fine vibrations are generated. Since the air tends to stagnate at both front and rear right-angled corners of the bottom wall, foreign matter that has entered such corners tends to stay.
Therefore, it is difficult to smoothly discharge the foreign matter, and the accumulated foreign matter tends to adhere to the inner surface of the tank rail and become dirty. Moreover, since it is not easy to clean the right-angled corners, there is a problem that dirt accumulates. .
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that facilitates the discharge of foreign objects that have entered the payout ball passage.

[4-13-1b. Technical concept: Ejection of foreign matter]
"The door frame and
a body frame positioned behind the door frame;
a dispensing ball passage portion bent in a substantially inverted L shape connecting a ball tank provided above the body frame and a dispensing device provided on the side of the body frame;
A game machine comprising a plurality of drop holes that are formed in the corners of the bottom wall of the payout ball passage portion and are capable of ejecting foreign objects,
When the side closer to the door frame is the front side and the opposite side is the rear side, the ball passage portion has an arcuate portion formed in at least a part of the front corner of the bottom wall of the passage, and at least the arc portion is formed. A valley-folded corner is formed at a corner on the rear side corresponding to the arc-shaped portion, and at least a part of the plurality of drop ports of the bottom wall of the passage is arranged at the corner on the rear side. game machine. ”
In the above description, "a ball tank provided above the body frame" refers to cases where the ball tank is attached above the rear surface of the body frame, cases where the ball tank is attached to the top surface of the body frame, and both. Similarly, "dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame" includes any case where the dispensing device is attached to the side of the rear surface of the main body frame. It includes the case where it is attached, the case where it is attached to the side surface of the body frame, and the case where it is attached so as to straddle both of them.
Also, the ball tank and the dispensed ball passage may be integrated or separated.
According to such a game machine, even if a foreign object enters the arcuate portion on the front side of the payout ball passage portion, the air is less likely to stagnate in the arcuate portion, so the foreign object is likely to flow along with the air current. Vibration makes it easier for the foreign matter to move along the inner radius of the arc-shaped portion toward the rear corner portion, so that the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop opening of the corner portion. In addition, foreign matter is less likely to remain in the arc-shaped portion on the front side of the delivery ball passage portion as described above, and the inner surface of the arc-shaped portion, which has an inner radius, is easy to clean, so it is easy to keep it clean. etc.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The dispensing ball passage portion includes a substantially horizontal tank rail connected to the ball tank, and a substantially vertical guide passage leading to the dispensing device,
The arc-shaped portion is formed at least in an upstream portion of the tank rail on the ball tank side,
Moreover, it is preferable that at least one of the drop openings formed in the corners is positioned at the most upstream of all the drop openings.
This is because, at the joint between the ball tank and the tank rail, there is a shooter-like step that descends sharply from the ball tank side toward the tank rail side in order to increase the flow velocity inside the tank rail, and the step vibrates. In addition, the vibration promotes the fall of foreign matter from the drop port, and the foreign matter is efficiently discharged from the drop port located at the most upstream position, and is dispersed throughout the tank rail. This is because it becomes difficult.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
It is preferable that the upstream side of the tank rail is formed in a crank shape in a plan view, and the drop opening is formed at a corner portion of the crank (preferably on the outcourse side of the corner portion).
In such a case, the foreign matter moving in the tank rail tends to move in the direction of going straight through the corner of the crank of the tank rail due to inertia, so that the foreign matter is efficiently ejected from the drop opening provided there.
The technical idea of providing a drop opening at the corner of the crank of the tank rail can also be applied to a normal tank rail that does not mix arc-shaped portions and corner portions.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph or the paragraph before,
One of the drop openings may be provided at a downstream front corner of the tank rail.
By doing so, it is possible to reliably discharge foreign matter that has flowed down along the arc-shaped portion on the front side of the tank rail and remained without being discharged.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in any one of the preceding paragraphs to the two preceding paragraphs,
The body frame has a tank unit mounting portion for mounting the ball tank and the tank rail on its upper part,
The tank rail is formed to be transparent, and the outer side of the arc-shaped portion is also formed in a rounded shape,
Furthermore, by opening a window hole in at least a portion of the tank unit mounting portion corresponding to the arc-shaped portion of the tank rail or by forming at least the corresponding portion to be transparent, the tank unit can be mounted from the front side of the body frame. The inside of the tank rail may be visually recognized through the part.
According to such a game machine, when the game board is removed from the body frame and replaced, foreign objects and game balls in the tank rail can be visually checked from the front side of the body frame through the tank unit mounting portion, which facilitates maintenance. In particular, the front inside and outside of the tank rail are rounded, so that the visibility is further improved.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to any one of the preceding paragraphs to the preceding paragraphs,
The body frame has an openable and closable rear cover on its rear surface, and the upper edge of the rear cover covers the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion,
On the other hand, an eaves-like ridge may be formed along the upper edge of the back cover on the lower edge of the rear surface of the tank unit mounting portion.
According to such a game machine, the foreign matter ejected from the drop port at the rear corner of the tank rail hits the eaves-shaped ridge and falls or accumulates on the ridge, so that the upper edge of the back cover and the foreign matter are discharged. There is almost no risk of foreign matter entering the interior of the body frame through the seam of the body frame. Incidentally, since the foreign matter contains metal powder as described above, it is not preferable because it may adversely affect the operation of the electronic components inside the body frame.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that facilitates the discharge of foreign objects that have entered the payout ball passage.

[4-13-2a. Problem…accidental entry into the drop opening]
It has long been known that foreign substances such as metal powder and resin powder enter the delivery ball passage part, and as a countermeasure, a drop port for dropping foreign substances was provided in the passage bottom wall of the delivery ball passage part (Patent document 2).
However, if the drop opening for dropping the foreign objects in the payout ball passage faces the outside, part of the large number of electric wires wired on the rear surface of the game machine enters the payout ball passage through the drop opening. Depending on the degree, there was a risk of interfering with the flow of game balls.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and its object is to provide a game machine provided with a payout ball passage portion capable of maintaining a smooth flow of game balls.

[4-13-2b. Technical concept: Prevention of accidental entry into the drop opening]
"The door frame and
a body frame positioned behind the door frame;
A game machine comprising a payout ball passage section bent in a substantially inverted L shape connecting a ball tank provided above the body frame and a payout device provided on the side of the body frame,
The dispensing ball passage portion includes a foreign matter drop opening provided downward on the bottom wall of the passage,
a sideways foreign object discharge detour passage part capable of receiving the foreign object falling from the drop opening and discharging the foreign object to the outside on the rear surface side from its own discharge port that opens backward. ”
According to such a game machine, the drop opening of the payout ball passage does not directly face the outside on the rear side, and the sideways foreign object discharge bypass passage is interposed between the drop opening and the discharge opening that opens rearward. Therefore, even if a part of the electric wire of the game machine enters the discharge port of the foreign object discharge bypass passage, it hardly reaches the inside of the payout ball passage through the drop port. Therefore, there is almost no possibility that the flow of game balls in the paid-out ball passage portion will be hindered by an accidental entry of an electric wire or the like.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
It is preferable that the foreign object drop port is provided at the edge of the passage bottom wall farther from the discharge port.
By doing so, a distance is created between the drop port and the discharge port, making it difficult for the end of the electric wire or the like to reach the drop port, and the foreign matter that has fallen from the drop port is temporarily stored in the foreign matter discharge bypass passage. Therefore, for example, an electronic component or the like that may be damaged by foreign matter entering or adhering thereto can be placed below the drop opening without any problem.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to provide a game machine having a payout ball passage portion capable of maintaining a smooth flow of game balls.

[4-13-3a. Problem: Malfunction of sphere rectifying member]
As described above, the conventional game machine is provided with a ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game balls when the game balls flowing on the tank rail come into contact with each other, thereby preventing the balls from clogging in the tank rail. It's getting harder to get up.
On the other hand, in some gaming machines, wire connection terminals for wiring (“terminal board 78” in Patent Document 1) are provided above the tank rail, specifically on the side of the ball tank of the body frame. Some of the electric wires connected to the electric wire connection terminals cross the ball rectifying member in the vertical direction.
Ball clogging can occur even in a tank rail provided with a ball rectifying member. It is thought that there are multiple causes for this. One of them is that when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the ball rectifying member, part of the electric wire enters the swinging region of the ball rectifying member and causes the swinging motion. can be inhibited. As a result, the ball rectifying member does not operate normally, so ball clogging is more likely to occur.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a smooth flow of game balls in the tank rail.

[4-13-3b. Technical concept: Securing the swinging area of the ball rectifying member]
"The door frame and
a body frame positioned behind the door frame;
a ball tank for storing game balls provided at a high place of the body frame;
a tank rail that guides game balls in the ball tank downstream;
a ball rectifying member that can swing while applying an appropriate load to the game ball when the game ball flowing on the tank rail comes into contact with the ball;
a wire connection terminal for wiring disposed above the tank rail;
and a wire connected to the wire connection terminal,
A game machine comprising a fence-like protective wall capable of preventing the electric wire from entering a swinging area of the ball rectifying member. ”
In addition, for the swinging of the ball rectifying member, one end may be rotatably attached to a shaft and the other end may swing up and down. Including when it swings.
According to this game machine, even if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal crosses the ball rectifying member, the protection wall prevents the ball rectifying member from entering the swinging area, so that the ball rectifying member is not obstructed by the electric wire. It can swing normally without Therefore, it is possible to maintain a smooth flow of game balls in the tank rail.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the preceding paragraph,
The tank rail includes a passage bottom wall, and a gutter front wall and a gutter rear wall erected in front of and behind the passage bottom wall,
The protective wall may be formed on at least the gutter rear wall of the tank rail.
According to such a game machine, the protective wall can be easily formed simply by extending at least the gutter rear wall of the tank rail upward.

Further, in the game machine described in the preceding paragraph or the paragraph two preceding, the protective wall may be provided at a position displaced rearward from the gutter rear wall of the portion of the tank rail where the ball straightening member is positioned. good.
According to such a game machine, the space above the ball straightening member is expanded in the width direction by the amount that the protective wall is displaced to the rear side. A reset operation such as pushing back with a fingertip can be performed without inconvenience.

Also, in the gaming machine described in the two preceding paragraphs, the protective wall may be formed on the body frame.
According to such a game machine, since no protective wall is formed on the tank rail side, not only the molding of the tank rail but also the installation of the ball straightening member can be simplified.
According to the above technical idea, it is possible to maintain a smooth flow of game balls in the tank rail.

[4-13-4a. Problem…High temperature inside the main body frame]
In recent years, in game boards, back units such as image display devices have become larger, and the amount of protrusion to the rear has increased.
In addition, in accordance with the increase in the amount of overhang of the back unit of the game board, the amount of rearward overhang of the main body frame surrounding it has also increased, and as a result, the tank unit mounting part at the top of the main body frame also extends rearward to form a ball tank. or the tank rail projecting below. Therefore, the overlapping portion between the tank unit mounting portion and the sphere tank or tank rail increases.
Needless to say, the back unit of the current game board is an assembly of electric parts, and heats up during operation. Therefore, it is necessary to dissipate heat from the inside of the main body frame to the outside, but as described above, the ball tank and tank rail overlap on the upper surface of the tank unit mounting part of the main body frame, so that heat tends to be trapped. Therefore, the inside of the body frame may become hot.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine in which heat is less likely to be trapped inside the body frame.

[4-13-4b. Technical concept: Improvement of the heat dissipation performance of the main body frame]
"The door frame and
a body frame positioned behind the door frame;
a ball tank for storing game balls provided above the body frame;
a tank rail disposed above the body frame for guiding game balls in the ball tank downstream,
A game machine characterized in that a gap is provided between the opposing surfaces of the body frame and the tank rail. "
According to such a game machine, the heat radiated into the inside of the body frame mainly from the back unit of the game board is radiated to the outside through the gap provided between the body frame and the tank rail facing each other. It is difficult for heat to stay inside.
In such a game machine, the gap may be provided in a part of the facing surface between the body frame and the tank rail. As a result, both stability and heat dissipation of the tank rail can be achieved.
Also, in this game machine or the game machine described immediately above, the gap is preferably formed in at least the vertical direction so that the upper end is open to the outside. As a result, the gap functions like a chimney and can efficiently dissipate heat to the outside.
According to the above technical idea, the heat generated inside the main body frame can be released to the outside, so there is an effect that the heat is less likely to be trapped.

[4-13-5a. Issue: Discharge of foreign matter]
The ball stop member that opens and closes the flow path of the delivered ball passage portion of Patent Document 1 is provided above the tank rail that constitutes the delivered ball passage portion. is placed on the lower side of the tank rail and at the bent portion of the payout ball passage where the flow of the game ball changes from sideways to downward, and the ball stop piece is moved in and out of the payout ball passage to open and close the flow path. You may do so.
On the other hand, however, in order to insert and remove the ball stop piece of the ball stop member into and out of the bent portion of the delivery ball passage, it is necessary to form a ball stop slit in the bent portion. Due to the vibration when the ball stop member is operated, there is a risk that the existing foreign matter may fall from the ball stop slit along the ball stop piece of the ball stop member and into the flow path flowing downward in the payout ball passage.
The following technical idea has been made in view of the above, and its object is to provide a game machine that is less susceptible to foreign objects entering the payout ball passage.

[4-13-5b. Technical concept: Ejection of foreign matter]
"The door frame and
a body frame positioned behind the door frame;
a dispensing ball passage portion bent in a substantially inverted L shape connecting a ball tank provided above the body frame and a dispensing device provided on the side of the body frame;
A game machine having a ball stop member capable of opening and closing the flow path of the paid-out ball passage,
a ball-stopping slit opened toward the bottom wall of the passage on the upstream side and the side wall of the passage on the downstream side, starting from the bent portion of the delivery ball passage portion that bends in a substantially inverted L shape;
an entry position for closing the flow path of the game ball by inserting the ball stopper from the ball-stopping slit into the ball-stopping slit, and a game ball by retracting the ball-stopper from the inside of the ball-stopping passage. and a ball stop member slidably provided so as to switch to a retracted position that opens the flow path of
The ball stopper member allows foreign objects to fall between the rear end portion of the ball stopper piece and the starting end portion of the ball stopper slit provided in the upstream passage bottom wall in the state where the ball stopper member is in the plunge position. A gaming machine characterized in that a flow cutoff space is formed. ”
In the above description, "a ball tank provided above the body frame" refers to cases where the ball tank is attached above the rear surface of the body frame, cases where the ball tank is attached to the top surface of the body frame, and both. Similarly, "dispensing device provided on the side of the main body frame" includes any case where the dispensing device is attached to the side of the rear surface of the main body frame. It includes the case where it is attached, the case where it is attached to the side surface of the body frame, and the case where it is attached so as to straddle both of them.
According to such a game machine, even if a foreign object that had stopped at the edge of the starting end of the ball-stopping slit falls into the slit due to the vibration when the ball-stopping member is switched from the retracted position to the entering position, the ball Since the flow cut-off space faces between the rear end portion of the stop piece and the start end portion of the ball-stopping slit, there is no danger of the ball-stop piece being placed on the ball stop piece. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of foreign matter at the edge of the starting end of the ball-retaining slit running along the ball-retaining piece of the ball-retaining member and entering the delivery ball passage. In particular, in order to prevent blind movement, a certain load may be applied to the ball stop member due to the engagement of an elastic lock piece, etc. In some cases, the surroundings vibrate more strongly each time the switching operation is performed, so it is highly useful.
Further, in the above game machine, the flow cutoff space portion may have a bottomless shape penetrating the ball stopper member in the vertical direction.
In such a case, the foreign matter passes through the flow cutoff space and is discharged to the outside, and hardly accumulates in the ball stopper member, so that the ball stopper member is less likely to become dirty even after long-term use.
Further, in the above game machine, the flow cutoff space portion may have a bottomed form having a receiving bottom projecting from the rear bottom portion of the ball stopper piece of the ball stopper member.
In such a case, for example, the density of parts below the tank rail is high, and electronic parts that may cause problems due to foreign matter entering or sticking, such as a control board, are placed directly under the flow cutoff space. Also, since the foreign matter is accumulated in the receiving bottom of the ball stop member and is not discharged to the outside, a hole for heat dissipation can be made in the substrate box for housing the substrate without worrying about the invasion of the foreign matter from above.

[4-14. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a board unit 620A of another embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123 and the like. FIG. 118(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a board unit of (a). It is the perspective view seen from the left front. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 118(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118(a), and FIG. 121 is an exploded rear perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 118(a). FIG. 122(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the squeak line in FIG. 118(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Ku-k line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line (a). ) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line. FIG. 123 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 118(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame covering a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661 attached to the rear side. A rear base 662, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 flow, and a game through which the out ball passage 663 is distributed. An out sensor 664 that detects balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide part 627 that receives and guides the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 to the right in front view, The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 is circulated, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal discharge passage 665 are closed. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 as shown.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a. A ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be visually recognized well from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like. there is

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open to the front. The front end is closed by front base 661 .

The out-ball passage 663 is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends in the left-right direction. Out-ball rectifying portion 663b that rectifies in a row while making it meander in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides downward the game balls B rectified in a row by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the lower end of the downward guiding portion 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. - 特許庁An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 123).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a so that the left end side is lower. In addition, the out-ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the vicinity of the downstream end below the ball ejection receiving portion 663a. It has depth. In addition, the portion of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the game ball B The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guide portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out ball straightening portion 663b below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and the front wall and the rear wall (partition wall portion) are on the same plane in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backward in a small crank shape so that it becomes like this. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guide portion 663c is bent in a crank shape and is formed in a curved shape so as not to have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, it passes through the out sensor 664 and bends in a crank shape. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it does not jump upward to the out sensor 664 side, and the out sensor 664 can prevent one game ball B from being detected twice.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the ball discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 122(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap corresponding to one game ball B or more is formed.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627, and has the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is inclined more than the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. A lateral guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) has a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward. The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123).

The ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665d alternately protruding inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, a game ball B flowing through a vertical guiding portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts with a plurality of projections 665d alternately, thereby causing the game ball B to flow down in a zigzag manner and flow. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B ejected downward from the ball ejection port 665c can be suppressed.

This ball discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guiding portion 665a and the vertical guiding portion 665b. , a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B that has been struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 is detected and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the ball discharge lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to move the game ball B discharged to the ball discharge passage 580b side to the out ball passage 663. The ball is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide part 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent. As a result, only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately detected. can be counted. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664, the number of game balls B can be accurately counted. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating a payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, The number of game balls B accepted by the winning openings such as the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of the winning openings after being hit into the game area 5a. It is the sum of the number of game balls B that have been accepted by the out port 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls). That is.

In addition, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is defined as "payout within a predetermined period. number/number of out-balls in a predetermined period=payout rate in a predetermined period".

Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow. The game ball B flowing through the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, so the "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide the out-ball detection unit 3030, the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, between the rear end of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is provided. , the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., and the out-ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are used by many game balls B The pachinko machine 1 can reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc. due to the static electricity, the induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of the game balls B, and the malfunction caused by the circulation of the game balls B is reduced. can be

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening portion 663b of the out ball passage 663, Since the impact applied to the out-sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the out-sensor 664 is quickly worn out and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible from the player side, Since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 to be played can be easily selected. In addition, when the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually recognized from the player side, the displayed payout rate will be larger than usual if a large amount of game balls B are paid out. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against the fraudulent act can be made to hesitate to execute the fraudulent act because other players and staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent act. can be

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position where the player cannot see it, the staff of the game hall can see it for the same reason as above. can detect fraudulent activity. Also, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different than the normal value, it is possible to change the displayed payout rate inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay Boards, connectors, wiring cables, various sensors, etc.) can be considered, so it is possible to deal with problems early, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 flows, a configuration for detecting the game ball B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, There is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit 3030), the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced, and a space corresponding to the configuration for detecting the discharged game balls B can be secured on the game board 5.例文帳に追加By installing the performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can entertain the players more.

In addition, since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude alternately, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage in the ball discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game ball B, damage to the island facility side of the game hall that receives the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guiding portion 665b having a plurality of projecting projections 665d. Since it is possible to suppress the circulation speed of the ball, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game ball B that circulates in the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal discharge passage 665. It is possible to reduce the influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B.

Further, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage Since the game ball B is discharged downward from 665, the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines or walls provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines. It is possible to avoid damage to the machine, walls, etc. In addition, since the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game ball B is less likely to scatter, and from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 on the island facility side Collection of discharged game balls B can be facilitated.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be Only by ejecting the game ball B struck into the area 5a downward, it can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660, so the configuration for ejecting the game ball B on the game board 5 , the configuration can be simple (simple), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 Since it is possible to prevent the discharged game ball B from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game ball B vigorously flowing through the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 collides with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent the outer frame 2 from being damaged and to provide the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, the part for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side ( An out receiving part, a bucket, etc.) need not be advanced to a position superimposed on the outer frame 2, and labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-14a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125 and the like. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 125(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the portion of the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 . More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that merges with the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The confluence portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 124, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) side, and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island facility side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received by a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the body frame 4 can be widened. Therefore, by moving the out-ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., a large number of game balls B circulate through the out-ball passage 663. The influence on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and opens downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f. and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of 664 .

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 has a body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and is rotatably mounted on the base unit 660 at the base end side, and detects the out sensor 664 that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the body portion 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion corresponding to the hole, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end side of the main body portion 668a. have.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. By rotating the locking claw portion 668c to lock and close the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a contacts the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 125(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out-sensor 664, and after the game ball B circulating through the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-sensor 664, the through-hole 668b is detected. discharged downwards. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, the sensor cover 668 is rotated about the base end side of the body portion 668a to open so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward. , and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 125(b)).

As shown in FIG. 125(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-threatening object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the outer frame 2) , the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B circulate. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that may come into contact. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below. There is a possibility that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668 and the sensor cover 668 may open. When the sensor cover 668 opens and the out-sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the out-sensor 664 detects the game ball B even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of the abnormality. Upon notification of the occurrence of this abnormality, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 so that the staff of the game hall can confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the contact risky substance, the body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact risky substance, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outside portion opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the sensor attachment recess 663f. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from below by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 . Therefore, when the game balls B are jammed in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are jammed can be specified at a glance. It is possible to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed so as to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned over to stand upright in an upside-down state, and the replacement of the out-sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668 and the out-ball passage 663 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660 can be performed. It is possible to easily perform the confirmation work of the inside and the inside of the ball removal discharge passage 665, and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced. Thus, it is possible to alleviate the player's frustration due to the interruption of the game, suppress the decline in interest, suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, and reduce the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out-sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 will not be removed from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, loss of the sensor cover 668 can be avoided.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 in which many game balls B in the base unit 660 circulate, around the axis in the front-back direction (horizontal direction) Since it is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, the downward force distribution applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game ball B is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side). ), and relatively small on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 through the out sensor 664 by many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, one end side rotatably attached to the sensor cover 668 Since the sensor cover 668 is opened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 is dropped. .

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 136. FIG. FIG. 126 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the center member and the like are made opaque. 127 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 as seen from the front right, FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 126 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. . FIG. 130 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 131 is a front view of the game board with the center member and the like made transparent. Fig. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. 134 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 126, and FIG. 135 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a normal prize winning port 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Secondly, it is intended to allow the user to enjoy the hitting operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a plate-like member attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the game area 5a on the front surface. and a game panel 1100 of A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 134 and 173, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board 1710 that relays connections between the main control board 1310 and various sensors and drive motors to be described later; It further comprises a back unit 3000 to be used.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000 . The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a prize winning opening sensor 2513. , 1st V winning opening sensor 2514, 1st losing opening sensor 2516, 2nd V winning opening sensor 2515, 3rd losing opening sensor 2518, start opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first shake Minute solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution middle drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, third It is for relaying the connection with the distributed left rotation detection sensor 2564, the third distributed rotation detection sensor 2565, the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003, the out sensor 664, and the like.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the game area 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a further different position in the game area 5a. And, a second start opening 2004 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, and the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening. A large prize winning opening 2005 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to 2004, and the first start port 2002 or the second start The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is accepted. A first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 that give an opportunity to accept the received game ball B, a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 that detect magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, It has

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning holes 2001, and a side upper left unit that is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, which are attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front facing right corner in the game area 5a. The attacker unit 2400, the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 are installed above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and are attached slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. and a frame-shaped center member 2500 having a second V winning opening 2008 .

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, A big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is provided. The center member 2500 includes an accessory winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. 2514 and a first loss opening sensor 2516 for detecting the game ball B received in the first loss opening 2535 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a first winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100. A first starting hole sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in one starting hole 2002 is provided (see FIG. 173).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached in the back box 3010, and a light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached to the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. A back and bottom ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game ball B and discharges it downward, and a first distribution device 2530 and a second distribution device attached to the front right corner of the light guide plate production unit 3100 and of the center member 2500 A back right ball ejection unit 3170 for receiving the game ball B from 2540 and ejecting it downward is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extending along both the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 A back front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, a back front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the front side and lower right of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and a back upper decoration in the back front effect unit 3200. and a sub-state indicator 3500 provided in the vicinity of the right end of 3211 so as to be visible at all times.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137A and 137B. Figure 137A (a) is a front perspective view of the front structural members and the game panel of the game board, (b) is a rear perspective view of the front structural members and the game panel, and Figure 137B is the front configuration. FIG. 4 is a front view of the partitioning member that constitutes the member separated into a first partitioning member and a second partitioning member;

The front structural member 1000 is mostly composed of a transparent synthetic resin partition member 1000A.
The partition member 1000A has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction (for example, a front-rear width equal to or larger than one game ball with a diameter of about 11 mm (specifically, about 16 mm to 18 mm)), and has a game panel 1100 external shape when viewed from the front. The inner shape when viewed from the front is almost semicircular on the left side and almost square on the right side. A game area 5 a is defined in front of the game panel 1100 .
As shown in FIG. 137B, the partitioning member 1000A includes a first partitioning member 1000A1 that partitions the game area 5a from the left side to the upper right side as viewed from the front, and similarly partitions the upper right side to the lower right side as the game area 5a is viewed from the front. and a second partition member 1000A2. The first partitioning member 1000A1 of the partitioning member 1000A is provided with a ball hitting portion 1006 at a position corresponding to the upper right corner with which a game ball hit from the ball launching device 540 can collide. The upper end portion of the second partition member 1000A2 is connected to the end portion of the drooping portion 1800 extending downward from 1006. As shown in FIG.

The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; It is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in a semicircular arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left diagonal when viewed from the front (approximately the range of 6 o'clock to 11 o'clock on the clock face). an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and the out guide portion 1003; A lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000, and the right end of the lower right rail 1004 to the right side of the front component 1000 a right rail 1005 extending along the ball rest 1006 and having an upper portion curved inwardly of the front component 1000 .
The outer rail 1001 of the embodiment is a metal rail member having the same width as the front-rear width of the first partition member 1000A1. It is attached to the inner surface of the game area 5a side of 1000A1. In addition, the lower right rail 1004 is formed by the inner surface of the lower portion of the second partition member 1000A2, and the inner surface of the vertical portion of the second partition member 1000A2 connected to the hanging portion 1800 of the first partition member 1000A1. to form the right rail 1005 .

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, as shown in FIG. 137A (a). A backflow prevention member 1007 is provided to prevent this. The backflow prevention member 1007 is rotatably pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the backflow prevention member 1007 and the outer rail 1001. It is rotatable only between an open position in which it rotates in the surrounding direction to open the space between it and the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008, and is collected by the island equipment of the game hall (not shown).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component member 1000 (first partition member 1000A1) has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 (first partitioning member 1000A1) has a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion formed in the lower left corner. 1012 and.

In addition, the front component member 1000 (the first partition member 1000A1 and the second partition member 1000A2) is substantially entirely formed transparent as described above, and the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side has a design and a pattern described later. It is possible to visually recognize lighting for production and the like from the front. In particular, if a cell sheet that decorates the surface is pasted from the game area 5a of the game panel 1100 all the way to the outer side, and the transparent first partition member 1000A1 and second partition member 1000A2 are arranged thereon, Since the boundary between the game area 5a and the outside thereof becomes ambiguous, the game area 5a can be visually felt to be wide.

[5-1-1. Other Forms of Front Constituent Member]
Another form of the front component 1000 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 137C to 137O. 137C is a front view of the first partitioning member, FIG. 137D is a front perspective view of the first partitioning member, FIG. 137E is a rear perspective view of the first partitioning member, and FIG. FIG. 137G is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 137C; FIG. 137H is a front perspective view showing another configuration of the first partition member; 137J is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 137I, FIG. 137K is a front view of the second partition member, and FIG. 137L is a front view of the second partition member. 137M is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 137K, FIG. 137N is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 137K, and FIG. 137O is a first partition member and a second partition member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of main parts showing a state before joining, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of main parts showing a state after joining.

[5-1-2. Partition member]
The partition member 1000A faces the game area 5a with a front-to-rear width larger than the diameter of the game ball (for example, one game ball with a diameter of about 11 mm or more, specifically about 16 mm to 18 mm), and an average plate thickness of about 3 mm. and a support base portion 1802 formed on the side of the partition wall 1801 opposite to the game area.
The support base portion 1802 is integrated with a partition wall support portion 1803 formed in a direction parallel to the board surface of the game panel 1100 on the rear surface of the partition wall portion 1801 opposite to the game area, and the partition wall support portion 1803. and a surrounding outer wall 1804 forming the outer surface of the partition member 1000A.

[5-1-3. Partitioning member (first partitioning member)]
137C to 137G, the first partition member 1000A1 that partitions the game area 5a from the left side to the upper right side of the partition member 1000A is hinge means (door frame upper hinge assembly) of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. 137C to 137G. A metal protective member 1819 is attached and detached with a set screw 1805 or the like to the outer surface of the non-game area side corresponding to the solid 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125) side (the outer surface of the surrounding outer wall portion 1804 on the left side when facing the front). It is attached in a possible state.

[5-1-3-1. Protective member for first partition member]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 137F, the protective member 1819 is a strip made of metal and aligned with the installation recess 1806 formed in the outer surface of the surrounding outer wall 1804 of the first partition member 1000A1. The short protrusions 1807 protruding above and below the installation recess 1806 are fitted into their own receiving holes 1808 for accurate positioning.
The protective member 1819 has mounting pieces 1809 formed at the top and bottom of the trailing edge side and bent toward the rear surface side of the first partition member 1000A1. is detachably fastened to the female screw portion 1810 of the .
The protective member 1819 may be a simple strip plate as shown in FIG. 137H as long as it has a predetermined bending strength, but in this embodiment, a thin strip plate is also required by press-molding the vertically elongated protrusion 1811. bending height is obtained. This makes it possible to reduce the weight of the protection member 1819 .
The front view shape of the first partitioning member 1000A1 corresponding to the hinge means side of the partitioning member 1000A is such that the outer surface side is a linear shape that substantially follows the vertical side of the game panel 1100, and the inner surface on the side of the game area 5a is curved like an arc. The narrow part 1812 with the shortest distance between the outer side and the inner side is formed near the vertical center, and the protective member 1819 is long enough to cover the narrow part 1812. ing.

The protection member 1819 of this embodiment is provided with a conductive member 1813 having elasticity such as a gasket toward the outer rail 1001, which is a metal rail member. It abuts on the rear surface of the outer rail 1001 via the partition wall portion 1801 and the conductive notch 1814 provided in the wall of the installation recess 1806 . Therefore, since the outer rail 1001 and the protective member 1819 are electrically connected through the conductive member 1813, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be discharged from the outer rail 1001 through the protective member 1819 to the ground means such as the body frame 4. . At this time, the rib-like bulging of the convex forming portion 1811 can ensure contact with the grounding means, thereby improving the reliability of countermeasures against static electricity. It should be noted that the conductive member 1813 is preferably installed so as to correspond to the narrowest portion of the narrow portion 1812 of the first partition member 1000A1. By doing so, the size of the conductive member 1813 can be reduced, so that the degree of projection when attached to the protective member 1819 can also be reduced. Therefore, the risk of the conductive member 1813 being caught by a tool or the like and detached or damaged during handling of the protective member 1819 is reduced.

Furthermore, in the protective member 1819 of this embodiment, the tightening direction of the set screw 1805 for attachment is set in the thickness direction of the first partition member 1000A1. Even if this happens, the contact between the protective member 1819 and the grounding means will not be adversely affected, and therefore the static electricity countermeasure using the protective member 1819 can be made to function more effectively.
In addition, by setting the tightening direction of the fixing screw 1805 for attachment in the thickness direction of the first partitioning member 1000A1 as described above and from the rear side, the first partitioning member 1000A1 is attached to the game panel 1100. In this state, the setscrew 1805 of the protective member 1819 cannot be removed. As a result, there is no possibility that the protection member 1819 is mistakenly removed from the first partition member 1000A1. On the other hand, if the protective member 1819 can be attached and detached while the first partition member 1000A1 is attached to the game panel 1100, the protective member 1819 can be made of a simple rectangular band plate, as shown in FIG. 137H. 1805 so that the set screw 1805 can be tightened from the outer surface side of the first partition member 1000A1. As a result, the protection member 1819 can be attached and detached for repair or replacement while the first partition member 1000A1 is attached to the game panel 1100. FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 137I and 137J, the protective member 1819 may be configured so that it can be tightened by a set screw 1805 from both the thickness direction (front-rear direction) and the outer side of the first partition member 1000A1. . In such a case, since the integrity of the protection member 1819 with the first partition member 1000A1 is improved, a higher protection function is exhibited for the first partition member 1000A1.

Since the partitioning member 1000A (first partitioning member 1000A1) of this embodiment has the above configuration, when the game board 5 is attached to or detached from the main body frame 4 with the door frame 3 opened, the first partitioning member 1000A1 Even if the outer surface of is accidentally hit against a game machine component such as the door frame 3, it will not be easily damaged by the cover of the protective member 1819, and even if the protective member 1819 is deformed by the impact, it will be stopped. The screw 1805 can be removed and replaced.
In addition, the narrow portion 1812 of the first partitioning member 1000A1 covered by the protective member 1819 has a reduced risk of damage, so it is possible to make the game area 5a wider by narrowing it to the maximum. In particular, by providing the protective member 1819 with a vertically elongated protrusion 1811 by, for example, press molding, the bending strength is improved compared to a flat plate structure having a rectangular cross section. It can be further narrowed, and the game area 5a can be widened accordingly.

[5-1-3-2. Specific member of first partition member]
By the way, the first partitioning member 1000A1 in FIG. 137B does not have the protective member 1819, and there is a possibility that it bounces around the narrow portion 1812 before being attached to the game panel 1100 as indicated by the imaginary line in the figure. There is The reason for this is that the metal outer rail 1001 attached to the inner surface of the first partition member 1000A1 is bent into an arc by stress within the elastic limit, and the restoring elasticity of the first partition member 1000A1 narrows the width of the first partition member 1000A1. This is because the bending strength of the portion 1812 cannot compete.
On the other hand, the first partition member 1000A1 of this embodiment includes the metal protection member 1819 as described above, and the bending strength of the protection member 1819 is sufficient to counteract the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001. , the shape before being attached to the game panel 1100 is corrected to a substantially straight shape along the vertical sides of the game panel 1100 . Therefore, the instability around the narrow portion 1812 of the first partitioning member 1000A1 is corrected, so that the workability of attaching to the game panel 1100 is improved.
In this way, the protective member 1819 of the first partition member 1000A1 can also function as a specific member having a bending strength that can be corrected against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001. It can also be used as a specific member.
As shown in FIG. 137F, the protective member 1819 attached by the setscrew 1805 whose tightening direction is the thickness direction of the first partitioning member 1000A1 is different when the outer rail 1001 is first attached to the first partitioning member 1000A1. , while correcting the first partition member 1000A1 bent by the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 with one hand, it is necessary to tighten the setscrew 1805 with the other hand in a direction orthogonal to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001. movement can be wasteful.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 137H, the protective member 1819 attached by the set screw 1805 whose tightening direction is the direction against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 (see arrow R in the same figure) is the outer rail 1001 first. Even if the first partitioning member 1000A1 bends around the narrow portion 1812 due to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, the protective member 1819 is attached to the first partitioning member 1000A1 and the set screw Since the movement of tightening 1805 can counteract the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, the operator supports the first partitioning member 1000A1 with one hand and tightens the set screw 1805 with the other hand while tightening the first partitioning member 1000A1. Corrections can also be made.
Therefore, the specific member is preferably attached to the first partition member 1000A1 by a set screw 1805 whose tightening direction is against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 as shown in FIG. 137H.

[5-1-4. Partitioning member (second partitioning member)]
The second partitioning member 1000A2 that partitions the upper right portion to the lower right portion of the game area 5a as viewed from the front straddles the rear surface of the partition wall portion 1801 and the partition wall support portion 1803, as shown in FIGS. 137K to 137N. It is integrally provided with ribs 1815 extending in the front-rear direction, and the ribs 1815 are arranged in a comb-like shape on the narrow portion 1812 of the partition wall support portion 1803 . The interval between the ribs 1815 should be smaller than the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm), preferably about half or less. Since the strength of the narrow portion 1812 of the partition wall portion 1801 is increased by bristles of the ribs 1815 in a comb-tooth shape, even when the game ball comes into contact with the right rail 1005, it can be stably bounced back according to the gauge configuration. Also, it is less likely to be damaged by a colliding game ball. In addition, since the partition wall support portion 1803 has a sufficient lateral width and can support the partition wall portion 1801, the portions other than the narrow width portion 1812 of the partition wall support portion 1803 can support the partition wall portion 1801. There is no need to make a forest like this.

By the way, if the ribs 1815 are arranged like comb teeth, the weight of the second partitioning member 1000A2 naturally increases. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137N, the second partitioning member 1000A2 of this embodiment has a total length h (partition wall supporting portion 1803 and ribs 1815 may be positioned in either direction in the front-rear direction, and the arrangement may be reversed to that shown in FIG. As a result, a smooth band 1816 having a width of (Hh) is formed at the front edge portion of the partition wall portion 1801 . By forming this smooth band 1816 on the front edge portion of the partition wall portion 1801, the presence of the ribs 1815 standing on the rear side of the partition wall portion 1801 becomes less conspicuous, and the weight is reduced by the amount of the scraped ribs 1815. can contribute to Preferably, the smooth band 1816 is formed in front of the area where the game balls rolling in the game area 5a can come into contact. As a result, since there is no possibility that the game ball rubs against the smooth band 1816, deterioration of transparency due to scratches is unlikely to occur, and of course there is no risk of damage due to collision of the game ball. Since the front position of the game ball within the game area 5a is regulated by the glass unit 160, the game ball cannot come into contact with the partition wall 1801 in the area within the radius of the game ball from the glass unit 160. Therefore, it is preferable to form a smooth band 1816 of the partition wall portion 1801 in this region.
Also, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the weight of the second partition member 1000A2, as shown in FIGS. ing. Of course, the surrounding outer wall portion 1804 corresponding to the forested ribs 1815 may ultimately be eliminated. The perspective view of FIG. 137L shows the state of the internal ribs 1815 by cutting out a part of the partition wall support portion 1803 and the surrounding outer wall portion 1804, and the hatching of the ribs 1815 shown in the enlarged view of FIG. The part without is exposed to the outside.
As means for reducing the weight of the game board 5, color psychology may be applied. In other words, according to color psychology, people tend to feel that blackish colors are heavy and that whitish colors are light, depending on the degree of lightness and brightness. Therefore, in order to make the game board 5 feel light, it is preferable to form the whole in a whitish color. In the case of being transparent, even the existence thereof can be made invisible, so that the game board 5 can be made to feel light in terms of color psychology just by making the first partitioning member 1000A1 and the second partitioning member 1000A2 transparent. More preferably, the cell sheet that decorates the surface of the game panel 1100 is composed of a whitish color so that the color can be seen through the transparent first partitioning member 1000A1 and the transparent second partitioning member 1000A2. The psychological pressure feeling of the board 5 is relieved, and the efficiency of transportation and installation work on the island equipment can be improved, and the degree of fatigue can be reduced.

[5-1-5. Partitioning member (joining of first partitioning member and second partitioning member)]
As described above, the partitioning member 1000A partitions the game area 5a from the left side to the upper right side as viewed from the front, and has the ball hitting portion 1006 with which the game ball hit from the ball launching device 540 collides. , and the upper end part is joined to the end part of the drooping part 1800 extending downward from the ball hitting part 1006 of the first partitioning member 1000A1. The right rail 1005 is formed by joining the end of the drooping portion 1800 of the first dividing member 1000A1 and the upper end of the second dividing member 1000A2.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 137O(a) and 137O(b), the joint portion between the end portion of the drooping portion 1800 of the first partitioning member 1000A1 and the upper end portion of the second partitioning member 1000A2 is the second partition member. An inner matching portion 1817 is formed on the play area 5a side of the upper end of the partitioning member 1000A2, and an outer matching that can be engaged with the opposite side of the inner matching portion 1817 to the end of the drooping portion 1800 of the first partitioning member 1000A1. A portion 1818 is formed, and the upper end of the second partitioning member 1000A2 is arranged on the side of the game area 5a, and the end of the drooping portion 1800 of the first partitioning member 1000A1 is arranged on the opposite side of the upper end to the game area. It has become so.
By doing so, the connection between the first partitioning member 1000A1 and the second partitioning member 1000A2 is stabilized, and furthermore, the impact of the game ball applied to the ball hitting portion 1006 of the first partitioning member 1000A1 causes the second partitioning member 1000A2 to play. It becomes difficult to transmit to the area 5a side, that is, to the right rail 1005 . This is because the impact of the game ball hitting the ball hitting portion 1006 acts in the direction of pushing the drooping portion 1800 of the first dividing member 1000A1 toward the non-playing area side, and the force in that direction pushes the outer alignment portion of the first dividing member 1000A1. This is because 1818 is separated from the inner matching portion 1817 of the second partition member 1000A2. Therefore, the game ball traveling along the right rail 1005 is less likely to be affected by the impact of the game ball hitting the ball hitting portion 1006. - 特許庁

[5-1-6. technical means P~R]
The embodiments described above correspond to the following technical means P to R.

[5-1-6-P1. technical means P1]
a detachable game board having a game area on which game balls launched by the ball shooting device roll;
A game comprising a closed state that covers the front surface of the game board in a visible state, an open state that enables attachment and detachment of the game board, and a door frame rotatably supported by a hinge means. on the machine,
The game board is
A plate-like game panel having the game area on its front surface;
a partitioning member that has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is attached to the front surface of the game panel to partition the game area;
A gaming machine characterized in that a metallic protective member is attached to the outer surface of the partition member on the opposite side of the game area corresponding to the hinge means side of the door frame.
In general, the game board 5 is attached and detached with the door frame 3 open. There is a possibility that the parts may be hit, and the impact may damage the outer surface of the partitioning member 1000A. Even if the outer surface of the game board 5 is accidentally hit against a game machine component such as the door frame 3 when attaching or detaching the game board 5, it is protected by the protective member 1819 and is not easily damaged. Even if it is deformed, it can be detached and replaced. Therefore, the partition member itself is not damaged.

[5-1-6-P2. technical means P2]
The front view shape of the portion of the partition member corresponding to the hinge means side is a straight line shape substantially along the vertical side of the game panel on the outer surface side and a curved shape with an arc-shaped recess on the inner surface on the game area side,
The game machine according to technical means P1, wherein the protective member is provided so as to cover at least a narrow portion where the distance between the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the partitioning member is small.
The narrow portion 1812 of the partitioning member 1000A covered by the protective member 1819 can be made narrower because the risk of breakage is reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the game area 5a wider than before.

[5-1-6-P3. technical measures P3]
The game machine according to technical means P1 or P2, wherein the protective member is provided with a vertically elongated convex forming portion.
Since bending strength is increased by providing the protective member 1819 with the convex forming portion 1811 that is long in the vertical direction, it is possible to further narrow the narrow portion 1812 of the partitioning member 1000A to widen the game area.

[5-1-6-P4. Technical measures P4]
The partition member has a metal rail member on which a game ball can abut on the inner surface,
Furthermore, the game machine according to any one of technical means P1 to P3, wherein the protective member and the rail member are connected by a conductive member.
Since the protection member 1819 and the outer rail 1001, which is a rail member, are electrically connected by connecting them with the conductive member 1813, the static electricity charged on the game ball is transferred from the outer rail 1001 through the protection member 1819 to an appropriate external ground. Means can be discharged.

[5-1-6-P5. Technical measures P5]
The game machine according to technical means P4, wherein the protective member is attached by a set screw whose tightening direction is the thickness direction of the partition member.
In such a game machine, even if the set screw 1805 is loosened or the screw head protrudes due to improper tightening, there is no risk of adversely affecting the contact between the protective member 1819 and the grounding means to be electrically connected. Static electricity countermeasures via 1819 can be made to function more effectively.

[5-1-6-Q1. Technical means Q1]
A game board having a game area on which game balls launched by the ball launcher roll,
The game board is
A plate-like game panel having the game area on its front surface;
A game machine comprising a partitioning member that partitions the game area by being attached to the front surface of the game panel,
The partition member is
A partition wall portion having a front-rear width larger than the diameter of the game ball;
a support base portion formed on the non-play area side of the partition wall portion,
The support base is
a partition wall support portion formed in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game panel on the rear surface of the partition wall portion opposite to the game area;
a rib in the front-rear direction that straddles the back surface of the partition wall and the partition wall support,
The game machine is characterized in that the ribs are arranged in a comb-tooth shape in a narrow portion of the partition wall support portion which is narrow in front view.
According to such a game machine, the strength of the partition wall portion 1801 is increased by forming comb-shaped ribs 1815 on the narrow portion 1812 of the partition member 1000A. Even if there is a game ball, it can be stably bounced off, and damage caused by a colliding game ball is less likely to occur.

[5-1-6-Q2. Technical means Q2]
A smooth band is formed at the front edge portion of the partition wall by making the length in the front-rear direction of the partition wall supporting portion corresponding to the narrow portion and the rib smaller than the front-rear width of the partition wall. The gaming machine according to technical means Q1, characterized in that
In addition, the smooth band may be in a smooth state without unevenness, and may be gently curved as a whole along the edge of the game area.
By forming a smooth band 1816 without ribs 1815 on the front edge portion of the partition wall portion 1801, the ribs 1815 that have been removed can contribute to weight reduction.

[5-1-6-Q3. Technical means Q3]
The game machine according to technical means Q2, wherein the smooth band of the partition wall portion is formed in front of an area where a game ball rolling in the game area can come into contact.
Since there is no possibility that the game ball collides with the smooth belt 1816, there is no possibility of damage.

[5-1-6-Q4. Technical means Q4]
The partition member is
a first partitioning member that partitions the game area from the left side to the upper right side as viewed from the front and has a ball hitting portion that can collide with the game ball fired from the ball launching device;
Similarly, a second partitioning member that partitions the upper right side to the lower right side of the game area facing the front, and whose upper end is joined to the end of the hanging part that extends downward from the ball hitting part of the first partitioning member. , and
At the junction between the end of the drooping portion of the first partitioning member and the upper end of the second partitioning member, the upper end of the second partitioning member is arranged on the game area side, and the upper end is the anti-game area. The gaming machine according to any one of technical means Q1 to Q3, wherein the end portion of the drooping portion of the first partitioning member is arranged on the side.
In the partitioning member 1000A, the connection between the first partitioning member 1000A1 and the second partitioning member 1000A2 is stable. It becomes difficult to be transmitted to the game area 5a side. This is because the impact of the game ball hitting the ball hitting portion 1006 acts in the direction of pushing the drooping portion 1800 of the first dividing member 1000A1 toward the opposite side of the game area. is separated from the upper end of the second partition member 1000A2.

[5-1-6-R1. technical means R1]
Equipped with a detachable game board having a game area on which game balls launched by the ball shooting device roll,
The game board is
A plate-shaped game panel having the game area on its front surface;
a partitioning member that has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is attached to the front surface of the game panel to partition the game area, the game machine comprising:
The partition member is
a metal outer rail that is attached to the inner surface of the play area while being bent into an arc within the elastic limit;
and a specific member that is attached to the outer surface of the outer rail on the opposite side of the game area and has a bending strength capable of resisting the restoring elasticity of the outer rail.
When a metal outer rail 1001 is attached to the inner surface of the partition member 1000A on the play area 5a side in an arc-shaped state within the elastic limit, the recovery elasticity of the outer rail 1001 causes the partition member to move around the weak portion. 1000A may bend, but by attaching a specific member having a bending strength capable of resisting the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 to the outer surface on the non-game area side corresponding to the outer rail 1001 as described above, the section can be divided. The configuration of the member 1000A is corrected to the state in which it is attached to the game panel 1100, and the configuration is stabilized, so that the workability of attaching the member 1000A to the game panel 1100 is improved.

[5-1-6-R2. Technical measures R2]
A game according to technical means R1, wherein the specific member is provided on the outer surface of the partition member including a narrow portion in which the distance between the arc-shaped outer rail and the outer surface of the partition member is small. machine.
If the specific member is provided on the outer surface of the partitioning member 1000A including the narrow portion 1812 where the distance between the arc-shaped outer rail 1001 and the outer surface of the partitioning member 1000A is small, it is not necessary to cover the entire outer surface of the partitioning member 1000A. It is not necessary to provide it, and in such a case, the weight of the game board 5 can be reduced.

[5-1-6-R3. Technical measures R3]
The game machine according to technical means R2, wherein the specific member is attached by a set screw whose tightening direction is a direction against the restoring elasticity of the outer rail.
In such a game machine, when the outer rail 1001 is attached to the partitioning member before the specific member, even if the partitioning member 1000A bends around the narrow portion 1812 due to the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001, the partitioning member 1000A cannot be identified. By attaching the members and tightening the setscrew 1805, the restoring elasticity of the outer rail 1001 can be counteracted. can be corrected. Therefore, the specific member can be efficiently attached to the partition member 1000A with the outer rail 1001 attached.

[5-1-6-R4. Technical measures R4]
The game machine according to any one of technical means R1 to R3, wherein the specific member is a plate-like member made of metal, and is characterized in that a vertically elongated protruding portion is formed.
Since bending strength is improved by providing the convex forming portion 1811 that is elongated in the vertical direction in the specific member, the narrow portion 1812 of the partitioning member 1000A can be further narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to widen the game area 5a accordingly.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137A and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 136, etc.).

The game panel 1100 of the embodiment is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an external shape substantially the same as that of the front structural member 1000 . The game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 . Also, the game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1102 penetrating back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 .

The game panel 1100 also has a notch 1103 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1103 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 are penetrated to fill the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the ball path unit 610 face forward. Although illustration is omitted, a decorative sheet with patterns and decorations according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharged ball receiving part 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 122). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-4. Main control unit (1)]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 173) for controlling game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 130) for setting game performance, A board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided.

The board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been made, or whether or not an illegal IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the board box 1320. FIG. Also, the board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing parts corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. In order to do so, it is necessary to destroy the sealing portion, and traces of the opening and closing of the substrate box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 , the peripheral control board 1510 and the setting change board 1311 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, and a prize winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first Distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution middle drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, third distribution middle drive motor 2561 It is connected to the three-way left rotation detection sensor 2564, the third-way right rotation detection sensor 2565, the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003, the out sensor 664, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 selects a setting key switch (also referred to as a "setting switch") 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting values. It has a setting change button (also referred to as a "setting change switch") 1311b that can be changed, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates a state in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted to be changed. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). ). This connector connection (connection between boards) electrically connects the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b to the main control board 1310. FIG. The right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have substantially the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. match.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is located on the center line. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311, and a pressing operation part is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A switching button 1311b is arranged, and a setting change permission lamp that can emit a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and above the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). 1311c is arranged. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a depressing operation part is arranged in the .

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion opening and can be pulled out from the insertion opening. In the present embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, other players arranged in a line opposite the island facilities of the game hall can be used. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so that the member of the pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and turned on for the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON for the decision key. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (ie, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the original position. (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn off the setting key switch 1311a. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized by only the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. An operation for turning on the setting key and an operation for turning on the determination key can be collectively performed only by the single setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the board box 1320, respectively. However, from the "gap" formed between the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings, the wire In order to prevent the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 from being changed by entering, a wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for these openings. The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. , the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting key switch The wiring pattern to which the OFF signal of 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are routed so that they do not come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (apart from each other). At the same time, connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. is transmitted (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a. ) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns to which the signals from are transmitted are also formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing setting values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current setting values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The "predetermined setting value change permitting condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on must be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the key switch 1311a. As the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it is also possible to set a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is activated. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a on. The setting value may be changed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated is satisfied.

A person who changes the setting values must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The key switch 1311a is set to ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a shown in FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). (set value) is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Each time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the initial set value of 1, increases again by 1, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When the setting value is to be determined, the person who changes the setting value rotates the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, turns the setting key switch 1311a ON. The cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the cylinder to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turned off. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and performing the second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

The setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a). When the switch 1311a is returned to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to turn it off, a decision key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is determined simply by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. and workability is improved.

A person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the decision key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting values to not displaying them, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. to complete.

When confirming and displaying the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn the first ON. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the set values that are currently set must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that the power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to open the first key. is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), and then confirm that the power is restored. Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a controls the current setting values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). of which, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1311c is extinguished is maintained. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the currently set value must turn the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position to the original position (that is, to the original position). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the currently set value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and displays the current setting. Complete the task of confirming the setting value displayed.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the power supply when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When power is restored during recovery, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by being rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is the pachinko machine as described above. 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key must be turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder and rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Thus, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. , the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key ON. The setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability of lottery determination when transitioning to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of transition determination from probability variation to normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with set values Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls B shot into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B that have been played is displayed. Out of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 173, etc.), and this detection signal is transmitted through the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a is set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be rotatable only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder whose key is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' is turned counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) which is the original position. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on for the decision key. (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of board box 1320 corresponding to the Enter key button. A wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the part and change the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. structure. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the circuit board box 1320, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern to the enter key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should not be brought close to each other ( spaced apart from each other). Further, when the setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The form of the Enter key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification (2) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the finger is touching, and a detection from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A signal may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. good.) may be described as "determination key modification (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 from the firing timing control circuit provided in 633b and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these firing reference pulses, the determination key is selected. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, while determining that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and then rotate it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player sitting opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. When a distance measuring sensor that can be used is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor It may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. The light emitted by the light emitting part of the distance measuring sensor passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light-receiving section, thereby detecting the action of the player. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor through the relay board, and determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no movement, it is possible to determine that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "determination key modification (5)"). .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is transmitted to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the enter key ON, and the It is possible to determine which of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON, decision key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to have a pulse width of 1 ms in the case of information indicating that the setting key is ON, and set to a pulse width of 3 ms in the case of information indicating that the enter key is ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the set key, the decision key, and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "determination key modification (7)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting key cylinder is returned to the initial position (i.e., the setting key cylinder turning position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by being rotated and turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a can be moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The voltage level of the signal is changed between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V in the range of 0V to 5V), By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a turns ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. ON/OFF may be determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential is sometimes described as "determination key modification (8)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

It should be noted that the position where the enter key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation section which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch so as not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover for depressing the depressing operation part) ) may be adopted, the color of the pressing operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error canceling switch, or the shape of the pressing operation part A different type of switch may be employed, or another type of switch that does not have a depressing operation section may be employed as the decision key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error cancellation switch, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. In the control board 633, they are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance, Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch should not come close to each other (separately from each other). ) is formed. Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. (The form of the enter key button (which may include the form of the set key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variation (9) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part A signal from the error release switch is branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the decision key is ON. good too. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error canceling switch is operated based on the signal from the error canceling switch, while the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON based on the signal from the error canceling switch. Therefore, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON when the depression operation portion of the error canceling switch is not operated. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the decision key is ON (the mode of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "the decision key modification (10)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control board 633 has a pressing operation part The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error cancellation switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and creates a command, and the payout control unit power-on processing described later. A command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch, and notifies that effect. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives the command to notify that effect. When the button is pressed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (mode 2 of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "variation (11) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to pay out. Input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and determination may be made based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as to whether or not the enter key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the determination key ON On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be pressed. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the payout control board 633, the wire penetration prevention portion is provided with the cover body for the opening. It becomes a structure that is molded into

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover). Also, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch, a button with a cover that covers the depressing operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error cancel switch (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the external shape or pressing operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be employed, and a switch of a different type that does not have a pressing operation part may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Various switches can be mentioned. Also, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error cancellation switch are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separately from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error cancellation switch is transmitted should not be brought close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only within the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch). 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off 1311a to turn it off, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on for the decision key, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring in the process, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the decision key is ON. When the payout control MPU determines that the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal of , and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. Thus, it is possible to improve the security against whether or not the Enter key is ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included). ”).

In the above-described embodiment, the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees toward the main control board 1310 to turn it on. Although it was designed to be input to the MPU 1310a, instead of this, the output port left sensor 3032 and the output port right sensor 3033 are input via the payout control board 633 (via), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 It may be determined whether or not the decision key is ON based on detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The game ball B shot to the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game ball B collected by the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the main control MPU 1310a detects when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4 and the outlet left sensor 3032 or outlet right sensor 3032 is detected. Based on the detection signal from 3033, when the game ball B is collected by the out port 1008, it can be determined that the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not opened (that is, closed) with respect to the body frame 4 and/or based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033, both When the game ball B is not recovered from the out port 1008, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (out port switch). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (14)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the out port 1008 in order to turn the decision key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), turn it off, and then turn it counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees toward the main control board 1310 to turn it on. The logic of the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 is input to the MPU 1310a. Monitor and create a command in the port input process of the input process, send the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process to be described later to the main control board 1310, and receive the command. The main control MPU 1310a of 1310 may determine whether or not the Enter key is ON. The game ball B shot to the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. The game ball B collected through the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing to be described later, based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033, the game ball B is collected by the outlet 1008. When the payout control MPU determines that the game ball B has not been collected by the out port 1008, the payout control MPU determines that the enter key is ON when the payout control MPU receives a command to that effect. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (out port switch). Mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the out port 1008 in order to turn the decision key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 574 or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. is monitored by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 in the port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and a command is created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the payout unit). The aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (16)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. is maintained, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (main body frame open). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again by pressing the button, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, it can be determined that the decision key is ON based on the detection signal of , while the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the body frame 4. is maintained, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (door frame opening). The form of the switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. Then, it is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of ) to turn it OFF, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it ON. can be set to turn ON the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "determination key modification (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to return to the rotational position of ) to turn it OFF, and further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it ON. can be set to turn ON the enter key, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to the initial position and turning off the setting key switch 1311a. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, while the OFF signal is input. If not, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (setting key switch 1311a'). mode 2 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (19)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. An enter key button may be provided. In this case, the press operation portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of board box 1320 corresponding to the Enter key button. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the part and to modify the main control board 1310, a wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the board box 1320, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover must be opened when the cover is open.), the color of the press operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the press operation A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Also, when the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the main control board 1310 (separated from each other). Further, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A setting key switch 1311a' can be used (the mode 2 of the Enter key button (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "Modified example (20) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a RAM clear switch to which the main control MPU 1310a is input is provided. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (RAM clear switch). mode 3 (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is applied to the payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, the payout control board 633 does not need an error canceling switch when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error canceling switch, which will be described later.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 2003 normal winning opening sensor 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, big winning opening sensor 2403, accessory winning opening sensor 2513, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002) , the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are inputted may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (various sensors, etc.). mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the decision key, sends the game ball B into the normal prize winning opening 2003, or performs various operations. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening or send the game ball B to the out opening 1008 .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. It controls the operation of the movable body (accessory) by controlling the drive of the electrical drive source such as the solenoid, and the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.) When determining the original position, the operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (optical function). The aspect of the object sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the optical sensor detects the original position of the movable body (accessory) in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position, etc.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is detected. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is inputted may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. FIG. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the magnetic sensor's The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to enter various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting a fraudulent act of making a ball, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003, and the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003 Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the vibration sensor may The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, radio waves are emitted to the pachinko machine 1 to play A game board 5 and a payout device 580 are provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a game ball B by causing malfunction of various sensors of various winning ports provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580.例文帳に追加In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the enter key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the radio wave sensor The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to turn it off, and further turn it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees to turn it off. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the production operation unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. It may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (effect operation button The form of the unit (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (27)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a configurable board box and placed around or adjacent to the board box 1320 . The board box 1320 is crimped between the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like at the crimped portion. This caulking part is a sealing part, and has a plurality of them. The board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body using one sealing part with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part. Next, to open the board box 1320, the sealing part is broken. There is a need to. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing portion is destroyed. Such a structure of the board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover of the board box 1320, but the setting key switch 1311a is exposed through the corresponding openings formed in the cover of the board box 1320. The setting change board 1311 cannot be modified by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding opening. In addition, the wire penetration prevention portion is formed on the cover body for the opening. Note that, unlike the structure of the board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. An open/close switch for the setting change board cover body that can detect the opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover body open/close switch, the case where the cover body is released from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions (setting change board box is sometimes referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other. A wiring pattern for transmitting a key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting switching button 1311b. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (main control The connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the substrate 1310 is also formed at a distance. , a wiring pattern to which a decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern to which a setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b. was formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). 1311a through which the decision key ON signal is transmitted, one of the wiring patterns is connected via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. , connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (connection between boards) may be connected (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the 1310 via a harness (the mode of routing of the wiring pattern may be described as "determination key modification (29)").

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the selected combination mode of the modification example is referred to as "the modification example (30) of the decision key"). ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the operation of confirming the real machine after clearing the RAM and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 178) from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the peripherals according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate a movable body (accessory) to be controlled and light a light-emitting body. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a time setting pattern 3 that specifies "", a time setting pattern 4 that specifies "25 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 4, a time setting pattern 5 that specifies "30 seconds" is assigned as the setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the change setting mode of the time from the end of the pattern variation to the player waiting state is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the demonstration can be varied.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) to be performed after the completion of symbol variation. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, action effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern specifying "serial effect, movement effect of movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting that specifies "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the mode of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the details of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the details of the demonstration effect performed after the pattern variation is completed.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that designates ", a volume setting pattern 4 that designates "volume 4" as a setting value 4 is allocated, a volume setting pattern 5 that designates "volume 5" is allocated as a setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction of decreasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by maximizing the volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice it, it may be offensive to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes described as "modification (5) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitters by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default luminance, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low, so that an error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and adjust the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. By changing and setting the brightness of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the brightness of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Also, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the above-described common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification (30) of the enter key.

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area out of all the areas of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on processing described later. is cleared except for , and then the game proceeds by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. Further, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established at the time of power recovery of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing to be described later, and stores the main control built-in RAM. The game proceeds by clearing the entire area except for the specific area, and then performing interrupt permission setting and the like. In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is established. In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. It will happen. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may be pressed (this may be described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition"). be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above is applied to the outer frame 2 after the power is restored after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, it was necessary that the setting key had been turned ON. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in the setting value confirmation display processing which is performed as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later. displayed on vessel 1310g. Moreover, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the outer frame 2 Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the ON operation of the setting key, the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may not be pressed (in the case described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). there is). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display processing as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing described later when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is satisfied, and In the processing at the time of entry, the game proceeds by performing the initial setting and start-up setting of the built-in WDT, and then performing the interrupt permission setting and the like. When the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, so the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. A detection signal from the body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is initialized. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning clockwise 60 degrees from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) and performing the first ON operation. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is read and is not stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a controls the main body frame opening for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the modification of the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs) When the power is restored after the momentary power failure that occurs), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Assuming that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs interrupt permission setting etc. While the game is progressing, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then, The game progresses by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the set current setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a recovers by the out-ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main-control-side power-on processing to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and output to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on processing described later, and the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 is counted on the base monitor 1310h. to display. Therefore, the current set values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above (sometimes referred to as a "modification of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set value that is set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the setting display 1310g, which contributes to cost reduction.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor is selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in the modified example (30) of the enter key described above.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor is selected as appropriate. It may be selected and employed in modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 126 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game balls B into the normal winning opening 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is "win". It has a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 129, 133 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIGS. 173 and 174A) for controlling effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board 1510. and a peripheral control board box 1520 . The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIGS. 173 and 174A, etc.) ).

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side surface and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side surface. This performance display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely behind the 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding upward at the .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140 and the like. FIG. 138 is a front perspective view of the front unit of the game board. FIG. 139(a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is the starter unit, side unit, and side upper left unit in the front unit. , and an attacker unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 140(a) is a front perspective view of the center member of the front unit, and FIG. 140(b) is a perspective view of frame parts forming the upper portion of the center frame.

The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. there is

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a first opening 2002 which is attached to a different position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004 and a first starting opening 2002 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003. Or a large winning opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004, and the first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 to receive the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B, an accessory winning opening 2006, and an accessory A first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided to give the chance of receiving the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

A plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a and on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The normal prize winning opening 2003 is arranged near the right end of the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003 . The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 . The prize winning slot 2006 is arranged above the normal winning slot 2003 . The first V winning opening 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the normal winning opening 2003 . The second V winning opening 2008 is arranged right above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a.

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002. On the other hand, a side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 which is mounted slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , An attacker unit 2400 which is attached to the right of the starter unit 2100 in front view, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. , above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. a frame-shaped center member 2500 having 2008;

[5-8a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and is positioned at the center of the center member 2500 in the left-right direction. located directly below.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and guides the ball B behind the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3150 .

[5-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general prize winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and can deliver it to the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. .

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center member 2500 to the right side below the center member 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 and the like. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 148, etc.).

Attacker unit 2400 has a triangular outer shape in a front view in which the height from the lower side increases toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal prize winning opening 2003 is always open upward at the upper right corner. The second starting port 2004 is provided at the lower left with an interval larger than one game ball B from the normal winning port 2003, and is always open forward. The big winning opening 2005 is provided in the vicinity of the lower left lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened forward so as to be opened and closed.

The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 which is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball B, and a large winning opening 2005 that extends in the horizontal direction about 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The width of the opening is

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large opening opening. It is provided with a big winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 and a magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 173, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening door 2411 capable of guiding the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004, and a normal lottery that draws the second starting opening door 2411 by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003. A starting opening solenoid 2412 to be opened and closed according to the result, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the game ball B An attacker solenoid 2414 is provided which is opened and closed according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance.

The attacker unit 2400, as shown in FIGS. 148, 149A, and 152, is provided above the second starting opening 2004 at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003, and is inclined downward to the left. a second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, a second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 provided on the left side of the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and extending vertically, and a second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421. It is provided on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 below the second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, and a large winning opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left.

The second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 extends from a portion on the right side of the right end of the second starting opening 2004, beyond the left end of the second starting opening 2004, to the center between the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 in the horizontal direction. It extends to the left to the vicinity. By this second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, acceptance of the game ball B from above to the second starting opening 2004 is blocked.

The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left from the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 with an interval through which one game ball B can pass. The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 vertically extends from a position higher than the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004. ing. The upper end of the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is bent rightward.

The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 vertically extends downward from the right end of the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 . This second start opening right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the reception of the game ball B from the right side to the second start opening 2004 .

The big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, from the left side of the left end of the second starting opening 2004, from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 One game ball B It extends in the left-right direction so that the left end side is lowered to the left side of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and substantially the same as the right end of the big winning opening 2005. As shown in the figure, the right end side of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so as to rise upward, and the angle of inclination becomes steeper toward the right.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is open to the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and is an attacker that guides the game ball B to a position below the large winning opening guiding shelf 2424 and lower than the large winning opening 2005. A right passageway 2430 is provided.

The attacker's right passage 2430 is located between the first opening 2431 that is vertically long and opens toward the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 that opens upward to the left, a third opening 2433 that opens upward on the lower side of the second starting opening 2004, and a large A fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long and opens leftward on the right side of the winning opening 2005, and a discharge opening that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens leftward. 2435 and . The attacker's right passage 2430 allows the game ball B to enter the inside from the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434, and the discharge opening 2435. The game ball B can be released to the outside only from the outside.

The attacker's right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of a plurality of steps with the left side descending. More specifically, the attacker's right passage 2430 extends downward from a portion on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 above the normal winning opening 2003, and moves leftward at a portion lower in height than the normal winning opening 2003. It bends around to the lower side of the normal winning prize opening 2003, and under the normal winning prize opening 2003, after bending downward with the second start opening right standing wall portion 2423 as part of the left wall, the large winning opening guide shelf 2424 It bends to the left again at a portion lower than , and bends downward to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400 below the portion on the right side of the center of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 .

The attacker's right passage 2430 has a plurality of protrusions 2436 protruding into the passage and extending in the left and right on the inner walls on the front and rear sides of the vertically extending portion at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that the heights on the front side and the rear side are alternated. When the game ball B comes into contact with these protrusions 2436, the game ball B can be guided downward in a zigzag shape while suppressing an increase in the downward velocity of the game ball B.

The attacker's right passage 2430 is located on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 and is elongated vertically and is provided at a portion where the fourth opening 2434 opens. It has a protrusion 2437 protruding further into the passage (see FIG. 152, etc.). Due to the presence of this protrusion 2437, it is possible to prevent the game ball B in the attacker's right passage 2430 from being discharged to the outside (leftward) from the fourth opening 2434, and to pass through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can enter into the attacker's right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right path 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the game area 5a without a chance of being received by the normal winning opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the attacker's right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 that is vertically elongated in a portion that passes through the right side of the big winning opening 2005, a game ball released leftward from the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 A game ball B that touches a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the large winning opening 2005 and flows to the upper side of the large winning opening 2005 to the right of the large winning opening 2005 is placed in the fourth position. It can be received by opening 2434 and allowed to enter attacker right passage 2430 . As described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2430 is released outside only from the ejection port 2435 at the lower end. Due to the presence of the attacker's right path 2430, the game ball B that has been played will not rebound to the big winning opening 2005 side.

Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, if the game ball B released from the big winning hole guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right of the big winning hole 2005 by the obstructing nail N, it enters the attacker's right path 2430. It is not possible to enter and be accepted in the grand prize opening 2005 . For this reason, even if the passage of the game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large winning opening 2005, the wall of the passage (fourth opening 2434) is on the large winning opening 2005 side. A path for the game ball B can be provided adjacent to the large winning opening 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 without rebounding to the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加, the pachinko machine 1 having a passage that has not been seen in the past pachinko machines.

The second starter door 2411 has a plate shape extending left and right from the lower side of the second starter door 2004 to the vicinity of the second starter left standing wall portion 2422 , and is moved back and forth by the starter solenoid 2412 . The second starting opening door 2411 is inclined so as to be lowered from the left end side toward the second starting opening 2004 on the right side, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear at the part of the second starting opening 2004. is doing. The second starting door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that has entered between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 falls onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 without coming into contact with the second start opening door 2411. Therefore, it will not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004 .

On the other hand, in the normal hitting state (open state), the second starting opening door 2411 is moving forward, so the game ball B that has entered between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 comes into contact with the second starting opening door 2411 and is guided toward the second starting opening 2004 by the second starting opening door 2411 to enter (accept) the second starting opening 2004 . In this way, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed by advancing and retracting the second starting port door 2411 . The second start port door 2411 closes the second start port 2004 when the start solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second start port 2004 when the start solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). open up.

The big prize winning opening door 2413 has a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction with one long side serving as an axis. The large winning opening door 2413 can close the large winning opening 2005, which is open to the front, by setting the short side upright by the attacker solenoid 2414, while the other long side faces forward. By rotating so as to move, the big winning opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be received. The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, after the game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 . Further, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 .

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening decoration board 2451 for decorating the second start opening 2004 with light emission, a large winning opening decoration board 2452 for decorating the big winning opening 2005 with light emission, and an attacker right passage 2430. and a front lower right decoration substrate 2453 for luminous decoration (see FIG. 174A). The second starting opening decorative board 2451 is provided behind the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, and is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs. This second start opening decoration board 2451 changes its light emission mode when a "normal hit" is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, and diverts the player's interest to the second start opening 2004. I try to attract

The big winning opening decoration board 2452 is provided behind the big winning opening 2005, and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon. The big winning hole decoration substrate 2452 lights up the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern due to a "big win game" or the like, so that the game balls received in the big winning hole 2005 are decorated. Makes B easier to see. The front lower right decorative board 2453 is provided below the second starting hole 2004 and to the right of the big winning hole 2005 and behind the attacker's right passage 2430, and is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs.

This attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the normal winning opening 2003 is below the exit of the second ball passage portion 2521 on the upper right side of the center member 2500 described later and the first starting opening 2002 ( The second start opening 2004 is located at a higher height than the third sorting device 2550 of the center member 2500, and the second start opening 2004 is the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003. It is located at a height slightly lower than the minute table 2554 and the big winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 . In addition, when attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the upper parts of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421), and the large winning opening 2005. is set.

[5-8e. Center member]
Next, the center member 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 147 and the like. FIG. 140(a) is a front perspective view of the center member of the front unit, and FIG. 140(b) is a perspective view of the frame parts forming the upper part of the center member. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center member and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 142(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center member, the game panel plate, and the back left decoration of the back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). FIG. 143(a) is a plan view of the third sorting device in the center member, and (b) is a front perspective view of the third sorting device in the center member. Fig. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device of the center member and viewed from above, and Fig. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device of the center member and viewed from below and front. be. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the third sorting device in the center member. Figure 147 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the projections provided in the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center member, (b) is the second V winning opening and It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the game ball when the protrusion is not provided in the third loss opening.

The center member 2500 is attached to a large opening 1102 formed in the game area 5a above the starter unit 2100 and slightly above the center in a front view. The center member 2500 includes a center frame 2501 formed in a frame shape, a third sorting device 2550, a second ball passage portion 2521 (details will be described later), or, although not shown, a game ball B in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. and a game member consisting of a so-called stage portion that is caused to swing by inertia and drop into the game area. The light guide plate effect unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, the back front lower right effect unit 3400, the sub-status indicator 3500, and the like can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-8e-1. center frame]
The center frame 2501 includes a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 extending in the front-rear direction in a plate shape with a substantially constant thickness, and a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front frame portion 2502 (the game panel 1100). a flat plate-like flange portion 2503 extending in the same plane direction as the front surface of the flange portion 2503; 2503 and an attachment hole 2505 for attaching the center frame 2501 to the game panel 1100 through the center frame 2503 in the longitudinal direction.
The center frame 2501 of the embodiment is made of transparent resin, and is formed of a plurality of frame parts 2501a and 2501b as shown in FIG. It overlaps and is connected to the front surface of the part 2501b. Of course, the frame parts 2501a and 2501b of the center frame 2501 do not need to be integrally joined with screws or the like, and may be fixed to the game panel 1100 to maintain the connected state.
The upper frame part 2501a has no electrical components mounted thereon and no electrical wiring. Therefore, only the upper frame part 2501a can be removed from the center frame 2501 attached to the game panel 1100 for maintenance such as cleaning or replacement with a new one. As described above, the end portion 2501aa of the upper frame part 2501a overlaps the front surface of the lower frame part 2501b. can be removed.
Although the center frame 2501 of the embodiment is formed of a plurality of frame parts 2501a and 2501b, it may be formed of a single molded body. If the members are formed separably, the center frame 2501 can be removed from the game panel 1100 for maintenance such as cleaning, or can be easily replaced with a new one.
Instead of mounting electrical parts on the center frame 2501, a part of the center frame 2501 (a frame part 2501a having a bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, which will be described later) has a translucent decoration 2501 (preferably, a translucent decoration 2501). The decoration 2501 is illuminated by the light of the back unit 3000 (back front effect unit 3200), which is light emitting means separately provided on the game panel 1100 side. You may do so. By doing so, it becomes possible to decorate the center frame 2501 with illumination without providing electrical wiring.
In addition, when the center member 2500 is not provided with the above-described game member, the center frame 2501 is also the center member 2500 .

[5-8e-2. Front frame of center frame]
A front frame portion 2502 of the center frame 2501 is formed substantially like a frame. The front frame portion 2502 has a front frame upper right portion 2502a that is linearly inclined so as to become lower rightward from a position on the upper side of the frame leftward from the center in the horizontal direction. The front frame upper right portion 2502a of the front frame portion 2502 becomes the bottom of the passage in a state where the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, and the game ball B is placed between the outer rail 1001 of the front component member 1000 and the front frame portion 2502a. forms a first ball passage portion 2506 having a predetermined width through which the air can flow. It should be noted that the above-described ball contact portion 1006 faces the end portion of the first ball passage portion 2506 .

[5-8e-3. Rear frame part of the center frame]
A rear frame portion 2504 of the center frame 2501 has a plurality of stripe-like decorations extending in the front-rear direction on the inner peripheral surface side in the circumferential direction. This makes it difficult to see the opposite side through the rear frame portion 2504, and the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b mounted on the rear left decorative substrate 3222 in the rear front effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided behind. It can be made to look like it emits light by irradiating it with light from, for example. The rear frame portion 2504 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. By attaching the center member 2500 to the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 faces the player ( from the front). It should be noted that the rear frame portion 2504 can be selected not to be provided as necessary.

[5-8e-4. Center frame flange]
The center frame 2501 has a frame-like front frame portion 2502 and a rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction as described above, and a flat plate-like flange portion 2503 having a tapered edge with a tapered edge in the front-rear direction. extending in a direction orthogonal to the The center frame 2501 can be reinforced by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 are less likely to be distorted.

The center frame 2501 inserts the rear frame portion 2504 from the front into the large opening 1102 in the center of the game panel 1100, and with the rear surface of the flange portion 2503 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, the attachment hole is opened. It is attached to the gaming panel 1100 by small screws threaded through 2505 into the gaming panel 1100 . When the center frame 2501 (center member 2500) is attached to the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B struck into the game area 5a is , so that they cannot enter the frame.

Further, when the center frame 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100 , the rear frame portion 2504 is positioned so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 . A plurality of streaky decorations formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504 make it difficult to see the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 from the player side (front).

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 at the frame-shaped left side portion of the center member 2500 (center frame 2501). In addition, the contour of the inner surface of the front frame portion 2502 generally matches the contour of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and a part of the front frame 2502 extends outward from the opening 1102. positioned. Mounting holes 2505 for mounting to the game panel 1100 are provided in the flange portion 2503 of the portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening portion 1102 .

In other words, part of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 protrudes inward more than the front frame 2502 at the left side of the frame of the center member 2500. A center member 2500 is attached to 1100 .

As a result, at the left side of the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500, the flange portion 2503 extends to the inside of the front frame portion 2502 and nothing extends to the outside. It is possible to implant the obstructing nail N at a position as close as possible to the . Therefore, the area in which the game balls B substantially circulate in the game area 5a can be made up to the position in contact with the front frame part 2502, so that the circulation area of the game balls B can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to enjoy the movement itself of the game ball B can be provided.

In the center member 2500, the flange portion 2503 extends in a direction perpendicular to the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. And the rear frame portion 2504, that is, the entire center member 2500 can be reinforced, and by attaching the center member 2500 to the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2503, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 can be increased. can be improved. Since the portion of the flange portion 2503 extending inwardly of the front frame portion 2502 is also attached to the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2505, the game ball B in the game area 5a is attached to the front frame portion. 2502, the flange portion 2503 is attached to the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2505, etc., so that the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained. Deformation and breakage of the frame portion 2502 (center member 2500) can be prevented.

Furthermore, as described above, since the obstructing nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502, the front frame portion 2502 of the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500 divides the nail. Even if the inside of the frame of the center member 2500 is enlarged, the substantial circulation area of the game balls B is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, by enlarging the inside of the frame of the center member 2500 while suppressing that the circulation area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a is substantially reduced, the performance display device provided behind through the inside of the frame. 1600 and the first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 can be made more visible, and the movement of the game ball B within the game area 5a and the , and various performances seen through the frame of the center member 2500 can be provided.

Further, in the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 can be increased by the flange portion 2503 as described above. Occasionally, deformation of the molded article can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center member 2500 is decorated with light emitted from the LED mounted on the rear left decoration board 3222 of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the game is played. Although the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the panel 1100 is shown to be difficult to see, it is not limited to this. For example, between the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame portion 2504 of the center member 2500, along the inner periphery of the opening 1102, on the surface facing the center side of the opening 1102 A decorative substrate for an opening on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted may be provided. As a result, the same effect as described above can be obtained, and the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can be hidden by the opening decoration substrate, thereby improving the appearance of the game area 5a. can be done. In this case, by making the surface of the decoration board for the opening white, the decoration board for the opening can be made inconspicuous, and the rear frame part 2504 can be decorated with brighter light emission when the LED is lighted. can be done. Alternatively, the surface of the opening decoration substrate may be colored in a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same effect as above can be achieved. Also, the decorative substrate for the opening may be provided over the entire circumference of the opening 1102, and the center member 2500 may emit light in a frame shape (annular shape) to encourage "right-handed" or "left-handed". By emitting light so as to circulate in a predetermined direction as shown in the figure, the player can be entertained by presenting a variety of light emitting effects.

[5-8e-5. Second Ball Passage]
In addition, the center member 2500 has a second ball passage portion 2521 that opens at the upper right corner of the center frame 2501 and is integrated with the center frame 2501 . This second ball passage portion 2521 is one form of the above-described game member, and rolls on the front frame upper right portion 2502a that constitutes the passage bottom of the first ball passage portion 2506 for right-handed hitting and falls at the end portion. Alternatively, it receives the game ball B that collides with the ball hitting portion 1006 and falls down, and guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400 .

As shown in FIG. 148, the second ball passage portion 2521 has an inlet portion 2521a (hereinafter also referred to as a “bouncing ball receiving portion”) on the side of the front frame upper right portion 2502a, which extends obliquely below the ball contact portion 1006. As shown in FIG. is obliquely opposed to the ball contact portion 1006. Therefore, most of the game balls B that have collided with the ball hitting portion 1006 are bounced there and then hit the bounce ball receiving portion 2521a and fall.

By the way, the flange portion 2503 corresponding to the second ball passage portion 2521 of the center frame 2501 and the mounting hole 2505 are formed on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion 2521 with the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a interposed therebetween as shown in FIG. It is
Needless to say, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521 a repeatedly receives the impact of the game ball B bounced off the ball hitting portion 1006 , but the impact is supported by the screw inserted through the mounting hole 2505 of the flange portion 2503 . Then, the impact of the game ball B received by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a acts in a direction to lift the flange portion 2503 from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the flange portion 2503 is on the second ball passage portion 2521 side. When the portion 2503 is on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion 2521 across the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, the flange portion 2503 is pushed against the front surface of the game panel 1100. FIG.
Therefore, if the flange portion 2503 having the mounting hole 2505 is on the side of the second ball passage portion 2521, the impact of the game ball B received by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a causes the flange portion 2503 to rise from the front surface of the game panel 1100. It will try to move up, and this will act on the screw in a pull-out direction. Repetition of this force may cause loosening of the screws.
On the other hand, if the flange portion 2503 having the mounting hole 2505 is on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion 2521 across the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, the impact of the game ball B received by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a will cause the flange portion to move. Since 2503 is pressed against the front surface of the game panel 1100, almost no stress is applied to the screws passed through the mounting holes 2505 of the flange portion 2503. As a result, the screws are less likely to loosen, and the long-term stability of the center frame 2501 is improved.
In addition, since the flange portion 2503 is located on the opposite side of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a to the second ball passage portion 2521, as shown in FIG. Since there is no step due to the thickness of the flange portion 2503 in the ball bouncing passage 2521s, for example, "a game ball B hits the ball hitting portion 1006 and heads for the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a contacts the step of the flange portion 2503 and the glass unit 160 It will change the course to the side, and in the worst case the ball will get stuck." In FIG. 136, a part of the edge of the flange 2503 protrudes into the ball bouncing passage 2521s. Therefore, contact between the two cannot occur in this area. Therefore, in FIG. 136, the flange portion 2503 protruding into the ball bouncing passage portion 2521 is not a step 2527 with which the game ball B can contact, and does not affect the course of the game ball B at all.

The second ball passage portion 2521 is made of a transparent synthetic resin including a detachable passage cover 2521d covering the front surface, so that the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.
Since the right-handed game ball B has a strong momentum and moves quickly, it takes a short time to collide with the ball hitting portion 1006 and drop. The impression of the game ball B flowing to 2521 becomes weak.
On the other hand, in the embodiment, at least the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is formed in an opaque bright color such as white, while at least the surface of the ball contact portion 1006 is formed in a dark color such as black.
The opaque light color of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may be yellow or pink other than white, while the dark color of the ball contact portion 1006 may be dark blue or dark brown other than black. As for the means to make it light or dark, it is possible to directly paint the relevant part with light paint, but also to attach a light-colored sticker to the relevant part or attach a separate molded product of the relevant color to the relevant part. etc. The point is that when viewed from the player during play, the background of the game ball B hitting the ball hitting part 1006 is dark, and the steel round mirror surface of the game ball B reflects a bright color. .

Here, it is important to widen the difference in lightness between colors and to emphasize the contrast as necessary elements for making the game ball B easy to understand and find by using colors. For example, if white has a reflectance of 100% and a brightness of 10, black has a brightness of 0 and the difference in brightness between the two is 10, thus enhancing the contrast. On the other hand, there is almost no lightness difference between a color with a lightness of 1 and a color with a lightness of 3, and a color with a lightness of 4 and a color with a lightness of 6, and they are recognized as a combination of colors having the same difference in lightness.
The game ball B is taken into the pachinko machine 1 and repeatedly rolls in the game ball area 5a. It is washed to remove dust and dirt, and is plated with chrome, which has excellent abrasion resistance, so that it can withstand such use environments. Therefore, the appearance of the game ball B has a mirror-like surface and looks silvery when exposed to external light.

In the example of this embodiment, when the game ball B hitting the ball hitting portion 1006 bounces back to the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, the player who is playing the game who is normally about 50 cm away from the front of the pachinko machine 1 looks up slightly ( The dark color (black) of the ball contact part 1006 at the position (see the perspective view of the player's line of sight in the balloon in FIG. 1) becomes the background of the game ball B, and at the same time, it is polished by the ball polishing device in the middle of the ball circulation path. Since the bright color (white) of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a appears on the round silver mirror surface of the game ball B (steel ball), the contrast makes it easy to recognize the falling state of the game ball B.
That is, black and white, which are the colors used for the exemplified ball contact portion 1006 and the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, are achromatic colors that do not have color in terms of hue, but colors that have the greatest difference in terms of lightness. is a combination of In addition, the surface of the game ball B passing between them is always polished and mirror-finished, and such an effect can be obtained.
In addition, since the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a has an opaque light color with respect to the transparent center frame 2501, other effect devices behind the center frame 2501 and the pattern of the game panel 1100 can be seen through. Since the influence of miscellaneous reflections on the surface of B can be reduced, the easiness of recognition is improved.
Of course, the time in which the game ball B hits the ball hitting portion 1006 and bounces back is very short and instantaneous, but since the game ball B is continuously struck to the right, the second ball is pushed from the end of the first ball passage portion 2506 to the second ball. It is possible to make the game ball B flowing in the passage part 2521 stand out in comparison with the conventional one. In particular, in recent pachinko machines 1, decorations on the upper edge and side edges of the door frame 3 protrude toward the player side, and the area around the ball hitting part 1006 located in the upper right corner is often dim. Below, the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a reflected on the round mirror surface of the game ball B is easily conspicuous, and the effect obtained is correspondingly greater.

In addition, in the embodiment, since the upper wall of the passage of the first ball passage portion 2506 is formed of the outer rail 1001 made of glossy stainless steel, when the game ball B passes through the first ball passage portion 2506, A player who is looking up can see a mirror image of the game ball B reflected on the outer rail 1001, that is, the game ball B can be seen in two. When the game ball B hits the ball hitting portion 1006 and bounces away from the outer rail 1001, the mirror image of the game ball B reflected there cannot be seen, and the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a replaces it. Since it is reflected on the mirror surface, the movement of the game ball B can be shown more dynamically.
In addition, in the embodiment, as will be described later, when the surface of the ball hitting portion 1006 on which the game ball B strikes is the front side, the surface is tilted backward (a state in which the surface is tilted rearward with respect to the vertical line). As a result, the bouncing direction of the hitting game ball B is slightly upward and is slightly decelerated, so that the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a reflected on the game ball B is more likely to be impressed. .

The second ball passage portion 2521 extends vertically and short from immediately below the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and the ball contact portion 1006 at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion 2506, and then bends rightward at a substantially right angle, When it hits the right rail 1005, it bends downward and extends along the right rail 1005, bends leftward near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, and lowers at a loose angle. It extends to the left, bends downward at the left position, extends to the height of the center of the game area 5a, bends to the right, extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward to open the exit downward. It is formed in a shape that opens toward it. The second ball passage portion 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

[5-8e-6. others]
In addition, the center member 2500 is provided in the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521, and the first special lottery result or An accessory winning opening 2006 that can receive the game ball B according to the result of the second special lottery, and the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is placed on the accommodation part 2531a side (V winning side) and the first losing. A first distribution device 2530 that distributes to any of the openings 2535, and a game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a by the first distribution device 2530 (distributed to the V winning side) is the first V winning opening 2007. A second distribution device 2540 that distributes to any of the second loss ports 2543, and the game ball B distributed to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 is the second V winning port 2008 and the third loss port 2555, and a third sorting device 2550 for sorting to any one of 2555.

In addition, the center member 2500 has a role winning opening door 2511 capable of opening and closing the role winning opening 2006, and the role winning opening door 2511 by accepting the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. Accessory prize winning opening solenoid 2512 to be opened and closed according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn, Accessory winning prize opening sensor 2513 to detect game ball B received in Accessory winning opening 2006, A first V winning opening sensor 2514 that detects the game ball B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 and received in the first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening distributed by the third distribution device 2550. A second V winning hole sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B accepted in 2008, and a first loss hole sensor that detects the game ball B distributed by the first sorting device 2530 and accepted in the first loss hole 2535. 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150(a)), a second loss opening sensor 2517 for detecting the game ball B distributed by the second distribution device 2540 and received in the second loss opening 2543, and a third A third loss opening sensor 2518 for detecting the game ball B distributed by the distribution device 2550 and received in the third loss opening 2555 is provided.

The accessory prize-winning opening 2006 is provided in a portion extending leftward in the second ball passage portion 2521, and extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the portion in the left-right direction. It's open. The accessory winning entrance door 2511 extends back and forth, and is formed in a plate-like shape that extends left and right so that the left end is lowered. A prize winning opening 2006 that opens upward can be opened and closed.

The accessory winning opening door 2511 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward, and when the accessory winning opening 2006 is closed, it extends to the left in the second ball passage portion 2521. By forming the bottom surface of the portion, it is possible to guide the game ball B flowing from the upstream side to the outlet side of the second ball passage portion 2521 .
In addition, the accessory winning opening door 2511 is driven backward by the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 to open the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has flowed down the second ball passage portion 2521 wins the accessory winning opening. It can be received by mouth 2006 .
In this way, the accessory winning opening door 2511 closes the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and when the accessory winning opening solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). opens the prize winning port 2006.

The first sorting device 2530 is provided at a height between the prize winning opening 2006 and the part extending to the lower right in the second ball passage portion 2521, and the second ball passage portion 2521 It is provided behind (the front surface of the game panel 1100).

The first sorting device 2530 has a storage portion 2531a that can store only one game ball B on the outer peripheral surface, and a sorting rotating body 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotating body 2531. A first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 173, etc.) for rotating the distribution rotor 2531 between a state in which the accommodation portion 2531a of the housing portion 2531a faces rightward and a state in which it faces upward, and a vibration Cylindrical peripheral wall portion 2533 covering the outer circumference of the minute rotating body 2531, and the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is passed through the peripheral wall portion 2533 above the sorting rotating body 2531 and shaken. A first sorting guideway 2534 that guides to the outer peripheral surface of the upper side of the dividing rotor 2531, and a lower part of the first sorting guideway 2534 that opens toward the rear and accommodates a housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531. A first losing port 2535 into which game balls B that have not been accommodated enter, and a ball game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 circulates. A first hit passage 2536 extending to the right through and a first loss opening sensor 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 150(a)) that detects the game ball B that has entered the first loss opening 2535. , is equipped with

The distribution rotator 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape with an outer peripheral surface tapering toward the rear. The right end of the first strike passage 2536 bends backward and then bends downward to communicate with the second sorting device 2540 side.

In the first sorting device 2530, when the first sorting solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 comes into contact with the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2531 through the first distribution guide path 2534, the outer circumference of the distribution rotor 2531 Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone that narrows backward, the game ball B is guided backward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface and enters the first losing hole 2535 .

On the other hand, when the first sorting solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the accommodating portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 150(a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting guideway 2534, only one is received in the receiving portion 2531a. In the state where the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531, when the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the side of the prize winning opening 2006, the game ball After B contacts the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a, it enters the first losing hole 2535 in the rear. The game ball B that has entered the first losing hole 2535 is discharged onto the board holder 1200 after being delivered to the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 .

In the state where the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2531a, the first distribution solenoid 2532 rotates the distribution rotating body 2531 in the clockwise direction, and when the housing portion 2531a turns to the right, the housing portion The game ball B housed in 2531a rolls from the housing portion 2531a to the right side of the first strike passage 2536, and flows through the first strike passage 2536. The game ball B that has circulated through the first strike passage 2536 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540 .

Thus, in the first sorting device 2530, the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 is transferred to either the second sorting device 2540 side (accommodating section 2531a side) or the first losing port 2535 side. can be divided into

The second sorting device 2540 is provided below the first sorting device 2530 and rearward near the exit of the second ball passage portion 2521, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 148 and the like. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the first sorting guideway 2534 and the first strike passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530 .

As shown in FIG. 150, the second sorting device 2540 circulates game balls B that are housed in the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the first strike passage 2536 side. A second distribution guideway 2541 extending vertically, a first V winning opening 2007 opening on the right side of the lower part of the second distribution guidance path 2541, and extending rightward from the first V winning opening 2007 a first V winning path 2542 extending downward after the first V winning path 2542; 2514 and .

In addition, the second sorting device 2540 is provided above the second loss port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second sorting guideway 2541, and the second loss port 2543. A distribution door 2544 capable of opening and closing the loss port 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 for moving the distribution door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second loss port 2543 extending to the left. A second loss passage 2546 that is bent downward behind, a second loss opening sensor 2517 that is provided at the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 and detects the game ball B received in the second loss opening 2543, It has The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that advances and retreats back and forth, and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

In the second sorting device 2540, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is OFF (not energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted, and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guideway 2541, it enters the second loss port 2543, passes through the second loss passage 2546, and passes through the second loss passage 2546. It is sent to the three sorting device 2550 side.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 moves forward above the second loss opening 2543, and the second loss opening 2543 is closed by the distribution door 2544 to play the game. Ball B is unacceptable. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it contacts the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and the sorting door 2544 It is guided to the right by the slope and enters (is accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 circulates through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514. is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 via the .

When the ball game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. A "jackpot game" that opens and closes is executed. This second sorting device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent second ball passage portion 2521 .

Thus, in the second sorting device 2540, the game ball B housed in the housing part 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 is placed in the first V winning hole 2007 or the second losing hole. 2543 (third sorting device 2550).

The third sorting device 2550, which is one form of the game member described above, is provided at the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2501 of the center member 2500, as shown in FIG. 140 and the like. The third distribution device 2550 communicates with the downstream end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second distribution device 2540, and guides the game ball B detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 to the left. A distribution guideway 2551 and a croon 2553 that is provided at the left end of the third distribution guideway 2551 and releases downward while rotating the game ball B around the vertical axis, and is provided below the croon 2553 A third distribution table 2554 on which a game ball B can roll, and a second Two third losing openings 2555 penetrating downward on the left and right sides of the two-V winning opening 2008, and a rotating body in the third distribution provided near the rear end of the center in the left-right direction of the third distribution table 2554. 2556, and a third distribution left rotator 2557 and a third distribution right rotator 2558 provided near the front end of the left and right ends of the third distribution table 2554 (Figs. 143 to 146). etc.).

Furthermore, the third distribution device 2550 is attached to the lower side of the third distribution table 2554 and attached to the center frame 2501. The third distribution base 2559 is attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559. and a third distribution drive motor 2560 for rotating the third distribution rotation body 2556, and a third distribution base 2559 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559 for rotating the third distribution left rotation body 2557. and a third left drive motor 2562 attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559 for rotating the third right rotation body 2558. I have it. The third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173). ).

The rotation shaft of the third distribution middle drive motor 2560 penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and protrudes upward. The rotation shaft of the third left-hand drive motor 2561 penetrates the third rotation base 2559 and protrudes upward, and the third left-hand rotation body 2557 is attached to the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562 penetrates the third distribution base 2559 and protrudes upward, and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is attached to the rotation shaft.

In addition, the third sorting devices 2550 are each attached to a third sorting base 2559, and have a rotation detection sensor 2563 during the third sorting for detecting the rotation of the rotator 2556 during the third sorting, A third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 , a second V winning opening sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, a third losing opening sensor 2518 that detects the gaming ball B received in the third losing opening 2555, It has These, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 2518, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are the panel It is connected to the main control board 1310 via the relay board 1710 (see FIG. 173).

In addition, the third sorting device 2550 includes a drive gear 2566 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotation shaft of the third sorting drive motor 2560 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559. and a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 2567 that meshes with the driving gear 2566 and is attached to the shaft portion 2556 a that protrudes downward in the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. The transmission gear 2567 has a diameter larger than that of the drive gear 2566 , reduces the rotation speed of the drive motor 2560 during the third distribution, and transmits the rotation to the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Further, the transmission gear 2567 has a detection piece 2567 a that extends outward in a flat plate shape and is detected by the rotation detection sensor 2563 during third distribution.

Further, the third distribution device 2550 is a spur gear-shaped left transmission gear attached to the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. 2568, a left rotation detecting gear 2569 in the form of a spur gear meshed with the left transmission gear 2568 and rotatably attached to the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559; Between the table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, a spur gear-shaped right transmission gear 2570 attached to the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562 and the right transmission gear 2570 mesh with each other. A right rotation detection gear 2571 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559 is provided.

Left transmission gear 2568 and right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and number of teeth. Further, the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a larger diameter than the left transmission gear 2568 and rotates slower than the rotation shaft of the third split left drive motor 2561 . The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a detection piece 2569 a projecting downward from the middle in the radial direction in the form of a flat plate and detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 . The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570 and rotates slower than the rotation shaft of the third split right drive motor 2562 . The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a detection piece 2571a that protrudes downward in the radial direction and is detected by the third distributed right rotation detection sensor 2565 .

In addition, the third sorting device 2550 is provided below the third sorting rotating body 2556 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and can irradiate light upward. Between the third distribution middle rotator decoration board 2572 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, the third distribution middle rotator 2556 and the second A third distribution table decoration board 2573 is provided below a portion between the V winning opening 2008 and mounts a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward.

In addition, the third sorting device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third sorting base 2559, and cooperates with the third sorting base 2559 to accept the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. A passage forming member 2575 forming a third sorting ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding and discharging the game ball B that has been thrown downward, a third sorting middle drive motor 2560, and a third sorting left drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 from below, the lower cover 2576 attached to the lower surface of the third distribution base 2559 covers the clown 2553 and the third distribution table 2554 from above. a transparent top cover 2577 (see FIG. 134);

The third sorting table 2554 is transparent. The third distribution table 2554 has a semi-arc shape on the rear end side and a cannonball-like shape with a longitudinal length substantially equal to the diameter of the semi-arc shape when viewed from above. The length of the third sorting table 2554 in the front-rear direction is 2.5 times the diameter of the rotating body 2556 during the third sorting. In other words, the diameter of the third allocating rotor 2556 is 0.4 times the length of the third allocating table 2554 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the diameter of the third distribution middle rotor 2556 is about four times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is the diameter of the game ball B. about 10.5 times. In addition, the central table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554 has a length (width) in the left-right direction that is a little over five times the diameter of the game ball B, and a length (depth) in the front-rear direction that is the diameter of the game ball B. 5 to 7 times the

The third distribution table 2554 is provided at the center in the left-right direction and in front of the third distribution rotating body 2556. The center table 2554a is a substantially rectangular center table 2554a that is inclined so that the front end side is lower. A left table 2554b and a right table 2554c that are long in the front-rear direction from a position behind the front end of the central table 2554a to a position behind the rear end of the third distribution rotating body 2556, It is provided in front of the center table 2554a, and after being inclined to be lower on both left and right sides with the center in the left-right direction as a boundary, it is bent backward at the left and right outer sides of the center table 2554a to form a left table 2554b and a right table. The recovery table 2554d is inclined to be lowered toward 2554c, and the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are each provided with one step higher on both the left and right outer sides, and the front end side and the inner side are inclined to be lowered. and a side table 2554e.

In addition, the third distribution table 2554 surrounds the weir portion 2554f protruding upward from both left and right sides of the central table 2554a, the rear end side of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the outside of the left and right side tables 2554e. , and a peripheral wall portion 2554g that is higher than the diameter of the game ball B and extends upward. The weir portion 2554f suppresses the entry and exit of the game ball B from both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2554g cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game ball B from falling off from the third distribution table 2554.

The central table 2554a has a longitudinal length slightly longer than the diameter of the third distribution rotating body 2556, and a lateral length longer than the longitudinal length. The rear end of the central table 2554a extends forward from the center of the third distribution rotor 2556, and both left and right sides are bent obliquely toward the third distribution rotor 2556. ing. The center table 2554a is only inclined in the front-rear direction and horizontal in the left-right direction. In the vicinity of the front end of the central table 2554a, third losing openings 2555 are opened on both the left and right sides with the second V winning opening 2008 in the center in the left-right direction in between. The second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are round holes with the same diameter. It should be noted that the second V winning opening 2008 has a round chamfered edge on the periphery of the hole.

The front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are the same as the front ends of the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2555 in the front-rear direction. is located at a height below the diameter of the Also, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are inclined in the front-rear direction so that the distance from the front end of each table to the rear end of the center table 2554a is the same as the rear end of the center table 2554a. and the rear side thereof is substantially horizontal. Furthermore, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c have the same height as the general surface of the third distributing rotating body 2556 in the vicinity of the center and the part of the third distributing rotating body 2556 in the front-rear direction. The rear side is higher than the rotor 2556 during the third distribution. A third distribution left rotator 2557 and a third distribution right rotator 2558 are provided at the front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on both left and right outer sides, respectively.

In addition, the third distribution table 2554 extends forward and backward from the rear end to the vicinity of the second V winning opening 2008 so that the width of the left and right becomes narrower toward the front at the center of the center table 2554a in the left and right direction, It has a bulging portion 2554h that bulges slightly upward. With this bulging portion 2554h, the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling in the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction can be directed outward in the left-right direction, making it difficult to enter the second V winning opening 2008. is doing.

In addition, the third distribution table 2554 protrudes upward from the front end sides of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing openings 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protruding portion 2554i that extends upward. The projecting portion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape in the second V winning opening 2008, and is formed in a bar shape with a narrow left and right width in the third losing opening 2555. - 特許庁Also, the protrusion 2554 i of the third failure opening 2555 projects slightly into the third failure opening 2555 . Although details will be described later, these projections 2554i are such that when the game ball B comes into contact with the circular openings of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, it rolls around the edge of the opening and then outwards. This is to prevent it from jumping out and entering the other third losing opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008 .

Further, the third distribution table 2554 protrudes lower than the projection 2554i in the center in the left-right direction between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 at the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protrusion 2554j.

The third distribution rotating body 2556 protrudes downward from the disc-shaped center, is rotatably supported by the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and has a shaft portion 2556a to which the transmission gear 2567 is attached. have. In addition, the third allocating rotating body 2556 has three inner protrusions 2556b protruding in a fan shape near the center, and an outer protrusion 2556c protruding in an arc shape higher than the inner protrusions 2556b near the outer peripheral edge. ,have. The inner protrusion 2556b and the outer protrusion 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and are provided on the same radial line. The outer projecting portion 2556c has a constant width in the radial direction, the outer peripheral side coincides with the general surface of the third distribution rotating body 2556, and the inner peripheral side is inclined in the radial direction so as to be higher. there is When the rotating body 2556 during third distribution is assembled in the third distribution device 2550, the general surface is parallel to the surface of the central table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554 and slightly above the central table 2554a. located in The rotating body 2556 during third distribution is rotated counterclockwise in plan view via a drive gear 2566 and a transmission gear 2567 by a drive motor 2560 during third distribution.

The third left rotating body 2557 and the third right rotating body 2558 protrude in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction, and have projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a extending in the axial direction, respectively. there is The projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a are located at the highest position on each of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c in a state where the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third distribution device 2550. With respect to the game ball B positioned at both left and right outer portions of the lowered front end, it protrudes to a substantially central position of the game ball B. - 特許庁The tips of the projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a are rounded in plan view. Therefore, the projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a of the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558 make it difficult to hit the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

Further, when the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are assembled in the third distribution device 2550, the lower ends of the projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a are aligned with the left table 2554b and the left table 2554b. It is positioned above the center of the game ball B with respect to the game ball B positioned at both left and right outer portions of the lowest front end on each of the right tables 2554c. That is, the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a are provided so as to come into contact with the upper part of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. As a result, the projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a do not come into contact with the game ball B so as to scoop it up, making it difficult for the game ball B to bounce upward.

The third left rotator 2557 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the third left drive motor 2561, and the third right rotator 2558 is driven by the third left drive motor. It is rotated clockwise in a plan view by a motor 2562 . Therefore, the game ball B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c is flipped backward by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotator 2558.

The third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to hold the second V winning opening sensor 2515 and the two third losing opening sensors 2518 . In addition, the third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to guide the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 to discharge downward. A spherule discharge passage 2574 is formed. The third sorting ball discharge passage 2574 divides the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing openings 2555 on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 without merging them. It is formed so as to be guided as it is, and a second V winning opening sensor 2515 and a third losing opening sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 134, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end side is lowered, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the inside of the game area 5a, the upper cover 2577 is provided at the rear. The first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 where the player is present, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like are not blocked.

When the third sorting device 2550 is assembled on the game board 5, the front end is positioned forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and slightly rearward of the front surface of the front structural member 1000, and the rear end is positioned behind the back described later. It is positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 of the unit 3000 and slightly ahead of the front of the effect display device 1600 . A collection table 2554 d of a third sorting table 2554 in the third sorting device 2550 is positioned forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

In the third distribution device 2550, the third distribution middle rotor 2556, the third distribution left rotor 2557, and the third distribution right rotor 2558 are driven by a third middle distribution drive motor 2560 and a third distribution left rotor. It is always rotated by the drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 . The third middle rotating body 2556 and the third left rotating body 2557 rotate counterclockwise in plan view, and the third right rotating body 2558 rotates clockwise in plan view. there is

In this embodiment, the third distribution middle rotor 2556 has a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the third distribution left rotor 2557 and the third distribution right rotor 2558 are much faster than the third distribution rotor 2556. Each rotates at a high speed of 625 rpm. Since the rotation speed of the third left rotating body 2557 and the right rotating body 2558 is high, the third left rotating body 2557 and the third right rotating body 2558 are provided with detection pieces. Even if the presence or absence of rotation is detected by the sensor, there is a possibility that the detection piece cannot be reliably detected by the sensor. More specifically, the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece. Since the piece may not be detected at all, it is necessary to make the detection period of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation period of the detection piece. If the rotation of the detection piece is fast and the rotation cycle is further shortened, the detection cycle of the sensor must be further shortened. This increases the load on the control unit, increasing the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating shafts of the third left rotating body 2557 and the third right rotating body 2558 (the third left driving motor 2561 and the third right driving motor 2562) , After mounting the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570, respectively, the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 are meshed with the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, respectively, to rotate. A detection piece 2569a and a detection piece 2571a are provided on the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 whose rotations are decelerated, and the third distributed left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distributed right rotation detection sensor 2564 are provided. A detection sensor 2565 is used for detection. In this embodiment, the number of revolutions of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is 250 rpm.

As a result, the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a for detecting the rotation of the third left rotation body 2557 and the third right rotation body 2558 is slowed down, so that the third left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distributed right rotation detection sensor 2565 can reliably detect, and it is possible to determine whether or not the third distributed left rotator 2557 and the third distributed right rotator 2558 are rotated. In addition, since the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a is slowed down, there is no need to unnecessarily shorten the detection cycle of the third distributed left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distributed right rotation detection sensor 2565. An appropriate detection period can be set, and an increase in the load applied to the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

The third sorting device 2550 is supplied with the game balls B sorted to the second loss opening 2543 by the second sorting device 2540 . More specifically, the game ball B distributed to the second losing opening 2543 is detected by the second losing opening sensor 2517, and is supplied to the crew 2553 through the third distribution guideway 2551, and in the crew 2553 After turning around the axis in the vertical direction, it drops near the right end of the collection table 2554d in the third sorting table 2554 below. At this time, based on the detection of the game ball B by the second loss opening sensor 2517, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game ball B by the third distribution device 2550 is executed.

The game ball B dropped from the croon 2553 near the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, then rolls toward the right part of the lowest front end of the right table 2554c, and rotates. The projection piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is in contact with. After that, the game ball B that hits the projecting piece 2558a and is flipped backward enters the center table 2554a through the third distribution rotating body 2556 from the rear end side of the right table 2554c, and the center table 2554a tilts. will roll forward. Then, it is accepted in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided in the vicinity of the front end of the central table 2554a, or enters the recovery table 2554d through the sides thereof. The game ball B that has entered from the center table 2554a to the collection table 2554d rolls toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the part where it entered. In addition, the game ball B rolling from the recovery table 2554d to the left table 2554b is repelled by the projecting piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotating body 2557 in the same manner as the movement on the right table 2554c. , from the rear end side of the left table 2554b to the center table 2554a through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution.

Thus, the basic flow of game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. After rolling on the central table 2554a, the game ball B is sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the recovery table 2554d. It is repeated until

By the way, in this embodiment, since the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are rotating at high speed, the game ball B does not move from the projecting piece 2557a or the right table 2554c on the left table 2554b or The timing when the projecting piece 2558a and the projecting piece 2558a enter the contact area where it can contact, and the timing when the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a contact the game ball B, so that the projecting piece 2557a and the projecting piece 2558a touch the game ball B. or hit the game ball B hard, and the momentum of the game ball B bounced backward varies depending on the contact condition of the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a.

Therefore, even if the game ball B is bounced backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a, if the degree of contact is weak, it cannot climb the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that is raised toward the rear, It may come back, and the game ball B may move back and forth between the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c without entering the rotating body 2556 side during the third distribution. Alternatively, even if the game ball B flipped backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a reaches the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution, the three outsides of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution Depending on the timing at which the protrusion 2556c is positioned, the entry of the game ball B is blocked by the outer protrusion 2556c, and it may be returned to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c without being able to move to the center table 2554a side. . Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution from the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the rotating body 2556 rotates during the third distribution, so that three outer protrusions 2556c Since the part between them is moving, the game ball B may be carried to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side due to the rotation of the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution. Also, when the game ball B is strongly flipped backward by the projecting piece 2557a or the projecting piece 2558a, it passes through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution and enters the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on the opposite side, It may enter the side table 2554e. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c that is in contact with it.

For this reason, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the projection 2557a of the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the projection 2558a of the third distribution right rotator 2558 repel backward, and the third distribution is performed. The game ball B that has entered onto the middle rotor 2556 will enter the central table 2554a with a certain degree of probability. At this time, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a from various positions in the left-right direction according to its rotating position.

The game ball B that has entered the center table 2554a rolls forward due to its inclination, but enters through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution from the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on both left and right directions. In addition, since the rotating body 2556 is rotating during the third distribution, it has a movement vector in the left-right direction, and it rarely rolls straight forward, and rolls obliquely. Become. At this time, since the bulging portion 2554h bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction of the central table 2554a, the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction is weakened by this bulging portion 2554h, or it returns to the opposite side. It will be done. Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end, or enters the side of them. , and enter the collection table 2554d.

By the way, on the central table 2554a, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B may move toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening. By coming into contact with the circular opening of 2555, the game ball B may move along the edge of the opening like a swing-by. Then, as shown in FIG. 147(b), in a state where there is nothing in the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rotates along the edge of the opening, and the rolling If the direction is changed and there is another second V winning opening 2008 or third losing opening 2555 at the point where it jumps out from the edge of the opening, the game ball is placed in the second V winning opening 2008 or third losing opening 2555 B may enter. Due to such a phenomenon, for example, when the game ball B enters the second V winning opening 2008, it goes around the edge of the opening and enters the adjacent third losing opening 2555, disappointing the player and increasing interest. It is likely to lower. In addition, due to such a phenomenon, the variation in the acceptance probability (winning probability) of the game ball B to the second V winning port 2008 in the third distribution table 2554 (third distribution device 2550) increases, There is a risk that it will give you a sense of distrust.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protrusion 2554i projects from the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B tries to rotate along the edge of the opening. 2554i on the way, it can be repelled from the edge of the opening to the front side or the inside of the opening by contacting the protrusion 2554i on the way, and the adjacent second V winning opening 2008 or the second V winning opening 2008 or the second V winning opening 2008 can be flipped from the edge of the opening to the left, right or rear side. It is possible to prevent it from entering the three-miss opening 2555. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from unnecessarily entering the third losing hole 2555 to disappoint the player, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the unplanned acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008, it is possible to reduce the variation in the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008, and the game can be played. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of distrust to people.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the protrusion 2554i protrudes inside the opening of the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rolling along the edge of the opening can be reliably flipped. In addition, since the edge of the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 is chamfered in a round shape, the movement vector of the game ball B can be easily directed to the outside or inside of the opening by the chamfering. It is made difficult to turn along the edge of the opening.

When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, it enters the recovery table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. . At this time, there is a possibility that the front end of the center table 2554a will come into contact with the protrusion 2554j that protrudes upward. Depending on the contact condition of the game ball B with the projection 2554j, the game ball B may be reflected backward, and depending on the reflection angle, it may be accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. have a nature. On the other hand, when the game ball B abuts against the projecting portion 2554j and is reflected forward, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. In addition, in the center table 2554a, when the game ball B passes between the third losing port 2555 and the weir portion 2554f, it enters the recovery table 2554d from the front end of the center table 2554a without coming into contact with the protrusion 2554j. .

In this way, the game ball B entered from the center table 2554a to the collection table 2554d rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the part where it entered, and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or by being flipped by the third distribution right rotating body 2558, it is sent to the central table 2554a again through the third distribution rotating body 2556, and either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 The third sorting table 2554 is circulated by repeating the above-described movements until it is accepted by the third sorting table 2554 . In this embodiment, the game ball B is distributed (accepted) to the second V winning hole 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is guided by the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and then discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing hole 2555 is guided by the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the third losing hole sensor 2518, and discharged downward. The game ball B ejected downward from the third sorting device 2550 is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 via the lower back ball ejection unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 .

Thus, in the third distribution device 2550, the game ball B distributed to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 is sent to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2555. can be divided into

Further, according to the third distribution device 2550 of the present embodiment, the height and protrusion amount of the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 are Since B is hard to hit hard and the third distributed left rotating body 2557 and the third distributed right rotating body 2558 are rotated at high speed, the game ball B entered the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. At times, it is possible to make the player unpredictable with what strength the game ball B will be flipped backward, and the player's line of sight is glued to the game ball B on the third distribution table 2554. At the same time, the motion of the game ball B that moves back and forth on the third sorting table 2554 can be enjoyed, and the expectation for acceptance into the second V prize opening 2008 is heightened, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, as long as the game ball B is not flipped strongly to some extent by the projecting piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 or the projecting piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c to the center table 2554a In addition, even if the game ball B enters the central table 2554a, if it is not accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the recovery table 2554d will move the left table 2554b or the right table. 2554c, the game ball B stays on the third sorting table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the game ball B is sorted for a longer time than a sorting device such as a clown in a conventional pachinko machine. The game ball B is distributed to the second V winning hole 2008, thereby increasing the expectation for the occurrence of the "jackpot game" and suppressing the decrease in interest. In other words, since the movement of the game ball B, that is, the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008, a "jackpot game" is generated, so that the effect display device 1600 moves to the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004. A case where a "jackpot game" occurs by showing an image effect in which a plurality of pattern rows are variably displayed to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by acceptance. In comparison, even if it takes a long time to confirm the occurrence of a ``jackpot game'', it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest by alleviating the disappointment at the time of ``losing''. can be made

By the way, in the sorting device using the cloon or the like in the conventional pachinko machine, acceleration of the game ball B is not essential in order to reach the sorting destination such as the V winning hole or the losing hole. The structure is such that the game ball B can reach the sorting destination even if the change is not given. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, although the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to some extent, the player becomes bored with it due to getting used to it, and there are other problems as exemplified below.
That is, for example, in the case where the rolling path of the game ball B is not changed and it is guided to an unfavorable distribution destination, the player's interest is increased before the distribution destination is reached because the distribution destination can be predicted from the rolling path. was likely to decline. Alternatively, even if the rolling path of the game ball B is changed by some means, as a result, if it is guided to a disadvantageous allocation destination, it should be originally advantageous (unless the rolling path is changed). By making the player feel that the development that could have been reached earlier is hindered by the means and suffers a disadvantage, there is a risk of giving the player a sense of distrust and lowering the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the third sorting device 2550, by the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 rotating at high speed, with what kind of strength The player cannot clearly predict whether the game ball B is accelerated and repelled, and the game ball B is repelled by the third distribution left rotator 2557 and the third distribution right rotator 2558. The number of times is not limited to one, and after drawing a complicated rolling path on the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B is distributed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. Since it will be accepted, the player can be made to feel that the allocation destination was selected by random luck. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is no problem in the conventional pachinko machine as described above. The development of the game can be enjoyed, and the player can have a strong interest and interest in the movement of the game ball B.

In addition, in the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the two third losing openings 2555 are provided side by side on the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 on the front end side of the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the losing hole 2555, the player can be made to feel that the advantageous/disadvantageous result is only divided by a slight difference. As a result, even if the game is sorted to the disadvantageous third losing slot 2555, it is possible to expect the effect of making the player feel that it was a pity and continuing to increase the desire to play the game.

In addition, the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment is provided with one second V winning port 2008 as an advantageous sorting destination, whereas there are two third losing ports 2555 as disadvantageous sorting destinations. It is provided, and in the third distribution table 2554, it indicates that it is difficult to accept the game ball B to the advantageous distribution destination rather than the disadvantageous distribution destination, and thus the difficulty to the advantageous distribution destination The visual indication makes the player strongly desire to accept the game ball B to an advantageous distribution destination, and enhances the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B and enhances interest. effect can be expected.

Furthermore, the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment tilts the central table 2554a so that the front end side is lower, and has the second V winning opening 2008 near the front end. The second V winning opening 2008 is positioned between the game ball B and the player, and whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning opening 2008 is shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. and the movement of the game ball B can be made more enjoyable. In addition, since the game ball B rolls toward the player side (forward) toward the second V winning hole 2008, the player is made to think that the game ball B is drawn to the second V winning hole 2008.例文帳に追加, and it is possible to heighten expectations for acceptance in the second V winning port 2008 and enjoy sorting on the third sorting table 2554 .

Further, according to the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B sorted to the second losing port 2543 side by the second sorting device 2540 is the second The game balls are supplied to the collection table 2554d downstream of the V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, and the central table 2554a provided with the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. In order to reach B, the third distribution right rotator 2558 (third distribution left rotator 2557) hits with a certain amount of strength so as to get over the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b). It has characteristics that require contact. Therefore, for example, when the rotation of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 is stopped for some reason, even if the game ball B is supplied from the second distribution device 2540 side, It will stay at the front end side portion of the right table 2554c which is the lowest position in the third distribution table 2554 via the crew 2553, and will not go to the center table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, The game ball B is not illegally accepted into the second V winning opening 2008.例文帳に追加

The center member 2500 of this embodiment includes a front center decorative substrate 2591 which is provided between the lower side of the frame-shaped center frame 2501 and the third distribution device 2550 and which can irradiate light forward, and a second ball passage. A top right decorative board 2592 provided above the accessory winning opening 2006 in the part 2521 and a table provided between the accessory winning opening 2006 and the first hit passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530 It has a right middle decorative board 2593 and a front right bottom decorative board 2594 provided below the second failure passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540 (see FIGS. 131 and 174A, etc.).

A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on each of the front center decorative board 2591, the front upper right decorative board 2592, the front right middle decorative board 2593, and the front right lower decorative board 2594, respectively. The lower side of the center frame 2501 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED mounted on the front center decoration board 2591 to emit light. When the LEDs mounted on the upper right decorative board 2592, the middle right decorative board 2593, and the lower right decorative board 2594 emit light, the second ball passage 2521, the first distribution device 2530, and the second distribution The device 2540 is decorated with light emission so that the game balls B in circulation can be easily seen from the player side.

The front-center decoration board 2591 and the front-right upper decoration board 2592 are connected to the effect relay board 3026 respectively, and the front-right middle decoration board 2593 and the front-right lower decoration board 2594 are connected to the front-right decoration board 2592 . That is, the front right center decoration board 2593 and the front right bottom decoration board 2594 are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the front right top decoration board 2592 .

[5-8f. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game balls on the right side of the front unit. Figure 150 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls received in the accessory winning opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the portion of the third sorting device in (a) from the top, ( c) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the second sorting device in (a). Also, FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation timings of the prize winning openings, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of "small win". FIG. 152(a) is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a).

In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center member 2500 is located on the upper right side with respect to the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and lower parts of the center member 2500 and in the part between the attacker unit 2400 and the center member 2500. there is In addition, a windmill W that rotates when a game ball B abuts is provided on the left side of the center member 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center member 2500 are adjusted so that the game ball B driven into the left side of the center member 2500 mainly enters the portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. In addition, it is adjusted to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. The windmill W has a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged in a line so that most of the game balls B that have entered on the right side of the center are lowered toward the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction below the center member 2500. It is made to enter upward, and the remainder is made to flow down to the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 .

Below the center member 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a row so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a circulate the game balls B circulating on the upper side and circulate on the lower side. It is adjusted to be accepted in the first starting port 2002 with a higher probability than the game ball B.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the second ball passage portion 2521 in the center member 2500 and the normal prize winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 prevent the game balls B flowing down the second ball passage portion 2521 from , the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430, the normal prize winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning prize opening 2003, with the same probability.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When a game ball B is hit so as to flow through the left side of the center member 2500 into the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. , mainly to enter the right side of the center of the wind turbine W, and are guided to enter the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability.

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 .

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002 ) side and may be accepted into the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of The game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center member 2500 has almost no possibility of being accepted by the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 .

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back lower ball discharging unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 at the top. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. Then, the game ball B that has not been received by either the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B flowing to the left side of the center member 2500 in the game area 5a has no possibility of being accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, but is rarely opened to the large winning opening 2005 may be accepted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit to the left side of the center member 2500 is the first with respect to the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center member 2500 is accepted by the second start opening 2004. The probability of being accepted at the starting port 2002 is set higher.

On the other hand, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit above the front frame upper right portion 2502a of the center member 2500, it passes through the first ball passage portion 2506 and the second ball passage portion 2521. flow into.

Specifically, as indicated by the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. hitting to the right), the game ball B that collides with the ball hitting portion 1006 rebounds. The bouncing game ball B hits the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521 a at the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 and on the side facing the ball hitting portion 1006 and enters (drops) into the second ball passage portion 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning port door 2511 that closes the prize winning port 2006 on the way, and then the second ball passage portion 2521. It is released downward toward the attacker unit 2400 from the outlet at the lower end.

A game ball B released downward from the outlet of the second ball passage portion 2521 is pushed by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400, and the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal It is induced to enter either the winning opening 2003 or the portion on the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with the same probability.

Then, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 from the ejection opening 2435 below the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. Also, the game ball B entering the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a normal lottery is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left portion of the normal winning opening 2003 further contacts a plurality of obstacle nails N and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 . In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left part of the normal winning opening 2003 rarely passes through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to the attacker right passage 2430 may enter. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the second start opening guide shelf 2421 passes between the second start opening top guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 and flows down onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424. .

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 and "normal win" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery, the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so that the second start is performed. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has passed between the mouth guidance shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 is received by the second start opening 2004 . When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402, a lottery for the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

The game ball B that has flowed down onto the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 through the space between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 is pushed down from the left end of the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 to the big winning opening 2005. is released to the upper site of the Then, when the game ball B is released from the big winning opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted in the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result When a "big hit" is drawn, or when the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, resulting in a big winning. The game ball B released leftward from the mouth guidance shelf 2424 will be accepted by the big winning mouth 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. In addition, when the game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the second ball passage portion 2521 is not received in any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 , from the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

By the way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second lottery, the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521 The prize winning port 2006 provided in the opening and closing is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. . Therefore, when a "small hit" is drawn, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes. "Right hitting" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the second ball passage portion 2521 provided with the mouth 2006. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, the "small hit" has a higher probability of being drawn than the "big hit", and the "small hit" includes "first small win", "second small win", and "third small win". Three patterns are set, and in each pattern, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opened and closed twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each "small hit" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 151, after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution of the "first small win", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed. After a short period of time (1252 ms) has passed, the state is again opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of the execution of the "second small win", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a long time (5420 ms) has passed, the state is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of the execution of the "third small win", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a long period of time (19366 ms) has passed, the state is opened for a long period of time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete the operation.

The second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "first small win" is started after the time when the "first small win" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small win" is started after the time when the "second small win" is completed from the start of execution.

In addition, in FIG. 151, in the second long time open state in the "second small win" and "third small win", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms) . In other words, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first small win" and nine times for the "second small win" and the "third small win".

Next, the action of the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "small hit" is to rotate counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution and turn the accommodation part 2531a upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After entering the accommodating state for the first time, and then turning clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2531a to the right and becoming the unaccommodable state for a predetermined time (4560 ms), the second time (13446 ms), which is longer than the first time, is reached. After entering the unaccommodable state for a short period of time (500 ms), it enters the unaccommodable state for the third time (13446 ms) for the same time as the second time, and then enters the unaccommodable state.

The distribution rotator 2531 is in an unaccommodable state after the first accommodative state ends in the middle of the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "small hit". Also, the distribution rotator 2531 will be in the second accommodable state after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotator 2531 ends before the second accommodable state is reached, and the second and third accommodative states are not executed. This distribution rotator 2531 starts the second accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second small win", and the second open state is the closed state. After that, it becomes uncontainable.

In addition, the distribution rotor 2531 will be in a state capable of being accommodated for the third time after the time when the "second small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "second small hit", the control of the distribution rotator 2531 ends before the third accommodating state is reached, and the third accommodating state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotator 2531 can be accommodated once for the "first small win", twice for the "second small win", and three times for the "third small win". This distribution rotating body 2531 starts the third accommodating state before the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "third small win", and the second open state ends. It will be in a non-accommodating state after being in a closed state.

Next, the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 in the "small hit" is the first closed state ( It becomes a state that can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then retreats and becomes an open state in which the second losing opening 2543 is opened (a state that is distributed to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms ), the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is set.

The distribution door 2544 is opened after the first closed state ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small win". In addition, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closed state of the distribution door 2544 is started in the middle of the second opened state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third small win", and After the second open state of 2006 becomes the closed state, the distribution door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only at the time of the "third small win", and shaking is performed at the time of the "first small win" or the "second small win". A second closing of the minute door 2544 is not performed.

For this reason, in the "first small win", the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time. The possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 is low. In addition, since the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small winning" and the "third small winning" is also for a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006. is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "small hit" is the winning opening. 2006, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is placed in the storage portion of the distribution rotator 2531. 2531a is even less likely. Then, since the time at which the first storable state of the sorting rotor 2531 and the first closed state of the sorting door 2544 in the second sorting device 2540 are the same, the sorting rotor 2531 The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side at the time of the first housing possible state.

On the other hand, the second open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small win" and the "third small win" takes a long time. There is a high possibility that it will be accepted in the winning slot 2006 . At this time, after the distribution rotating body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state that can be accommodated before the prize winning port 2006 is opened, the prize winning port 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Since it will be in an unacceptable state after it becomes, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531. .

Thus, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the "second small winning" and the "third small winning" is low. In addition, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 is even lower. Nevertheless, at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, the distribution rotating body 2531 is rotated counterclockwise to make the accommodation portion 2531a upwardly accommodated, and the accommodation portion 2531a is held for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After facing upward, it rotates clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2531a to the right, which makes it unacceptable. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side, but the distribution rotor 2531 distributes the game ball B to the first hit passage. 2536 side is executed to indicate the sorting operation by the sorting rotor 2531 in advance.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side, but at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, the second distribution By protruding the distribution door 2544 of the device 2540 forward and closing the second loss port 2543, it is possible to distribute to the first V winning port 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) elapses, it retreats to the second loss port. 2543 is opened so that the third sorting device 2550 is in a state of sorting. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, the distribution door 2544 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side, but the distribution door 2544 moves the game ball B to the first V winning opening. The sorting operation by the sorting door 2544 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation to the 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are performed at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, that is, the production at the start of the small winning game state (opening production of the small winning game state, for example, "accessory winning opening Aim for 2006", etc.", etc.), and after the operation of the distribution rotator 2531 and the distribution door 2544, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens for the first time. is open. As a result, the possibility of allocating the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side by the allocation rotator 2531 and allocating the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side by the allocation door 2544 is reduced. is doing. In addition, there is no possibility of allocating the game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side by the allocation rotator 2531 and allocating the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side by the allocation door 2544. Alternatively, if it is infinitely low, the prize winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time when the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are operated.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotator 2531, distribution door 2544) for distributing the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. , other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution door 2544, which is highly likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (the first V winning opening 2007 in this example) by operating (high V winning expectation), is not operated in advance. Only about the distribution rotator 2531 which is less likely to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the distribution door 2544 (V winning expectation is low) It may be made to operate. As a result, although some of the distribution destinations of the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. When the ball becomes , the number of destinations to be distributed increases, thereby surprising the player and increasing the expectation, and making the player pay attention to the game ball B to be distributed to enjoy its movement, thereby preventing the decline in the interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

In addition, the existence of the movable part (distribution door 2544) highly expected to win the V prize is hidden by not operating in advance, and the player is made to believe that the game ball B enters the third distribution device 2550.例文帳に追加When the "third small hit" is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with a high degree of V winning expectation operates to move the game ball B to the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). By allowing the ball to enter, unexpectedness is given, and the game ball B enters an unexpected distribution destination, thereby improving the game interest. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning port 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it is possible to make people think that there are only two, the first losing port 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, and the "third small prize" A player is not discouraged even if a ``second small win'' having a lower V winning expectation than '' is executed and a game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side.

In addition, in this example, the distribution rotator 2531 is arranged in such a manner that the player can easily see it, while the distribution door 2544 is in the form of a flat plate that advances and retreats forward and backward of the game board 5, and the area on the front side is Since the area is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is moving. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007 that can be entered by the sorting door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the distribution door 2544 operates and the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 when the "third small hit" occurs, the behavior of the game ball B becomes difficult to be noticed. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V prize had suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot had been executed without making him aware that B had entered the first V prize opening 2007.例文帳に追加

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2531 in advance during the opening performance of the small winning game state, the contents of the instruction in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the prize winning opening 2006" In addition to the distribution rotor 2531 , the player can easily recognize the target to be hit, that is, the position to be aimed during the small winning game state.

When the "small hit" is drawn as described above, the game ball B flowing down the second ball passage portion 2521 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in an open state. When it is detected, it is sent to the first sorting guideway 2534 of the first sorting device 2530 after being detected by the prize winning opening sensor 2513 . When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning prize opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Among the "small wins", in the "second small win", when the prize winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is open. When the body 2531 rotates from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a passes through the first hit passage 2536 and the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. , and flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss port 2543 at the lower end, is detected by the second loss port sensor 2517, and is sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 side is supplied to the crew 2553 through the third distribution guideway 2551, and after turning in the crew 2553, it falls to the third distribution table 2554 below. do. The game ball B dropped from the croon 2553 near the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, then rolls toward the right part of the lowest front end of the right table 2554c, and rotates. The projection piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is in contact with. After that, the game ball B that hits the projecting piece 2558a and is flipped backward enters the center table 2554a through the third distribution rotating body 2556 from the rear end side of the right table 2554c, and the center table 2554a tilts. will roll forward.

The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a from the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution is received in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a , enter collection table 2554d by passing them. The game ball B that has entered from the center table 2554a to the collection table 2554d rolls toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the part where it entered. Then, the game ball B rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is repelled by the projecting piece 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotating body 2557 in the same manner as the movement on the right table 2554c. , from the rear end side of the left table 2554b to the center table 2554a through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution.

Thus, the basic flow of game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 passes through the rotating body 2556 during the third distribution from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. After rolling on the central table 2554a, the game ball B is sent to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c by the recovery table 2554d. The third sorting table 2554 is circulated by repeating up to this point.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 passes through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and is discharged from the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3150 . On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2555 passes through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, and after being detected by the third losing port sensor 2518, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 via the . When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

On the other hand, in the "third small win", when the prize winning port 2006 is open for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed, so the distribution rotor 2531 When the is rotated from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2531a flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the first hit passage 2536. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the distribution door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters (is accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . The game ball B that has entered the first V winning opening 2007 passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and then passes through the back right ball discharge unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 to the board. It is ejected onto holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and "small hit", "big hit", etc. It is necessary to draw lots for the results of the first special lottery or the results of the second special lottery. When the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the left side of the center member 2500, although there is an opportunity to be accepted by the first starting port 2002, there is no opportunity to be accepted by the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the right side of the center member 2500, the second ball passage portion 2521 is provided on the right side of the center member 2500 and the second start port 2004 is opened and closed. Although there is an opportunity to be accepted in the opening 2003, there is a possibility that the attacker will enter the right path 2430 where he/she will be sent to the out opening 1008 without a chance to be accepted in the normal prize winning opening 2003 or the like. In addition, in order to receive the game ball B in the second start opening 2004, it is necessary to receive the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2003 and derive the ordinary lottery result of "normal winning". is lower for the second starting port 2004 than for the first starting port 2002 .

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven down the left side of the center member 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002. can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2002, and a "small hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes, so that a game is played in the accessory winning opening 2006. In order to accept the ball B, the hitting operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed", and the game ball B is hit into the second ball passage part 2521 provided with the accessory winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加, and expectations for receiving the game ball B into the accessory prize winning opening 2006 can be heightened.

Even if the game ball B hit to the right side of the center member 2500 is not received in the accessory winning opening 2006, it may be received in the normal winning opening 2003 on the downstream side, and further to the normal winning opening 2003 There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the second start port 2004 that has been opened according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the second special lottery result will be a "small hit" or a "big hit". may be selected.

When the game ball B struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530. It is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not is accommodated.

When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540, so that the second The game ball B is distributed to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening 2543 in the distributing device 2540, which can excite and thrill the player. In this second sorting device 2540, even if the game ball B is sorted to the second loss port 2543, the game ball B passes through the second loss passage 2546 and enters the second V winning port 2008. Since it is sent to the minute device 2550, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the second V winning port 2008, and to suppress the decline in interest.

The game ball B distributed to the second losing port 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 is supplied to the third distribution table 2554 from the clone 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 . Then, it is flipped by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 of the third distribution table 2554, passes through the third distribution middle rotating body 2556, enters the center table 2554a, and moves forward. Depending on whether or not it is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 when it rolls to the top, the player can feel nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special When a "big win" is drawn as the result of the lottery and the result of the second special lottery, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, thereby providing an opportunity to pay out a large number of game balls B. In order to receive the game ball B in the open/closed big winning hole 2005, the game ball B can be hit toward the right side of the center member 2500. - 特許庁

[5-8g. Another embodiment of the center member]
Next, a center member 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 149A, 153 and 154. FIG. FIG. 149A(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second ball passage portion, and FIG. 149A(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the third ball passage portion described later. be. FIGS. 153(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion different from FIG. 149A, and FIGS. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment of a ball passage portion and a third ball passage portion; In addition, in FIGS. 149A, 153 and 154, the same reference numerals are given to the components which are the same as or have the same functions as those of the previous embodiments.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 149A, apart from the second ball passage portion 2521 of the center member 2500, a third ball passage portion 2522 connecting the first ball passage portion 2506 and the lower right attacker unit 2400 is provided. is.
The third ball passage portion 2522 has an upward opening at the right end side of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame, and is spaced leftward from the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521. As shown in FIG.
The third ball passage portion 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the inlet at the upper end, and bends rearward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the second ball passage portion 2521 first bends to the right. Above, in a state where the game panel 1100 is bent downward behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 and aligned with the second ball passage portion 2521 in the front-rear direction, the second ball passage portion 2521 is located below the accessory winning opening 2006 on the left side. It extends downward so that the left-right direction substantially coincides with the portion extending to the center of the game area 5a, bends rightward in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and then the second ball passage. After bending forward at a portion below the portion extending rightward on the lower side of the portion 2521, the second ball passage portion 2521 is placed on the same plane in the front-rear direction as the second ball passage portion 2521. It bends to the right so as to extend along the lower side of the part extending to the right on the lower side, then bends downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the second ball passage portion 2521, and the outlet It is formed in a shape that opens downward.

The second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction at a portion of the second ball passage portion 2521 that extends vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006, thereby overlapping from the front. It has a visible weighted portion 2520a. Both the game ball B flowing through the second ball passage portion 2521 and the game ball B flowing through the third ball passage portion 2522 can be visually recognized well from the front in the weighted portion 2520a. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine through which path the game ball B circulating in the weighted portion 2520a is circulating.

The second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the weighted portion 2520a, and on the bottom side of the weighted portion 2520a. It is twisted 90 degrees around it in the direction opposite to the upper side. The outlets of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 open downward above the normal prize winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400 .

The second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are each provided with a plurality of projections 2520b spaced apart in the circulation direction of the game ball B, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the projections 2520b, the An increase in the flow rate can be suppressed.

The center member 2500 of FIG. 149A having the above configuration is twisted backward when the game ball B struck into the first ball passage portion 2506 enters the entrance of the third ball passage 2522, and the center member 2500 is twisted rearward at the weighted portion 2520a. After being aligned with the second ball passage portion 2521 in the front-rear direction, it is twisted forward and released from the left outlet of the second ball passage portion 2521 downward toward the attacker unit 2400 side.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the third ball passage portion 2522 passes through the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter any of the left-hand sites and, rarely, to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 .
A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 and the attacker unit 2400 prevent the game ball B flowing down the second ball passage portion 2521 from , the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003, with the same probability. The game ball B that has passed through 2522 is adjusted to enter the normal winning opening 2003 and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 .
Also, the probability of the game ball B reaching the big winning hole 2005 is higher when the third ball passage portion 2522 is circulated than when the second ball passage portion 2521 is circulated.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player refrain from simply "right hitting" and adjust the hitting strength so that the game ball B enters the third ball passage portion 2522. You can enjoy the driving operation.

By the way, on the right side of the center member 2500, there is a weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. Since it is difficult to determine which path the game ball B is circulating, it may have entered the second ball path 2521 when it should have hit the player through the third ball path 2522. It is possible to make the player think that there is nothing there, and to draw attention to the game ball B circulating on the right side of the center member 2500. - 特許庁In addition, the game ball B hit aiming at the third ball passage portion 2522 can make the player excited by whether or not the game ball B comes out from the exit of the third ball passage portion 2522. Expectations can be heightened, and when the ball comes out of the unexpected exit of the second ball passage part 2521, the player can be surprised by being given unexpectedness, and the player can be entertained and amused. A decrease can be suppressed.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 153(a) separates the upper end inlet of the third ball passage portion 2522 to the left from the inlet of the second ball passage portion 2521 as compared to FIG. 149A. is lengthened. Other than that, it is the same as the embodiment of FIG. 149A, and this embodiment can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153(b), the ball contact portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is arranged so that the game ball B in contact with it easily rebounds toward the entrance side of the third ball passage portion 2522. In addition to being in the backward tilting state, the portion between the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 in the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame is moved to the third ball passage portion 2522 side ( Left side) is tilted so that it is lower. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the third ball passage portion 2522 side, so that the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B entering the third ball passage portion 2522 is widened. It is possible to make it easy to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the passage part 2522.例文帳に追加

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153(c), the inlets of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are directed upward in the embodiment of FIG. 149A and FIGS. While the opening is made, the upstream sides of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are extended to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction above the center member 2500, and the respective inlets are arranged vertically. It is designed to open toward the left in the state of being left.

In this embodiment, part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the play area 5a) constitutes part of the second ball passage portion 2521, and part of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame is the third ball passage portion. 2522. Further, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the first ball passage portion 2506 between the front frame upper right portion 2502a and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is the left end of the front frame upper right portion 2502a. to the entrances of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, and is narrower than the first ball passage portion 2506 shown above in FIG. 149A and the like.

In this embodiment, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522, it is necessary to hit a narrow portion on the left side of the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 in the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a strength or a striking strength that directly enters the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 that opens toward the left, it is compared with the embodiment such as FIG. 149A. Therefore, the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B is narrowed. In addition, the game ball B struck into the first ball passage portion 2506 on the left of the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 passes through the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage. 2522 and the left end of the wall portion (part between the two entrances), the rebounding game ball B deviates from the first ball passage portion 2506 depending on the momentum and angle to the left. there is a possibility. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with enough force to enter the first ball passage portion 2506, it deviates leftward from the first ball passage portion 2506 and moves to either the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center member 2500 will be distributed without entering the other side. As described above, since the difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B is increased, the player's motivation for the operation of hitting the game ball B can be increased, and the player can hit the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 153(d), in the embodiment shown in FIG. 153(c), a branch portion 2524 is provided in the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521 to communicate with the third ball passage portion 2522 in one way. It is a thing. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the third ball passage portion 2522 that extends left and right (front frame upper right portion 2502a) and is bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength enough to enter the second ball passage portion 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), the game ball B may hit the branch portion 2524 in the second direction. Since it branches to the 3rd ball passage portion 2522 side, the degree of difficulty of circulation of the game ball B to the 3rd ball passage portion 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 153(c).

In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the third ball passage portion 2522, it is necessary to strike the game ball B entering the second ball passage portion 2521 with a force weaker than that of the game ball B. Since the branching portion 2524 communicating with the portion 2521 is provided above the portion of the third ball passage portion 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the third ball passage portion 2522 moves downward. It does not bounce upward (to the side of the branched portion 2524 ) at the bent portion, and does not enter the second ball passage portion 2521 side through the branched portion 2524 . In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates in one way from the second ball passage portion 2521 to the third ball passage portion 2522 .

Further, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 having the branch portion 2524 in the middle and flowing through the second ball passage portion 2521, the second ball passage portion Since it branches to either the part 2521 side or the third ball passage part 2522 side, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on which side the game ball B branches at the branching part 2524. , the flow of the game ball B in the second ball passage portion 2521 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the player hits the game ball B aiming at the third ball passage portion 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521. However, since there is a possibility of branching to the third ball passage portion 2522 side at the branch portion 2524 of the second ball passage portion 2521, whether or not the branch portion 2524 branches to the third ball passage portion 2522 side The player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.In addition, when the branching portion 2524 branches to the third ball passage portion 2522 side, the player's mistake in the hitting operation is covered and the desired ball can be achieved. The game ball B circulates through the third ball passage portion 2522, and the player can be made to feel that he or she has won the game, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154(e), the third ball passage portion 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that crosses the frame of the center member 2500. FIG. In this embodiment, the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the front frame upper right portion 2502a. Therefore, all game balls B hit into the first ball passage portion 2506 above the upper right portion 2502 a of the front frame flow through the second ball passage portion 2521 . According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center member 2500. Since the circulation of the game ball B can be made conspicuous through the bypass portion 2525, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen after the game ball B circulates through the bypass portion 2525. To make the game ball B hit operation aimed at the entrance of a third ball passage part 2522 having a bypass part 2525 in the second direction, and to make the game ball B hit operation enjoyable and to suppress the deterioration of interest. can be done.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 154(f), the inlets of the third ball passage portion 2522 are provided behind the second ball passage portion 2521, and the respective inlets are arranged in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 is provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 , and the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 . In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the ball hitting portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 in the first ball passage portion 2506, and the ball flows along the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game ball B is guided to the third ball passage portion 2522 side. In addition, the ball contact portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 moves rightward as it goes rearward, and the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 is inclined. A game ball B that is vigorously hit toward the side can be reflected to the entrance side of the third ball passage portion 2522.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, since the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction and appear to overlap each other, the first ball passage portion 2506 above the center member 2500 is hit. It is possible to make it difficult to discriminate which path the stuck game ball B has entered, and to attract the player's attention.

[5-8h. Bouncing ball receiving part]
As described above, the center member 2500 of the embodiment has the ball contact portion 1006 provided at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion 2506, and the second ball passage portion 1006 facing the second ball passage portion 1006, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. A bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is formed at the entrance of the portion 2521, and when the game ball B struck to the right collides with the ball hitting portion 1006, it bounces, and the bouncing game ball B hits the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and bounces again while hitting the ball hitting portion 2521a. It descends through the two-ball passage portion 2521 .
Since the game ball B, which is intended to be hit to the right, is usually hit hard, the impact applied to the ball hitting portion 1006 at the time of collision is large, and therefore the impact applied to the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is also large. Since the resin forming the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may crack due to repeated impacts, the center member 2500 of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 2521a is molded separately from a synthetic resin, and tightened with a screw passed through the back side of the center member 2500 to rigidly join it. As a result, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is reinforced and becomes less likely to break, and even if it breaks, it can be removed and replaced.

However, when the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is rigidly joined to the center member 2500 by screws as shown in FIG. There is a possibility that the game ball B that bounces off and hits the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is bounced back strongly again, and if so, the speed of the game ball B in the second ball passage portion 2521 may become too fast.

Therefore, in the center member 2500 of the embodiment shown in Figs. It is attached with a joint structure. Here, "non-rigid joint structure" refers to joint relationships that do not use means for integrating members, such as adhesive joints and screw joints. It refers to attaching while maintaining a relatively movable state without integrating. In the non-rigid joint structure here, a vertically long receiving hole 2526a formed in the front and rear surfaces of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is provided with a support portion 2501c of the center frame 2501 and a transparent passage cover 2521d covering the support portion 2501c. Longitudinally elongated support protrusions 2526b protruding to face each other are fitted in from both the front and rear directions, and the dimensional difference (clearance) between the receiving hole 2526a and the support protrusion 2526b which is slightly smaller than the receiving hole 2526a. As a result, it is loosely fitted to the extent that rattling in all directions, especially vertical rattling, can be detected with a fingertip.
The receiving hole 2526a of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and the supporting projection 2526b of the supporting portion 2501c, which are illustrated as a non-rigid joint structure, are replaced with each other so that the supporting projection 2526b protrudes toward the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a. A receiving hole 2526a may be formed on the support portion 2501c side. Also, instead of providing the supporting protrusion 2526b and the receiving hole 2526a, the supporting part 2501c may be shaped like a frame, and the bouncing ball receiving part 2521a itself may be loosely fitted therein. However, when the support projection 2526b is provided on the support portion 2501c side, as shown in FIG. Even if a mistake such as forgetting to attach the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a to the support portion 2501c occurs, the game can be played as it is. The support protrusion 2526b does not need to be plate-shaped as shown in the figure, and may be in the form of a round shaft. It is sufficient that the ball is rebounded toward the portion 2521 side.
149D to 149F, the configuration in which the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is separately attached to the center frame 2501 with a non-rigid joint structure is the same as that of the above embodiment without the third ball passage portion 2522, as shown in FIGS. 149D to 149F. Member 2500 is similarly applicable.

According to the configuration in which the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is attached to the center frame 2501 with a non-rigid joint structure as described above, when the game ball B bounced off the ball hitting portion 1006 hits the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, The rattling of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a with respect to the center frame 2501 absorbs the impact, and the force of the game ball B is dampened there, and the bouncing is weakened, so that the subsequent falling speed becomes gentle. Moreover, since the impact applied to the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is absorbed, the risk of damage to the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a itself and the center frame 2501 can be reduced.

149E and 149D, the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a has a flat top portion 2521ah. It is set so as to be stepwise lower than the end portion of the bottom (upper right portion 2502a of the front frame).
According to such a configuration, when the game ball B bounced back from hitting the ball hitting portion 1006 lands on the top portion 2521ah of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a with excess momentum and further flows backward through the first ball passage portion 2506, the first ball passage It hits a step 2527 formed at the boundary between the passage bottom of the portion 2506 and the top portion 2521ah of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a. Therefore, the game ball B, which is about to flow backward through the first ball passage portion 2521, is stopped or decelerated here, quickly changes its direction, and falls to the second ball passage portion 2521 side, so that the subsequent game ball hit to the right The risk of colliding with B is reduced.

In addition, the ball hitting portion 1006 of the embodiment is set so that when the surface on which the game ball B hits is assumed to be the front side, the surface is tilted backward, and as a result, the rebound direction of the game ball B that hits the ball B is set slightly. Since it faces upward, the game ball B is likely to land on the top portion 2521ah side of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a. Therefore, the step 2527 described above functions effectively. Further, in order to further enhance the effect of the step 2527, the sharp angle of the step 2527 may be set substantially perpendicular to the surface of the top portion 2521ah of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a or at an acute angle to the surface of the top portion 2521ah. good. By doing so, the resistance at the time of getting over the step 2527 is increased, so the effect of preventing the backflow of the game ball B is improved.

However, if the player does not want the presence of the step 2527 to be known to the player for performance reasons, etc., the upper edge of the passage cover 2521d that covers the front surface of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may be removed as shown in FIG. 149E. is raised to at least the level of the step 2527 or higher so that at least the step 2527 and the upper edge of the passage cover 2521b overlap in the longitudinal direction.

Also, the center frame 2501 of the embodiment is formed in a different color (including transparent) from the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a which is separate therefrom. By doing so, the end portion of the first ball passage portion 2506 is clearly defined, making it easier to set the sights when hitting to the right. If the passage cover 2521d shown in FIG. 149E is opaque and blocks the front surface of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a, part of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a protrudes outside the outer edge of the passage cover 2521d. All you have to do is leave it.
In addition, by making the separate bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a different in color from the center frame 2501, it is possible to easily find setting defects during manufacturing by visual check. In particular, when the center frame 2501 is transparent and the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is made opaque, when the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is not attached, it is hidden by the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a and cannot be seen. unit 3200, etc.) becomes fully visible and the appearance changes greatly, so that setting failures can be found more easily.

In addition, the transparent center frame 2501 alone makes it difficult to determine the top and bottom, and it takes some time to determine the correct orientation. In order to prevent such time loss, in the embodiment, as shown by broken lines and imaginary lines in FIG. , or an imaginary line near the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a that is almost parallel to the player's line of sight and is difficult to see, a colored sticker 2528 including white is attached.
By using this seal 2528 as a mark, the top and bottom of the center frame 2501 can be recognized at a glance, so that the attachment to the game panel 1100 can be performed quickly. In addition, since the presence of the sticker 2528 is hardly visible to the player when it is attached to the game panel 1100, there is almost no risk of hindering performance.
When the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is separate from the center frame 2501, the color of the seal 2528 is preferably the same color as the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a. For example, if the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is white, it is made white. By doing so, the mounting position of the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a can be clarified.
It should be noted that the sticker 2528 can also include a code or characters indicating management information of the game panel 1100, for example.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. 155 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 156 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 157 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.
The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a third winning opening sensor provided in the starting opening unit 2100. A first starting hole sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in one starting hole 2002 and a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) are provided.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the cage effect display device 1600, and a main control board 1310 mounted on the left side of the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 to connect the main control board 1310 with various sensors, drive motors, and the like. A panel relay board 1710 relaying connection, a panel relay board cover 3025 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and a cover 3025 below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. Effect relay board 3026 mounted on the right side of the rear surface and relaying connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and various decoration boards provided on the game board 5, and the rear side of the effect relay board 3026 are covered. A performance relay board cover 3027 attached to the back box 3010 is provided.

[5-9a-1. back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed leftward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the right side of the case.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions. A vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion in the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached in the back box 3010, and a light guide plate effect unit 3100 attached to the lower front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. A back and bottom ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game ball B and discharges it downward, and a first distribution device 2530 and a second distribution device attached to the front right corner of the light guide plate production unit 3100 and of the center member 2500 A back right ball ejection unit 3170 for receiving the game ball B from 2540 and ejecting it downward is provided.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extending along both the left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the light guide plate effect unit 3100 A back front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, a back front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the front side and lower right of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and a back upper decoration in the back front effect unit 3200. and a sub-status indicator 3500 provided near the right end of 3211 .

[5-9a-2. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 162. FIG. FIG. 160(a) is a front perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the light guide plate effect unit. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate effect unit. FIG. 162(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 162(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated.

A light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . The light guide plate effect unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent plate-like light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. A first picture board 3103 mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102, and a unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102. , and a second picture board 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

In addition, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 includes an upper substrate cover 3105 attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first pattern substrate 3103, and a unit cover 3105 so as to cover the front of the second pattern substrate 3104. A left board cover 3106 attached to the left side of the base 3101, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 with a space in the horizontal direction are provided.

The light guide plate 3102 has a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 162(a)) formed by a large number of concave-convex first reflecting portions that reflect forward only light from above, and only light from the left side. and a second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 162(b)) formed by a large number of concave-convex second reflecting portions that reflect the light forward. In other words, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 can illuminate the first pattern 3110 by causing the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 to emit light, and can cause the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 to emit light to display the second pattern. 3120 can be displayed by light emission.

The light guide plate 3102 has, as a reflecting portion constituting the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, a dotted light emitting portion 3102a (shaded portion in FIG. 162) that emits light in a dot shape by light irradiated from the corresponding direction. , a linear light-emitting portion 3102b (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 162) that linearly emits light by light emitted from the corresponding direction, and a spectral light-emitting portion that emits light by splitting the cocktail light emitted from the corresponding direction. 3102c (the mottled portion in FIG. 162). In other words, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the point-like light emitting portion 3102a, the linear light emitting portion 3102b, and the spectral light emitting portion 3102c. Although illustration is omitted, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can also be formed by varying the densities of the dot-like light-emitting portions 3102a, the linear light-emitting portions 3102b, and the spectral light-emitting portions 3102c. there is

Here, the cocktail light is a color light containing two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when yellow light, which is a mixture of red light and green light, is irradiated to the spectroscopic light-emitting portion as cocktail light, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and red light and green light are emitted at the site. A part that looks green appears. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated as cocktail light to the spectroscopic light emitting part, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and the part that looks red, green, or blue at that part. , and a mixture of these colors appears, which makes it possible to show a rainbow-colored glittering light emission. Note that if only one of the three primary colors of light is irradiated to the spectral light emitting unit, the light of that color will be emitted because the light has no component to be dispersed. For this reason, the spectral light emitting unit can emit light in a single color or glitter in multiple colors depending on the color of the light being irradiated, enabling a more diverse range of light emission effects. can.

In the light guide plate 3102, the countless first reflecting portions forming the first pattern 3110 and the countless second reflecting portions forming the second pattern 3120 are formed with minute unevenness. When the LED of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the LED of the second pattern substrate 3104 are not lit, they appear transparent, and the effect image and the like displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side can be seen. , can be seen in good condition.

The first pattern 3110 is, as shown in FIG. 162(a), a pattern consisting of characters of "decisive battle". This first pattern 3110 has a part where the shadow of "final battle" extends radially outward from the character "final battle", and a plurality of arc-shaped parts radially arranged on the outer side. ing. In the first pattern 3110, the part of the character "decisive battle" is formed by the dotted light emitting part 3102a, and the part in the shadow outside the character "decisive battle" is formed by the linear light emitting part 3102b. is formed by the spectral light emitting portion 3102c and the linear light emitting portion 3102b.

The second pattern 3120 is a pattern imitating a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 162(b). The second pattern 3120 includes a central pattern portion 3121 consisting of a character, a radial pattern portion 3122 radially extending outward from the central pattern portion 3121, and flower petals scattered around the outside of the central pattern portion 3121. It has a scattered pattern part 3123 that is attached. The central pattern portion 3121 is formed by the dotted light emitting portions 3102a surrounded by the spectral light emitting portions 3102c. The radial pattern portion 3122 is formed by spectral light emitting portions 3102c bordered by linear light emitting portions 3102b. Scattered pattern portion 3123 is formed by spectral light emitting portion 3102c.

The radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with the radial decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the radial decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200, which will be described later ( See Figure 172). As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is illuminated, the radiation pattern portion 3122, the radiation decoration portion 3212b, and the radiation decoration portion 3213b appear to be connected to each other. Since the 3212b and the radial decoration part 3213b protrude forward, the second pattern 3120 can be given a sense of depth, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

The light guide plate 3102 also has a lower cutout portion 3102d cut upward from the lower side and a right cutout portion 3102e cut leftward from the right side. The lower cutout portion 3102d is for preventing contact with the third sorting table 2554 and the upper cover 2577 of the third sorting device 2550 in the center member 2500, and the right cutout portion 3102e is for the center member 2500. This is for avoiding contact with the third ball passage 2522 .

The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three parts in the left-right direction, such as an upper left decoration substrate 3103a, an upper middle decoration substrate 3103b, and an upper right decoration substrate 3103c. A plurality of full-color LEDs that irradiate light downward are mounted on the bottom surface of the . The first pattern board 3103 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026 . To the effect relay board 3026, the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3103a, the light guide plate upper middle decorative board 3103b, and the light guide plate upper right decorative board 3103c are connected in a daisy chain in this order (see FIG. 174A).

The second pattern substrate 3104 is vertically divided into two parts such as a light guide plate upper left decoration substrate 3104a and a light guide plate lower left decoration substrate 3104b. of full-color LED is mounted. The second picture board 3104 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026 . To the effect relay board 3026, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b and the light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a are connected in order in a daisy chain (see FIG. 174A).

The two left cooling fans 3107 and right cooling fans 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 are driven by a third distribution middle drive motor 2560 and a third distribution left drive motor of the third distribution device 2550 in the center member 2500. 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are cooled. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 are separated from each other in the left and right direction, and are attached obliquely toward the front of the center in the left and right direction. These left cooling fan 3107 and right cooling fan 3108 have a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a respectively connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026 (see FIG. 174A). .

This light guide plate effect unit 3100 includes a back lower ball discharge unit 3150, a back right ball discharge unit 3170, a back front effect unit 3200, a back front left bottom effect unit 3300, and a back front right bottom effect. A unit 3400 is attached. That is, all the effect units in the back unit 3000 are attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100 . As a result, when assembling the back unit 3000 (game board 5), by attaching all other effect units of the back unit 3000 such as the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 to the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the light guide plate effect can be achieved. All performance units can be attached to the back box 3010 only by attaching the unit 3100 to the back box 3010.例文帳に追加

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 is unitized by attaching a light guide plate 3102 , a first pattern substrate 3103 , a second pattern substrate 3104 , and the like to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 . As a result, when the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is assembled, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by holding the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102. The light guide plate 3102 can be prevented from being touched with fingerprints, stains, scratches, and the like, and the light guide plate 3102 can be easily handled.

By the way, in the case where a decorative body that emits light is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate, the light emitted by the light emitting decoration of the decorative body is emitted through the light guide plate toward the player side in front of the player. The light guide plate may appear to be partially illuminated, or a pattern displayed by light emission on the light guide plate may be seen. Then, when the light guide plate shines or the pattern is visible, the luminous decoration of the decorative body may be difficult to see because the luminous decoration may overlap with the luminous decoration in the rear, and the production effect of the luminous decoration may decrease. There is In addition, if the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body provided behind the light guide plate makes it possible for the pattern to be light-emitting displayed on the light guide plate to be visible in advance, when the light-emitting pattern is actually displayed on the light guide plate, the player will not be able to see it. The impact given is reduced, and there is a risk that the performance effect of the light guide plate cannot be obtained sufficiently. Further, in the case where the decoration is provided behind the light guide plate, when the light guide plate emits light to display the pattern, the rear decoration can be seen overlapping the pattern through the pattern. There is a risk that the pattern of the light-emitting display on the light guide plate may become difficult to see.

On the other hand, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment is located at the rearmost position in the back box 3010 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and is located further than the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102). No decoration is provided on the rear side. That is, since the back front effect unit 3200, the back front left bottom effect unit 3300, and the back front right bottom effect unit 3400 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back top decoration body 3211, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back bottom right effect unit 3400 are provided. Even if the rear right decorative body 3213 and the like are decorated with light, the light can be made difficult to reach the light guide plate 3102 .

Therefore, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to shine even when the decorations such as the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are made to emit light. Therefore, the luminous decoration of the decorative body is not difficult to see, the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be displayed in a good state, and the production effect of the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be fully exhibited. be able to.

In addition, even if the decorations such as the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are made to emit light, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to shine. Therefore, the player can see the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 before the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed by light emission. It is possible to avoid lowering the impact given to the player when the two patterns 3120 are displayed in light emission, and to fully exhibit the effect of the light emission display of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. can.

Furthermore, since no decoration such as the upper back decoration 3211 is provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3110 are displayed. The decorative body does not appear to overlap behind the two patterns 3120, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in a good state, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are produced by light emitting display. The effect can be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, as described above, the upper back decorative body 3211, the left back decorative body 3212, and the right back decorative body 3213 do not overlap behind the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120. Since the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition, the first pattern can be displayed regardless of the shape and color of the upper back decoration body 3211, the left back decoration body 3212, and the right back decoration body 3213. 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition. Therefore, the shape and color of the decorations such as the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are considered to be the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 equipped with decorations which are not necessary, can increase the degree of freedom in designing the decorations, and have a higher decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate effect unit 3100 is provided at the rearmost side in the back box 3010 and the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, the light from the effect display device 1600 Since the direction of light is substantially perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 does not appear to be partially illuminated, or the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 appear to be illuminated. However, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

In addition, since the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close to the effect display device 1600 as possible, depending on the effect image (including the color of the screen) to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 3102 that is illuminated The first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be made conspicuous or highlighted, and the presentation effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. In addition, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 closer to the effect display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 can be illusioned with the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 The image can be illusioned with the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, so that the player can see more colorful effects.

Note that the effect display device 1600 may be attached to the rear side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 . Accordingly, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is covered with the effect display device 1600, so that the light guide plate 3102 can be made more difficult to touch. Similar effects can be obtained.

[5-9a-3. Back lower ball discharge unit]
Next, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The backside ball discharge unit 3150 is attached to the front lower portion of the unit base 3101 . The backside ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below. is. The back lower ball discharge unit 3150 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that separately detects the game ball B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 and a first start sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B that has been accepted.

In addition, the back and bottom ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game ball B received by the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 and discharged downward in the third sorting device 2550 of the center member 2500, It is to be discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

Furthermore, the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 has an out ball detection unit for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 below the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. It has a mounting portion 3155 to which the unit 3030 can be mounted. By attaching the out ball detection unit 3030 to the attachment portion 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9a-4. Back right ball discharge unit]
Next, the back right ball ejection unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 159 and the like. The back right ball discharge unit 3170 is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101 . This back right ball discharge unit 3170 receives the game ball B received in the first loss port 2535 of the first distribution device 2530 in the center member 2500 and the first V winning port 2007 of the second distribution device 2540. , for ejection to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9a-5. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 163 is a front view showing the arrangement of each decoration substrate of the back front effect unit in the back unit. The back front effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 .

The back front effect unit 3200 is formed in a U shape that opens downward when viewed from the front. A back upper decoration 3211 attached and extending left and right, a back left decoration 3212 attached to the front side of the left side of the decoration base 3201 and extending vertically, and a back left decoration 3212 attached to the front side of the right side of the decoration base 3201 and a rear right decoration body 3213 attached and extending vertically.

In addition, the back front effect unit 3200 includes a back top decoration substrate 3221 and a back left decoration 3212 which are provided between the back top decoration 3211 and the decoration base 3201 to make the back top decoration 3211 emit light. and the decoration base 3201, and is provided between the rear-right decoration 3213 and the decoration base 3201, and is provided between the rear-left decoration 3213 and the decoration base 3201 for luminous decoration of the rear-left decoration 3212. A back right decoration substrate 3223 for decorating the right decoration body 3213 with light emission is provided.

Furthermore, the back front effect unit 3200 suggests the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and A sub-status indicator 3500 is provided to display the pending number. The sub-state indicator 3500 is provided near the right end of the upper back decoration 3211 .

The upper back decoration 3211 has translucency as a whole. The upper back decoration 3211 has a logo portion 3211a in which three circles are arranged in a horizontal direction and a logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres are arranged in a bead shape along the outer periphery of the logo portion 3211a. have. In the logo portion 3211a, characters of a predetermined logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed as a relief. The upper back decoration body 3211 has a slanted front surface so as to protrude forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, part of the logo decoration section 3211b constitutes the sub-status display section 3501 of the sub-status indicator 3500. FIG.

The back left decorative body 3212 has translucency as a whole. The back left decorative body 3212 has a slanted front surface so as to protrude forward toward the left. The back left decorative body 3212 has a main decorative portion 3212a which is formed in a three-dimensional concave and convex shape by simulating flames over the entire surface, and radially extends around the right outer side so as to cross the main decorative portion 3212a. and a radial decoration portion 3212b. The main decorative portion 3212a is formed so that a colorless (transparent) portion, a red portion, and a yellow portion are mixed. The radiation decoration portion 3212b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decorative portion 3212b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the light guide plate 3102 causes the second pattern 3120 to emit light.

The back right decorative body 3213 has translucency as a whole. The back right decorative body 3213 has a front surface facing substantially leftward and is slightly inclined with respect to the surface in the front-rear direction so that the front side is positioned slightly to the right than the rear side. The back-right decorative body 3213 has a main decorative portion 3213a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape by simulating flames over the entire surface, and radially extending around the left outer side so as to traverse the main decorative portion 3213a. and a radial decoration portion 3213b. The main decorative portion 3213a is formed in red. The radiation decoration portion 3213b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decorative portion 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the light guide plate 3102 causes the second pattern 3120 to emit light.

The upper back decorative substrate 3221 has a flat plate shape extending left and right with a substantially constant top and bottom, and is provided in an inclined state along the front surface of the upper back decorative body 3211, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface. ing. The upper back decorative substrate 3221 has a white surface. The back top decoration board 3221 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back left decoration board 3222 .

The back left decorative board 3222 is in the form of a flat plate extending vertically, is attached with the board surface facing forward and backward, and has a white surface. The back left decorative substrate 3222 includes a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative portion 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212 and a plurality of LEDs mounted behind the radial decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212. and a second LED 3222b. The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back left decoration board 3222 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 . When the first LED 3222a is illuminated, the back left decoration substrate 3222 can illuminate the main decoration portion 3212a of the back left decoration 3212, and when the second LED 3222b is illuminated, the back left decoration 3212 can be radiated. The portion 3212b can be decorated with light. The plurality of second LEDs 3222b are arranged in rows in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the radiation decoration portion 3212b at the portion of each radiation decoration portion 3212b.

The back-right decorative board 3223 is in the form of a flat plate extending vertically, is mounted with the board surface directed in the left-right direction, and has a white surface. This back right decorative substrate 3223 includes a first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the main decorative portion 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 and a second LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the radiation decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213. and two LEDs 3223b. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are full-color LEDs, respectively. The back right decoration board 3223 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back top decoration board 3221 and the back left decoration board 3222 . When the first LED 3223a is illuminated, the back right decoration substrate 3223 can illuminate the main decoration portion 3213a of the back right decoration 3213, and when the second LED 3223b is illuminated, the back right decoration 3213 can be radiated. The portion 3213b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3223b are arranged in rows in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction or front-rear direction) of each radiation decoration portion 3213b (see FIG. 164(a)).

In addition, the back right decorative board 3223 is mounted on the board surface facing right, and has a plurality of third LEDs 3223c capable of illuminating the right part of the center member 2500 . This third LED 3223c is a full color LED. When the third LED 3223c emits light, the accessory winning opening 2006, the first sorting device 2530, and the like in the center member 2500 can be illuminated brightly.

In addition, a plurality of sub-status LEDs 3510 for displaying sub-patterns and the like in the sub-status indicator 3500 are mounted on the upper left side of the back right decorative substrate 3223 . The sub-state LED 3510 is a side-view type LED that emits light in a direction parallel to the substrate surface on which it is mounted. The light from each sub-state LED 3510 is guided by the light guide pin 3520 to the rightmost sub-state display portion 3501 in the logo decoration portion 3211b of the upper back decoration 3211, and emitted forward. The sub-state LEDs 3510 are one first sub-symbol LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for suggesting the first special lottery result, and one second sub-symbol LED 3512 consisting of a full-color LED for suggesting the second special lottery result. and two first sub-reserved number LEDs 3513 consisting of a single-color LED for displaying the number of reservations for the first special lottery result, and two second single-color LEDs for displaying the number of reservations for the second special lottery result and a sub-reserved number LED 3514 .

The back front effect unit 3200 is assembled on the game board 5 and passes through a space surrounded by the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213. To make the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 luminescently displayed on the light guide plate 3102 in the light plate effect unit 3100, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, etc. visible from the front (player side) in good condition. can be done. In addition, the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, and the performance image can be decorated by the upper back decoration 3211, the left back decoration 3212, and the right back decoration 3213, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. can be improved.

In addition, according to the back front effect unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back top decoration board 3221, the back left decoration board 3222, and the back right decoration board 3223 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the top back decoration body 3211 and the back left decoration board 3211 are displayed. The decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 can be decorated with light emission, and the player can see the light emission effect using them.

Furthermore, according to the back front effect unit 3200, according to the light emission display of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative substrate 3222 and the second By causing the LED 3223b to emit light to light-embellish the radiation decoration portion 3212b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the radiation decoration portion 3213b of the back right decoration body 3213, the left and right sides of the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 radiate. The decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b can appear to be continuous.

In addition, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are inclined so that the front end side protrudes forward from the center side of the game area 5a to the left and right direction outside, A sense of depth can be imparted to the second pattern 3120 by the radial decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b that are continuous with the radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102 .

For this reason, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 provide a wide and large light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) that spreads to the left and right. Since it can be shown to the player, it can give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and make the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the back left decorative body 3212 of the back front effect unit 3200 is positioned behind the left side of the center member 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, the first LED 3222a of the back left decorative substrate 3222 and the second When the LED 3222b emits light, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center member 2500 can be illuminated with the light, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see from the player side (front). .

[5-9a-6. Back front left lower production unit]
Next, the back front left lower effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the left cooling fan 3107 on the left side of the front lower part of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 .

The back-front-lower-left effect unit 3300 guides the back-lower-left decoration body 3301 and the back-lower-left decoration body 3301 having translucency formed so that the character "determination" projects obliquely upward in relief. A decoration base 3302 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light plate effect unit 3100 is provided between the decoration base 3302 and the lower back left decoration 3301. A bottom left decoration substrate 3303 attached to the lower surface of the decoration base 3302 is attached to the lower surface of the decoration base 3302 and used to decorate the outer periphery of the bottom left decoration 3301 (Fig. 174A), and

The bottom left decoration substrate 3303 and the bottom left decoration substrate 3304 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the top surface of each of the back-bottom-left decorative substrate 3303 and the back-bottom-left bottom decorative substrate 3304 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower left decorative substrate 3303 and the back lower left decorative substrate 3304 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the portion of the lower back left decoration body 3301 with the characters "Decision" is illuminated, or "Decision" is displayed. , or the entire lower back left decoration 3301 can be decorated with light.

[5-9a-7. Back front lower right production unit]
Next, the back front right lower effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back front lower right effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the right cooling fan 3108 on the right side of the front lower part of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100 .

The back-front-right lower-right production unit 3400 includes a translucent back-lower-right ornamental body 3401 formed so that the characters "Battle" in relief protrude obliquely upward, and a back-lower-right ornamental body 3401. A decoration base 3402 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate effecting unit 3100 is provided between the decoration base 3402 and the back lower right decoration 3401. A back-lower-right decoration substrate 3403 for luminous decoration of the character part, and a back-lower-right decoration substrate 3404 attached to the lower surface of the decoration base 3402 for luminous decoration of the outer circumference of the back-lower-right decoration 3401 . (See FIG. 174A).

The lower right decoration substrate 3403 and the lower right decoration substrate 3404 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the top surface of each of the back bottom right decoration substrate 3403 and the back bottom right decoration substrate 3404 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 3403 and the lower right decorative substrate 3404 are appropriately caused to emit light, so that the portion of the lower right decoration 3401 with the characters "Battle" can be decorated with light. It is possible to make the outer periphery of the part of the characters of "Battle" luminous decoration, or to luminous decoration the whole of the back lower right decoration body 3401 .

[5-9a-8. Sub status indicator]
Next, sub-status indicator 3500 in rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 164(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front effect unit in the back unit, the sub-status indicator and the right part of the center member in the left side cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between ) is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the right rear decoration board of the rear front effect unit in the rear unit, the sub-status indicator and the right portion of the center member. FIG. 165 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring of some of the sub-status LEDs on the back-right decorative board.

The sub-state display device 3500 is drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 separately from the effect image for suggesting the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery in the effect display device 1600. Display suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2004, or the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result It displays the number of pending.

The sub-status indicator 3500 is provided in the vicinity of the right end of the upper back decorative body 3211 in the back front effect unit 3200 so as to be always visible from the front (player's side). The sub state display device 3500 includes a sub state display portion 3501 forming a part of a logo decoration portion 3211b in which small spheres of the upper back decorative body 3211 in the back front effect unit 3200 are arranged in a beaded manner, and a back front effect. A plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the rear right decorative board 3223 of the unit 3200, and a plurality of light guide pins 3520 for guiding the light from the sub-state LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub-state display section 3501. and have.

The sub-state display portion 3501 extends upward and downward in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the logo portion 3211a of the upper back decoration 3211 . Further, the sub-state display portion 3501 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward.

A plurality of sub-status LEDs 3510 are arranged vertically on the back right decorative board 3223, and are side-view type LEDs that emit light in a direction (here, forward) parallel to the mounted board surface. Since the plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223, they are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222. Light emission is controlled by the connected peripheral control board 1510 .

The sub-state LEDs 3510 are one first sub-symbol LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for suggesting the first special lottery result, and one second sub-symbol LED 3512 consisting of a full-color LED for suggesting the second special lottery result. And two first sub-reserved number LED 3513 consisting of a single-color LED for displaying the number of reservations for the first special lottery result, and a single-color LED for displaying the number of reservations for the second special lottery result (e.g., red LED) and two second sub-holding number LEDs 3514 consisting of:

The light guide pin 3520 has a rear end positioned in front of the sub-status LED 3510 and a front end passing through one sphere in the sub-status display portion 3501 and positioned near the front end of the sphere.

The sub-status indicator 3500 displays the light-emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc.) of the sub-status LED 3510 as a sub-pattern. Specifically, when suggesting the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are blinked in red during a predetermined fluctuation time. In this embodiment, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every 2F (2/30 sec).

Then, when the drawn first special lottery result or second special lottery result is "losing", the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are lit in red as "losing" symbols. On the other hand, when the drawn first special lottery result or second special lottery result is "win", the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are lit in green as the "win" symbol.

In addition, the display of the number of holdings of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn in the sub-status indicator 3500 is the two first sub-holding number LEDs 3513 and the second sub-holding number that are arranged vertically in each The pending number is displayed by a combination of lighting states of the LEDs 3514 . Specifically, when the number of reservations is "0", the upper and lower lights are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the upper one is lit and the lower one is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2". When the number of reservations is "3", the top is blinking and the bottom is lit, and when the number of reservations is "4", the top and bottom are blinking. In this way, the number of reservations is displayed by combining the lighting states of the two LEDs in the first sub-reservation number LED 3513 and the second sub-reservation number LED 3514, respectively.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, but as described above, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 emit red or green light as sub-symbols. and does not emit blue light. Therefore, on the back right decorative substrate 3223, as shown in FIG. 165, the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting elements of the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are connected to short circuit. As a result, even if some kind of malfunction occurs, electricity is not supplied to the blue light emitting element, and the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 do not emit blue light. Therefore, the sub-symbol is not displayed in the blue color, which normally does not emit light, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful and suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing. can. In addition, since the anode and cathode of the unused blue light emitting element are connected and short-circuited, it is possible to avoid the accumulation of static electricity in the light emitting element. Damage to the sub-symbol LED 3512 can be prevented, and the sub-symbol can be reliably displayed.

As described above, according to the sub-status indicator 3500 of the present embodiment, a sub symbol indicating the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn on the sub-status indicator 3500 is displayed. Therefore, even if the display of the main pattern by the effect image on the effect display device 1600 is overlooked, or if the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main pattern is not well understood, by looking at the sub-symbol, the special lottery can be drawn. A player can be made to recognize the lottery result.

In addition, in the sub-status display device 3500, since the sub-status display part 3501 forms a part of the logo decoration part 3211b of the upper back decoration body 3211, the sub-status LED 3510 is caused to emit light to display the sub-pattern. As a result, the logo decoration portion 3211b appears to be decorated with light emission, but the game balls are accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result is drawn, the light emission mode of the sub-state display portion 3501 in the logo decoration portion 3211b changes. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the lighting mode is changing according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, and can be made to recognize the sub symbol. At this time, the sub-pattern indicating the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is decorated by the sub-status display unit 3501 forming part of the logo decoration unit 3211b. The sub-patterns do not look inorganic like the technique of (1), the sub-patterns can be blended into the decoration, and the appearance of the sub-status indicator 3500 and the game area 5a can be improved.

Furthermore, the light from the sub-state LED 3510 mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 is guided by the light guide pin 3520 to the sub-state display section 3501 provided at a position away from the back right decorative board 3223. Therefore, it is possible to guide the light to the front end of the sub-state display portion 3501 in a good state and display the sub-pattern or the like. In addition, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the logo decorative portion 3211b provided along the outer periphery of the logo portion 3211a of the upper back decorative body 3211 The light can be guided to the position of the sub-state display part 3501 forming a part, and the sub-pattern can be blended into the decoration of the upper back decoration body 3211 to improve the appearance.

In addition, a first LED 3223 a and a second LED 3223 b for light emission decoration of the back right decorative body 3213 and a first LED 3223 a and a second LED 3223 b of the center member 2500 are mounted on the back right decorative substrate 3223 on which a sub state LED 3510 for displaying a sub pattern etc. is mounted. Since the third LED 3223c for illuminating the first sorting device 2530 and the like is further mounted, the back right decorative body 3213 is light-emitting and the first sorting device 2530 is brightened to circulate the game ball B. can be made visible.

In the above-described embodiment, the sub-symbol for suggesting the result of the special lottery is displayed with red light and green light. and blue light may be used to display the sub-design, or green light and blue light may be used to display the sub-design. Alternatively, the sub-pattern may be displayed with only one of red light, green light, and blue light. At this time, by connecting the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element of the color that is not used (not emitted) in the full-color LED and short-circuiting them, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, it is desirable to connect the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element of the unused color to short-circuit and then connect to GND (ground), so that static electricity can be dropped to GND and released.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the sub-status indicator 3500, as shown in FIG. Although an example of use has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be used to illuminate the decoration body, illuminate a predetermined portion, or cause the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 to emit light. , and may be applied to full-color LEDs. Specifically, for example, when a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color, or a decorative body that has a portion that does not transmit light of a specific color, is illuminated with a full-color LED, the color that does not transmit light is used. Since it is not necessary to emit light, the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of the corresponding color are connected and short-circuited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the luminous decoration of the decorative body from appearing unnatural due to erroneous operation or the like, which causes the luminous decoration to emit light in a color that does not need to be emitted. .

More specifically, for example, the portions (main decorative portion 3212a and main decorative portion 3213a ) is configured to allow only red and green light to pass through, when the full-color LEDs (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) provided corresponding to the part emit blue light, the part is blue However, the area adjacent to the area with a different color is decorated with the blue light, and the unintended luminous decoration does not produce the intended effect. There is a risk that it will not be possible to make full use of it. On the other hand, by connecting the anode and the cathode of the blue light emitting element to the full-color LED provided corresponding to the portion that does not transmit the blue light and short-circuiting, the full-color LED It is possible to avoid unintentional lighting decoration of the part adjacent to the part due to malfunction, and to prevent unnatural lighting effect from being performed. A performance effect can be exhibited, and the same operational effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the back-right decorative board 3223, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sub-state LEDs 3510 may be mounted on the status display board), or the sub-state LEDs 3510 may be mounted on the back decoration board 3221 .

[5-9a-9. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out ball detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the attachment portion 3155 of the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 166 to 170 and the like. Figure 166 (a) is a front view of the out-ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out-ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out-ball detection unit, (d) ) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit and the front right lower position. (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 167(a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit as seen from the rear.

Also, FIG. 168(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out-ball detecting unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the game panel in contact with the out-ball detecting unit. FIG. 169 is an enlarged cross-sectional view seen from the right side after being assembled on the game board and vertically cut at the center of the out-port right sensor. FIG. 170 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the out port from the front in the state assembled on the game board.

In this embodiment, an out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting a game ball B received in the out port 1008 is formed so as to be attachable to the attachment portion 3155 of the back and bottom ball discharge unit 3150 . When the game board 5 of the present embodiment is attached to the body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be attached.

This out-ball detection unit 3030 is driven into the game area 5a, and includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2006. It is for detecting a game ball B that has not been accepted by the player (a game ball B that has not been given a privilege, also called an "out ball"). In this embodiment, the game ball B ejected from the out port 1008 is detected.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 from behind, and includes a unit main body 3031 attached to the front surface of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and an out outlet left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. 3032 , an out-port right sensor 3033 , and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear sides of the out-port left sensor 3032 and out-port right sensor 3033 .

The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and includes a tubular portion 3031a extending in the front-rear direction in a tubular shape, and a partition portion 3031b dividing the inside of the tubular portion 3031a into left and right. , a flange portion 3031c projecting in the left-right direction from the rear end of the cylinder portion 3031a in a flat plate shape, and a rear end side of the cylinder portion recessed toward the front, into which the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033 are inserted. and an insertion recess 3031d. The tubular portion 3031a has a front end approximately the same size as the out port 1008 of the front component 1000, is elongated in the left-right direction, and has a lower inner surface that slopes downward toward the rear.

The partition part 3031b is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical part 3031a, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3031b is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that the front side thereof is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a and moves rearward as it goes upward.

The out-port left sensor 3032 detects a game ball B that has flowed through the left side of the partition portion 3031b in the tubular portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 . The out-port right sensor 3033 detects a game ball B that has flowed through the right side of the partition portion 3031b in the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 . The out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide downward the game ball B that has passed through the out-port left sensor 3032 and the out-port right sensor 3033, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

In the out ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit body 3031 is attached to the attachment portion 3155 on the front surface of the back bottom ball discharge unit 3150 (see FIG. 169). Further, the out-ball detecting unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, and the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 is inserted into the out recessed portion 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is inserted into the game panel 1100. (see Figures 168 and 169).

When the out-ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 169). ). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3031 a of the unit main body 3031 . In addition, the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the ejection portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 169).

This out-ball detection unit 3030 detects the game ball B guided backward by the out-guiding section 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a. After being supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031 a and detected by either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 , it is discharged downward by the cover 3034 . The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island equipment side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed without making it contact the board holder 1200.例文帳に追加

According to the out ball detection unit 3030 of the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and Since it is possible to detect the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted into any of the prize winning openings 2006, for example, the acceptance of the game ball B into a specific winning opening is continuously detected. If the "out ball" is not detected in spite of the presence of the player, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out for a specific winning hole, and the fact that the fraudulent act is being carried out can be reported.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting "out balls", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessories The ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting the game balls B received in the winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the partition 3031b separates the left sensor 3032 and the right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right sides, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center member 2500 is detected. Along with being able to guide to the out port left sensor 3032 side, the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center member 2500 can be guided to the out port right sensor 3033 side, the out port left sensor 3032 of the center member 2500 The game ball B that has flowed down on the left side can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flowed down on the right side of the center member 2500 can be mainly detected by the out-hole right sensor 3033 . Therefore, the number of game balls B detected per hour by the left sensor 3032 and the right sensor 3033 of the outlet determines whether the player tends to hit left or right. Based on the determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable hitting operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, since the forward protrusion of the partition portion 3031b is shortened to make it easier for the game ball B to get over, when many game balls B enter the out port 1008 per time, the game ball of the partition portion 3031b is relatively large. The game ball B can escape to the left side or the right side where the circulation amount of B is small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 1008 without delay.

In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes below the ejection portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B ("safe ball") received by the accessory winning opening 2006 and ejected onto the board holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detection unit 3030 and is detected by the out-opening left sensor 3032 and the out-opening right sensor. 3033 can be prevented from being detected, and only the "out ball" can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000 , but the configuration is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100 . At this time, as long as the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.例文帳に追加

Also, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("whole ball") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("whole ball") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out-ball detection unit 3030 detects only "out-balls", so the numbers of "out-balls", "safe balls", and "global balls" are compared. Thus, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jam in the game board 5 .

[5-9b-1. Substrate and substrate cover (1)]
On the rear side of the game panel 100 of the game board 5, there is a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, etc., as described above, and light, sound, and light based on control signals from the main control board 1310. A peripheral control board 1510 is attached to control the performance by moving the ornaments. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 require advanced anti-tampering measures (hereinafter simply referred to as "high-risk boards") as is well known, and are sealed in a board box 1320. and the peripheral control board box 1520 .
Furthermore, on the rear side of the game board 5, a panel relay board 1710 for relaying connections between various sensors, drive motors, etc. and the main control board 1310, and various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 and the peripheral control board 1710 are provided. A performance relay board 3026 that relays connection with the board 1510 is attached below the back box 3010 .
Although these boards 1710 and 3026 are mounted with electronic components including joining members for joining connectors, they correspond to those with a low need for anti-fraud measures (hereinafter also simply referred to as "low-risk boards"). Therefore, although it is not housed in a box that has a sealing function, it is often covered with a back cover 640 (see FIGS. 7 and 12) that covers the rear side of the game board 5, and the back cover 640 is used as a troubleshooting measure. When opening and closing, there is a possibility that the game balls spilled from the upper ball tank 552 and the like may contact the mounting surface of the substrate 1710, 3026, and damage or failure that may occur due to such accidental contact of the game balls is prevented. Therefore, a panel relay board cover 3025 is attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and an effect relay board cover 3027 is attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the effect relay board 3026. It is
These board covers 3025 and 3027 are formed with long hole-shaped openings for exposing joint members for connecting connectors to the outside. The board covers 3025 and 3027 are designed and manufactured for each model. Since the positions and sizes of the openings are matched with the joint members of the substrates 1710 and 3026, there is no risk of creating a space that allows game balls to enter the openings.

[5-9b-2. Substrate and substrate cover (2)]
Since the board covers 3025 and 3027 are designed and manufactured according to the boards 1710 and 3026 which are different for each model, although they have the function of protecting the boards 1710 and 3026 from the game balls, they are designed every time the model changes. It is necessary to redo all the processes from the manufacturing process to the mold molding.
On the other hand, the substrate cover 3050, which will be described next with reference to FIGS. 174B to 174M, has a function of protecting the substrates 1710 and 3026 (as far as possible, these low-risk substrates are collectively referred to as “substrate 4000”) from game balls. It is possible to suppress the cost without damaging the
174B is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back, FIG. 174C is a front view of the back board unit seen from the back, FIG. 174D is a perspective view of the back board unit seen from the back, and FIG. 174E is FIG. 174D. 174F is a sectional view along the line AA of FIG. 174C, FIG. 174G is a sectional view corresponding to the line AA of FIG. 174C showing another embodiment, FIG. 174H is a sectional view along the line BB of FIG. 174C, Figure 174I is a front view of the pachinko machine seen from behind showing the state in which the back board unit is installed, Figure 174J is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind showing the state in which the back board unit is installed, and Figure 174K shows another form. FIG. 174L is a side view of a connecting member as a specific electronic component, and FIG. 174M is a perspective view of a connecting member as a specific electronic component.

[5-9b-2a. Back board unit]
The board cover 3050 of this embodiment constitutes a part of the back board unit 3040 shown in FIGS. 174B to 174H. The back board unit 3040 has a substantially L-shaped front view appearance having a vertical portion 3042 and a horizontal portion 3043, and traverses the center of the rear side of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 in the assembled state as shown in FIG. 174B. 174I and 174J, a back cover 640 that normally covers the rear side of the game board 5 as shown in FIGS. 174I and 174J. covered with Note that the back board unit 3040 may be attached to the body frame 4 side.
The back substrate unit 3040 is composed of a mounting support portion 3080, a substrate 4000, and a substrate cover 3050, as shown in FIG. 174E in an exploded manner.

[5-9b-2b. Mounting support]
As shown in FIGS. 174E to 174H, the mounting support part 3080 has a general L-shape when viewed from the front, and the rear side (*when the pachinko machine is installed, the player side is the front side, and the opposite side is the rear side). The same applies hereinafter) has a substantially shallow box shape reinforced by grid-like ribs 3081 .
The mounting support portion 3080 has two upper and lower shaft portions 3041a on the outer edge of the L-shaped vertical portion 3042 extending vertically. It is rotatably and detachably supported by a shaft support 3010f provided at a rear corner of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG.
In addition, the mounting support portion 3080 has elastic locking claws 3014b at the upper end of the vertical portion 3042 and the distal end of the horizontal portion 3043 . The locking claws 3014b of the vertical portion 3042 are detachably locked to the locking portion 3010g projecting from the rear surface of the back case 3010, and the locking claws 3014b of the horizontal portion 3043 are locked to the back box. 3010 is detachably locked to a locking portion 3010g formed at a rear corner portion opposite to the rear corner portion where the pivot portion 3010f is provided.
Therefore, the mounting support portion 3080 can be opened and closed in a door-like manner about the pivotal support portion 3010f of the back box 3010 in a state in which the locking claws 3014b are removed from the respective locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010, and can be attached and detached. Also, it is fixedly attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state where the locking claw 3014b is locked to the locking portion 3010g.

[5-9b-2c. substrate]
As shown in FIG. 174E, the substrate 4000 of this embodiment includes a substantially L-shaped panel relay substrate 1710 corresponding to a part of the L-shaped horizontal portion 3043 and the vertical portion 3042 of the mounting support portion 3080, and the rest of the panel relay substrate 1710. It is a square production relay board (also referred to as “production drive board”) 3026 corresponding to the horizontal part 3043 of .

A large number of electronic components 4001 including connecting members 4001x for connecting connectors, which are specific electronic components, are mounted on the mounting surface of these boards 4000 facing the board cover 3050. Since it mainly relays between 1510 and other boards, the risk of unauthorized manipulation is extremely low. In other words, the substrate 4000 that can be attached to the rear substrate unit 3040 is a substrate (low-risk substrate) other than a substrate that requires advanced countermeasures against fraud such as "sealing" in a housed state. Anything is fine. In addition, the number of substrates 4000 to be housed may be plural as in the present embodiment, or may be only one.

A panel relay board 1710, which is one of the boards 4000, is provided with a mounting area 4002 in which electronic components 4001 other than a connecting member (a specific electronic component) 4001x for connector connection are collected and mounted.
Further, the panel relay board 1710 is formed with a plurality of joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003b capable of mounting a plurality of joint members 4001x. Then, one joint member mounting section 4003a is used as a common section common to a plurality of models, and a plurality of joint members 4001x constituting a group that can be commonly used (no change is required) are collectively arranged therein. A plurality of joint members 4001x unique to the model are collectively arranged in the joint member mounting section 4003b as a non-common section that cannot be shared with other models.

A production relay board 3026, which is the other board 4000, is also provided with a mounting area 4002 in which electronic components 4001 other than the connecting member (specific electronic component) 4001x for connector connection are collected and mounted.
In addition, the effect relay board 3026 is formed with a joint member mounting section 4003c capable of mounting a plurality of joint members 4001x. A member 4001x and a plurality of joint members 4001x forming a model-specific group are collectively arranged.

[5-9b-2d. Substrate cover]
The substrate cover 3050 is substantially the same L-shape as the mounting support portion 3080 and has a substantially shallow box shape facing the mounting support portion 3080 and is screwed to the rear surface of the mounting support portion 3080 . On the front surface of this board cover 3050, the panel relay board 1710 and effect relay board 3026 are screwed in a horizontal manner. A substrate 4000 is accommodated in a box-shaped space formed by 3080. FIG.
A portion of the substrate 4000 corresponding to the mounting area 4002 (an area where the electronic components 4001 other than the connecting member (specific electronic component) 4001x for connecting the connector are assembled and mounted) is entirely covered with a substrate cover 3050. It is designed not to be exposed to the outside. As a result, the electronic component 4001 other than the joint member 4001x can be reliably isolated from the game ball B. In FIG. 174E, the substrate cover 3050 has two openings 3051 at the upper corners of the portion covering the mounting area 4002 on the effect relay substrate 3026 side. Since the mounting area 4002 is almost filled with , there is no possibility that the game ball B enters the mounting area 4002 .

The substrate cover 3050 includes the entire joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c (that is, all the joint members 4001x provided in the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c) in a portion facing the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c. ) is formed to expose to the outside.
In addition, the substrate cover 3050 has a vertically oriented or a A plurality of lateral long holes 3053 (three in a column in this embodiment) are formed.

[5-9b-2d-1. window hole]
As shown in FIG. 174E, two window holes 3052 are formed in lateral portions 3043 extending left and right of the L-shaped board cover 3050 .
One window hole portion 3052 is positioned substantially in the center of the lateral portion 3043 and exposes the joint member mounting section 4003c corresponding to the joint member mounting section 4003c of the effect relay board 3026 to the outside. All electronic components 4001 are exposed to the outside.
The other window hole portion 3052 is positioned at the end of the horizontal portion 3043 of the board cover 3050 on the side of the vertical portion 3042 and corresponds to the joint member mounting section 4003a of the panel relay board 1710 so that the joint member mounting section 4003a can be externally connected. , and all the electronic components 4001 there are exposed to the outside.

The substrate cover 3050 has a function of protecting the substrate 4000 from the game balls B that unexpectedly enter when the back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed as described above. Since it is larger, the game ball B can enter the joining member mounting sections 4003 a and 4003 c corresponding to the window hole 3052 . Therefore, the window hole portion 3052 and the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c are provided with unique countermeasures against game balls.

That is, in the present embodiment, a peripheral control board box 1520 containing a peripheral control board 1510 is arranged as a board box containing another board in the space above the window hole 3052 . Even if the game ball B falls out of the box, the peripheral control board box 1520 acts as a shield (obstacle) to prevent entry into the window hole 3052 .
In addition, it goes without saying that electrical wiring is printed on the substrate 4000, but in the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c, no wiring is provided where the joint member 4001x is not mounted. Even if the sphere B enters into the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c through the window hole 3052, it is difficult for the sphere to make an erroneous contact with the wiring. Specifically, the mounting surface of the substrate 4000 overlapping the joint member 4001x, and the mounting surface corresponding to the non-contact space C (see FIG. 174L) within the distance corresponding to the radius of the game ball B around the joint member 4001x. , the wiring of the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c may be provided. Then, since most of the wiring can be provided in an area where the round game ball B is blocked by the joint member 4001x and cannot be stepped on physically, the risk of the game ball B accidentally contacting can be reduced.

Furthermore, in addition to the above game ball countermeasures, the upper and lower intervals between the plurality of joint members 4001x are made smaller than the diameter of the game ball B to prevent the game ball B from entering the gap between the joint members 4001x. It is preferable to make the horizontal interval between the members 4001x larger than the diameter of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not remain between the joint members 4001x arranged side by side. This is because the game ball B remaining on the upper surface of the joint member 4001x or between the adjacent joint members 4001x becomes a risk factor that can damage the substrate 4000 due to an unexpected drop.
Also, as shown in FIG. 174K, the joint members 4001x of the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003b (although not shown, the same applies to the joint member mounting section 4003c) are tilted in the horizontal direction so that the upper surface of the joint member 4001x is tilted. It is also possible to prevent the game ball B from stagnation. As a specific means for tilting the bonding member 4001x in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. , there is a method in which each bonding member 4001x is tilted with respect to the substrate 4000 without changing the relationship between the substrate cover 3050 and the substrate 4000. In the latter case, the substrate 4000 can be efficiently attached to the substrate cover 3050 because the relationship between the substrate cover 3050 and the substrate 4000 is not changed. can do
Note that when the bonding member 4001x is attached straight to the substrate 4000, a portion of the substrate 4000 is divided and tilted as shown in FIG. Either case is acceptable.
Further, as will be described later, the joining member mounting section 4003b is provided with a long hole 3053, and the long hole 3053 prevents the game ball B from entering the joining member mounting section 4003b. Therefore, there is no possibility that the game ball B remaining on the joint member 4001x will later enter the joint member mounting section 4003b. However, since the probability that the game ball B remaining on the joint member 4001x will fall later and cause some trouble to some part is not zero, the joint member 4001x of the joint member mounting section 4003b is also tilted to drop the game ball B. There are plenty of benefits to actively dropping.

Further, in this embodiment, the electronic component 4001 mounted on the substrate 4000 is also provided with the countermeasure against the game ball.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 174M and 174L, an electronic component 4001 mounted on a substrate 4000 has a large number of terminal strips 4006 protruding from two opposing side surfaces 4005 of a rectangular resin body 4004. A terminal piece 4006 is joined to the mounting surface of the substrate 4000 .
The electronic component 4001 (for example, the joint member 4001x) of the present embodiment mounted on the substrate 4000 in the window hole portion 3052 has terminal strips 4006 on the upward side surface 4005 and terminal strips on the downward side surface 4005 when in use. 4006 is joined along the mounting surface of the substrate 4000, and the projecting amount of the terminal piece 4006 from the side surface 4005 of the resin main body 4004 is larger in the downward direction than in the upward direction. It is made to be.
By doing so, even if the game ball B collides with the electronic component 4001 from above, since the terminal piece 4006 directed upward has a small amount of protrusion from the side surface of the resin main body 4004, the possibility of contact with the round game ball is physically reduced. In addition, even if the electronic component 4001 is pushed downward by the collision of the game ball B, the terminal piece 4006 protruding greatly downward from the side surface 4005 of the resin body 4004 holds on, so that the electronic component 4001 tilts. Hateful. Therefore, for the game ball B falling from above, the risk of electrical short circuit due to contact with the terminal piece 4006 and the risk of physical deformation due to collision with the resin main body 4004 can be reduced at the same time.
When it is desired to check various input/output information, it is preferable to obtain information from the terminal piece 4006 of the joint member 4001x. A test point connected to , or a through hole in place of this, can be provided so as not to contact the game ball B because the amount of protrusion from the side surface 4005 of the resin body 4004 is small. (Non-contact space C in FIG. 174L)
Incidentally, such a joining structure of the electronic component 4001 can be grasped as an embodiment of the following technical means. Moreover, the bonding structure of this electronic component 4001 is not limited to being mounted in the bonding member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c. It is widely applicable to electronic components having
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
a substrate on which an electronic component including at least a joining member for joining a connector is mounted,
At least one of the electronic components has a large number of terminal strips protruding from two opposite sides of a square resin body, and the terminal strips are bonded to the board, wherein:
When the electronic component is in use, the terminal piece on the upward side surface and the terminal piece on the downward side surface are joined together along the substrate. The game machine is characterized in that the amount of protrusion from the side surface of the main body is made larger in the downward direction than in the upward direction. ”

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the connecting member 4001x for connecting a connector having a large number of terminal strips 4006 projecting from the two opposite side surfaces of the rectangular resin body 4004, a perspective view of FIG. As shown in the figure, a connecting member 4001x (S) for connecting a connector for electrically connecting at least one of a power source, a ground (GND), and various signals. The protruding terminal strips 4006 are arranged so as to be aligned in the vertical direction, and a measure is taken to prevent the connection with the substrate 4000 from becoming unstable.

That is, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 174N and the cross-sectional view of FIG. Terminal strips 4006 protruding from the side surface are arranged in a vertical direction, and are connected to copper foil pads 4000p formed on the substrate 4000 with the terminal strips 4006 facing downward. In the enlarged view of FIG. 174O, 4000b is a base material forming the substrate 4000, 4000r is a resist, and 4000s is solder for joining the terminal piece 4006 of the joining member 4001x(S) to the pad 4000p.
In general, the board 4000 attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is often positioned lower than the shoulders of the operator when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility. Therefore, as indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 174O, when the connector 4001y is pinched and pulled out from the joining member 4001x(S), a large force acts to push down the joining member 4001x(S) together with the connector 4001y.
In addition to the substrate 4000 attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. installed. Therefore, in the work of assembling the pachinko machine 1, there are many cases where the positional relationship is the same as described above. The power of the ingredients acts a lot.
Then, when a force is applied to the joint member 4001x(S) in the downward direction, the force changes to press the terminal piece 4006 protruding downward from one side surface of the resin body 4004 against the pad 4000p of the substrate 4000. FIG. Therefore, even when the connector 4001y is inserted into or pulled out from the bonding member 4001x(S) of the substrate 4000, the terminal piece 4006 is less likely to peel off from the pad 4000p of the substrate 4000, and connection failure is less likely to occur.

Further, the substrate 4000 is provided with an enlarged pattern portion 4000pp in which a copper foil extends further downward from the pad 4000p for joining the terminal piece 4006 of the joining member 4001x(S). The width of the pad 4000p of this embodiment is approximately the same as the width of the terminal piece 4006, and the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp extending from the pad 4000p is also approximately the same width as the terminal piece 4006. The width may be larger than the width of pad 4000p.
By providing such an enlarged pattern portion 4000pp, it is possible to make it difficult for the trouble of poor connection caused by inserting/removing the connector 4001y to occur.
That is, when the connector 4001y cannot be removed from the joining member 4001x(S), in many cases, the connector 4001y is forcibly pulled while rocking up and down. At this time, when an upward force is applied to the joint member 4001x(S) through the connector 4001y, the force changes in a direction opposite to the above-described pushing-down direction, such that the terminal piece 4006 is pulled off from the pad 4000p of the substrate 4000. . Since the pad 4000p and the copper foil of the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp oppose this force together, the problem of connection failure due to insertion/removal of the connector 4001y is less likely to occur.

Further, in this embodiment, the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp is provided with a through hole 4000t that exposes the copper foil without covering the entire portion with the resist 4000r to facilitate electrical contact. Since an electrical abnormality can be detected using the through hole 4000t, the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174P , when a joint member 4001x for connecting a connector is arranged on the lower side of the electronic component 4001, at least the lower side of the electronic component 4001 has a connector between the electronic component 4001 and the joint member 4001x. The joining member 4001x (S) of this embodiment is provided with a work space 4000w that allows insertion and removal of the joint member 4001y.
Specifically, when the joint member 4001x for connecting a connector is arranged on the lower side of the electronic component 4001, the protrusion amount of the upper electronic component 4001 from the substrate 4000 is the same as the protrusion amount of the lower joint member 4001x from the substrate 4000. If the lower joint member 4001x is the same or larger, the joint member 4001x (S) of this embodiment is used as the lower joint member 4001x, and the work space 4000w (preferably, the lower joint member 4001x The width w of the work space 4000w in the vertical direction is set in the range of (protrusion amount h≦width w) with respect to the protrusion amount h of (S). The width w is preferably narrower than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball on the board 4000 where the game ball may collide. In particular, when the through hole 4000t described above is provided, unnecessary trouble due to contact with other terminal pieces 4006 can be avoided.
When the electronic component 4001 is arranged above the joint member 4001x(S), even if there is a work space 4000w required for inserting and removing the connector 4001y between the joint member 4001x(S) and the electronic component 4001, it is cramped. Therefore, the connector 4001y of the lower joint member 4001x(S) may be strongly pushed downward. be.
As shown in FIG. 174P, by adopting the bonding member 4001x(S) of this embodiment also for the electronic component 4001 located above, the board 4000 with little concern about poor connection can be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 174Q, the substrate 4000 of this embodiment has a surface opposite to the side to which the bonding member 4001x(S) is connected and a portion corresponding to the rear side of the bonding member 4001x(S). A solid pattern portion 4000sp connected to the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp through a through hole 4000t is provided at the bottom.
By providing the solid pattern portion 4000sp on the surface opposite to the mounting surface and corresponding to the rear side of the joining member 4001x(S), the strength of the board 4000 itself at that portion is increased, so that the connector 4001y can be removed. A strength that can withstand the force of insertion and removal can be obtained, and a stable ground (GND) area can be secured by electrically connecting the enlarged pattern portion 4000pp and the solid pattern portion 4000sp through the through hole 4000t.

[5-9b-2d-2. slot]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 174F, the elongated hole 3053 has an opening width s large enough to expose the bonding member 4001x, which is a specific electronic component, to the outside, that is, to allow the bonding member 4001x to pass therethrough. It has a specific area smaller than the diameter of the game ball B (about 11 mm). Therefore, even if there is an empty space without the joining member 4001x in the long hole portion 3053, passage of the game ball B is blocked.
The long hole portion 3053 is provided in the joint member mounting section 4003b of the non-common portion that differs from model to model. number) should be opened. By doing so, it is possible to correspond to many models, and even if the redundant long hole portion 3053 is generated, there is no possibility that the game ball B will enter as described above, and rather the substrate 4000 is raised as a heat dissipation port. It can contribute to preventing overheating.

In addition, the substrate cover 3050 is provided between its inner surface and the mounting surface on which the joint member 4001x of the substrate 4000 is mounted, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. A gap h is provided that is larger than the protrusion amount t of the projection to the inner surface side of the substrate cover 3050 without passing through the specific region of the long hole portion 3050 when trying to jump in from the outside of the region. As a result, even if the game ball B hits the outside of the specific area of the long hole portion 3053 and a part of the spherical surface protrudes toward the inner surface of the substrate cover 3050, the amount of protrusion t allows the inner surface of the substrate cover 3050 and the substrate Since the distance h between the board 4000 and the mounting surface is larger, the game ball B does not come into contact with the board 4000. - 特許庁There is a correlation between the opening width s of the specific region of the elongated hole portion 3053 and the size of the gap h between the inner surface of the substrate cover 3050 and the mounting surface of the substrate 4000, and the larger the opening width s, the more the game ball B Since the protrusion amount t increases, it is necessary to increase the distance h between the inner surface of the substrate cover 3050 and the mounting surface of the substrate 4000 accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 174G, the long hole portion 3053 is formed with an inclined portion 3054 on at least one side in the longitudinal direction so that the opening width s of the long hole portion 3053 widens outward. good. By doing so, even if the game ball B is strongly pushed from the outside of the long hole portion 3053, the game ball B escapes to the side of the inclined portion 3054, so there is almost no possibility that the edge will be chipped. It can be easily separated from the part 3053 .

In addition, the elongated holes 3052 are not limited to the vertically long configuration described above, and may be horizontally elongated and arranged in the vertical direction.
For example, three elongated hole portions 3052 are lined up at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. In that case, depending on the length of the long hole portion 3052 in the longitudinal direction and the material of the substrate cover 3050, the uppermost long hole portion 3052 is regarded as the first step, and the portion of the second step long hole portion 3052, particularly near the center, is changed. The more the game ball B is pushed, the more likely it is to bend. This is because the band plate portion formed between the upper and lower portions of the long hole portions 3052 has a long-span, both-ends support beam structure.
In such a case, as indicated by imaginary lines in the enlarged view of FIG. It is preferable to provide ribs 3050a that are linearly continuous or that are scattered at appropriate intervals in the middle of the band plate portion. By doing so, even if the game ball B hits the vicinity of the center of the second stage long hole portion 3052, the impact can be absorbed by the ribs 3050a and can be bounced back by the repulsive force. B does not touch.
Alternatively, the vertical width of the band plate portion formed between the long hole portions 3052 is increased (for example, approximately the opening width s of the long hole portions 3052) to increase the strength of the band plate portion itself. good too. In this case, by widening the vertical width of the band plate portion, a horizontally long empty space is generated on the mounting surface of the substrate 4000 facing it, so that the electronic component 4000 other than the bonding member 4001x can be mounted in this empty space. . Note that if the electronic component 4000 is mounted in such an empty space, when the bonding members 4001x are densely arranged in the elongated hole portion 3052, the mounted electronic component 4000 may be surrounded by the bonding members 4001x and may not be able to radiate heat. Therefore, it is preferable to provide the band plate portion with heat radiation holes in advance. Of course, in such a configuration, the strength of the band plate portion is determined by taking into consideration the provision of heat radiation holes. For example, regarding the size of the heat dissipation hole, even if a game ball collides with the band plate, it is a size that does not protrude from the heat dissipation hole to the inner surface of the band plate (specifically, the heat dissipation hole is circular. In this case, when a game ball hits the outside of the heat radiation hole, the amount of protrusion of the spherical surface to the heat radiation hole is within the thickness of the substrate cover 3050 and does not protrude from the inner surface side of the band plate portion. It is sufficient to determine the thickness of the required band plate portion by setting.

By the way, the relationship between the substrate 4000, the substrate cover 3050, and the elongated hole portion 3053 is as shown by the dashed lines in FIG. It can also be applied to the substrate 4400 provided in a place where there is a risk of jumping into it.
In other words, on the back side of the game board 5 that constitutes the game area 5a, drive mechanisms, electric wiring, and the like related to movable bodies and electrical devices are densely packed. Therefore, there is a risk that the game ball B that has jumped into it will stagnate, and furthermore, there is a risk that the game ball B that has stagnated there will suddenly roll out due to the opening and closing of the door frame 3, for example. When the board 4400 is placed in such a place, especially at the extreme end part, in a bare state, the game ball B that suddenly rolls out may cause wiring or terminals of electronic parts mounted on the board 4400 to be displaced. There is a risk of contact with the strip (electrode), which can lead to electrical failure and destruction.
On the other hand, by covering the substrate 4400 with a substrate cover having the elongated hole portion, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from accidentally contacting the substrate 4400, and furthermore, the portion surrounded by the elongated hole portion of the substrate 4400 is provided with an electronic component. (including the joint member 4001x), electrical failure and destruction can be prevented.

[5-9b-2d-3. Window hole part and long hole part]
In the description so far, the window holes 3052 are provided in the joint member mounting sections 4003a and 4003c, and the long hole section 3053 is provided in the joint member mounting section 4003b. The portion 3052 and the elongated hole portion 3053 may be mixed.
For example, referring to FIG. 174H, the projection 3050d on the rear side of the substrate cover 3050 and the peripheral control substrate box 1520 and the like arranged thereabove can be used as eaves for ball protection. While taking measures against the game ball described above, the window hole 3052 is opened and the joint member 4001x is mounted on the substrate 4000 corresponding thereto, while the lower part of the section where the eaves effect such as the protrusion 3050d does not reach is horizontally long. 3053, and so on.
As described above, the window hole portion 3052 has the advantage of allowing flexibility in the arrangement of the joint member 4001x (connector), which is an advantage in terms of commonality. Even if it is possible to pick it up, the risk of the game ball B directly touching or impacting the board 4000 remains to some extent.
On the other hand, the elongated hole portion 3053 is slightly inferior to the window hole portion 3052 in terms of the degree of freedom in arranging the joint member 4001x. is superior in comparison with the window hole portion 3052 .
In this way, the window holes 3052 and the elongated holes 3053 are provided in a mixed manner so as to take advantage of their superiority according to the surrounding environment of the joint member mounting sections 4003a to 4003c where the joint members 4001x (connectors) are arranged. Good.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 174I and 174J, the long hole portion 3053 is disposed below (more preferably is directly below the ball tank 552) (the area below the ball tank 552 surrounded by straight lines passing through the left and right ends of the ball tank 552). Usually, there is a high probability that the game ball B that enters inside the back cover 640 has fallen from the upper ball tank 552, so the elongated hole portion 3053 is intentionally arranged in a zone that can be said to be dangerous for such a joint member 4001x. By doing so, the installation range of the substrate 4000 can be widened.

[5-9b-2e. Technical measures K0 to K5 of substrate and substrate cover]
The embodiment of the substrate and the substrate cover (2) described above has problems existing in the prior art disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-46599 (FIG. 5), that is,
"At the top of the main body frame of the game machine, a ball tank that stores game balls for prizes is attached, and when the main frame is opened and closed, the game balls in the ball tank may drop out, and the timing and If the timing of opening and closing the back cover on the rear surface of the body frame coincides, there is a possibility that game balls will enter the inside of the back cover.
As described above, a low-risk substrate that does not require much anti-fraud measures is attached to the inside of the back cover as it is. There is a risk that the terminal piece of the bonding member that is bonded to the substrate or the wiring of the substrate will be touched, or that an unstable state will continue while being placed on the bonding member.
A pachinko ball, which is a game ball, has a diameter of 11 mm, a weight of 5.4 g to 5.7 g, and is made of iron. was likely to become "
The following technical measures K0 to K5 are provided for the problem.

[5-9b-2e-0. technical means K0]
a game area in which games are played with game balls;
A gaming machine having a substrate on which specific electronic components are mounted,
comprising a substrate cover covering the surface of the substrate on which the specific electronic component is mounted;
The substrate cover has an elongated hole through which the specific electronic component can be exposed to the outside,
The long hole portion has a specific area into which a game ball can enter so as to protrude toward the substrate,
Between the surface of the board on which the specific electronic component is mounted and the inner surface of the board cover, a gap is provided that is larger than the projection amount of the game ball protruding to the inner surface side of the board cover through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a game machine, even if a game ball collides with the surface of the board covered by the board cover, the wiring or the like is not touched, so the risk of destruction or failure is reduced.
In addition, even if the long hole opened in the board cover protrudes to the inner surface side of the board cover when a game ball tries to jump in from the outside of the specific area, the amount of projection is such that the inner surface of the board cover and the specific electrons of the board. Since the distance from the surface on which the component is mounted is larger, the game ball does not come into contact with the substrate. Therefore, when a specific electronic component is a connecting member for connecting a connector, for example, a plurality of long long hole portions corresponding to a large number of connecting members are formed in the substrate cover, and positions corresponding to the long hole portions are formed. By properly arranging the necessary connecting members, one type of board cover can be used even if the number and arrangement of connectors to be used are different for each board. Of course, even if the actual number of connectors is small and there is a surplus (vacancy) in the long hole portion, the problem caused by the game ball does not occur as described above.
Therefore, since it is not necessary to remake the substrate cover according to different substrates for each model, manufacturing costs can be reduced (see, for example, paragraphs [1355] to [1388], FIGS. 126, 174B to 174M, etc.).

[5-9b-2e-1. technical means K1]
a game area in which games are played with game balls;
A board on which electronic components are mounted, including at least a joining member for joining a connector (hereinafter also referred to as a “specific electronic component”), wherein
comprising a substrate cover covering a surface of the substrate on which the bonding member is mounted;
The substrate cover is
Having an elongated hole portion that exposes the joint member to the outside and has an opening width in the lateral direction smaller than the diameter of the game ball,
A space is provided between the surface of the substrate on which the joint member is mounted and a distance larger than an amount of projection inward when the game ball hits the outside of the long hole. game machine.
According to such a game machine, even if a game ball collides with the surface of the board covered with the board cover, the wires and the like are not touched, so the risk of destruction or failure is reduced.
In addition, even if a game ball tries to jump in from the outside and a part of the spherical surface protrudes inside the board cover, the long hole formed in the board cover is a joining member between the inner surface of the board cover and the board due to the protrusion amount. Since the distance from the surface on which the is mounted is larger, the game ball does not come into contact with the substrate. Therefore, by forming a plurality of long holes in the board cover so as to be able to accommodate a large number of connectors, for example, and by arranging the necessary joining members in positions corresponding to the long holes, the connector to be used can be Even if the number and arrangement of the substrates differ from one substrate to another, one type of substrate cover can be used. Of course, even if the actual number of connectors is small and there is a surplus in the long hole portion, the above-described problem due to the game ball does not occur.
Therefore, since it is not necessary to remake the board cover according to the board that differs for each model, the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

[5-9b-2e-2. technical means K2]
Technical means characterized in that the substrate cover is formed with an inclined portion on at least one longitudinal side of the elongated hole portion, the inclined portion being inclined in a direction in which the width of the opening of the elongated hole portion widens outward. A gaming machine according to K0 or K1.
In such a game machine, even if the game ball is strongly pushed from the outside of the long hole, the game ball escapes to the inclined part side, so there is almost no possibility that the edge will be chipped, and the game ball can be easily separated from the long hole. sell.

[5-9b-2e-3. technical means K3]
According to the technical means K0 to K2, the substrate cover is provided with the long hole portion within a range corresponding to the lower portion of the ball tank arranged above for storing the game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.
Normally, game balls that enter the inside of the back cover have a high probability of falling from the upper ball tank, so it is possible to prevent game balls from entering the range of the board cover that corresponds to the lower part of the ball tank. By providing the elongated hole portion, higher usefulness is exhibited.

[5-9b-2e-4. technical means K4]
The board mounts electronic components other than the specific electronic components in a mounting area,
The game machine according to any one of technical means K0 to K3, wherein the board cover covers the electronic components in the mounting area in a state not to be exposed to the outside.
In this way, by gathering electronic components other than specific electronic components in the mounting area of the board and covering them with a board cover so that they are not exposed to the outside, electronic components that do not need to be exposed to the outside can be removed from the game ball. can be reliably isolated from

[5-9b-2e-5. technical means K5]
Forming joint member mounting sections in which a plurality of the specific electronic components can be mounted at a plurality of locations,
A plurality of the long holes are formed in a portion corresponding to at least one of the joint member mounting sections of the substrate cover, and the joint member mounting section is formed in another portion corresponding to at least one of the joint member mounting sections. Forming a window hole exposed to the outside,
Further, the game machine according to any one of technical means K0 to K4, wherein a board box containing another board is arranged in a space above the window hole.
In general, the circuit board of a game machine has a common part common to a plurality of models and a non-common part different for each model.
On the other hand, in the joint member mounting section corresponding to the part having the elongated hole of the board cover, the number and arrangement of connectors can be freely set by utilizing the plural elongated holes. Even if there is a surplus, there is no problem as described above, so it is easy to deal with non-common parts that differ from model to model.
On the other hand, the window hole of the board cover is wide open with a size corresponding to one joint member mounting section, and large and small connectors can be mixed in a complicated arrangement on the board corresponding to the space. Therefore, it is easy to deal with common parts common to a plurality of models. Since the window hole is wide open as described above, there is room for the game ball to enter. By doing so, it is difficult for the game ball to enter.

[5-9b-2f. Technical means L1 to L7 of the substrate and the joining member]
In addition, the above embodiment also corresponds to the following technical measures L1 to L7.

[5-9b-2f-1. technical means L1]
A game machine having a substrate on which electronic components are mounted, including a connecting member for connecting a connector that electrically connects at least one of power supply, ground, and various signals,
The joining member is arranged so that the terminal strips projecting from one side surface of the resin body are aligned vertically with respect to the board mounted vertically at a predetermined location,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the joint members is connected to a pad formed on the board with the terminal piece facing downward.
For example, the board attached to the rear side of the gaming machine is generally positioned lower than the shoulders of the operator when the gaming machine is installed on the island facility. Therefore, when the connector is inserted into or removed from the joining member, a large amount of force acts to push down the joining member together with the connector.
In addition to the board attached to the rear side of the game machine, many boards are attached to various places. Therefore, in the work of assembling the game machine, there are many cases where the positional relationship is the same as described above, and when the connector is inserted or removed from the joint member, a large amount of force acts to push down the joint member together with the connector.
When a force is applied to the joining member in the downward direction, the force is changed to press the terminal piece protruding downward from one side surface of the resin body against the pad of the substrate. Therefore, even if the connector is inserted into or pulled out from the joining member of the substrate, the terminal pieces are less likely to peel off from the pads of the substrate, and connection failures are less likely to occur.

[5-9b-2f-2. technical means L2]
A gaming machine according to technical means L1, wherein the board is provided with an enlarged pattern portion formed by extending a copper foil further downward from a pad for joining the terminal piece of the joining member.
When the connector is pulled out from the joining member, if the resistance is large, the connector may be lifted up and down and pulled out gradually. At this time, when an upward force is applied to the joining member via the connector, the force changes in a direction opposite to the pushing-down direction to pull off the terminal piece from the pad of the substrate. Since the pad and the copper foil of the enlarged pattern portion are opposed to this force together, the problem of poor connection due to insertion/removal of the connector is less likely to occur.

[5-9b-2f-3. technical means L3]
The gaming machine according to technical means L2, wherein the enlarged pattern portion has a width equal to or greater than the width of the pad.
By setting the width of the enlarged pattern portion to be equal to or greater than the width of the pad, not only is the strength increased, but unnecessary stress is less likely to occur at the boundary between the pad and the enlarged pattern portion.

[5-9b-2f-4. technical means L4]
A gaming machine according to technical means L2 or L3, wherein through holes are provided in the enlarged pattern portion.
By providing a through hole in the enlarged pattern portion, the enlarged pattern portion can be effectively utilized, such as enabling detection of an electrical abnormality.

[5-9b-2f-5. technical means L5]
The connection member according to any one of technical means L1 to L4, wherein the joint member is arranged below the electronic component with a working space that allows insertion and removal of the connector. game machine.
When the electronic components are arranged above the joint member, even if there is a work space necessary for inserting and removing the connector between the joint member and the electronic component, the electronic components above the connector force the connector downward. The possibility of being pushed in increases the usefulness of the present invention.

[5-9b-2f-6. technical means L6]
A gaming machine, wherein the electronic component positioned on the joint member described in technical means L5 is the joint member described in any one of technical means L1 to L4.
By vertically arranging the bonding members of the present invention with a space therebetween, it is possible to provide a substrate that is less likely to cause connection failure troubles.

[5-9b-2f-7. technical means L7]
The substrate is provided with a solid pattern portion connected to the enlarged pattern portion via a through hole on a surface opposite to the side to which the bonding member is connected and in a portion corresponding to the rear side of the bonding member. The game machine according to any one of technical means L2 to L6, characterized by:
By providing the solid pattern portion on the surface opposite to the mounting surface and corresponding to the back of the joining member, the strength of the substrate itself in that portion is increased, so that strength that can withstand the force of inserting and removing the connector can be obtained. Also, by electrically connecting the enlarged pattern portion and the solid pattern portion through the through-hole, a stable ground (GND) area can be secured.

In addition to those attached to the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the substrates related to the technical means K0 to L7 are attached to the inside of the lower part of the center member 2500 as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. ) and those attached to various locations inside the movable body (not shown).

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172 and the like. FIG. 171 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the second pattern. FIG. 172 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the back unit is decorated with the first picture. The game board 5 performs the light guide plate performance of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3200, a back front lower left effect unit 3300, and a back front lower right effect unit 3400 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

Specifically, as a lighting effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs provided are made to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. As a result, in front of the display screen of the production display device 1600 and behind the back front production unit 3200, the characters of "decisive battle" are decorated with light emission, thereby suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player. This makes it possible to make the player think that something good will happen, heighten the player's expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. so that the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission. As a result, a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed in light in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, thereby surprising the player and having a strong impact on the player. can be given, and the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot game" will occur, thereby increasing expectations for the game.

When the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated, if the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 of the back front effect unit 3200 are decorated with light emission, the radiation pattern part of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed. 3122 and the radial decoration part 3212b and the radial decoration part 3213b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 appear to be continuous, and together they constitute one pattern (special pattern). Therefore, a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back-left decorative body 3212 and the back-right decorative body 3213 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back-left decorative body 3212 and the back-right decorative body Since the decoration of 3213 is positioned in front of the second pattern 3120, it is possible to impart a sense of depth to the special pattern and to make the special pattern look three-dimensional. Therefore, since a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest in the special pattern can be strongly attracted, the player can be entertained, and at the same time, what can the player do? It is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, heighten the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emission effect of the decorative body can be appropriately combined, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 It can also be combined with an image (display effect). As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emission effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[5-11. Game board technical means F1 to J3]
The game board embodiment described above corresponds to the following technical means F1 to J3.

[5-11-F1. technical means F1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball hit into the game area can pass;
a ball hitting portion provided at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion and capable of colliding with a game ball passing through the first ball passage portion;
A gaming machine having a second ball passage portion for receiving game balls falling from the first ball passage portion and guiding them downward,
a bouncing ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball bouncing off the ball hitting portion and causing the game ball to drop toward the second ball passage portion;
The game machine is characterized in that the bouncing ball receiving portion is separate from the game panel and attached to a support portion provided on the game panel side with a non-rigid joint structure.
Here, "non-rigid joint structure" refers to joint relationships that do not use means for integrating members, such as adhesive joints and screw joints. It refers to attaching while maintaining a relatively movable state without integrating.
According to such a game machine, when a game ball that hits the ball hitting part and bounces back hits the bouncing ball receiving part, the impact is absorbed by the rattling due to the non-rigid joint structure, and the momentum of the game ball is lost. The flow of game balls can be made gentle.

[5-11-F2. Technical measures F2]
The game according to technical means F1, characterized in that the support portion for attaching the bouncing ball receiving portion is capable of receiving a game ball rebounding against the ball hitting portion and dropping the game ball toward the second ball passage portion. machine.
By providing the support part for attaching the bouncing ball receiving part with a function to drop the game ball that hits the ball hitting part and bounces back to the second ball passage part side, even if a mistake of forgetting to attach the bouncing ball receiving part occurs. Since it is possible to play the game as it is, the loss due to the mistake can be minimized.

[5-11-F3. technical measures F3]
The bouncing ball receiver has a flat top which is stepped lower than the end of the passage bottom forming the lower side of the first ball passage, and A game machine according to technical means F1 or F2, wherein a step is formed at the boundary between the bottom of the passage and the top of the bouncing ball receiving portion.
A step is provided at the boundary between the terminal end of the passage bottom of the first ball passage and the top of the bouncing ball receiving portion, so that the game ball bounced back from hitting the ball contacting portion has excess momentum and reaches the top of the bouncing ball receiving portion. When it tries to flow backward through the first ball passage portion from there, it hits the step and decelerates or stops. Therefore, the game ball which tries to flow backward through the first ball passage hits the step, changes its direction, and quickly falls into the second ball passage, thereby reducing the risk of colliding with the following game ball hit to the right.

[5-11-F4. technical measures F4]
The game according to any one of technical means F1 to F3, wherein the ball hitting part is tilted backward when the surface on which the game ball hits is the front side. machine.
By tilting the surface of the ball hitting part on which the game ball hits, the rebound of the hitting game ball is slightly upward. As a result, the impact applied to the bouncing ball receiving portion can be reduced.

[5-11-F5. technical measures F5]
Technical means F3 or F4, characterized by comprising a passage cover covering the front side of the bouncing ball receiving part and having an upper edge at a position substantially equal to or higher than the step. game machine.
By aligning the position of the upper edge of the passage cover covering the front side of the bouncing ball receiving part and the step with almost the same height, or by making the upper edge of the passage cover higher than the step, the step can be seen from the player's side. It can be made inconspicuous.

[5-11-F6. technical measures F6]
The game machine according to any one of technical means F1 to F5, wherein the bouncing ball receiving portion is attached to a fixed member fixed to the game panel with a non-rigid joint structure.
According to such a game machine, when a game ball that hits the ball hitting part and bounces back hits the bouncing ball receiving part, the impact is absorbed by the rattling due to the non-rigid joint structure, and the momentum of the game ball is lost. The flow of the game ball can be moderated, and damage to the fixed member due to the impact can also be prevented.

[5-11-F7. technical measures F7]
Technical means F1 to F6, wherein the non-rigid joint structure is such that the bouncing ball receiving part is loosely fitted to the supporting part formed on the game panel or the fixed member. The gaming machine according to any one of .
Here, the "loose fitting state" refers to a loose fitting state in which an appropriate play (clearance) is provided, and refers to a rattling state when subjected to an external force.
By attaching the bouncing ball receiving portion to the supporting portion of the bouncing ball receiving portion in a loosely fitted state to generate rattling between them, when the game ball bounced off the ball hitting portion hits the bouncing ball receiving portion, Since the impact is absorbed by the rattling and the momentum of the game ball is suppressed, the subsequent flow of the game ball can be moderated.

[5-11-F8. technical measures F8]
The game machine according to technical means F6 or F7, wherein the fixed member is a center frame fixed to the game panel.
It is possible to prevent the center frame from being damaged by a game ball that hits the ball hitting part and rebounds.

[5-11-G1. technical means G1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a first ball passage portion above the game area through which a steel game ball driven into the game area can pass;
a ball hitting portion provided at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion and capable of colliding with the game ball passing through the first ball passage portion;
a second ball passage portion for receiving the game ball falling from the first ball passage portion and guiding it downward,
a bouncing ball receiving portion capable of receiving the game ball bouncing off the ball hitting portion and dropping the game ball toward the second ball passage portion;
At least a surface of the ball hitting portion against which the game ball hits is formed in a dark color, and at least a surface of the bouncing ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball that bounces off the ball hitting portion is formed in an opaque light color. game machine.
When the game ball that hits the ball hitting part bounces back to the bouncing ball receiving part, the dark colored (black, etc.) ball hitting part that is slightly visible from the player's point of view becomes the background of the game ball (see Fig. 1). At the same time, the round mirror surface (silver) of the steel game ball polished by the ball polishing device in the middle of the ball circulation path reflects the bright color (white, etc.) of the bouncing ball receiving part. , the presence of the game ball is easy to understand due to the contrast. In particular, in recent game machines, the decorations on the upper and side edges of the door frame protrude toward the player, and the area around the ball hitting part located in the upper right corner is often dim. The bright color of the bouncing ball receiving part reflected on the round mirror surface of the ball is even more noticeable.

[5-11-G2. technical means G2]
The gaming machine according to technical means G1, wherein the ball hitting portion is tilted backward when the surface against which the game ball hits is assumed to be the front side.
By tilting the surface of the ball hitting part on which the game ball hits, the hitting game ball bounces slightly upward, and the speed is slightly reduced compared to the case where the game ball bounces downward. Therefore, the bouncing ball receiving portion is reflected on the mirror surface of the game ball for a longer period of time, making it more conspicuous.

[5-11-G3. Technical measures G3]
The bouncing ball receiving part is provided on a transparent center frame attached to the game panel, and the light-colored portion is painted with light-colored paint, attached with a light-colored sticker, or attached with a light-colored resin molding. The game machine according to technical means G1 or G2, characterized in that it is formed by any one of the above.
By making the bouncing ball receiving part in an opaque light color against the transparent center frame, the patterns of other production devices and the game panel behind the center frame are seen through and miscellaneously reflected on the surface of the game ball. Since the influence can be reduced, the ease of recognition is improved.

[5-11-G4. technical measures G4]
Any one of technical means G1 to G3, wherein the upper wall of the first ball passage portion is formed of a stainless steel outer rail that surrounds the outside of the play area. The gaming machine described in .
By forming the upper wall of the passage of the first ball passage part with the outer rail made of stainless steel, when the game ball passes through the first ball passage part, the game is reflected on the outer rail from the player who is slightly looking up. A mirror image of the ball is seen, that is, two game balls are seen. When the game ball bounces off the ball hitting part and leaves the outer rail, the mirror image of the game ball reflected there becomes invisible, and the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving part is reflected on the mirror surface of the game ball so as to replace it. You can make the movement of the ball look more dynamic.

[5-11-G5. technical measures G5]
The dark color of the ball contact part is black, dark blue, dark brown or dark green,
The gaming machine according to any one of technical means G1 to G4, wherein the bright color of the bouncing ball receiving portion is white, yellow, or pink.
By combining the dark color of the ball hitting portion and the light color of the bouncing ball receiving portion, the difference in brightness is increased and the difference in contrast is emphasized, so that the game ball can be made more conspicuous.

[5-11-H1. Technical measures H1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball hit into the game area can pass;
a ball hitting portion provided at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion and capable of colliding with a game ball passing through the first ball passage portion;
a second ball passage portion for receiving a game ball falling from the first ball passage portion and guiding it downward;
a center frame attached to the periphery of the opening formed in the game panel,
The center frame is
a bouncing ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball bouncing off the ball hitting portion and causing the game ball to fall toward the second ball passage portion;
a flange portion that can abut on the front surface of the game panel and has mounting holes for screws;
A game machine characterized in that the game panel can be attached and detached from the front side of the game panel without mounting electrical parts.
Since there are no electrical parts mounted on the center frame, there are no electric wires in the center frame, and the center frame is screwed to the front of the game panel through the mounting holes provided in the flange. Attachment/detachment to/from the game panel is facilitated. Therefore, maintenance such as cleaning and repair of the center frame is easy, and replacement is easy when there is damage that is difficult to repair.

[5-11-H2. Technical means H2]
Technical means H1, wherein the center frame is characterized in that the flange portion having the mounting holes for screws is formed on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion with at least the bouncing ball receiving portion interposed therebetween. game machine.
The bouncing ball receiving portion repeatedly receives the impact of the game ball bounced off the ball hitting portion as described above, but the impact is supported by the screw inserted through the mounting hole of the flange portion. When there is a flange on the side of the second ball passage, the impact of the game ball received by the bouncing ball receiving portion acts in a direction that lifts the flange from the front surface of the game panel, and the flange acts on the bouncing ball receiving portion. When it is on the opposite side of the second ball passage part across the , it acts in the direction of pressing the flange part against the front surface of the game panel. Therefore, if the flange portion having the mounting hole is on the side of the second ball passage portion, the impact of the game ball received by the bouncing ball receiving portion causes the flange portion to rise from the front surface of the game panel. A pull-out force acts on the screw. Repetition of this force may cause loosening of the screws.
On the other hand, if the flange portion having the mounting hole is on the opposite side of the second ball passage portion with the bouncing ball receiving portion therebetween, the impact of the game ball received by the bouncing ball receiving portion causes the flange portion to move to the front surface of the game panel. Since it is pressed, almost no stress is applied to the screws passed through the mounting holes of the flange portion. Therefore, the screws are less likely to loosen, improving the stability of the center frame over the long term.

[5-11-H3. Technical measures H3]
Technical means H1 characterized in that the ball bouncing passage formed between the ball hitting portion and the bouncing ball receiving portion is not provided with a step, which is caused by the thickness of the flange portion, so that the game ball can come into contact therewith. Or the gaming machine according to technical means H2.
In the ball bouncing passage formed between the ball hitting portion and the bouncing ball receiving portion, by not providing a step where the game ball can come into contact due to the thickness of the flange portion, for example, "a bouncing ball that hits the ball hitting portion A game ball heading for the receiving part contacts the step of the flange part and changes course to the glass unit side, and in the worst case, the ball gets caught.

[5-11-I1. Technical measures I1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball hit into the game area can pass;
a ball hitting portion provided at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion and capable of colliding with a game ball passing through the first ball passage portion;
a second ball passage portion for receiving a game ball falling from the first ball passage portion and guiding it downward;
a center frame attached to the periphery of the opening formed in the game panel,
The center frame is
a bouncing ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball bouncing off the ball hitting portion and causing the game ball to fall toward the second ball passage portion;
A flange portion that can abut on the front surface of the game panel and has a mounting hole for a screw,
Further, the center frame is formed of a plurality of separable frame parts, and among them, the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving part is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the other frame parts. .
The bouncing ball receiving section receives the repeated impact of the game ball that bounces off the ball hitting section, so it may suffer damage that is difficult to repair. By arranging the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving part so as to overlap the front surface of the other frame parts, the whole frame part can be easily replaced when the bouncing ball receiving part is damaged.

[5-11-I2. Technical measures I2]
A gaming machine according to technical means I1, wherein no electrical component is mounted on the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion.
If the frame part having the bouncing ball receiving portion is not mounted with an electrical component, the frame part is not connected to electric wires, so that it becomes easier to attach and detach from the game panel.

[5-11-I3. Technical measures I3]
The frame part having the bouncing ball receiving part is provided with a translucent decoration, and the decoration is illuminated from behind by light emitted from a light emitting means separately provided on the game panel side. The game machine according to technical means I2.
A frame part having a bouncing ball receiving part is provided with a translucent decoration so that it can be illuminated from behind by the light of a light emitting effect means separately provided on the game panel side, so that the frame part does not require electrical wiring. can be decorated with the lighting of

[5-11-J1. Technical means J1]
a game panel having a game area on the front;
a first ball passage portion located above the game area through which a game ball hit into the game area can pass;
a ball hitting portion provided at the terminal end of the first ball passage portion and capable of colliding with a game ball passing through the first ball passage portion;
a second ball passage portion for receiving a game ball falling from the first ball passage portion and guiding it downward;
a center frame attached to the periphery of the opening formed in the game panel,
The center frame is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has a bouncing ball receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball bouncing off the ball hitting portion and dropping the game ball toward the second ball passage portion,
A game machine according to claim 1, wherein said bouncing ball receiving portion is formed separately from said center frame in a different color and is detachably attached to said center frame.
Since the bouncing ball receiving part is separate from the transparent center frame and is formed in a different color, it is possible to easily find any improper mounting of the bouncing ball receiving part by visual inspection.
In addition, since the separately detachable bouncing ball receiving portion has a different color from the center frame, the end portion of the first ball passage portion is clearly defined, making it easy to aim for right-handed hitting.

[5-11-J2. Technical means J2]
The center frame is located at a position overlapping with the bouncing ball receiving portion when installed on the game panel, or at a position near the bouncing ball receiving portion that is difficult for a player to see when installed on the game panel, The gaming machine according to technical means J1, characterized in that a colored sticker including white is attached.
By attaching a colored sticker at a position overlapping the bouncing ball receiving portion of the center frame or in the vicinity of the bouncing ball receiving portion, it is possible to easily recognize the top and bottom of the center frame, which is difficult to distinguish by itself because of its transparency. Therefore, the work of attaching the center frame to the game panel can be performed efficiently. Moreover, since this seal is completely invisible or difficult to be seen by the player when the center frame with the bouncing ball receiving portion is attached to the game panel, there is no risk of hindering the game. There is no risk of spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the product.

[5-11-J3. Technical means J3]
The game machine according to technical means J2, wherein the seal attached to the center frame has the same color as the bouncing ball receiving portion.
By making the sticker attached to the center frame the same color as the bouncing ball receiving part, even if multiple stickers are attached to the center frame, it is possible to clearly indicate the mounting position of the bouncing ball receiving part. .

[5-11-K0. others]
The technical means F1 to J3 corresponding to the above embodiments have been described above. Included in means F1-J3.
That is, in the embodiment, the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a is provided on the center frame 2501 (fixed member) fixed to the game panel 1100. 1100 itself may be provided with the support portion 2501c described above, and the bouncing ball receiving portion 2521a may be attached to the support portion 2501c.
In addition, in the embodiment, the center member 2500 is formed by integrating the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third sorting device 2550, which are game members, in the center frame 2501, but the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third sorting device 2550 may be formed separately from center frame 2501 .

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 174A. FIG. 173 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 174A is an explanatory diagram showing the connection configuration of boards, motors, etc. in the game board. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). A peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195 .

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and a game board 5. A base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a is provided.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in a started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in a normal winning opening 2003, and a large winning opening 2005. A large prize winning slot sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received, a prize winning slot sensor 2513 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning slot 2006, and a game ball B accepted in the first V winning slot 2007. The first V winning opening sensor 2514 to detect, the first losing opening sensor 2516 to detect the game ball B accepted in the first losing opening 2535, the second to detect the gaming ball B accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518 for detecting game ball B accepted in third losing opening 2555, out sensor 664 for detecting game ball B discharged from game board 5 (or out opening left sensor 3032 and right outlet sensor 3033), the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor 3003 that detects vibration acting on the game board 5. Detection signals from the main control input It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via a circuit.

Detection signals from setting key switches 1311a and setting switching buttons 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (i.e., through the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starter sensor 3002, and the second starter sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and the main control It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, the detection signals from the general winning slot sensor 3001, the normal winning slot sensor 2401, the accessory winning slot sensor 2513, the big winning slot sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 are sent to the panel relay board 1710. is input to the main control board 1310 via, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , the prize winning opening solenoid 2512, the first sorting solenoid 2532, and the second sorting solenoid 2545, through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, output the drive signal, or output the predetermined From the output terminal of the output port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal reserved indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special reserved number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special Drive signals to the holding number indicator and the round indicator are directly output without going through other substrates, that is, directly. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, the normal winning sensor 2401, the big winning sensor 2403, the accessory winning sensor 2513, the first V winning sensor 2514, the Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first loss opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2402, and the normal winning hole Detection of game ball B by mouth sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the normal winning opening sensor 2401. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 . In addition, since a large amount of game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, the game balls B are frequently detected by the out sensor 664. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands regarding the control of game effects and various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball A ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extracting operation. , is equipped with

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. input to the MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and a power failure of the main control board 1310. A power failure warning signal from the monitoring circuit and an error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator through the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 through the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is touching the handle 195, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. are electrically connected to each other, and the shooting condition 3 that game ball B is permitted to be shot based on a launch permission signal from main control board 1310 is not satisfied. , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the effects in the peripheral control board 1510, has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality sound performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. It is transmitted from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side drive light emission data to be transmitted to the door frame 3 side from the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 are sent to the display control unit serial In addition to transmitting from the I/O port to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

A detection signal from the second loss opening sensor 2517 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 to inform that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one line drawn in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be expressed using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[7. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 173 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175A to 180. FIG. 175A and 175B are flowcharts showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIGS. 175A and 175B, and FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing, and FIG. 180 is an example of setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation Display processing will be described.

[7-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the acceptance of the game ball B of the second starting port 2004, and this normal symbol per An initial value determination random number for determination per normal symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for determination, and a normal pattern for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for symbol variation display patterns and the like are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (at power failure). When clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per determination is obtained from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU 1310a incorporates. An ID code is taken out, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal symbol based on the taken out ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is It is designed to be set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that once the ID code is stored, it cannot be rewritten using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. A second security measure is taken to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code, and a two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire game balls B to be paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, and uses an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. is obtained illegally, and even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal pattern hit determination and the normal pattern hit determination value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual , the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if the game ball B is caused to pass through the normal winning opening 2003 at each predetermined interval, the game ball B is moved to the second starting opening 2004 by opening and closing the movable piece. A game state that becomes acceptable cannot be generated.

[7-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175A and 176, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the blackout warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a blackout warning signal is input from the blackout monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) is to be erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. , the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), and the setting key switch 1311a is first turned on. is turned on, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. It is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is established by determining that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2, while it is determined that the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is detected. and/or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change the setting of the set value of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation, and the setting value is changed. It is set to a value of 1 when it is permitted to change the setting, and is set to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510. ) can receive various commands.

After step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it returns to step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and set to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when it is not permitted to change the setting of the setting value. (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines that various information is not to be erased (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After performing the first ON operation by rotating it clockwise by 60 degrees, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch in the determination of step S18 described above, and determines that the setting key is opened based on the setting key ON signal. By judging that the switch 1311a is turned ON, it is judged that the predetermined set value change permission condition is established, and the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG in step S20A. In order to set it, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of the above-described step S25, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change processing of step S37 described later is performed. Subsequently, in the process of step S38, which will be described later, by clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as , "first RAM error canceling method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. A main control side power-on process, which is a routine, is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, the various information is to be erased. By removing and clearing, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can be progressed (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch 1310f.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

After step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processes, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) ends normally and the backup flag BK- If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. (Step S37). In this setting change process, which will be described in detail later, the push operation portion of the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. Each time, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the decision key from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. Based on this signal, the changed setting value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines that various information is to be erased, the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" means a set value dedicated area in which set values are stored, and the number of game balls B collected through an outlet 1008 provided in a game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. and an out-ball counting exclusive area in which the counting result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in setting change processing described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 counted in the number of balls counting process described later. The count result (total number) of the number of balls is stored.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side When the power-off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code preliminarily stored in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random number for judging the normal pattern is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used for determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number. Initial value for normal per symbol determination. Set to decision random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware. Along with making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit/fall random number update process (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting drive signals to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main-control-side power-off processing, and the main-control-side power-on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing is not stored immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied due to the fact that the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when it is determined in step S25 that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value, setting change processing is performed in step S37, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). When it is determined that the various information should be erased, in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation portion is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the setting value is changed and determined. When changing settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation) If it is a winning state, etc., it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business starts. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while depressing the depressing operation portion. Also, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM.As described above, the setting key can change the set value as well as the current setting Since it is an important key that can be used to check the setting values, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people. is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can delete (clear) the game backup information from the RAM By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the clear switch 1310f, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off as described above. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as a DC +5V to the island of the game hall. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a game hall clerk or other clerk, and even if there is no indication of intention by the game hall clerk or other clerk to clear the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. However, there is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, supplies game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarting, will receive the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum in the backup process. Since it is determined that the calculation result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM No information is initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) and other information are not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) are reliably prevented from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2412 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414 . Here, first, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information indicating the driving state of the starting solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, that is, Next, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed for the main control return destination command at the time of power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven to open and close the big winning port 2005. The state of being closed by the member is transferred to the state of being open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of In other words, for example, the game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, and the big winning hole 1 count display command that tells the number of the game balls B that have entered the big winning hole 2005 is mainly executed. Even if the control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the ball of the game ball B that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. The main control board 1310 sends a large prize winning opening 1 closed display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, start closing the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 between rounds). , and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and opens the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning hole opening 5th display command that instructs the transition to the state where the large winning hole 2005 is opened (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning hole 2005). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen according to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that conveys the effect that the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is open When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece, thereby performing the second starting operation. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs while the port 2004 is open and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of , the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred is restored, so that the starter solenoid 2412 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004 as a game state and a game state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. The screen according to the probability and the time saving state. is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can be returned, the game ball B can be received into the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey the message in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised by the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, the player may forget that the game state is acceptable, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball B can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. However, when power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game of entering the game ball B into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the command at power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven to open the large winning opening 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is in a jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "It's a big win. The big winning slot is open. Play the game so that the game ball B enters the big winning slot."). can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 after power is restored. , In a state in which the game ball B can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the main control As the return destination of the substrate 1310, a screen that informs that the starting port solenoid 2412 is started to be driven to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2004 (for example, "Movable piece is open Play the game so that the game ball B enters the second start opening.”) is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510. A player sitting in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to enter a game ball B into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at the time of power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at the time of power-on, and the main prize number information at the time of power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the main prize ball when the power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is set when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). When the RAM is cleared, the information instructing that effect, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-working time saving state, and high probability non working hours state, and the model code of the pachinko machine It consists of the information shown and Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[7-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 175A and 176 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 detection signal, detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2516, second A detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 2515, a detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 2518, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 (or the out opening left sensor 3032 and the out opening right sensor 3033), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. , operation signal (RAM clear signal) from RAM clear switch 1310f, detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from body frame open switch, signal from setting key switch 1311a, signal from setting changeover button 1311b, out A detection signal from the sensor 664 and a payout ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and used as input information. It is stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding start start winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal of , the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Note that in this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing). , are read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if the game ball B does not enter or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor Detection signal from 2515, detection signal from third failing sensor 2518, detection signal from out sensor 664, detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010, operation signal from RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), door frame open. Detection signal from the switch, detection signal from the body frame opening switch, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, signal from the setting switching button 1311b, detection signal from the out sensor 664, prize balls sent in the prize ball control processing described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has received the command normally.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a classifies the information display to inform that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a problem. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hitting random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 176, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball count processing (step S107). In this number-of-balls counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal is input from the out-hole left sensor 3032, and a game area 5a is divided and formed on the game board 5. When the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the above, the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 is set to a value. A game ball B collected by an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 by performing an operation of adding (incrementing) 1, and receiving a detection signal from the out port right sensor 3033. is detected by the out-port right sensor 3033, the value of the collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls B collected through the out-port 1008 is added (incremented) by one. That is, in the ball counting process, when the out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B recovered from the out port 1008 and the out-port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B recovered from the out port 1008. , an operation is performed to add 2 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, and uses the out ball counting exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. , the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, when the value of the recovered ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, each time the number of game balls B recovered at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU 1310a issues a ball recovery command to that effect. It is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. It should be noted that the main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535) and further adds (increments) the value of the collected ball counter by 1, the collected ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and an operation to add from this value of 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls B is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and the number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls is 10. , the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this Self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payout control board 633 does not input the payer ACK signal to inform that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command within a predetermined time. A command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 balls. In this case, a main award number information output command classified as other is created to notify that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. Based on the game ball B entered into various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5") Then, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process of step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. ing. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. is read out from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of the added number of balls. When the number exceeds 10 (that is, when the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created and transmitted to notify that effect. Information is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. It is designed to

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnetic goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. A value of 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent activity detection processing. ), a magnet informing command classified into informing display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage. It's becoming

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not in the jackpot gaming state (big winning opening 2005 when the game ball B enters), etc.), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. do.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave emission goto and the magnet When no fraud is detected, the value 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as no fraud is detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Also, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing enable signal setting processing (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, based on the value of the above-described fraud detection flag FD-FLG, determines that fraud has not been detected when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame is open, and when the body frame open switch detects that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 by inputting a detection signal from the body frame open switch, As the logic of the firing permission signal, the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic is set, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored). It is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic is set until the start of the firing.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is A hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a is obtained, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2402 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the round indicator lamp, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. A function display unit 1400 for setting the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so as to light the 15-round display lamp, storing it in the output information storage area as output information, and lighting the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information memory, when the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port The winning opening winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second region of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 In order to light up the suspension indicator, the output of the lighting signal for the normal suspension indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, which is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , Creating various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, storing as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and lighting the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting value confirmation display processing (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and, based on this input information, the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. A detection signal from the body frame open switch and a setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a causes the setting key cylinder to move to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). ) is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the setting key ON signal, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame open switch, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined by the setting key ON signal. is not turned ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not established. In the setting value confirmation display process, when the setting value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. On the other hand, if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU 1310a, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the payout control board 633 Or, when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the big winning port 2005, and output a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece In addition, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output signal, short time medium information output signal, start winning prize information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, or a launch permission signal set to the firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. or outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the game balls B collected by the out port 1008, or stores it in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball B that has entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected ), various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to the normal figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands categorized as notification display, and status display. Various commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 pays as a prize ball based on the game ball B that entered the various winning holes provided on the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls B to be put out reaches 10, an instruction is given to transmit a main prize number information output signal as main prize number information to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558. main winning ball number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified by specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies each time the number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, A setting change command that informs that the setting value has been changed, an error display command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a main control built-in RAM A setting key ON operation command for confirming a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area (to be described later) is stored in the specific area. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main peripheral serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. is now possible. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

It should be noted that every time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10, when a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 For each ball recovery command received, the number of game balls B recovered at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball recovery information (counted value (that is, out port In 1008, the information that associates the total number of game balls B collected) with the updated date and time) is updated. It should be noted that, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the business hours of the game hall without being able to receive the ball recovery command, the last counted value (that is, the game balls recovered at the outlet 1008) Ball collection information in which the total number of balls of B) and the updated date and time are associated is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 stores and retains ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is generated again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. output to the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control is to be returned to the peripheral control board 1510 when power is turned on. It is possible to do so. That is, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and based on this, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[7-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting value as shown in FIG. 178 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off processing (at power-off) in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag indicating whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the processing of step S210 may proceed and the setting value 1, which is the initial value, may be set for the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a When the MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to light the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button 1311b is operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, and determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. 1311b is not operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button 1311b has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a adds (increments) the set value by 1 to update it (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. When the key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key cylinder is rotated from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotation position) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and it is further turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it back to the second turning on position. 1311a determines that the decision key has been operated based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and determines that the decision key has been operated when the decision key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a; When the determination key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switching button 1311b has been operated. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button 1311b has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a repeats the processing in steps S218 and S220, determines in step S222, and confirms that the enter key has been operated. If it is determined that there is not, the process returns to the determination of step S216, and each time the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the set value is incremented by 1 and updated to display the setting until the enter key is operated. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting value updated by operating the setting switching button 1311b immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is used by the main control system. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the decision key has been operated, it stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing of step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

After step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a moves the setting key cylinder from the initial position (that is, setting key 1311a) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a and the decision key is turned on. The setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting values are hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). This setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the first ON state). A flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change of setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permitting setting change of setting value It is set to a value of 1, and to a value of 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. In the processing of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in the set value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is abnormal. A determination is made as to whether or not it is in any of the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, that set value is used as it is.

In the judgment of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a judges that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initial setting of step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the processing at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[7-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not being acknowledged.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned on. is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, outputs a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise 60 degrees from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first turning operation and the first ON operation. By determining that it is open and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. , it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal. Based on the determination, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and then the current setting value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value obtained in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether or not the setting value is abnormal, so that the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ) to end the routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, confirms the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is the command to send.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the setting key ON operation history information (set value confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. information that associates the message with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the above-mentioned ball collection history information, set value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are generated. A predetermined specific history information display permitting condition is satisfied that the display of the specific history information can be permitted. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is configured so that a person who confirms the specific history information can perform the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the predetermined condition for permitting display of the specific history information is satisfied. , the image that has been displayed so far is switched to a specific history information display image for selectively displaying specific history information, and control is performed to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pressed. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off. On the other hand, when the OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , the OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has ended (that is, indicates that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM have been confirmed). is a command that tells

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range in the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

After step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared. By setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the control MPU 1310a, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and when the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. In addition, the infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display processing is finished, so that the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described later in detail, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[7-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A, and the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 179), and is the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 180 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A or the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 175A. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function, when the power is restored, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A or the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178), the main control MPU 1310a restores the power in step S400 and then displays an error display in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the process has started, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and its predetermined output port is set. output terminal to the discharge control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, the error display process shown in FIG. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing enable signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 175A, and the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 179) and step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. ).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." Control is performed to display a message image of white characters, and an announcement of "A RAM error has occurred. Please call a member of staff." Control is performed so that the sound is forcibly set to the maximum volume and played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker 622, etc.) without depending on the volume. The processing for notifying the RAM error by means of the error display command is the processing with the highest priority. Prioritize error reporting.

[8. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[8-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, the processing is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, it is not intended to instruct the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be performed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and to a value of 0 when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S540, when the payout control MPU judges that there is no power failure warning signal input, it judges whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display are stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually outputs 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 every time B is paid out.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls B put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. A processing (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls is stored and updated in the winning ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is added to the number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls B actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding that number is The indicated value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and a BRQ signal from the CR unit. , BRDY signal and CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc., respectively, and as input information Store in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls B stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition at the time, the number of game balls B received and paid out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the number of balls actually paid out It is determined whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 591 and the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 591 do not match, and the game balls B are put out inconsistently. At that time, time management is performed for the judgment condition and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, when the game ball B is put out by the put-out device 580, even if the put-out operation cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the put-out operation can be continued when power is restored. Therefore, the game balls B can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, and when the game ball B is put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, an instantaneous power failure or a power outage causes a CR Even if exchange of various signals with the unit is interrupted and game ball B cannot be continued to be dispensed, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC at the time of power restoration. etc. are stored as payout backup information, and are restored to values such as prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before momentary power failure or power failure. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the game balls B can be continuously paid out. It's like

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting process , as a setting of the error state output to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal is set to the logical state (LOW) to inform that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible when the communication with the CR unit is not in progress. It is set in the output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, it is possible to output a PRDY signal to the CR unit from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, and the payout device is sent to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the payout operation of the game ball B by 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the tank is full at B, and the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574. It is determined whether or not it is. For example, the determination as to whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls B is made by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check processing. is ON, and the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full-tank and bulb-out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 turns from OFF to ON. , the timing of the above-described full-tank determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B stored is stored in the above-described state information storage area. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the game balls B stored, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

The timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is also used to determine whether or not the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON in the processing, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is changed from OFF to ON, timing of the above-described dead ball determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball conveys that effect. While the cut information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is a predetermined number or more. It stores in the state information storage area the out-of-ball information for notifying that it is not.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-described out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a countermeasure is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls B is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[8-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (2ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIGS. 181 to 183.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 184, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[9. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 173 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 188 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[9-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC with a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided in the production operation unit 300, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, Rotation (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the contact operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the protrusion force detection sensor 375 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300") 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and press operation unit 303 (operation history information, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not to reflect the state of the operation of 303 in the game presentation is appropriately determined. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (the contact operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described scale set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation section 301 (a contact operation section 302 and a pressing operation section 303) to obtain a 31st brightness that is the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve, the touch operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the touch operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the palette A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) touches the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The brightness designation value by the operation of 303 and the corresponding special palette value are set. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark Therefore, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from the light guide plate compared to direct light, for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC in the display data creation process to be described later. One minute (one frame) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in processing time. (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") can give priority to performances by sound effects such as music and sound effects in accordance with various performances.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands received. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands. (extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303), and the above-described first brightness specified value becomes the maximum brightness When one luminance designated value is set up to the 31st luminance designated value, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to achieve the set luminance designated value. It is possible.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting entrance winning command for instructing the start of a starting entrance winning effect, a normal symbol Ordinary design storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), variation pattern for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative designs in the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special designs It analyzes whether it is a command, a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball B is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and which It recognizes whether it is in a game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electronic Drive source schedule data and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the performance display control section 1512, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a number of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. is read (extracted) from and output to VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 for one screen. 10 minutes (one frame) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponding to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is obtained, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the output set in the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output from each channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, by rotating the volume control switch, the resistance value is changed, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into values in 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the music is played from the top central speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. and sound effects. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. It's becoming

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. Seconds have elapsed), by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to a master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound for audio. It is designed to be output as data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value, The volume of the sound emitted from the top side speaker and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effects, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effects incorporated in the track to be used and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the synthesized effect sound, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually adjusted to the center of the top on the side of the door frame 3. Amplifies to a master volume value which is the volume of sound flowing from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4, serializes the amplified production sound, outputs it as audio data, and outputs it as audio data. does not affect the sound data of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume control switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informational sound incorporated in the track to be used. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. The signal is amplified up to a master volume value that becomes a flowing volume, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 To briefly explain the control of playing the notification sound to notify the hall clerk of the fraudulent act, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound effect is incorporated. The sound data of the track that was recorded, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound was incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound was set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and this The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are set to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. and serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound and outputs them as audio data. In other words, only the notification sound with the maximum volume is actually emitted from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 . At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is the above-mentioned sound. It is progressing according to the schedule data for generation.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now will be reduced to the sub-volume value by turning the volume control switch and adjusting the substrate volume. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound ), and the sound flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4 .

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low tone of the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko machine 1 When the notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk of the fraudulent act against the hall, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass sound of the main body frame 4. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622, this muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. Then, when the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 stops flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the informative sound started to flow, but the sound is generated until a predetermined period has passed since the informative sound started to flow. It is designed to start flowing again from the point where it progressed according to the schedule data for use.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are not dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral volume from muted to maximum volume by program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Make a backup by copying to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, in step S1008, the value 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is, as described above, a V-blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[9-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. will be explained. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady process flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, Exit the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the execution of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, ie, a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is executed repeatedly each time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) of FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[9-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 185, will be described. . When the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is started by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt process has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids which are arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. According to the drive data, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input, thereby providing history information (for example, original data) of detection signals from various sensors. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the original position (standby position) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 or acquire the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from the top central speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, and the door It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted in plurality on various decorative substrates provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5 .

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[9-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the judgment of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been sequentially read out from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, following the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, reads the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. In a certain mode and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facility of the game hall, and when the game balls B rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise. It is under the influence of filed environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is When it is determined that the period for which information can be received has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[9-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 189, the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether a power failure warning signal has been input. (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control ICs can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it is no longer possible to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 185 is started again.

As described above, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[10. Origin Return Operation of Movable Production Unit]
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a power switch 630a (see FIG. 7) for turning on and off the power supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. The switch 630a itself is always in the "on" state, and by turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) provided on the island facility, power is supplied or cut off to all the pachinko machines 1 on the island facility. It is done collectively.
On the other hand, there have been many machines that have a mechanical movable production unit 3600 as a visual production device. The production unit 3600 tends to be large. If the movable parts, which are the centerpiece of the game, do not operate normally during the game, it will cause a decrease in the interest of the players. is moved and returned to the origin position (hereinafter referred to as return-to-origin operation) is confirmed.
However, sometimes during the game, for some reason, the movement of the movable part stops or becomes unstable. In that case, as one of recovery means, there is a reset of microprocessors mounted in a plurality of control units that control the pachinko machine 1, but since it cannot be reset directly, power must be cycled. Only at this time, the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 of the target pachinko machine 1 are opened together and the power switch 630a is turned on and off. The hinge part ([outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 + main body frame upper hinge member 510 + door frame upper hinge assembly 120] or [outer frame Excessive stress on the lower hinge member 60 + main frame lower hinge assembly 520 + door frame lower hinge member 125], especially on the lower side [outer frame lower hinge member 60 + main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 + door frame lower hinge member 125]) was likely to give

[10-1. Return-to-origin start switch]
Therefore, in the embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) having the movable effect unit 3600 in the game board 5, the body frame 4, the door frame 3, etc., the movable effect unit 3600 is controlled as shown in FIG. A return-to-origin start switch 3610 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the state of the return-to-origin start switch 3610 is confirmed, and when the state of the return-to-origin start switch 3610 is in the state of being operated (first state: for example, protruded state), the return-to-origin operation is restricted and not executed. I'm trying
Then, the timing for executing the return-to-origin operation of the movable effect unit 3600 is returned from the first state in which the state of the return-to-origin start switch 3610 is operated to the state before the operation (second state: for example, immersed state) ( changed). Specifically, as long as the return-to-origin start switch 3610 is set to the first state, the movable effect unit 3600 is not operated, and when it is set to the second state, the movable effect unit 3600 is operated. be.
In this case, when the origin return start switch 3610 is pushed to change from the first state to the second state, the origin return operation of the movable effect unit 3600 starts, but the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be closed immediately. , the stress caused by the vibration during operation of the movable effect unit 3600 applied to the hinge can be greatly reduced.

Furthermore, when the state of the return-to-origin start switch 3610 changes from the state in which it is operated (first state) to the state before it is operated (second state), after a predetermined time has elapsed, An origin return operation may be executed.
For example, the approximate time required to close the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 after the return-to-origin start switch 3610 is returned to the second state (experienced expected value or average experimentally measured value may be used. ) is set, and the return-to-origin operation is executed with a delay of that amount of time.
Then, since the origin returning operation of the movable performance unit 3600 is performed in a state where the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are almost closed, the stress caused by the vibration applied to the hinge part when the movable performance unit 3600 operates can be effectively reduced. can be done.
In addition, if the opened/closed state of the main body frame 4 is notified by voice, it is further preferable that the user is alerted to the fact that the main body frame 4 is in the open state.

In the embodiment, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pilot lamp 3620 as a display device for visualizing the state of the origin return start switch 3610, and the origin return start switch 3610 is switched from the first state to the second state. In this case, the display of pilot lamp 3620 is different from that in the first state. Specifically, an LED is used for the pilot lamp 3620, and the pilot lamp 3620 is lit in the first state in which the return-to-origin operation is restricted, and is extinguished in the second state. Alternatively, a multicolor LED may be used as the pilot lamp 3620 so that the first state and the second state are illuminated in different colors. The pilot lamp 3620 may be installed anywhere as long as it can be visually recognized from the rear side of the body frame 4. For example, as shown in FIG. In consideration of the above, it is preferable to arrange it near the edge of the hinge portion for opening and closing the body frame 4 .
Since the state of the return-to-origin start switch 3610 can be recognized from the change in the pilot lamp 3620, the execution timing of the return-to-origin operation can be visually recognized clearly. As a result, the work of supplying power with the body frame 4 in the open state can be performed calmly without worrying about the state of the movable part, so that work mistakes can be reduced.

In addition, when the body frame opening switch 4b (see FIG. 269) for detecting the open/closed state of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided as in the embodiment, the body frame opening/closing switch 4b can be operated together with the state of the origin return start switch 3610 It is also possible to confirm the state of and start the return-to-origin operation.
In such a case, since the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion is not reliably executed until the body frame 4 is closed, the stress applied to the hinge portion can be minimized.

[10-2. Return-to-origin start switch and setting key switch]
In the above-described embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1 having the movable effect units 3600 in the game board 5, the main body frame 4, the door frame 3, etc., the control unit, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, which is one of them, The origin return start switch 3610 provided controls (or sets) the execution start timing of the origin return operation of the movable effect unit 3600 executed by supplying power to the peripheral control board 1510 according to the situation. Having described the method, in the embodiments described below, a plurality of set values relating to the odds of winning a lottery awarding a predetermined profit to a player can be selectively changed, and the settings for permitting such changes are provided. In a pachinko machine 1 in which a key switch 1311a is provided in a control unit (main control unit 1300), a setting key switch 1311a provided in the control unit is used as an origin return start switch 3610 to perform an origin return operation of a movable effect unit 3600. is executed according to the situation.

The command set in the command reservation setting process to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 of FIG. 176 is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in FIG. is received, the return-to-origin operation of the movable effect unit 3600 is executed. That is, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the movable effect unit 3600 executes the origin return operation for a predetermined period of time.
Next, in the main control side power-on processing, the states of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are obtained and recorded. Before executing the peripheral control board command transmission process, the recorded information of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f is checked, and the states of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are changed to the state permitting the setting change ( If it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is the origin return start switch 3610 (the origin return start switch 3610 is in the first state), for example, the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are held until the setting change operation is completed. The state is monitored again, and transmission is scheduled in step S120 of FIG. to forgo transmission of the set command when the power is turned on.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the return-to-origin operation of the movable effect unit 3600 from being performed until the setting change operation is completed. The peripheral control board 1510 can start the return-to-origin operation of the movable effect unit 3600 .

It should be noted that the setting value during setting change can be confirmed on the setting display 1310g of FIG. However, by operating the setting key switch 1311a, the display may be switched to a setting change display. That is, when functioning as a base monitor 1310h, all of the 7 segments of 4 digits are used, and when functioning as a setting change, that is, when displaying a setting value, 7 segments of 1 digit at the right end or left end are used. . By doing so, there is no need to provide an independent setting display 1310g, so the cost can be reduced and there is more room in the arrangement of parts.

In addition, even when the acquired and recorded information of the states of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f permits confirmation of the set values, the states of the setting key switch 1311a and the RAM clear switch 1310f are again monitored, If the transmission of the command set at power-on, which is scheduled to be transmitted in step S120 of FIG. Until then, the return-to-origin operation of the movable effect unit 3600 can be prevented in the same manner as described above. This is because setting values are checked in the same manner as setting values are changed in that the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are opened.

As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is used as the return-to-origin start switch 3610, the origin of the movable effect unit 3600 is maintained until the setting change is completed in the setting change operation with the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 opened. Since the return operation can be regulated, there is no problem that the setting change operation takes more time than necessary due to the vibration that may occur when the movable effect unit 3600 returns to the origin.

Also, the reserved command may be immediately sent in the interrupt process, and the peripheral control board 1510 may delay the origin return operation of the movable effect unit 3600 and start it.
In this case, particularly in the pachinko machine 1 in which the movable effect unit 3600 has a plurality of movable parts, it is preferable to perform the return-to-origin operation sequentially from the movable parts with relatively light loads.
By doing so, even if the return-to-origin operation is started after a sufficient time has been set for the setting change operation, it will not be possible until the door frame 3 or the like is closed. , the stress on the hinge can be alleviated more or less.
In addition, from the point of view of the return-to-origin operation, which is to confirm the movement of the movable parts, even if it is not the same as the actual performance during the game, there is a special operation confirmation specification that moves slightly slowly where it would move violently during the game. , thus relieving the stress on the hinge.

Next, in the above description, the return-to-origin operation of the movable effect unit 3600 is regulated or started according to the state of the setting key switch 1311a as the return-to-origin start switch 3610, but step S18A in FIG. When the detection signal of the main body frame open switch 4b indicates closed as shown in , regardless of the state of the setting key switch 1311a, the process proceeds to the next step without going through step S18B for confirming the state of the setting key switch 1311a. do it.
In the first place, the pachinko machine 1 has the rear surface of the body frame 4 exposed, and since it is installed on both sides of the island facility in a back-to-back state, an appropriate gap is formed in the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and the gap is formed. There is concern about damage caused by a new method of traversing the island facilities to access the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 on the other side and illegally changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 on the other side. Therefore, if the setting value cannot be changed when the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch 4b indicates closing, it is possible to change the setting value from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 by crossing the island equipment. Injustice can also be effectively countered.

If the detection signal of the body frame open switch 4b indicates open at step S18A in FIG. 175B, then the state of the setting key switch 1311a is checked (FIG. 175B, step S18B). When the state of the setting key switch 1311a indicates the state of permitting the change of the setting value, the store clerk of the game hall, who is permitted to change the setting, sets the setting key switch 1311a to the state of permitting the setting change with awareness of the setting change. It determines that it is set and permits the setting change operation, while determining that the state of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first state as the origin return start switch 3610, and regulates the origin return operation of the movable effect unit 3600.

By the way, in the processing shown in steps 28, S30, and 32 of FIG. 175B, as a case where it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM and the error display processing of step S33 is executed, for example, after step 58 of FIG. It is conceivable that only the power supplied to the control unit becomes temporarily unavailable, such as recovery without executing the main control side power-off processing that should be executed.
At this time, after it is confirmed that the RAM is abnormal, the control unit transmits a command indicating that the RAM is abnormal in step S33 of FIG. If the command is recognized as a valid command, it notifies that the RAM is abnormal using a speaker or a display device.
After that, since the control unit executes loop processing, it is necessary to turn on the power again for recovery. is being done.
In the processing of steps S202, S204 and S206, the same RAM abnormality check processing as in steps S28, S30 and S32 of FIG. 175B is executed. At this time, as for the set value, if the acquired value is an abnormal value, a low set value (set value 1) is set as the initial value.
In step S200 of FIG. 178, the value of the area where the setting value is recorded is acquired, and after determining whether the value is appropriate, the value is maintained as it is, or the initial value described above is restored. Although it is determined whether to re-set, the initial values may be directly set without executing steps S200 and S208.

If such a situation occurs immediately after the power is turned on, and the return-to-origin operation is being performed, the production control device receives a command indicating that the RAM is abnormal, which is transmitted from the control unit, and the RAM is abnormal. A speaker or a display device (effect display device 1600 or base monitor 1310h) is used to notify that this is the case, and the return-to-origin operation is interrupted. The notification using the device is stopped, and the initial screen is displayed on the display device through the preparation screen. Receiving it will start over from the beginning.

If the RAM still has an abnormality after the power is turned on again, the RAM is notified by a speaker or a display device.
At this time, the base monitor 1310h switches to an anomaly notification function for informing that the RAM is abnormal, which is different from the original display function as the base monitor and the display function as the setting change. I'm trying to light up the segment.
Furthermore, if there is an abnormality such as an interruption in the movable effect unit 3600, the abnormality (for example, interruption of the return-to-origin operation) in the movable effect unit 3600 is displayed using the display device (base monitor 1310h). are announced with different special indications.

At this time, regarding the notification using the speaker, in the present embodiment, since the occurrence of an abnormality in the RAM is ranked as a more serious abnormality, priority is given to this, and the notification is given for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the notification by the speaker regarding the abnormality of the movable effect unit 3600 is continuously notified after the notification period of the predetermined period ends. In addition, regarding the abnormality notification of the movable effect unit 3600 by the speaker, the notification period may be set and notified from the point where the notification period ends, or the notification period may be set and started from the point where the abnormality is confirmed. , the notification may be started in a state where the sound is muted or the volume is suppressed. In the latter case, if the RAM abnormality is notified for a longer period of time than the RAM abnormality notification period, when the RAM abnormality notification period ends, the sound volume that has been muted or suppressed continues to be reduced. A value can be set to notify the remaining time.

Here, in the return-to-origin operation, the presence or absence of signals from all the detection sensors provided at the origin position of each movable effect unit 3600 is first checked. If the order of driving is wrong, there is a risk that the movable parts will come into contact with each other. Therefore, the performance control device sequentially outputs drive signals to the motors in accordance with a predetermined order in which contact is not caused. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 having three movable parts 3600g (not shown, they are referred to as movable part A, movable part B, and movable part C, respectively), the result of confirming the signal of the detection sensor is that there is no detection signal for the movable part B. When , it is determined that the movable portion B is not at the origin position, and a drive signal is output in the direction of the origin to the motor that drives the movable portion B before the movable portions A and C. When the detection signal can be confirmed, all movable parts are assumed to be at the origin position, and a predetermined origin return operation is started. Conversely, if the detection signal cannot be confirmed even after repeatedly outputting the drive signal, it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the movable portion B, and the abnormality is reported using a speaker or a display device. If the movable part B is not detected even if it is at the origin position, the detection sensor may be out of order. Alternatively, if the base monitor 1310h is used as a display device, all seven segments of four digits are used to display an error such as "E.01.C". It may be specified by number and notified.

In addition, although the RAM clear switch 1310f is also used as a switch used for the change operation of the setting change operation, the RAM clear switch 1310f is also used as a trigger for executing RAM clear in the payout control board 633.
Furthermore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the abnormality determination process executed by the payout control board 633, resetting of information stored in the RAM regarding payout control, identification of an abnormal point, repair method, etc. are navigated by voice. In addition, it is also used as a transmission trigger for sending a command to the sub-control board via the main control board 1310X.
In addition, when there is an abnormality in the RAM of the payout control board 633, RAM clear processing is executed in the same manner as the RAM abnormality of the main control board 1310X. In other words, since it is related to the function that can switch the change of the internal information advantageously or disadvantageously, when the RAM clear processing is executed for the RAM abnormality of the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310X should be notified.
In this case also, the base monitor 1310h is used to notify with a different display than when the main control RAM is abnormal. Then, the game may be stopped in the same manner, and the setting change process may be executed again to perform the recovery procedure.
As for the place where the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided, it is preferable to mount it on the main control board 1310X within the board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, considering that the paths such as wiring and connectors are exposed.
On the contrary, when mounted on the payout control board 633 in the payout control board box 632 of the payout control unit 620d, in the abnormality determination process executed by the payout control board 633, resetting of information stored in the RAM regarding payout control, , it is only used as a trigger for guiding the identification of an abnormal location, repair method, etc. by voice, and it is desirable to mount it on the main control board 1310X even when comparing the roles.

In addition, the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 need to be mounted with a connector and an I/F circuit for connecting with the test equipment of the inspection organization in order to undergo the compatibility inspection of the inspection organization before introduction to the market. There is However, these devices are necessary only for conformity inspections and are not used in mass-produced products. Therefore, the main control unit 1300 and the payout control unit 620d mass-produced to be introduced to the market are not equipped with connectors and I/F circuits for inspection.
Therefore, in the main control unit 1300 and the payout control unit 620d of the present embodiment, a connector and an I/F circuit for inspection are provided around the base monitor 1310h or the base monitor 1310h that functions as a display of the setting value at the time of setting change operation. It is By doing so, there is an empty space around the base monitor 1310h of the main control unit 1300 and the payout control unit 620d, in which connectors and I/F circuits for inspection are not mounted. .

In the embodiment, when forming the base monitor 1310h with a multi-digit display (four digits in the embodiment), a single display capable of displaying all the digits in series is not purposely used. The vessels are arranged side by side with the required number of digits at predetermined intervals. As a result, the mounting surface that is hidden by the display and is not exposed is divided into digits, which substantially makes it difficult to carry out fraudulent work to hide it with the display.

In addition, for the setting display, the 7-segment display placed closer to the hinge part out of the four 7-segment displays is used, and the other three 7-segment displays are It is not used and is extinguished during the setting change operation.
Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is switched from the state in which the setting change is permitted to the state in which the setting change is not permitted, the setting display displays the setting information last switched by the setting change operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f for a predetermined period. The display function is switched to that of the base monitor 1310h.
As a result, it is possible to provide an appropriate distance from the eye position of the worker who works while standing on the open side of the body frame 4 . Therefore, it is possible to make the set values easily visible to workers in a wide range of age groups, especially older workers.
In addition, since it is less likely to be affected by the lighting in the game hall and the dramatic lighting of other pachinko machines 1, erroneous input of set values due to misreading can be reduced. Even if it is necessary to check the setting value of the setting display during business hours, the setting display can be hidden from the player by locating it near the hinge portion of the body frame 4. become easier.

[10-3. Technical idea α]
The above embodiment includes a technical idea α for the following problems.

[10-3-1. Task]
A game machine has a power switch on the rear side of the main body frame that turns on and off the power supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It is common to leave it in the "on" state and turn on and off the original power switch provided on the island facility to collectively supply or cut off the power supply to all the game machines in that island facility.

On the other hand, there have been many visual production devices that have mechanical movable production units, but in recent years, in order to further increase the interest of players, large movable production units have been introduced, such as having a plurality of movable parts. tend to become
If the moving part, which is also the centerpiece of the game, does not operate normally during the game, it will cause a decrease in the interest of the players. movement to return to the origin position (hereinafter referred to as return-to-origin operation) is confirmed. Even so, the movement of the movable part may sometimes stop or become unstable for some reason during the game. In that case, one of the recovery measures is to reset the microprocessors installed in the multiple control units that control the game machine, but since this cannot be reset directly, turn the game machine's power switch on and off. Therefore, the power may be turned off once and then re-supplied. Only at this time, the door frame and body frame of the target game machine are opened together and the power switch is operated.

However, in the conventional game machine, as soon as the power is supplied, the above-described return-to-origin operation is started, and the movable part of the movable production unit moves. There was a risk of applying excessive stress to the supporting hinge.

The present technical idea was made in view of the above, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of reducing the stress applied to the hinge portions of the door frame and the body frame.

[10-3-2-α1. Technical idea α1]
an outer frame;
a body frame supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable like a single door;
a game board detachably attached to the body frame;
a movable effect unit having a movable part that returns to the origin position after moving from the origin position and performing a predetermined action;
a control unit that controls the movable production unit;
In a gaming machine in which the movable portion moves to perform a predetermined return-to-origin operation when power is supplied to the control unit,
an origin return start switch that can be operated from the rear side of the body frame when the body frame is in an open state;
when power is supplied to the control unit and the return-to-origin start switch is in the first state, the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion is regulated;
A gaming machine characterized in that the origin return operation of the movable portion is performed on condition that the origin return start switch is changed from the first state to the second state.
While the return-to-origin start switch is in the first state, the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion is regulated, and by changing the return-to-origin start switch to the second state, the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion is performed. When the hinge portion is in the open state where the load is the most, it is possible to avoid the risk of the vibration of the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion becoming a follow-up strike.

[10-3-2-α2. Technical thought α2]
A display device for displaying the state of the return-to-origin start switch is provided, and the display of the display device changes when the return-to-origin start switch is switched from the first state to the second state. A game machine according to technical idea α1.
Since the state of the return-to-origin start switch can be recognized from the change in the display on the display device, the timing of execution of the return-to-origin operation can be visually and clearly recognized. As a result, the work of supplying power with the body frame in the open state can be performed calmly without worrying about the state of the movable part, so that work mistakes can be reduced.

[10-3-2-α3. Technical thought α3]
A detecting means capable of detecting an open/closed state of the body frame is provided, the return-to-origin start switch has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detecting means has detected the closed state of the body frame. The game machine according to the technical idea α1 or α2, characterized in that the origin return operation of the movable portion is performed with the above as a trigger.
In such a game machine, since the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion is executed after the body frame is closed, the stress applied to the hinge portion can be minimized.

[10-3-2-α4. Technical thought α4]
Technical idea α1 or α2, characterized in that the origin return start switch is changed from the first state to the second state, and the origin return operation is executed after a predetermined time has passed. game machine.
In such a game machine, since the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the return-to-origin start switch is switched to the second state, the body frame is kept in the closed state or closed until the execution. It can be changed to a near state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the return-to-origin operation of the movable portion in a state in which the body frame is wide open, so that the stress applied to the hinge portion due to the vibration of the return-to-origin operation can be reduced.

[10-3-2-α5. Technical thought α5]
A display device for displaying the state of the return-to-origin start switch,
The control unit can interrupt the return-to-origin operation of the movable part,
The game machine according to any one of the technical ideas α1 to α4, wherein the state in which the return-to-origin operation is interrupted is notified by the display of the display device.
In such a game machine, since the display device for displaying the state of the return-to-origin start switch is used to notify the interruption of the return-to-origin operation of the movable part, the number of display devices can be reduced, thereby reducing the cost. As a matter of course, it is possible to provide a margin in the arrangement of parts.

[10-3-3. Effect of technical idea α]
It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing stress applied to hinge portions of door frames and body frames.

[11. Control processing of the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (especially the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second start opening passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit", 15R A process of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big winning game state. In addition, when it becomes a mode suggesting "2R big win", the processing of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big win gaming state is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating the time saving state, and the 2R jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state has become a mode suggesting "2R jackpot". When ending the state, it is set when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and during the non-time saving state. Then, when the time saving flag is the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuation times of the time saving state, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In that case, when the big hit game state is terminated, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The time-saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value becomes '0', but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes '0'. Sometimes, it is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 201 described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S237), execute the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. The processing of S245 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, the random numbers obtained in step S241 are stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol. is to be a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then the process is terminated.

However, in the processing of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. Along with updating so as to correspond to the number of memories, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command (first reservation number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 4)) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4). It's like

FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S241, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will occur, and if a big win will not occur, a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加The mode type of the game presentation is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S262).

By transmitting the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), it is stored corresponding to the first starting port 2002 where the starting winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win if it is a big win, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big win. Preliminary determination information such as whether to execute a ready-to-win effect as the game effect to be executed or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is performed by peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before starting the variable display according to the start winning. You will be able to understand the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be announced in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "1" (step S252). In the processing of this step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253- The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. store in

However, in the processing of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of second reserved storage changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. Along with updating so as to correspond to the number of memories, a command (second reservation number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 1)) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1). It's like

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 is set to "4", while the second start port 2004 is played. The upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on the entry of ball B is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the time saving state, and the second special symbol variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, so the second reservation memory number Even if the upper limit of is set to "1", the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time. Even if the game ball B enters the game ball B, the player is prevented from being in a disadvantageous situation such as not being able to obtain a chance of a big winning lottery.

FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S239 of the special symbol process processing are similar program modules, and the random number used for determination And only the table is different, here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol process processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

In addition, the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 175A).

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers (for example, first special random numbers, first pattern random numbers, reach random numbers, variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the first special symbol that is stored in the first storage area out of the random numbers are read out from the RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in a identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the hit/loss of the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table shown in FIG. When the second special symbol normal process is executed, it is compared with the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 197(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random numbers, one type of first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types different from the jackpot determination value. The first special random numbers are matched with the big hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won the small win, and the first special random numbers of 315 types are matched with the loss determination value indicating that the first special random number is a loss. It is associated (big hit probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 3/319). In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one type of second special random number is a jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. 144 types of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit determination value match with the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and the 174 types of second special random numbers are the loss determination that indicates that the above loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting opening 2002 is executed The player is in a more advantageous state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special As a result of comparison with a random number), when it is determined to be a big win (step S312), a big win flag indicating that the variation wins a big win is set (step S313), and the win determination process is terminated.

Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S302 are compared (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time saving state. and a reach determination table at the time of state. And in the reach determination table at the time of the time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time-saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time-saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, The reach random numbers are associated with each of the 67 types of reach random numbers so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag is set to indicate reach, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 197(B). to determine the type of jackpot, and determine the mode (stopped pattern of the first special pattern) of the first special pattern corresponding to the decided type of jackpot when the variation control is stopped (step S322).

In particular,
1. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times. By repeating (15 rounds), the game ball B is controlled (easy) into a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the big win game state ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). 2. 15R jackpot controlled to a time-saving state, which is terminated unless a jackpot is achieved by the time the fluctuation display is executed 77 times. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have won the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated twice. By repeating (2 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big prize hole 2005, and if it is controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state. Before the start of the 2R big win game state, control is made to a time-saving state in which the game is terminated unless a big hit occurs during the time when the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of One of two kinds of big wins, namely, 2R big win controlled to the normal state after the end of the big win game state if it is controlled to the non-time-saving state, is determined.

In the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R big hit, and 192 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 2R big hit. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big win has a probability of 4%, and a 2R big win has a probability of 96%. Similarly, in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, 196 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R big hit, and 4 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 2R big hit. That is, when a lottery result of a big win is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number, there is a probability of 98% that the game will be a 15R big win, and a probability of 2% that it will be a 2R big win. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the probability of determining a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002, the game is played It is designed to be in an advantageous situation for those who

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. In the second special symbol stopping symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R big win is determined, the 15R big winning symbol is determined as the big winning symbol, and when the 2R big winning is determined, the 2R big winning symbol is determined as the big winning symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131. The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control a small winning game state in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the accessory winning opening 2006, All the game balls B winning the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state are guided to the first losing opening 2535 to accept the game balls B to the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008. The first small hit that is difficult 2. An opening/closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control a small winning game state in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the accessory winning opening 2006, One game ball B among the game balls B winning the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is guided to the third sorting device 2550 after the closing of the accessory winning opening 2006, thereby providing a second V. Acceptance of the game ball B into the winning opening 2008 is enabled, and when the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning opening 2008, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small winning game state (for example, 29 Seconds), or when it is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 that 10 game balls B have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern for closing is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), and the game ball B is big. Control to a 15R jackpot game state in which the ball can be entered (easy) in the prize winning opening 2005, and after the jackpot game state is completed, the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. 3. The second small hit is controlled to a time-saving state that is terminated if there is no big hit in between. By executing an opening/closing pattern in which the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed nine times, the game ball B can enter the accessory winning opening 2006 (easily) and is controlled to a small winning game state. , one game ball B among the game balls B winning the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the closing of the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball is After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the small winning game state based on B being accepted in the first V winning hole 2007, or 10 game balls B win the big winning hole 2005. When the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that the opening and closing pattern is closed 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball B can (easily) enter the big winning hole 2005, and is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state. Then, after the end of the big win game state, until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, it is controlled to a time saving state that ends if the big win is not achieved. One of three types of small wins is determined as a big win.

In the small hit symbol determination table compared with the first random number, 199 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained, and 1 judgment value is distributed when the third small prize is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, the second small win has a probability of 99.5%, the third small win has a probability of 0.5%, and the second small win has a probability of 0.5%. I don't win a single prize. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second random number, 20 judgment values are distributed when the first small prize is obtained, and 130 judgment values are distributed when the second small prize is obtained. , 50 judgment values are distributed in the case of the third small hit. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the first small win has a probability of 10%, the second small win has a probability of 65%, and the probability is 25%. It will be the third small hit. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the small winning symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number wins the prize winning slot 2006 compared to the small winning symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. By guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B to the first V prize winning opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small win in which the 15R big win game state is always reached after the small win game state is finished is increased. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting port 2002, the game is played It is designed to be in an advantageous situation for those who

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when the second small winning pattern is determined, the second small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern, and when the third small winning pattern is determined, the third small winning pattern is determined as the small winning pattern. . In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when it is determined to be the first small hit, it is determined as the first small winning symbol as the small winning design, and when it is determined to be the second small winning design. , it is determined as the second small winning pattern, and when it is determined as the third small winning pattern, it is determined as the third small winning pattern as the small winning pattern.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, determines the winning pattern (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, as the process of step S328. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328 ). And after that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and left decorative design → right decorative design → middle Stop and display in the order of the decorative patterns (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 specifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, If the pattern ("final battle") is determined, and if the 2R jackpot is specified, the 2R jackpot pattern (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern among the patterns "0" to "9") ), and when the 15R jackpot is specified, the 15R jackpot pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns of '0' to '9' with the same odd number pattern) is decided. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss If it is determined to be a design), and if a loss is specified, it is determined to be a design that does not involve reach (a combination in which at least the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are different patterns), and fluctuation When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and controlled.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be controlled to the time saving state until the maximum 77 times the variable display is executed, but the time saving state The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after the jackpot game state, control is performed to the time saving state, and when a predetermined number of (for example, two) jackpots occur thereafter, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of times of the jackpot game state is completed. , may be controlled to a normal state. In addition, even if the number of occurrences of big wins is less than a predetermined number, the non-time-saving state may be controlled during the big-win game state, and the time-saving state control may be performed again after the big win game state.

FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If so (step S341), select a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), and select a small hit flag. is set (step S343), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit corresponding to the type of the small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop design setting process is selected (step S344). , If the reach flag is set (step S345), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal In the case of a loss (a loss in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is acquired from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter in which the number of times of continuing the time saving state is set is "0". do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving control is ended is set (step S354).

When it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point , the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, while the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second during the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), A special pattern variation pattern is set in such a manner that the special pattern variation time information set to about 12 seconds in a non-working time state is associated with the special pattern random number (first special pattern, second special pattern). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during the time saving state, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the non-time saving state, so that the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is extremely short, Variation time information of the above special design is set.

FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed for a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Normal state control) will start.

Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game (step S387), and starts the big win game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot number counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process to be described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed. to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control processing to be described later, the big win opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big win opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0". When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), when the big win frequency counter is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0", the process shifts to the big winning mouth post-opening process (step S403) and ends the big win game. Execute control that causes

Then, a jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. It has become.

In addition, when the jackpot in-execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, when the jackpot game is ended, specifically, the jackpot is executed in the jackpot control processing (step S235A) after the jackpot opening (step S403). Opening and closing control of the big winning hole 2005 according to the type (for example, after the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when 10 game balls B have won the big winning hole 2005, the big winning hole sensor 2403 (opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern twice or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). While the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114) by resetting the jackpot executing flag, the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S386), if the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start the small hit game. A small-hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time (time for displaying the start of the small-hit game, etc.) until the start of the small-hit game is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small-hit running flag indicating that the small-hit game is being executed is set (step S393). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) start command). As a result, the effect of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, similarly, the small hit start command (first small Hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit start command) is set.

In addition, when the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, when the small hit game is ended, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later ) to end the opening/closing control of the prize winning port 2006 according to the type of the small win (for example, the opening/closing pattern of opening the prize winning port 2006 for a short period of time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice or nine times). reset when By resetting the small hit executing flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when it becomes a loss, the waiting time (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variable display is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processing of steps S386 to S394 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (step S395), and the process ends.

FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The above-mentioned peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are shifted to the above-mentioned jackpot game state based on the fact that the mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) has become a big hit symbol. 1510 or waits until the next round is started before opening the big winning opening (step S401)
2. The large prize winning port 2005 is controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped becomes a big hit pattern, or the big prize winning port 2005 is opened to the state based on the start of the next round. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have won the big winning hole 2005, it is closed. Special winning mouth opening process (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for the big winning opening to wait until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state will end when all the rounds are completed (step S403).

The big win process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the big winning hole pre-opening process (step S401) should be performed. In addition, in the process during the opening of the big winning prize gate (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the opening of the big winning prize gate 2005, a big winning round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the big winning prize gate 2005 is closed. At the end of the round controlled by the state, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is implemented by the device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small-hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small-hit process flag.

1. Small hit start processing (step S410) for executing the setting process for starting the small hit game state
2. Small-hit mid-process for monitoring the entrance and release time of the game ball B during the small-hit game state (step S411)

The small hit process flag is operated in the process of step S42 so as to indicate that the small hit start process (step S410) should be performed. Further, when the entry of the game ball B into the specific area is detected in the small-hit middle processing, a big-hit in-progress flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big-hit game state (15 rounds in this example) is determined as a big hit. Set the number counter and terminate the process. As a result, the big-hit game state is started following the small-hit game state.

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is ON and the game ball B has passed through the normal winning hole 2003, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. Execute winning process.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S803) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S804) in which lottery processing and the like are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing to stop the fluctuation display of the design (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the second start opening door 2411 retreats and the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807)

In addition, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 175A).

[12. Game in small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small winning game state will be described. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit, the opening and closing pattern of opening the accessory winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed a predetermined number of times. state, and all the game balls B that enter the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state and are detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 are detected by the first losing opening sensor 2516 and the third losing opening sensor 2518. , the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and the second V winning opening sensor 2515, that is, when discharged from the inside of the accessory winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5, the small hit game state is set to terminate. In addition, the game ball B entering the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and the first V winning opening sensor 2514 and the second V winning opening are received. When detected by the mouth sensor 2515, it is controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state, and the game ball B entering the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small win game state is the first loss hole 2535 or the third loss hole. When it is accepted by 2555 and detected by the first losing opening sensor 2516 and the third losing opening sensor 2518, after the small hit game state, it is controlled to the normal state or the time saving state according to the control state before the small hit.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the game ball B that has won the accessory winning opening 2006 is controlled to be guided to the first losing opening 2535, and the game winning the accessory winning opening 2006 One game ball B out of the balls B is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550, and after circulating in the third sorting table 2554, the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third loses One game ball B among the game balls B winning in the second small hit controlled to be received in any of the openings 2555 and the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007. It is designed to control to one of the small hit game state of the third small hit to be controlled in such a manner.

In addition, in the first small hit, the number of times of opening and closing the accessory winning opening 2006 is smaller than that in the second and third small winnings, and in addition, all the game balls B that have won the accessory winning opening 2006 win the special prize. Since it is guided to the first losing mouth 2535 closest to the mouth 2006 and detected by the first losing mouth sensor 2516, the execution period of the small winning game state (period from the start of the small winning game state to the end) is short, In the third small hit, one game ball B among the game balls B winning the accessory winning opening 2006 is placed in the first V winning opening 2007 which is the next closest to the first losing opening 2535 from the accessory winning opening 2006. Since it is guided to and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small hit game state is short next to the first small hit. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball B among the game balls B winning the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided to the farthest third sorting device 2550 from the accessory winning opening 2006. After the game ball B guided to the strikeout device 2550 is circulated in the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2515. , Since the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555 is detected by the third losing opening sensor 2518, the execution period of the small winning game state is the longest among the three types of small winning.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, when it is determined as a small hit based on the first special random number, it is a second small win. The ratio is set high, and the second small hit is executed in most cases in the normal state, whereas in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hit is based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small win is executed, the ratio of the third small win is made higher than in the normal state, and in the time-saving state, the third small win is executed at a rate of one for four small wins. .

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning game state, the time saving state after the 15R big winning game state is advantageous for the player. state, one game ball B among the game balls B entered into the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state is circulated in the third distribution table 2554. While making the player's heart throb as to whether it will be accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 or accepted in the third losing opening 2555, attention is given over a certain period of time, while a small winning game is played in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the second V prize winning port 2008 during the state, it is only controlled to the time saving state again after the 15R big hit game state, so of the game balls B entering the accessory winning prize port 2006 When one game ball B circulates inside the third sorting table 2554, there is a risk of causing a decline in the interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, by increasing the ratio of the third small win with a short execution period of the small winning game state, the small winning game state is shortened during the time saving state. It is designed to end on time.

In addition, as described above, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from the storable state to the non-storable state in the third small hit, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 becomes the first hit. It flows down the second sorting guideway 2541 of the second sorting device 2540 through the passage 2536, touches the upper surface of the sorting door 2544 in the closed state, is guided to the right, and enters the first V prize opening 2007. do. Therefore, in the third small hit, the game ball B distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 from the storable state to the unstorable state is discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time. and the player cannot see it. In addition, the first V winning opening 2007 can be entered when the sorting door 2544 is moving forward above the second losing opening 2543, but the sorting door 2544 operates in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the operating state. That is, the existence of the sorting door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see), and the game ball B sorted to the first V winning port 2007 by the sorting door 2544 can be placed on the game board 5 in a short time. Since the presence of the first V winning hole 2007 is also difficult to recognize due to the fact that it is ejected backward, the player can see that the game ball B has been guided to the first V winning hole 2007, in other words, the first V winning hole 2007. It is difficult to notice that the game ball B passes. In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B has been guided to the first V winning opening 2007 when the third small hit occurs in the time saving state, A small winning game state is executed without being conscious of the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the V winning opening (the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008)), and the corresponding small winning game is played. A 15R jackpot game state can be executed after the end of the state. As a result, the small winning game state and the 15R big winning game state are continuously generated in a short time, and the game amusement can be improved.

In addition, when the game ball B is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 as the second small hit, and when the game ball B is distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 as the third small hit, the production The effects of the small winning game state executed on the display device 1600 are different. Specifically, when the second small hit is achieved, the game ball B distributed to the third distribution device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, In contrast, when the third small win is achieved, a production that does not make the rotation of the distribution rotator 2531 conscious (for example, when the third small win is achieved, the big win By performing the same notification as in the case of becoming (such as notifying that it was a big hit instead of a small hit when it became the third small hit), the player realized that the small hit game state was executed. As a special bonus chance to acquire prize balls different from the prize balls obtainable in the big win game state, a prize ball acquisition opportunity similar to the small win game state is executed before the start of the big win game state. A special bonus chance may be executed before the start of the 15R big win gaming state, and the player who recognizes that he or she has won the 15R big win gaming state may play a different game from the 15R big winning gaming state. Since a prize ball can be acquired, amusement in the game is improved.

In addition, if the time to reach the V winning opening is shorter for the third small winning than for the second small winning, the path until the game ball B guided by the second small winning is accepted by the V winning opening The length of the (first path) and the path (second path) until the game ball B guided by the third small hit is accepted into the V winning opening becomes longer in proportion to the arrival time to the V winning opening. If the arrival time to the V winning hole is longer than the third small win, the route (first route) until the game ball B guided by the second small win is accepted by the V winning hole is selected. The game ball B guided by the third small hit may be shorter than the path (second path) until it is received in the V winning hole. For example, by providing deceleration means for decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball B in the first path, the game ball B passing through the second path may reach the V winning opening in a longer time.

In addition, in the above example, a plurality of V winning openings, that is, the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are provided. One game ball B among the winning game balls B is distributed to a third distribution device 2550 having a second V prize opening 2008, and in the variable display of the second special pattern executed in the time saving state, the accessory is By guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B that have won the winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007, which is next to the first losing opening 2535 in the distance from the accessory winning opening 2006, Although the execution period of the winning game state is configured to be different, the distance to the V winning opening, the number of V winning openings, etc. are not limited to those described above. The technical idea of the present invention is also applicable to Specifically, for example, a means (obstacle etc.) is provided, the second small hit with a long arrival time to the V winning opening and the means for inhibiting or delaying the acceptance of the game ball B to the V winning opening are not provided (at least more than the second small hit As long as the number of items to be provided is small), the third small hit with a short arrival time to the V winning opening, and the normal state according to the time to reach the common V winning opening (first special symbol You may make it change the execution ratio in a variable display) and a time saving state (variable display of a 2nd special design).

[12-1. Error notification in small winning game state]
Next, the error notification in the small winning game state will be described. In this example, the time until the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged in the small winning game state is monitored, and an error notification is performed when the game ball B is not discharged even after a predetermined period of time. .

FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-described small winning start process (step S411). In the small-hit start process, a setting process for starting the small-hit game state is executed.

When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and the interval timer times out (step S422), that is, when the standby time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small winning game state elapses, the small winning game state is started. An initial value "0" is set to an elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time (step S423).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the opening/closing pattern data according to the type of small win being executed (first small win, second small win, third small win) (step S424), and selects Based on the opened/closed pattern data, the control of the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is started (step S425), and the process is shifted to the above-mentioned small winning medium process (step S411). When the small hit process flag is updated (step S426), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes.

The opening/closing pattern data is provided for each type of small win, and indicates the operation mode of each of the prize winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state. It is a thing. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the prize winning port 2006, the distribution rotator 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the small hit type selected in step S424. 151, the prize winning port 2006, the sorting rotator 2531, and the sorting door 2544 operate.

FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the process during the small hit (step S412).

When the small hit middle process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to the elapsed timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game state, and the discharge monitoring timer described later is set. If so, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the discharge monitoring timer (step S431). When 1 is added to the elapsed timer, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the opening/closing pattern data selected in step S424 of the small winning start processing, and the opening/closing pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state). The data is read out, and opening/closing control is performed for the accessory winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the read opening/closing pattern data (step S432).

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006. If the accessory winning opening sensor 2513 is turned on (step S433), that is, the main control MPU 1310a If the game ball B is accepted, 1 is added to a residual ball counter that counts the residual balls that have not yet been ejected from the role prize winning port 2006 among the game balls B that have won the prize winning port 2006 (step S434). .

Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is first received in the accessory winning opening 2006 after the start of the small winning game state (when the first game ball B enters) (step S435), the longest period assumed until all game balls B entering the accessory winning opening 2006 including this game ball B are discharged is provided corresponding to each small hit type. The assumed longest period is set in the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small hit, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is all distributed to the second losing opening 2543 without being distributed to the first hitting passage 2536 by the distribution rotating body 2531. The shortest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10000 ms) in order to allow entry. In the case of the second small hit, one game ball B out of the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531, and the first hit passage is selected. In order for the game ball B that has entered the third sorting device 2550 through 2536 to enter either the second V winning hole 2008 or the two third losing holes 2555 after circulating in the third sorting table 2554. , the longest period among the three types of small hits is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 180000 ms). In the case of the third small hit, one of the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotator 2531, but the first In order to accept the game ball B that has passed through the hit passage 2536 at the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period is set next to the first small hit as the assumed longest period ( 60000s).

The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in the above step S431, and the discharge monitoring timer times out when the number of game balls B that have entered the prize winning port 2006 and the number of game balls B that have been discharged from the prize winning port 2006 do not match. If it continues until later, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act has been performed.

In addition, the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state is monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the assumed longest period according to the type of small winning being executed, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity has occurred. Alternatively, the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory winning opening 2006 in the small winning game state is monitored, and this elapsed time is the assumed maximum period corresponding to the small winning type being executed. When it becomes, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act is being performed, or the timing at which the game ball B is actually distributed by the distribution rotator 2531 (in the first small hit With the start of the small hit game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized), and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotating body 2531 is facing upward. The timing at which the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotator 2531 is turned to the right (the timing of the first distribution operation of the distribution rotator 2531), and the distribution rotator in the second small hit After the timing of the first sorting operation of 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is again turned ON (energized), and the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned on from the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 faces upward. The timing at which the accommodation portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is turned to the OFF (non-energized) state and operates so as to face the right direction (timing of the second distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531). After the timing of the second sorting operation of the minute rotator 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is again turned ON (energized), and the first sorting is performed from the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 faces upward. Elapsed time from the timing when the solenoid 2532 is turned off (non-energized) and the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotator 2531 is directed to the right (timing of the third sorting operation of the sorting rotator 2531). It is also possible to monitor the time and determine that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act is being performed when the elapsed time reaches the expected longest period corresponding to the type of small win being executed.

In addition, when detecting the discharge of the game ball B accepted in the role winning opening 2006, that is, when discharging the game ball B accepted in the role winning opening 2006, the first loss opening sensor 2516, the first When the game ball B is detected by any of the V winning opening sensor 2514, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, and the third losing opening sensor 2518 (step S437), the residual ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438). ).

Then, whether or not the residual ball counter is "0", that is, whether the number of game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls B ejected from the accessory winning opening 2006 match. It is determined whether or not (step S439), and if the residual number counter is "0", it is determined that no abnormality or fraud has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the ejection monitoring timer has timed out (step S440) in order to determine whether or not an abnormality or fraud has occurred. . The discharge monitoring timer is provided corresponding to each of the small winning types as the longest period assumed from the start of the small winning game state to the discharge of all the game balls B from the accessory winning opening 2006 as described above. It indicates the remaining period of the assumed maximum period that can be If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing the subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed again, the small hit middle processing is executed and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the emission monitoring timer times out. become.

If the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440 when the residual ball counter is not "0", it is determined that an abnormality or fraud has occurred, and a discharge error is notified (step S441). It is designed to terminate the processing during the hit. The ejection error notification includes an error display on the production display device 1600, output of notification sound by the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and a predetermined mode by lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. In this example, a display such as "Emission is abnormal." is not performed. That is, the state in which the residual ball counter is not "0" indicates a slight abnormality such as that most of the game balls B that have entered the prize winning opening 2006 are not ejected, so the abnormality of the gaming machine is notified. The display is made so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable or uneasy. After performing the discharge error notification in step S441, by ending the small hit medium process without updating the small hit process flag, next special symbol of the main control side timer interrupt process and special electric auditors control process (step When S114) is executed, the process during the small hit is executed again. That is, all of the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are discharged, or the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by the game clerk to completely erase the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The ejection error notification is executed without ending the small winning game state until it is erased (until it is reset).

When it is determined that the residual ball counter is "0" at step S439, it is determined whether the game ball B has entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (step S442). If the game ball B does not enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442, that is, the game ball B enters the first losing opening 2535 or the third losing opening 2555, and the first losing opening occurs. If detected by the mouth sensor 2516 or the third losing mouth sensor 2518, a small winning end command for instructing the execution of the effect at the end of the small winning game state is set (step S443), and the small winning start process (step S411 ) when the small hit process flag is updated (step S447), this process is terminated.

If the game ball B enters the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514 or the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the jackpot game starts. After setting the standby time to the interval timer (step S444), reset the flag during execution of the small hit and set the flag during execution of the big hit (step S445). In addition, a V-win big-hit start command for instructing execution of an effect at the start of the big-hit game state based on the reception of the game ball B into the first V-win-win opening 2007 and the second V-winning opening 2008 is set (step S446), When the small hit process flag is updated (step S447) so that the process shifts to the winning start process (step S411), this process ends.

Thus, in this example, when the game ball B is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time the game ball B is discharged from the accessory winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is increased. is subtracted by 1, the number of game balls B remaining without being ejected from the accessory winning opening 2006 (center member 2500) can be grasped. In addition, the period (assumed longest period) until the ejection error notification is executed is made different according to the small hit type, in other words, the distribution destination of the game ball B, and the game ball B that has passed through the first hit passage 2536 is the second. In the third small hit received at the second V winning port 2008 without entering the three sorting device 2550, the game ball B enters the third sorting device 2550 and circulates in the third sorting table 2554. The period (assumed longest period) until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter than the second small hit. In other words, the period until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter for the small win that takes a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening.

Since the game ball B does not normally remain in the accessory winning opening 2006, if the state in which the game ball B remains in the accessory winning opening 2006 continues for a long period of time, some abnormality ( It can be determined that an error) has occurred. In addition, when it is detected that more game balls B are discharged than the number of game balls B that have entered the role prize winning port 2006, a fraudulent act such as illegally winning the game ball B into the role prize winning port 2006 is performed. It can be determined that there is a possibility that The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent actions, and when there is suspicion of these, an ejection error notification is made.

Also, in this example, it is detected that game balls B remain in the accessory winning opening 2006, or that a larger number of game balls B than the game balls B that have entered the accessory winning opening 2006 have been discharged. As a result, even after the ejection error notification is performed based on the fact that the ejection monitoring timer has timed out when the residual ball counter is not "0", the game is not stopped and the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. During winning process, the value of the remaining ball counter is monitored. It automatically returns to the state of discriminating the entry of the game ball B into the 2V winning opening 2008, and terminates the small winning game state.

In this example, even if the value of the residual ball counter does not become "0" after the ejection error notification is executed in step S441 of the small winning process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, Priority is given to error notification related to this serious abnormality. As a serious abnormality, for example, when one of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a (magnetism detection error notification), when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification ), when it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door open error notification), and the like. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state is terminated, and error notification related to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification etc.), and after the end of the error notification related to the serious abnormality, the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state may be restarted again, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be changed to the small hit game state. By overwriting the emission error notification in step S441 and executing it, the emission error notification in step S441 in the small hit game state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. Output, lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are not reflected (executed to be visible and visible), but are not reflected (executed behind the scenes), but serious abnormalities The content of the ejection error notification is advanced with the passage of time even while the error notification is being performed. Display on the effect display device 1600, output of the main frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc., lighting / blinking of lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. (For example, when an error notification related to a serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after starting the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small winning game state and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, a serious abnormality 35 seconds after starting the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state after finishing the error notification related to it).

Further, in step S439 of the small hit medium processing, the discharge error notification mode may be changed depending on whether the residual ball counter is "1" or more and when it is less than "0". If the residual ball counter is "1" or more, it indicates only a slight abnormality that the game ball B that has entered the prize winning opening 2006 is not discharged, while if the residual ball counter is less than "0". In this case, it indicates a serious abnormality in which more game balls B than the number of game balls B entered into the accessory winning opening 2006 are discharged. There is a possibility that Therefore, when a slight abnormality such that the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged occurs, as a discharge error notification 1, for example, as shown in FIG. It is abnormal." and the like, and the effect sound is continuously output from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., so that the error sound is not output, and the error sound is not output. A part of the LED is made to partially emit light, and when a serious abnormality occurs in which more game balls B than the number of game balls B entered has occurred, as a discharge error notification 2, for example, the entire area of the effect display device 1600 In addition, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and the error sound "Illegal action has been taken." The occurrence of fraudulent activity may be notified by outputting with sound volume and further by causing all of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 to emit light so that the entire door frame 3 emits light.

Also, in this example, the detection signal of the second losing mouth sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second distribution device 2540 in the second small winning game state When the game ball B guided to the distribution guideway 2551 is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the effect display device 1600 and the main body frame speaker. 622, a game ball B that circulates inside a third distribution table 2554 in a third distribution device 2550 by controlling a top central speaker, a top side speaker, and lamps/LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. An effect is executed to hype up which one of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 is accepted.

In addition, the detection signal of the second loss opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the game ball by the second loss opening sensor 2517 The presence or absence of the occurrence of an abnormality may be determined according to the detection of B. For example, when the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small winning type in the above-mentioned small winning middle processing, or according to the small winning type If there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the planned V winning opening or losing opening (different from the passage or winning opening scheduled according to the type of small win When the game ball B is headed to the path or the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the allocation error notification may be executed in step S441 of the minor winning process.

Specifically, as the V winning opening and the losing opening scheduled according to the type of the small hit, the first losing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small winning, and the second winning opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the second small winning. A V winning opening 2008 or a third losing opening 2555 is planned, and a first V winning opening 2007 is planned in the case of a third small hit. Then, in the case of the first small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B has been received in any one of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 in the small winning middle processing, In the case of the second small hit, when it is detected that the game ball B has been accepted in one of the first losing hole 2535 and the first V winning hole 2007 in the small winning process, in the case of the third small win, the small winning is in progress. When it is detected that the game ball B has been accepted in any one of the first losing opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 in the process, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, for example, as shown in FIG. As indicated by 207, a message such as "Illegal occurrence!" , and furthermore, all the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 emit light so that the entire door frame 3 emits light, thereby notifying the occurrence of fraud. Minute error notification may be executed. In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately reported, and the fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, a second distribution detection sensor for detecting the game ball B circulating inside the second distribution guideway 2541 is provided in the middle of the second distribution guideway 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is provided. may be input to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small hit, the game is played in any of the first V winning opening 2007, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third losing opening 2555 in the small winning medium process. If there is a possibility that the ball B will be accepted, that is, if it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guideway 2541 by detecting the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor, the second In the case of a small hit, although the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the processing during the small hit, the game ball B cannot be detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517, so that the ball passes through the second distribution guide path 2541. When it is determined that the game ball B is heading toward the first V winning opening 2007, in the case of the third small hit, the second loss opening sensor after the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle processing. When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second sorting guideway 2541 is heading toward the third sorting device 2550 by detecting the game ball B at 2517, the scheduled V winning opening such as When there is a possibility that the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the losing opening, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a state in which a fraudulent act is likely to occur can be made, and the fraudulent act can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, according to the degree of abnormality (fraudulent level), the form of distribution error notification may be changed. When it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small hit middle process, but the second loss When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second sorting guideway 2541 is heading toward the first V winning hole 2007 because the game ball B cannot be detected by the mouth sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high. Judging, for example, a message such as "Illegal occurrence!" is displayed on the entire area of the production display device 1600, and a loud sound of "Illegal action is being taken." In the case of the second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small win medium process and in the case of the third small win. Later, when it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is heading for the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the game ball B with the second loss opening sensor 2517, abnormal By judging that the degree is low and displaying, for example, "There is an emission abnormality" in a part of the effect display device 1600, output from the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. is not performed. The occurrence of an abnormality other than fraudulent activity may be notified. That is, when the game ball B passes through the path in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate higher than the percentage of the game ball B entering the V winning opening set in advance according to the type of the small hit. (When the V winning expectation level is higher than the V winning expectation level set in advance according to the type of small win being executed), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, and cheating is performed. The game ball B passes through the route in which the game ball B enters the V winning opening at a rate lower than the rate of the game ball B entering the V winning opening set in advance according to the type of the small win. If it is (when the V winning expectation is lower than the V winning expectation set in advance according to the type of small win being executed), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low and the fraud is committed. You may make it alert|report the generation|occurrence|production of abnormality different from. In addition, when the V winning expectation is lower than the V winning expectation set in advance according to the type of small win being executed, although the player himself/herself suffers a disadvantage, the game parlor side suffers damage. Since it does not occur, if the degree of such an abnormality is low, the sorting error notification may not be performed.

In addition, the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the small winning classification, or the V winning opening scheduled according to the small winning classification. During the period in which the distribution error notification is performed based on the possibility that the game ball B is detected in the V winning opening or the losing opening different from the opening or the losing opening, the special prize winning opening is performed in the small winning middle processing. Even if it is determined that a slight abnormality such that the game ball B that has entered the 2006 is not discharged has occurred, a V winning opening or a losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of the small win is used. Based on the detection of the game ball B and the possibility of detecting the game ball B in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of small win. The distribution error notification that is being executed is continued without being terminated. However, the ejection error notification 1 based on the fact that it is determined that a slight abnormality has occurred in which the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 has not been ejected in the small winning process is in a visible and viewable state. Although it is not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the content of the discharge error notification 1 progresses with the passage of time. Also, in this case, if the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the residual ball counter becomes "0", the game ball B that has entered the accessory winning opening 2006 is not discharged. Ejection error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period in which error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality ( In this example, the ejection error notification 1) is never visually and audibly performed. However, it is quietly executed behind the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (distribution error notification in this example), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even when the small winning game state and the big winning game state do not occur, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the first losing opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, The detection of the game ball B by the third loss opening sensor 2518 is monitored, and when the game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed and the occurrence of the fraudulent act is notified. It's like In addition, in a state where the small winning game state or the big winning game state does not occur, the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517 may be monitored. When the game ball B is detected by either the detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517, the degree of abnormality is high, that is, it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed, and the occurrence of the fraudulent act is notified. good. That is, in a state where the small winning game state or the big winning game state does not occur, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the game ball B entering the V winning opening, any path in the accessory winning opening 2006 is played. Even if the ball B has passed, it may be determined that a fraudulent act has occurred, and the occurrence of the fraudulent act may be notified.

In the above example, when the ejection error notification is executed in step S441, the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of small hit. Also, based on the possibility of detecting the game ball B in a V winning opening or losing opening different from the V winning opening or losing opening scheduled according to the type of small win, the distribution error notification is performed. In this case, the process during the small winning is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the residual ball counter, but the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the residual ball counter. In addition, even when the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the residual ball counter is monitored, and when the value of the residual ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the abnormal state is automatically restored to win a small hit. The game state may not be terminated. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

Also, after performing the distribution error notification, if the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or losing opening (regular acceptance opening) scheduled according to the small hit type, or according to the small hit type When the game ball B rolling on the scheduled route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second small hit is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517), the distribution error notification is terminated. You may make it In addition, after the discharge error notification, if the game ball B is detected at the V winning opening or losing opening (regular acceptance opening) scheduled according to the small hit type, or if the game ball B is detected according to the small hit type When the game ball B rolling on the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when the second small hit is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517), the discharge error notification is terminated. good too. In addition, the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer that causes the execution of the discharge error notification is detected by detecting the game ball B rolling on the route (regular route) scheduled according to the small hit type (for example, the second small In this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer is changed to the value during execution. Emission error notification may be made executable when the assumed maximum period corresponding to the small hit type is reached.

[13-1. volume control]
The volume control switch is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the second One special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the fluctuation pattern in the peripheral control unit Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the command, or until 0.5 seconds have passed after the fixed display of the decorative pattern after receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit) Except for this, the volume control switch is turned to adjust the volume of the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It can be adjusted by As described above, the volume control switch has a variable resistance value when it is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter changes the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. The voltage divided by is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and effects are output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. Sound flows. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, music, sound effects, etc. are produced from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. Sound flows.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the effect sounds such as music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the pachinko hall clerk of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are provided. (For example, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. It is designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed in five stages from mute to maximum volume unlike the substrate volume divided into seven stages described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass speaker on the main body frame 4 can be Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 is small, the volume is high when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. , maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special A certain period of time (in this example, peripheral control 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command in the unit and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received in the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ), the volume control switch is rotated to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects, and a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically Peripheral control unit initial setting process (step S1000) and the period until the current time setting process (step S1002) ends) and special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) in the special symbol (first special design, second special design) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display (in this example, after receiving the fluctuation pattern command at the peripheral control unit, 0.5 after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative design seconds, until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the decorative pattern has been confirmed and displayed), and the contact operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300 set in the variable production and the operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (effective period for accepting the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. By operating the operation unit 303, it is possible to adjust the volume of the sound effects such as music and sound effects. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first Special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the fluctuation pattern command at the peripheral control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the The operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in the variable effect (effective period for accepting the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. Except for , when the contact operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the contact operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated. can be adjusted to a desired volume (either from the minimum volume of 1 to the maximum volume of 5) by changing the volume of the effect sound of music or sound effects.

Specifically, the contact operation unit 302 is rotated to the right without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the amount of rotation of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to 1. The volume is changed to a stepped up volume, the contact operation part 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the amount of rotation of the contact operation part 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the effect sound is produced. The volume is changed to one level lower.

FIG. 208 shows the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame for bass sound of the main body frame 4 in accordance with the turning operation of the volume control switch and the turning operation of the contact operation portion 302 of the production operation unit 300 . While the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 622 is set to volume 5, the effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect to variably display the decorative pattern, and during this variable effect, the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a portion 303 is pressed and then a contact operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 208, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, without operating the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300, When the contact operation part 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the amount of rotation of the contact operation part 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation, the volume of the effect sound is lowered by one step from volume 5 to be changed to volume 4, and the contact operation part 302 is rotated. The change according to the operation is immediately reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. - 特許庁That is, the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. At the timing t1 of the rotation operation, the volume after this change is reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. .

Also, the scale of the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes according to the rotation operation of the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 . This makes it possible to visually determine the current volume setting. Also, in this example, an indicator displayed in response to the rotation operation of the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 that executes the effect using decorative symbols or the like. Also, this indicator is displayed on the top surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is translucently displayed so that the image of the variable effect executed behind the indicator can be recognized. In addition, a sub display device different from the effect display device 1600 that executes the variable effect by decorative patterns etc. may be provided. You may make it display an indicator on a sub display device. Further, in this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the contact operation unit 302 was completed. After the indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. You can let it run. Note that the above-described indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower right display area or the like that does not overlap the effect image or the like in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be partitioned and An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the performance display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

Further, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the production sound such as music or sound effect are changed by rotating the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as “beep”) corresponding to the volume after the change is changed. electronic sound) is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for bass. As a result, when the contact operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated, the production sounds of music and sound effects are output from the top central speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sounds of the main body frame 4. 622, the actual sound volume is confirmed by the specific sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. Volume can be adjusted. It should be noted that the specific sound may not be output during execution of the variable effect. That is, during execution of the variable performance, a performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is output, and the actual sound volume can be confirmed without outputting the specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest caused by the output of the specific sound irrelevant to the content of the variable performance during the variable performance, which hinders the variable performance being executed.

This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which the sound data of the effect sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the production sound of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 are adjusted. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation, the value of the board volume is increased or decreased, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound effects of music or sound effects. There are two methods, one and the other. Since the volume control switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, only the store clerk in the hall can rotate the volume control switch. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find it too small to hear the music and sound effect sounds, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effect sounds too loud. be. Therefore, when the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the volume of the effect sound such as music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. It's like As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effects to a desired volume. can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and the production sound of music or sound effects can be produced by feeling the volume adjusted by the hall clerk to be large. If the sound is too loud, the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired volume.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waiting state is reached and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the previous time, The sound volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game is canceled and the sound volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk's direct turning operation of the volume control switch. As a result, when a player who has played a game sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is low and it is difficult to hear the production sounds of music and sound effects, the player can play the game in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who sits on and plays a game can operate the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to increase the volume to a desired volume. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted sound volume to be loud and the production sound of music and sound effects to be loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game operates the production operation unit 300. By operating the contact operation portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[13-2. Volume control for specific frequency bands]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, In addition to adjusting the sound volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume, the sound volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (or mute) the sound output in the high sound range (above a predetermined frequency band).

That is, a predetermined period after turning on the power (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a special symbol display (first special symbol Display device, second special symbol display) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (In this example, the peripheral control unit receives a variation pattern command (until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns, or until 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the decorative patterns have been confirmed and displayed), and further fluctuation effects. The operation period of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 set in (effective period for accepting the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the so-called button effect), etc. Except for this, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, an environment change mode for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is performed. is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of environments that can be changed (whether high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 emits light, etc.) is displayed. By operating the pressing operation unit 303 with the environment setting selected, processing for changing the environment setting can be executed. In this way, by operating the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 according to the environment change mode screen, sound output in a specific frequency band can be suppressed, the volume adjustment switch can be rotated, and the Output can be made at a volume set according to the rotation operation of the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 . In addition, although the environment change mode screen is displayed on the topmost surface of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is displayed semitransparently so that the back image can be recognized.

Specifically, when the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300 , a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . Then, by operating the touch operation unit 302 to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, the pressing operation unit 303 is operated to suppress the sound output of the specific frequency band, and the sound output of the specific frequency band is suppressed. A screen for selecting the state where the sound output is not suppressed is displayed (for example, a mini character for volume setting is displayed, and "high range cut on" or "high range cut off" is displayed in the balloon of the mini character, and touch operation The display is switched each time the unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount), and the contact operation unit 302 is operated again to suppress the sound output of a specific frequency band and the state of not suppressing the sound output of the specific frequency band. is selected, the change to the selected state is determined by pressing the pressing operation unit 303, and the determination screen is displayed (in the balloon of the mini character for volume setting, "high range (there is either a cut in the high range" or "no cut in the treble range"). After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the setting screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears, thereby terminating the environment change mode. After the determination screen is displayed, the determination screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may disappear based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 . The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the determination screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. A lower left display area or the like that does not overlap the display of the indicator when adjusting the sound volume may be defined, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. In addition, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the performance display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen are displayed on this display device. may

By pressing the pressing operation portion 303 without rotating the touch operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300, after the screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the contact operation is performed. Even if the part 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the effect sound is disabled, and no indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Then, after the environment change mode ends, when the contact operation part 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume control of the effect sound becomes effective and an indicator is displayed on the effect display device 1600. will be

In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 by turning the volume adjustment switch or rotating the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 . If the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the volume below the volume set according to the operation, the contact operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed at the timing t2 when these operations are completed. The change according to the operation of the portion 302 or the pressing operation portion 303 is not reflected in the effect sound output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. - 特許庁Then, the timing of t3 when the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 ends (determining and stopping the decorative pattern based on the reception of the stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative pattern from the main control MPU 1310a) The change corresponding to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 performed during the variable production is reflected at the timing), that is, the volume of the production sound in a specific frequency band is changed by the volume adjustment switch. or the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

Note that after timing t2 when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is completed in adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the variable effect, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is disabled. be. Then, at the timing of t3 when the variable effect ends, when the change in the volume control of the effect sound in the specific frequency band corresponding to the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected, a specific Volume control of the sound effects in the frequency band becomes effective. Further, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is disabled, if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the environment will be changed. A screen for performing the change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but volume adjustment of a specific frequency band cannot be selected. It should be noted that during the period in which the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is disabled, the environment change mode is performed even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation portion 302 of the effect operation unit 300. screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 or the pressing operation is performed in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the part 303 is operated, the change according to these operations is not reflected immediately, but is reflected after the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is finished. Usually, from the start to the end of the variable performance, the performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is continuously output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. Therefore, if you want to adjust the volume of the sound of a specific frequency band in the middle of a fluctuating performance (the sound that is being continuously output is momentarily interrupted, and then the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed) The player may feel discomfort due to restarting the output of the effect sound that has been suppressed or the effect sound that is not suppressed in the volume of a specific frequency band.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance, the variable performance is performed. By reflecting the change according to this operation until the end without reflecting it after the end of the variable effect, the effect sound that flows continuously during the variable effect will be output with the contents set in advance, After the effect is completed and the output of the effect sound continuously played according to the contents of the variable effect is stopped, the volume of the specific frequency band by operating the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Since the performance sound reflecting the adjustment can be output, the player does not feel uncomfortable. That is, during the variable effect in which the effect sound is continuously output, the effect sound that has been continuously output is stopped without reflecting the volume control of the specific frequency band, and the next effect sound is output. By reflecting it at the switching timing before outputting, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort.

On the other hand, when the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the period in which the variable production is not performed, this operation is performed. The corresponding change is immediately reflected, and the production sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is adjusted is output from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. .

In this way, while the volume adjustment of the effect sound during the variable effect is immediately reflected, the volume adjustment of the effect sound in the specific frequency band is not reflected immediately. That is, for sound-related information that may adversely affect the performance scheduled in the variable performance being executed, such as giving the player a sense of incongruity due to the change in the performance sound, the change during the variable performance is prohibited to reduce the performance effect. It is designed to deter.

Further, when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected immediately, the fact may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the player. For example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the variable effect, the volume control of the specific frequency band is Although it is not reflected immediately, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a waiting display such as "Wait a minute" is displayed in the balloon of this mini character to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band. The player may be notified that the operation of the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for performing is normally accepted. Also, the standby display for notifying the player that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band is normally accepted is specified. For example, a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message "Wait a minute." The player is notified that the operation of the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band is performed by performing the standby display 1 such as , when the remaining time until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, a mini character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a speech bubble of this mini character is displayed. A standby display 2 that counts down "3", "2", "1", etc. may be performed. Furthermore, when the timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band has arrived, notification to that effect may be made. A reflection display such as "Selection reflection start!" may be displayed in the balloon.

Further, in the above example, as the volume control of a specific frequency band, equalizer setting A in which the volume in a specific frequency band is not suppressed and equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed are preset equalizer setting patterns. By switching between the equalizer setting A and the equalizer setting B by adjusting the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band, a state in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed and a state in which the sound volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed. It is designed to switch between two stages (on and off), one in which the volume of the band is suppressed and the other. A plurality of equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in specific frequency bands are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching between these multiple equalizer settings, a plurality of settings with different degrees of volume suppression in specific frequency bands can be obtained. You may make it switch to a state. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a volume of a specific frequency band is controlled by rotating the volume adjustment switch or effecting operation unit 300. Equalizer setting C (for example, if the set volume is volume 6, the volume is changed to volume 3), which is suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302. is stored as a setting pattern, and by switching to any of equalizer setting A, equalizer setting B, and equalizer setting C by adjusting the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band, the volume of the specific frequency band is changed. A state in which the volume is not suppressed, a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is muted, and a volume of the specific frequency band are set according to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 300. Alternatively, it may be possible to switch between three levels: a state in which the volume is suppressed to half of the normal volume, and a state in which the volume is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to make settings that meet the tastes of various players.

In addition, the production sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above, but also includes the frequency band and low range of the voice. (If there are a plurality of characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjusted. Also, the effect sound (confirmation sound) for announcing the confirmation of the big win, the payout sound at the time of payout of prize balls, etc. may be adjusted. Moreover, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands may be adjusted as specific frequency bands, and for example, the volume of both the high frequency range and the low frequency range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted together (for example, an operation to switch between a state in which the treble range is not suppressed and a state in which the treble range is suppressed, and a state in which the bass range is not suppressed and suppressed) and the operation to switch to one of the states in one operation), and adjust each (for example, the operation to switch between the state of not suppressing the high range and the state of suppressing the low range and the state of not suppressing the low range and the state of suppressing the low range) and the operation of switching to one of the states may be performed separately). That is, the player may be allowed to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble sound cut, payout sound cut, big hit confirmation sound cut, etc.). As a result, it is possible to make settings that meet the tastes of various players.

In addition, in the case of outputting a continuous effect sound during the big win game state or the small win game state, etc., the volume control of the above effect sound is performed by the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 may be reflected immediately in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound, while the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the end of the big win game state and the small win game state. As a result, the output of the continuous effect sound is stopped, and at the switching timing until the next effect sound is output, the volume control of the specific frequency band is performed by the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the body frame. By reflecting this in the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of No. 4, it is possible to change the effect sound according to the adjustment without discomfort. It should be noted that during the jackpot game state and the small win game state, since the player's attention to the content of the performance is lower than in the variable performance, the volume control of the specific frequency band is performed in the same manner as the volume control of the above-mentioned effect sound. The output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for bass sound on the side 3 may be immediately reflected.

In addition, in the case of outputting a continuous effect sound in a game state different from the normal state such as the time saving state, the volume control of the above effect sound is performed by the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the main body The production operation unit 300 is used to immediately reflect the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass in the frame 4, and to adjust the volume of the production sound of the specific frequency band during the fluctuation production for the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the change corresponding to this operation is not reflected until the change effect is completed, and the change effect is reflected after the change effect is completed. When the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band when not in use, the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 are operated. , the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 may be immediately reflected. That is, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected during the execution of the variable performance, which the player pays the most attention to, and is reflected after the variable performance is completed to specify when the player is not paying much attention. It is also possible to reflect the sound volume adjustment of the frequency band of (1) so that the effect sound can be changed according to the adjustment without discomfort.

Even when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the effect sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4. The production sound after the change is not output until the change is made. Therefore, when the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound in the specific frequency band during the variable effect, the specific frequency is generated after the end of the variable effect. Even if the band volume adjustment is reflected, the changed production sound is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4 after the start of the next variable production. be done. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery processing (hit determination lottery, etc.) for starting the next variable effect is performed. Similarly, when the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during the period when the demonstration is being performed on the effect display device 1600 Although the volume adjustment of the effect sound of a specific frequency band is immediately reflected, if the effect sound is not output as a demonstration, the effect sound after the change is applied to the door frame 3 until the next variable effect is started. The sound is not output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but is output after the start of the variable effect.

Also, the volume control for a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the effect sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waiting state occurs, and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the front face of the pachinko machine 1 last time. At the same time as the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the floor and playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed state).

In addition, the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section of the production operation unit 300 are used to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the execution of the error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (may be the maximum volume). When 303 is operated, it may be appropriately set whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (unauthorized level) that caused the error notification. good.

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, when a slight abnormality (full-tank error) occurs, such as when the full-tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B. When the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the specific frequency band during the full tank error notification executed immediately, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately notified. , and when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, continue the state in which the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the center of the top on the door frame 3 side The changed notification sound may be output from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for bass. In this example, the sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a full tank error notification (for example, "Please remove the ball!") reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. (For example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, output as a female voice, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, output as a male voice).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210, when a serious abnormality (door open error) such as detection of the opening of the door frame 3 occurs, the sound volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed during the door open error notification. When the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated for adjustment, or when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs after adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band, the specific frequency band volume adjustment may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume in a specific frequency band of the sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a door open error notification (for example, "The door is open!"). (e.g. output as a female voice if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, output as a male voice if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed), but serious abnormalities is generated, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is disabled, and the notification sound in which the volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

That is, as shown in FIG. 209, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B, a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs. During the tone error notification, when the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but the volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound. , The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the body frame 4. . Also, as shown in FIG. 210, during the door opening error notification when a serious abnormality (door opening error) such as detection of opening of the door frame 3 occurs, the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the sound volume. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated, the operation is accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the notification sound, and the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It's like In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound according to the degree of abnormality (unauthorized level) that caused the error notification, serious abnormalities can be reliably detected. become discoverable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated so as to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 are operated. , in a state in which the changed effect sound is being output from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 for bass, if a serious abnormality occurs, the environment change mode or a specific sound corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (turned off) without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, and the notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the effect sound is resumed after the stop of the notification sound, a specific operation corresponding to the environment change mode or the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly canceled is set again (turned on), and the production sound with the suppressed volume of the specific frequency band is produced on the side of the door frame 3. The sound is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 .

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment enables volume control of a specific frequency band, and the volume control of the specific frequency band by operating the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is reflected. In the case of immediately outputting the effect sound and the notification sound, and without immediately reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band by the operation of the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the output of the effect sound. A case in which the timing is delayed to enable the output of the effect sound or notification sound after the change is appropriately set according to the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game state, error state, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect and to reliably discover a serious abnormality.

[14. Change settings such as winning probability]
In the above pachinko machine 1, an example will be described in which the probability of a big hit or a small hit is changed according to the set value. In the following, it is assumed that operation signals are output to the payout control board 633 from the setting keys on the setting board, the setting change switch 1311b, and the setting determination switch. Although the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, it may be connected to the power board 630 in the power board cover 631 or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310 . Further, the setting board may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, either the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630 or the main control board 1310 may be equipped with a setting key, a setting change switch 1311b, a setting confirmation switch and a setting display 1310g.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a acquires the operation state of each switch provided on the setting board, and displays the setting value set or selected. control device 1310g.

The setting board includes a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, a setting change switch 1311b for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, A setting display 1310g for displaying a set or selected setting value is provided, and functions as a setting change operation section that receives a setting change operation. As described above, the setting board is provided in the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged on the game island in the game parlor, the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to change the settings.

In this embodiment, operation signals of the setting keys on the setting board, the setting change switch 1311b and the setting confirmation switch are taken into the payout control section 633a. Also, the setting display 1310g is controlled by the payout control section 633a. The determined setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a uses a special lottery etc. as a table (hit determination table, big hit design determination table, small hit design determination table, etc.) according to the setting. select the table that A table used in a special lottery or the like is provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some values are different.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 211, in this example, "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal pattern per probability", and "second The opening/closing pattern of the starting port" is set corresponding to each of set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table) is set to a different value for each set value. Setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 and setting value 6 are "1/279", and setting value 5 is "1/289". In this example, the higher the setting value is from setting value 1 to setting value 5, the higher is the probability of big hit. there is Incidentally, the probability of a big win may be improved in proportion to the set value. In this case, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the higher the probability of a big win.

In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, Set value 1 to set value 4 are "1/100", set value 5 and set value 6 are set to "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, set value 1 to Up to setting value 5 is "50/100", and setting value 6 is "66/100". In this example, in the case of a high set value (set value 5 or set value 6), the occurrence frequency of the big hit game state is indirectly increased by increasing the small hit probability more than the other set values (low set value). It has become. Thus, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, the set value is estimated by the winning frequency of the small hit in the normal state, while the second special symbol is used. In the table used for the special lottery, the probability of a small hit is set to be substantially the same for all set values, so that the continuation of the short-time state (Ren-chan) is purely enjoyed during the short-time state.

In addition, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal state, the set value 5 and the set value 6 are set higher than the set value 1 to the set value 4. On the other hand, in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol executed mainly in the time saving state, only the set value 6 small hit probability is set higher than the set values 1 to 5. Therefore, in the setting value 4 and the setting value 5, although the lottery is performed with a different small hit probability in the special lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, in the special lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state , a small winning lottery is performed with the same probability. However, the big hit probability and the determination ratio of the small hit type to be described later are set so that the set value 5 is higher than the set value 4, and the set value 5 is set to be more advantageous than the set value 4 as a whole. It is

In addition, while the probability of a big hit in the normal state is high, the probability of a small hit is low. A game with a low possibility of becoming a big hit through a "small hit" and a hit as a trigger for shifting control to a time-saving state like the set value 5 has a low possibility of being a "big hit", while a "small win" is possible. To provide a new game property capable of realizing a game with a high possibility of winning a big win through a game by changing a set value, and making the set value to be guessed according to the type of the win as an opportunity for shift control to a time saving state.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, the small-hit probability may be improved in proportion to the set value, and in this case, setting values 1 to 6 may be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the small-hit probability. . Further, the small-hit probability corresponding to a part of the set values among the set values 1 to 6 is lower than the small-hit probability corresponding to any of the set values lower than the part of the set values. You may make it For example, the small-hit probability of setting value 4 may be 1/100, and the small-hit probability of setting value 3, which is lower than setting value 4, may be 1/90. In this case, setting value 4 is set higher than setting value 3 to determine the ratio of the small win type (in this example, the third small win) that is advantageous when the small win occurs. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

In addition, as a result of the special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio for determining the small hit type based on the fact that it is decided to be a small hit is also set in the small hit design determination table. selection ratio), and different values are set for each set value. In this example, when it is determined to be a small hit as a result of the special lottery of the first special symbol, the set value 1 to set value 3 is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 9/10 and 10 minutes. is determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 1, set value 4 and set value 5 are determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 8/10, and are determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 2/10 , with a set value of 6, the first minor win is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second minor win is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third minor win is determined at a rate of 3/10. It's like

Also, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, it is determined to be the first small hit at a rate of 3/10 with the set value 1 and set value 2, and 6/10. It is determined to be the second minor hit at a rate, determined to be the third minor hit at a rate of 1/10, and determined to be the first minor hit at a rate of 2/10 at the set value 3 and set value 4, and 10 minutes It is determined to be the second small hit at a rate of 6, determined to be the third small hit at a rate of 2/10, and determined to be the first small hit at a rate of 1/10 at the set value 5 and set value 6. , is determined to be the second minor win at a rate of 6/10, and is determined to be a third minor win at a rate of 3/10.

In addition, as described above, the first small hit is to guide the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 to the first loss opening 2535, and there is no possibility of occurrence of the big winning game state, or the big winning game state is extremely unlikely to occur. Then, in this example, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit is selected only when the set value is 6 and another set value (set value 1 to set value 5) is not selected, so that if the set value 1 to set value 5 is set value 1 to set value 5, the big hit game is always played in the case of a small hit in a state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the time saving state of the normal state. A small win game state can be executed while generating expectations for a big win game state by generating a second small win or a third small win having the possibility of generating a state. That is, in the case of the set value 1 to set value 5, when the small win is made in a state more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state of the normal state, attention is paid to the small win game state while having expectations for the big win game state. , All the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are guided to the first losing opening 2535, and when the player recognizes that there is no possibility of the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the player becomes more discouraged. By generating a second small win or a third small win having at least the possibility of occurrence of the big win game state, it is possible to make the players look forward to the big win game state during the small win game state, and increase the interest of the game. Decrease can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the case of the set value 6, although the first small win may be selected, it can be determined that the set value is 6, which is the highest set value, by executing the first small win in the normal state. , the player can be given more joy than the disappointment of winning the first small prize, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the time saving state, the execution frequency of the small winning game state is high because the small winning probability is increased compared to the normal state. Therefore, it is recognized that all the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 after the first small winning are guided to the first losing opening 2535, and that there is no possibility of occurrence of the big winning game state. does not discourage players. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2) increases the determination ratio of the first small hit, and the high setting value It is designed to reduce the determination ratio of the first small hit. That is, at the high set value, when it is determined to be a small win as a result of the special lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the small win type disadvantageous to the player is lower than at the low set value. Therefore, a high setting value is more advantageous to the player than a low setting value.

In addition, as described above, the third small win guides the game ball B received in the accessory prize winning port 2006 to the first V prize winning port 2007. The situation is almost the same as that of In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the third small win is high means that the probability of winning the big win is high. By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of the jackpot game state is indirectly improved.

In addition, the probability of winning the normal lottery (percentage of the normal per design judgment value indicating that it is a normal per normal per design judgment random number) is set to a different value for each setting value. It is set to "1/2", and the set value 6 is set to "1/1". Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003 at the set value 6 and the normal lottery is performed, the second start opening door 2411 moves forward without fail to allow the game ball B to be received in the second start opening 2004. , which is more advantageous to the player than other set values.

Also, in this example, if it is determined to be a normal hit as a normal lottery result, the normal pattern per A (normal pattern per pattern A) and normal pattern per B (normal pattern per pattern B (normal pattern per pattern B1 ~ It is designed to determine one of a plurality of normal pattern per types of normal pattern per pattern B5)) and normal pattern per pattern C (normal pattern per pattern C), and according to the determined normal pattern per type Modes (symbol A per normal pattern, pattern B per normal pattern, pattern C per normal pattern) are derived and displayed on the normal pattern display. Moreover, the opening/closing mode of the second starting door 2411 is varied for each set value. Specifically, when it becomes A per normal pattern in the normal state, all setting values (set value 1 to set value 6) are executed "execute 0.1s open once" opening and closing mode, time saving state When it becomes normal per symbol A, execute the opening and closing mode of "perform 6s open once" with all set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and when it becomes normal per symbol B in normal state Executes the opening and closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening twice" with odd setting values (setting value 1, setting value 3, and setting value 5), and even setting values (setting value 2, setting value 4, setting Execute the opening and closing mode of "execute 0.1s open once" with value 6), and when it becomes B per normal symbol in the time saving state, set value 1 to set value 3 "execute 6s open once" At set values 4 and 5, the open/close mode of "execute 3s open twice" is performed, and at set value 6, the open/close mode of "execute 3s open once" is performed.

In addition, in the case of the set value 1 to set value 5, one of the two types of normal symbol per type, normal symbol per A and normal symbol per B, is determined as the normal symbol per type. In the case of the set value 6, one of the three types of normal symbol per type, that is, normal symbol per A, normal symbol per B and normal symbol per C, is determined as the normal symbol per type. . Then, when the normal pattern per C is reached in the normal state, the opening and closing mode of "executing 0.1s opening 6 times" is executed with the set value 6, and when the normal pattern per C is obtained in the time saving state, the setting is performed. With a value of 6, the opening/closing mode of "execute 1s opening 6 times" is executed.

In this way, the operating mode of the second starter door 2411 (opening/closing mode of the second starter 2004) that opens the second starter 2004 based on the result of the normal lottery being a normal win is set for each set value. , the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second starting door 2411.

By inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position, the above setting key maintains the short-circuited or open state of the contact, and serves as a trigger for changing to the setting change mode. A switch that outputs a signal. It should be noted that another switch may also be used instead of providing the setting key. In this case, the setting change mode is started by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 1311b for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, and the setting change mode is started by long-pressing the setting change switch 1311b during the setting change mode. may be terminated.

Alternatively, the setting change mode may be started/finished by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing the RAM clear switch 1310f for a long time during the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operating time of the setting change switch 1311b is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 1311b falls.

The setting change switch 1311b is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch 1311b is pressed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the set value=6, the set value becomes 1 when the setting change switch 1311b is operated. The setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f without providing the setting change switch 1311b. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to six steps, and may be set in fewer steps (for example, two steps) or more steps (for example, eight steps).

In addition, the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot, the ratio of time saving (ST) after the jackpot, the number of times of time saving, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of winning the general prize, the starting prize, and the prize ball of the big prize Various parameters related to the game, such as number, may be changed to change the number of prize balls a player can win.

The setting confirmation switch is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 1311b and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 1311b and the setting confirmation switch may be configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 1311b may be configured by a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be configured by a momentary toggle switch.

Alternatively, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch. Further, the set value selected with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger may be determined. For example, operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 195, operation of the single button operation sensor 194, operation of the ball lending button, operation of the return button, The selected setting may be confirmed by the winning detection of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, or the like. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used in the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in order to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, three switches (including setting keys) were provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

Further, setting change operation may be enabled only with the RAM clear switch 1310f without providing any of the setting key, the setting change switch 1311b, and the setting confirmation switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 1310f for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch 1311b, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be operated in the setting change mode for less than a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) to select a setting value, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used instead of the setting confirmation switch. The setting value can be determined by operating (long pressing) for a predetermined time or longer. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 1310f after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 1310g is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 1311b, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a setting key). Note that the setting display 1310g may be configured by LEDs of the number of settable values instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error is provided on the payout control board 633. The selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, dots may be turned off when displaying error types, and lit when displaying set values. Alternatively, the error type display may be lit (not blinking), and the setting value may be blinking.

[14-1. Setting change process]
Next, processing related to setting change will be described. FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing the procedure for changing the set values.

In this example, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, main control side power-on processing is executed, and when the conditions for starting the setting change mode are satisfied in the main control side power-on processing, It is designed to change the above setting value.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process, and then determines the state of the setting key to turn on the setting key. If operated, a setting change mode for changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is operated to ON when the setting key operation signal is received. . The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is being operated, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the handle 195 is touched, or the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit (the prepaid card has a balance). , the setting change mode may not be started when there is a balance in the cash sand. In addition, even if there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 is being tampered with (for example, a magnetic error is detected), the setting change mode may not be started.

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a changes the game control area (also referred to as a specific area) of the built-in RAM with data other than the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information on prize balls) Then, the first RAM clearing process for clearing the data indicating the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is executed.

Next, the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a ends the first RAM clearing process, it transmits a first RAM clearing process end command to the payout control unit 633a, and when the first RAM clearing process end command is received, the payout control unit 633a sets the setting indicator 1310g. An initial value (for example, set value 0) is flashed as a value, and the set value displayed on the setting display 1310g is switched each time the setting change switch 1311b is operated (loop from set value 1 to set value 6).

It should be noted that the setting value is cleared by executing the first RAM clearing process by the main control MPU 1310a and becomes an unset state. Also, if the setting value is not set, the setting change mode cannot be terminated. If the power is turned off while the setting value is not set, the power will be turned on again. Then, the setting change mode will be performed. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, loop processing is performed to monitor the state of the setting key until the setting key is turned on. will be started.

In addition, the payout control unit 633a checks whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, that is, whether or not the body frame open switch is turned off. is not opened), it loops until the main body frame open switch is turned off, and does not accept the operation of the setting confirmation switch. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 .

When the main body frame open switch is off, or when the main body frame open switch is turned off and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the payout control unit 633a confirms and displays the set value displayed on the setting display 1310g. (Blinking display is ended and lighting display is performed), and a setting change end command indicating the fixed setting value is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a.

When the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting change end command, it stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, a lottery process or the like is performed in accordance with the determined set value.

Then, when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting values are changed by the above-described processing.

When the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a terminates the display of the setting value on the setting display 1310g (does not display the setting value). can be Further, when the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is ended, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. As a result, the game clerk can change the set value after grasping the current set value.

Further, when the setting change mode is to be executed, the fact may be notified. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, a setting change mode start command for notifying the start of the setting change mode is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511, and when the setting change mode start command is received. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (during setting change, etc.) on the effect display device 1600 . In this case, when ending the setting change mode, that is, when the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command for notifying the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the setting change mode is terminated. The peripheral control unit 1511 may terminate the predetermined display performed by the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the change mode termination command. It should be noted that the set value determined as a predetermined display or the set value displayed on the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the display device 1600 may be made to disappear when the setting change mode ends. good too.

Further, in accordance with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be a display of a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all special symbol indicators are turned off or turned on).

On the other hand, after performing the initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process (step S12), the state of the setting key is discriminated, and if the setting key is not turned on, step The processing after S14 is executed.

In the main control side power-on processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, erases various information, or determines in step S30. When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S32, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S32, that is, main control side power failure processing is not completed normally, in the game control area in step S38, data other than the set value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information on prize balls ), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). As described above, unlike the first RAM clear process, the setting value information is not initialized in the second RAM clear process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear processing can be executed and the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be cleared, and by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f when the power is turned on, the second RAM It is possible to clear the information about the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information on prize balls) by performing clear processing. Also, after the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is cleared by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear processing is executed, and then the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to execute the second RAM clear processing. Clear the information about the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information about prize balls), that is, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information about the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, information about prize balls) It is also possible to clear both. In this manner, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed according to the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control section 633a may determine. In addition, the setting key operation signal transmitted from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, by transmitting a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency for a predetermined number of times), or by transmitting a ground signal at the power supply voltage. A signal of an intermediate potential, which is not a voltage, may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of activating the setting change mode by short-circuiting the terminals of the setting keys, a signal related to the operation of the setting keys is sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 by a signal that cannot be caused by short-circuiting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to transmit to

[14-2. Fluctuation effect according to the set value]
Next, a variable effect corresponding to each set value will be described. FIG. 213 is a variation pattern table referred to in variation pattern setting processing (first variation pattern setting processing, second variation pattern setting processing).

In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each setting value, and the variation pattern type selected according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table ( In FIG. 213(A), for example, a mini character for suggesting settings is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "Is it low?" or "Is it 1, 2, or 3?" By doing so, a set value 1 to a set value 3 can be selected for a deviation variation pattern 25 that executes a "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is one of 1, 2, and 3. For example, a mini-character for suggesting setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the same time, "Is it expensive?" A set value 4 to set value 6 can be selected as a failure variation pattern 26 for executing a "high setting suggestion effect" suggesting that the set value is any one of 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is at least 4 or more, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, for example, by displaying a mini-character for suggesting setting on the effect display device 1600, and displaying "May be an even number?" The set value of 2, 4, or 6 is any one of 2, 4, or 6. The set value 2, set value 4, or set value 6 can be selected for the deviation variation pattern 27, for example The set value of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed by displaying a mini character for suggesting setting on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "may be an odd number?" is any one of 1, 3, and 5, and the set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5 are selectable. Therefore, when the "even number setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the set value is 2, the set value 4, or the set value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion effect" is executed, the set value is 1, the set value The player can recognize that it is either 3 or set value 5. In addition, it is possible to guess the set value by combining with the execution history of "low setting suggestive effect" and "high setting suggestive effect". That is, if the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the set value is 1 or 3, and the "odd number setting suggestion effect" and the "high setting suggestion effect" are executed. If so, the set value is 5, and if the "even number setting suggestive effect" and "low setting suggestive effect" are being executed, the set value is 2, and the "even number setting suggestive effect" and "high setting suggestive effect" are executed. is executed, it can be inferred that the setting value is 4 or 6. Thus, in this example, a new game feature is provided in which a set value is guessed by a combination of setting suggestion effects that have been executed out of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

In addition, in this example, for example, by displaying a mini character for suggesting settings on the effect display device 1600, and displaying "maybe the best?" or "maybe 6?" A failure variation pattern 29 that executes a "maximum setting suggesting effect" suggesting that the value is 6 can be selected only with a set value of 6. - 特許庁Therefore, when the "maximum setting suggesting effect" is executed in the variable effect, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum set value 6, thereby improving the game interest. In addition, in the case of the set value 6, it is possible to select a loss variation pattern 31 in which the "maximum setting fixed effect" is executed in the case of a loss that does not result in a reach or in the case of a loss of reach. It is possible to notify that the set value 6 of the maximum setting is fixed, and to make the player recognize that the maximum setting is fixed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Also, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 213 In (B)), for example, a mini character for suggesting setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and "maximum setting confirmed!" A small hit variation pattern 33 and a small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting fixed effect" for informing that the value is 6 can be selected only at the set value 6. - 特許庁Therefore, when the ``maximum setting fixed performance'' is executed in the variable performance in the case of a small win, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest set value 6, and the game interest is improved. .

Also, when the first special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table (Fig. 213 (C )), the big hit variation pattern 34 for executing the “maximum setting fixed effect” can be selected only with the set value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting fixed effect" is executed in the variable effect in the event of a big win, the player can recognize that the set value is the maximum set value 6, and the big win game state is executed. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with a double pleasure, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Also, when the second special lottery result becomes a small hit during the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 213 In (D)), the small hit variation pattern 34 for executing the "maximum setting fixed effect" can be selected only at the set value 6. - 特許庁Therefore, when the ``maximum setting fixed effect'' is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small win, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest set value 6, and furthermore, the character prize winning opening. By guiding the game ball B entered in 2006 to the first V winning port 2007 and winning the third small win to generate a big win game state, the player can be given double joy. Increased interest in gaming.

As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. That is, in the normal state, the set values 1 to 4 have a small hit probability of "1/100", while the set values 5 and 6 are higher than the set values 1 to 4, "90 minutes 1 of the Similarly, in the time saving state, the setting value 1 to setting value 5 are set to a small hit probability "1/10", while the setting value 6 is higher than the setting value 1 to setting value 5 "1/9" It is said that

In addition, when the second special lottery result becomes a small hit during the time saving state, the small hit variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting fixed effect" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process is over a long period of time (155 s). and is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns that can be selected with the set values 1 to 5 lower than the set value 6. Also, in the set value 6, the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 having a longer variation time than the small hit variation patterns 1 to 3 is higher than the set value 1 to the set value 5 lower than the set value 6. That is, at the setting value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance executed in the time saving state is long. As described above, with the set value 6, the probability of a small hit is higher than with the set values 1 to 5, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball B that entered the accessory winning hole 2006 is placed in the first V winning hole. Since the percentage determined to be the third small win that induces the game to 2007 to generate the big win game state is also set higher than the set value 1 to set value 5, it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls in a short time. . Therefore, in the case of the set value 6, by increasing the selection rate of the small hit variation pattern 20 or the small hit variation pattern 34 in which a longer variation time is set than the other small hit variation patterns than the set value 1 to the set value 5 By suppressing the number of execution times of the variable presentation per unit time, improvement of gambling property is suppressed.

In addition, in this example, although the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are distributed in substantially the same manner for all set values, in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6, the variation patterns peculiar to the set value 6 (loss variation pattern 29 to deviation variation A pattern 31, a small hit variation pattern 33, a small hit variation pattern 34, and a big hit variation pattern 34) are provided, so distribution of variation pattern determination random numbers is different. Therefore, in this example, only the variation pattern determination random numbers assigned to a specific variation pattern (adjustment variation pattern) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6 are adjusted and the variation pattern determination random numbers are distributed. In this way, only the random numbers for determining the variation pattern assigned to the specific variation pattern are adjusted without changing the distribution of the random numbers for determining the variation pattern for each of all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table corresponding to the set value 6. As a result, the load of adding or deleting variation patterns is reduced, and the design of the gaming machine is facilitated. In addition, the specific variation pattern is one that maintains a certain or more appearance frequency even if the number of random numbers for determining the variation pattern is reduced, and at least the random number for determining the variation pattern set in other setting values It should be adjusted so as to have 60% or more of the distribution number, and the appearance rate should not be excessively reduced compared to other set values.

In this way, in this example, the small winning probability and the fluctuation time of the variable performance executed when the result of the special lottery results in a small winning are made different according to the set value of the pachinko machine 1, thereby balancing the gambling property. is taking

In addition, the above setting suggestion effect (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even number setting suggestion effect, odd number setting suggestion effect, highest setting suggestion effect, highest setting fixed effect) is the first special lottery result in normal state. Alternatively, it is most likely to be executed when the reach is lost, and there are many types of executable setting suggestion effects. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result in the time saving state is lost or the reach is lost, or the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) in the normal state and in the time saving state is a small hit or a big hit In this case, it is difficult to execute compared to the case where the first special lottery result in the normal state is a loss or a reach loss, and there are fewer types of executable setting suggestion effects. That is, during the time-saving state or during the small hit, by reducing the execution frequency of the setting suggesting effect compared to the case of losing or losing the reach in the normal state, attention is paid to the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening. ing.

[15. Guide passage group consisting of second ball passage portion and third ball passage portion]
[15-1. Regarding the case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the second ball passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center member 2500 is provided. Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the second ball passage portion 2521, and FIG. be.

As shown in FIG. 214, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521 (near the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position such that the game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 must pass through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the first ball passage portion 2506 and hits the game ball B with such strength that it abuts against the ball hitting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. However, when the game ball B enters the second ball passage portion 2521 , the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 . On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and contact the ball hitting portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), the third ball passage portion 2522 has a high probability. When the game ball B enters the third ball passage portion 2522, the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 because the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521. will not be detected by

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 , and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 . Based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is struck into the second ball passage portion 2521. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 .

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (shooting intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area and the path where the game ball B is hit. First, during the small winning game, the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521 is opened, and the game ball B is entered into the opened accessory winning opening 2006. is required. Therefore, during the small winning game, the strength of entering the first ball passage portion 2506 and contacting the ball hitting portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 It is necessary to hit the game ball B with (so-called right hit).

Also, during the jackpot game, the big winning hole 2005 provided at the bottom right of the center member 2500 is opened, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the opened big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加However, in the guide path group 2520, the game ball B discharged from the exit of the third ball passage part 2522 is more likely to enter the big winning hole 2005 than the exit of the second ball passage part 2521. It is In addition, during the time saving state, based on the ball entering the normal winning opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center member 2500, the second start opening 2004 provided at the lower right of the center member 2500 is opened. , It is required to enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 that is in the open state. The game ball B ejected from the exit of the game ball B enters the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 with a higher probability. Therefore, during the big hit game and the time saving state, the game ball B enters the first ball passage portion 2506 and hits the ball hitting portion 1006 so that the game ball B enters the third ball passage portion 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a strength that does not make contact (strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting).

Also, during the normal state, it is required to enter the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 provided below the center member 2500 . For this reason, during the normal state, the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500 is the highest so that the game ball B can enter the first starting port 2002 and flows down the area on the left side of the center member 2500. It is necessary to hit the game ball B with the strength to enter the front view left side (the left side of the front frame upper right part 2502a) than the part (so-called left hitting).

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the hitting method (shooting intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area and the passage where the game ball B is hit. If the ball B has not been hit, the player is reminded to hit the game ball B in the recommended area or path. Specifically, when the game ball B should not be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 When the passage detection state continues for a predetermined time, the player is alerted.

First, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the third ball passage portion 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the jackpot game and the time saving state, but the right detection provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 When the sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it determines that the game ball B has been struck into the second ball passage portion 2521, and this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, when the game ball B is detected for 5 seconds). are detected), the player is warned that the game ball B should be hit into the third ball passage portion 2522 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215(A), the effect display device 1600 is executing the first warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the third ball passage". As a result, during the jackpot game and the time-saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and contact the ball hitting portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-hand hitting). The player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit into the 3-ball passage portion 2522 . After the execution of the first warning effect, if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the game ball enters the second ball passage portion 2521. It is determined that the state in which B has been struck has been resolved, and the first warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been struck into the second ball passage portion 2521, and monitored. While starting the timer, the count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the monitoring timer is started (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), , when the first warning effect is executed but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when less than 5 game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the second ball passage portion Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been struck into 2521 has been resolved, the first warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time saving state, and even when the state where the game ball B should be hit into the third ball passage portion 2522 is not reached, information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is displayed. Cleared. After the execution of the first warning effect, a monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second In addition to terminating the first warning performance assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the ball passage portion 2521 is eliminated, the third ball passage is also used when the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state. The first warning effect is terminated because the state in which the game ball B should be hit into the part 2522 is gone.

Also, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center member 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 prevents the game ball B from passing. When it is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds). , warns the player that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center member 2500 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215(B), the effect display device 1600 is executing the second warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, during the normal state, the hitting method is changed to the strength of entering the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame). , the player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center member 2500 . When the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 is detected. It is determined that the problem has been resolved, and the second warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it is determined that the game ball B has hit the second ball passage portion 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. In addition, the count value is incremented every time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, when the state in which the game ball B is hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 continues for a predetermined time after the monitoring timer is started (for example, when five or more game balls B are detected in five seconds), , when the second warning effect is executed, but the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when less than 5 game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), the second ball passage portion Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into 2521 has been resolved, the second warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. In addition, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and even when the state where the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. After the execution of the second warning effect, a monitoring timer is started, and when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second In addition to terminating the second warning performance assuming that the state in which the game ball B is hit into the ball passage portion 2521 is resolved, the area on the left side of the center member 2500 also occurs when the game state is switched from the normal state. The second warning performance is terminated because the state in which the game ball B should be hit is no longer there.

As described above, when the game ball B should not be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 When the state in which the passage is detected continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning screen (first and second warning effects) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the contents of the warning change according to the game state. . As a result, even when the game ball B is hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 when the game ball B is not in a game state in which the game ball B should be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, the recommended area or passage is The player can accurately grasp which one is which.

On the other hand, during the small winning game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit into the ball passage portion 2521.例文帳に追加Specifically, as shown in FIG. 215(C), the effect display device 1600 executes the third warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the ball into the second ball passage". As a result, during the small winning game, the game ball B should be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength of entering the first ball passage portion 2506 and coming into contact with the ball hitting portion 1006. - 特許庁The player can grasp that there is something. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is ended. I am trying to

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, A watchdog timer is started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B has not been struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the third warning effect is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is not struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 is resolved. , the third warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the small winning game, and even when the game ball B is not in a state to be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the third warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not struck into the second ball passage portion 2521. In addition to ending the fourth warning effect assuming that the state is canceled, even when the game state is switched from the small winning game, it is assumed that the state where the game ball B should be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 is no longer there. The third warning effect has ended.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521. For example, the inlet that is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521, the outlet that is the lower end of the second ball passage portion 2521, and the position provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521 may

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521, but it is located downstream of the prize winning opening 2006. may be provided in In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the second ball passage portion 2521 during the small winning game, there is a possibility that the game ball B enters the accessory winning opening 2006 which is in the open state. Since it is high, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located downstream is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to excessive passage of the game ball B.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If a betting area instruction display (for example, a right-handed hitting display with a right arrow image or a left-handed hitting display with a left arrow image) is separately provided to let the player always know that the player should hit the ball. It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to interfere with the placement area instruction display. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the hitting area instruction display" is divided and provided, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 other than that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left part of , so that each guidance is not obstructed by being superimposed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are illustrated by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized as sound effects instead of display. In that case, the priority of allocation to channels finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effects set during the normal state, during the jackpot game, or during the time saving state. It is desirable to set such that the data is output as much as possible even when there are no vacant (unused) channels in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a player who is unfamiliar with the game property of hitting a variety of game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[15-2. Regarding the case where detection sensors are provided in the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion]
As an embodiment different from the above, the right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center member 2500 and the third ball passage portion 2522 A case where a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the entering game ball B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. FIG. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, and FIG. It is a specific production example at the time of execution of production.

As shown in FIG. 216, slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521 (near the entrance), a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided. A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided slightly below the entrance which is the upper end of the 3-ball passage portion 2522 (in the vicinity of the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position such that the game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 must pass through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the first ball passage portion 2506 and hits the game ball B with such strength that it abuts against the ball hitting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), it enters the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. However, when the game ball B enters the second ball passage portion 2521 , the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 .

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position such that the game ball B that has entered the third ball passage portion 2522 certainly passes through. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and contact the ball hitting portion 1006 (strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), the third ball passage portion 2522 has a high probability. When the game ball B enters the third ball passage portion 2522 , the game ball B is detected by the left detection sensor 2405 .

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are sent to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. is entered. Based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, and the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Based on , it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is hit into the third ball passage portion 2522 . Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has hit the second ball passage portion 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it determines that the game ball B has been struck into the third ball passage portion 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 detect the passage of the game ball B. If not, it is determined that the game ball B has not been struck into either the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522 .

In this embodiment, as described above in detail, it is necessary to change the hitting method (shooting intensity) of the game ball B according to the game state, and to change the area and the path where the game ball B is hit. If the game ball B has not been hit in the area or path to be played, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B in the recommended area or path. Specifically, since both the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are provided with the right detection sensor 2404, the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center member 2500. In the normal state, either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the third ball passage portion 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B. When the state continues for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to alert the player.

More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center member 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the third ball passage portion 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B has been struck into the third ball passage portion 2522, and these states continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). When five or more game balls B are detected in a second), the player is warned that the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217(A), the effect display device 1600 is executing the fourth warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit left". As a result, during the normal state, the hitting method is changed to the strength of entering the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center member 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame). , the player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center member 2500 . Then, when the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been struck into 2522 has been resolved, and the fourth warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B during the normal state, the game ball B is struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522. The state is determined, and a monitoring timer is started, and the count value is incremented each time the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the monitoring timer is started, if the state in which the game ball B is struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522 continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are is detected), the fourth warning effect is executed, but when the state does not continue for a predetermined time (for example, when less than 5 game balls B are detected in 5 seconds) , the state in which the game ball B is struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522 is resolved, and the fourth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. is doing. In addition, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the normal state, and even when the state where the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer and the count value is cleared. ing. After the execution of the fourth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , the state in which the game ball B is struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522 is eliminated, and in addition to ending the fourth warning effect, the game state is switched from the normal state. Also in this case, the fourth warning effect is terminated because the game ball B should not be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500 .

It should be noted that it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 during the small winning game, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 If the passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the second The player is warned that the game ball B should be hit into the ball passage portion 2521.例文帳に追加Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217(B), the effect display device 1600 is executing the fifth warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the second ball passage". As a result, during the small winning game, the game ball B should be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 by changing the hitting method to the strength of entering the first ball passage portion 2506 and coming into contact with the ball hitting portion 1006. - 特許庁The player can grasp that there is something. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is ended. I am trying to

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, A watchdog timer is started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B has not been struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the fifth warning effect is executed. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is not struck into the second ball passage portion 2521 is resolved. , the fifth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Further, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the small winning game, and even when the game ball B is not in a state to be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the execution of the fifth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not struck into the second ball passage portion 2521. In addition to terminating the fifth warning effect assuming that the state is canceled, even when the game state is switched from the small winning game, it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in a state in which it should be hit into the second ball passage portion 2521. The fifth warning effect has ended.

On the other hand, it is recommended to hit the game ball B in the third ball passage portion 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 during the jackpot game and the time saving state, but the left detection provided in the third ball passage portion 2522 If the sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the third ball passage portion 2522, and that state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , warns the player that the game ball B should be hit into the third ball passage portion 2522 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217(C), the effect display device 1600 is executing the sixth warning effect of notifying the message "Please hit the third ball passage". As a result, during the jackpot game and the time-saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and contact the ball hitting portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-hand hitting). The player can grasp that the game ball B should be hit into the 3-ball passage portion 2522 . When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state in which the game ball B has not been hit into the third ball passage portion 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is terminated. I have to.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it means that the game ball B has not been hit into the third ball passage portion 2522. A decision is made and a watchdog timer is started. Then, when the state in which the game ball B has not been struck into the third ball passage portion 2522 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start of the monitoring timer, the sixth warning effect is executed. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the state in which the game ball B is not struck into the third ball passage portion 2522 is resolved. , the sixth warning effect is not executed, and the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Also, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state, and even when the state in which the game ball B should be hit into the third ball passage portion 2522 is lost, the information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. there is After the execution of the sixth warning effect, the monitoring timer is started, and when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, the game ball B is not struck into the third ball passage portion 2522. In addition to ending the sixth warning performance assuming that the state is canceled, even when the game state is switched from the jackpot game or the time-saving state, the state in which the game ball B should be driven into the third ball passage portion 2522 is no longer present. Assuming that the sixth warning effect has ended.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521. For example, the inlet that is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521, the outlet that is the lower end of the second ball passage portion 2521, and the position provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521 may Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below (in the vicinity of the entrance) the entrance which is the upper end of the third ball passage portion 2522, but the game ball B that has entered the third ball passage portion 2522 always passes through. For example, it may be provided at the inlet that is the upper end of the third ball passage portion 2522 , the outlet that is the lower end of the third ball passage portion 2522 , or the inside of the third ball passage portion 2522 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided on the upstream side of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521, but it is located downstream of the prize winning opening 2006. may be provided in In such a case, when the game ball B is driven into the second ball passage portion 2521 during the small winning game, there is a possibility that the game ball B enters the accessory winning opening 2006 which is in the open state. Since it is high, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located downstream is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to excessive passage of the game ball B. .

In this embodiment, both the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 are provided with detection sensors (the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405). , one detection sensor may be provided at a position through which the game ball B entering the guide path group 2520 must pass. For example, one detection sensor is provided in the path before the game ball B entering the first ball path part 2506 branches to either the second ball path part 2521 or the third ball path part 2522. Thus, it is possible to detect whether or not the game ball B enters the guide path group 2520 with one detection sensor. That is, when one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the guide path group 2520, and one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B. If not, it can be determined that the game ball B is not hit into the guide path group 2520 . Even in such a case, when the state in which one detection sensor detects the passage of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time in the normal state in which the game ball B should be hit into the area on the left side of the center member 2500, the game By alerting the player, the player can grasp at least whether the game ball B should be hit in the area on the left side of the center member 2500 or not.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are illustrated by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. If a betting area instruction display (for example, a right-handed hitting display with a right arrow image or a left-handed hitting display with a left arrow image) is separately provided to let the player always know that the player should hit the ball. It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the placement area indication. For example, in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, a "display area for displaying the hitting area instruction display" is divided and provided, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 other than that area is provided. It is desirable to partition the "display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left part of the above so that each guidance is not obstructed by being superimposed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are illustrated by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings are realized as sound effects instead of display. In that case, the priority of allocation to channels finitely provided for outputting sound is higher than various effects set during the normal state, during the jackpot game, or during the time saving state. It is desirable to set such that the data is output as much as possible even when there are no vacant (unused) channels in the finitely provided channels. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent a player who is unfamiliar with the game property of hitting a variety of game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[15-3. Regarding the case where the ball clogging elimination hole is provided in the weighted portion where the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion are arranged in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, ball clogging in the rear third ball passage portion 2522 can be removed. The case where a possible ball jam clearing hole 2523 is provided will now be described with reference to FIGS. 218 and 219. FIG. 218 and 219 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided in the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522. FIG.

As described above in detail, the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are aligned in the front-rear direction at a portion of the second ball passage portion 2521 that extends vertically on the left side of the prize winning opening 2006. As a result, it has a weighted portion 2520a that can be seen overlapping from the front. The third ball passage portion 2522 is located behind the second ball passage portion 2521 in the weighted portion 2520a.

As shown in FIGS. 218 and 219(A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the longitudinal direction. A clogged ball clearing hole 2523 is provided which can be inserted from the front side of the ball clogging hole 2523 and can remove clogged balls in the third ball passage portion 2522 on the rear side by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the portion where the rear side of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the front side of the third ball passage portion 2522 are adjacent to each other are provided with ball clogging elimination holes 2523. there is In addition, the clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in the portion where the rear surface side of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the front surface side of the third ball passage portion 2522 are adjacent to each other is located on the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 when viewed from the front. It is positioned so as to coincide with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided in , and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522 . This allows the rod-shaped member to be smoothly inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522 . That is, when ball clogging occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, the third ball passage portion 2522 on the rear side A rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B clogged in the passage part 2522, and the clogging in the third ball passage part 2522 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-rear direction.

When a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, the cover member is also visible from the front, The ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided at a position that coincides with the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the front side of the ball passage portion 2521 . As a result, when ball clogging occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the third ball passage portion 2522 without removing the cover member.

Also, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. As a result, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. can be done. That is, when ball clogging occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522, by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the third ball passage portion 2522 is facilitated. can be removed by

In addition, a plurality of ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in portions extending vertically from the weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. . As a result, even if ball clogging occurs at any position of the third ball passage portion 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 provided near that position. Well, ball clogging in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be easily removed.

The second ball passage portion 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 is curved only in the left-right direction, while the third ball passage portion 2522 is curved not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The third ball passage portion 2522 is more likely to be clogged than the second ball passage portion 2521 . The weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction has an inlet that is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 and a lower end. Since it is away from any of the exits and is a portion after being bent from the entrance or the exit, even if the rod-like member is inserted from the entrance or the exit, the rod-like member will not reach that portion. In this regard, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, a rod-shaped member is provided from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522. A ball jam clearing hole 2523 is provided which can be inserted. As a result, when ball clogging occurs not only in the second ball passage portion 2521 on the front side of the weighted portion 2520a but also in the third ball passage portion 2522 on the rear side, the rod-shaped member can be inserted. , the ball jam can be easily removed.

In the above, in the weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the second ball passage portion 2521 penetrates in the front-rear direction toward the third ball passage portion 2522. The ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided so that the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 is provided. Below, another example of the ball clogging clearing hole 2523 capable of clearing the ball clogging in the third ball passage portion 2522 on the rear side will be shown.

As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219(B), the left surface side of the third ball passage portion 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a in which the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging clearing hole 2523 into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522, and the ball clogging in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member. may be provided. In such a case, when clogging occurs in the third ball passage portion 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522, the clogged game balls in the third ball passage portion 2522 are removed. A rod-shaped member can come into contact with B, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, ball clogging in the third ball passage portion 2522 can be removed. In this embodiment, a transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided to the left of the guide passage group 2520 composed of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522. 3102 is located behind the second sphere passage portion 2521 and the third sphere passage portion 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the third sphere passage portion 2522 without being blocked by the light guide plate 3102. ing.

As a second example, as shown in FIG. 219(C), a weighted portion 2520a in which a second ball passage portion 2521 and a third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction has a second ball passage portion. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is not circular but extends vertically. It may be formed in an elongated slit shape. In such a case, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the second ball passage portion 2521 toward the third ball passage portion 2522, the rod-shaped member can be moved greatly in the vertical direction. ball clogging can be easily removed.

The second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction near the entrance, which is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 . As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 219(D), a predetermined rod-shaped member is attached to the third ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 at a position where the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided which can be inserted from the left side of the passage portion 2522 and can remove ball clogging in the second ball passage portion 2521 on the right side (back side) by inserting the rod-shaped member. may That is, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate in the left-right direction from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522 toward the second ball passage portion 2521 . In such a case, when ball clogging occurs in the second ball passage portion 2521, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522, the second ball passage portion 2521 on the right side (back side) is opened. The stick-shaped member can come into contact with the jammed game ball B, and by moving the stick-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball jam in the second ball passage portion 2521 can be removed.

Further, when the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522 as in the first example and the third example, the ball clogging is removed from the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522. By inserting a rod-shaped member through the clearing hole 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the third ball passage portion 2522. Since it is provided at the position, there is a possibility that the rod-shaped member will come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 when the rod-shaped member is inserted through the clogged ball elimination hole 2523 . Then, if the light guide plate 3102 is damaged by the rod-shaped member, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting patterns (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120), the damaged part unrelated to the pattern may also be damaged. Light is guided (light is reflected), but if the damaged part overlaps with the pattern, there is a problem that the pattern is difficult to see. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light guide decoration area in which a pattern appears in the right area portion of the light guide plate 3102 adjacent to the third ball passage portion 2522 . Further, the light guide plate 3102 is attached to the square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . It is possible to move to the left, and when inserting the rod-shaped member through the ball clogging elimination hole 2523, as a preliminary step, it is possible to move the rod-shaped member to a position where it does not contact the light guide plate 3102. may be configured. Also, on the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522, there is a movable body that can move between a position where it hides the clogging elimination hole 2523 provided on the left side of the third ball passage portion 2522 and a position where it does not. When a member is provided and a rod-shaped member is inserted through ball clogging elimination hole 2523, as a preliminary step, the movable member may be configured to move to a position that does not cover ball clogging elimination hole 2523. good. In such a configuration, when there is no need to clear the clogged balls in the third ball passage part 2522, the movable member is positioned to hide the clogged ball hole 2523 so that the player can visually recognize the clogged ball hole 2523. There is an advantage in that the decorativeness of the whole including the third ball passage portion 2522 is not spoiled.

[15-4. Ball clogging prevention structure in the vicinity of the exits of the second ball passage portion and the third ball passage portion arranged in parallel]
As explained in FIG. 149A (a), the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the ball hitting portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a ( When the player hits the ball to the right, the game ball B in contact with the ball contact portion 1006 enters the second ball passage portion 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the second ball passage portion 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning port door 2511 that closes the prize winning port 2006 in the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521, and is guided. It is discharged downward toward the attacker unit 2400 from the right outlet at the lower end of the passage group 2520 . Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the second ball passage portion 2521 is pushed by the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the attacker unit 2400 and the first opening portion 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430. , the normal prize winning opening 2003, and the portion on the left side of the normal winning prize opening 2003 with the same probability.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 149A(b), when the game ball B hit into the first ball passage portion 2506 enters the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 and flows through the third ball passage portion 2522, , and after being twisted backward to line up with the second ball passage portion 2521 in the front-rear direction at the weighted portion 2520a, it is twisted forward to move from the outlet on the left side of the outlet of the second ball passage portion 2521 to the attacker unit 2400 side below. released. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the third ball passage portion 2522 passes through the normal winning opening 2003 or the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to enter any of the left-hand sites and, rarely, to the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 .

In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is discharged onto the lower right rail 1004 from the ejection opening 2435 below the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the outlets of the second ball passage portion 2521 are arranged on the right side and the outlets of the third ball passage portion 2522 are arranged on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, a large amount of game balls B discharged from those exits flow in a short time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below those exits. . In this regard, below the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, a first opening portion 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal prize winning opening 2003. When the game ball B enters the portion 2431 , it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430 . As a result, in the vicinity of the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, some of the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided from the first opening portion 2431 to the out port 1008. , it becomes difficult for the game balls B to stay in the vicinity of these exits, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented. In addition, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided from the first opening portion 2431 to the out port 1008. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from piling up inside the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 .

Thus, the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the second ball passage 2521 and the third ball passage 2522. The outlet of the second ball passage portion 2521 is provided closer than the outlet of 2522 . Inside the second ball passage portion 2521, there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 that becomes open during a small winning game. When the game balls B pile up to the position of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage part 2521, more game balls B than expected flow into the opened accessory winning opening 2006, and the game is played. people will be able to gain an unfair advantage. In this respect, the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided so that the outlet of the second ball passage 2521 is closer than the outlet of the third ball passage 2522. 2521 and the outlet of the third ball passage part 2522, the game ball B near the exit of the second ball passage part 2521 is efficiently guided from the first opening part 2431 to the outlet 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from accumulating up to the position of the prize winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521 .

In this embodiment, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 below the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, on the right side of the normal prize winning opening 2003. The first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided, but the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided with an out port different from the out port 1008, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is You may make it discharge|eject outside the game area 5a from another outlet. Even in such a case, part of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 can be efficiently discharged outside the game area 5a from an out port different from the out port 1008. The game balls B are less likely to stay in the vicinity of those exits, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

In addition, below the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, it is possible to guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position near the exit of the second ball passage portion 2521. Although the first opening 2431 of the attacker's right passage 2430 is provided, a passage or a game ball B can be guided to the out port 1008 at a position near the exit of the third ball passage 2522. An out port other than the out port 1008 through which the game ball B can be discharged to the outside of the area 5a may be provided. Even in such a case, part of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the game area 5a, and those exits It becomes difficult for the game balls B to stay in the vicinity, and the occurrence of ball clogging can be prevented.

In the above, near the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, the first opening portion 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, in the vicinity of the entrances of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, there are passages capable of guiding the game ball B to the out port 1008 and the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a. An out port other than the out port 1008 through which the liquid can be discharged may be provided. Below, in the vicinity of the entrances of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided. Give an example. FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 is provided near the entrances of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 220, between the entrance that is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the third ball passage portion 2522, game balls B can be discharged outside the game area 5a. A possible second out port 1013 is provided. With such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and abut against the ball hitting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), the second ball passage portion 2521 has a high probability. However, part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 . Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and contact the ball hitting portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), the third ball passage portion 2522 has a high probability. However, part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 . In other words, a part of the game ball B hit so as to enter the first ball passage portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013 . As a result, regardless of whether the player aims at the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 or the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522, the ball is hit into the first ball passage portion 2506. Since a part of the ball B is guided out of the game area 5a through the second out port 1013, the number of the game balls B entering the inside from those entrances is reduced, and the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage are guided. It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring inside the portion 2522 .

In addition to the above, only when ball clogging occurs inside the second ball passage portion 2521 or the third ball passage portion 2522, an out port 1008 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided. You may make it provide the out mouth different from. Below, in the vicinity of the exit inside the second ball passage portion 2521, another example of the case where the second out port 1013 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a is provided is shown. FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 is provided near the outlet inside the second ball passage portion 2521 .

As shown in FIG. 221(A), slightly above the outlet, which is the lower end of the second ball passage portion 2521, is the game area 5a (game board 5) which is flush with the rear surface of the second ball passage portion 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which opens on the front surface and is capable of ejecting the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, inside the second ball passage portion 2521, there is provided a bonus prize winning opening 2006 that is open during the small winning game, and the second out opening 1013 is downstream of the bonus prize winning opening 2006. It is set at a position where With such a configuration, when ball clogging does not occur below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the second ball passage portion 2521, when the game ball B enters the second ball passage portion 2521, the second The ball passes in front of the second out port 1013 as it is without entering the second out port 1013. - 特許庁

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 221(B), when ball clogging occurs below the second outlet 1013, such as below the outlet of the second ball passage portion 2521, When the game balls B are piled up, the game balls B that have circulated through the second ball passage portion 2521 enter the second out port 1013. - 特許庁That is, in the inside of the second ball passage portion 2521, the game balls B are not piled up to a position above the second out port 1013. As described above, the inside of the second ball passage portion 2521 is provided with the accessory winning opening 2006 that is opened during the small winning game, but the ball clogging occurs near the exit of the second ball passage portion 2521. As a result, when the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory winning opening 2006 provided inside the second ball passage portion 2521, more game balls B than expected are placed in the opened accessory winning opening 2006. will flow in and the player will be able to obtain an unfair advantage. In this regard, on the downstream side of the accessory winning opening 2006 inside the second ball passage portion 2521, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a only when the ball clogging occurs inside the second ball passage portion 2521. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, which is capable of A situation in which the game ball B can be discharged out of the game area 5a from the second outlet 1013 before the game ball B is piled up to the position of the winning opening 2006, and the player can obtain an illegal profit. can be prevented from occurring.

[16. Regarding the detection of the outlet when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball is inserted into the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, prize winning opening 2006, etc.). , and when the game ball B enters the out port 1008, the number of entered balls is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the result of the calculation is used as information about the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, the base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, depending on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, it determines whether to continue or stop (stop) the calculation. I am trying to cancel (stop) it. A calculation execution state when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of computation when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, as the ball entrances provided on the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and accessories. When the game ball B enters the winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the big winning opening sensor 2403, and the prize winning. A mouth sensor 2513 detects game balls B and adds them to the corresponding number-of-entered-ball counters. With such a ball-in number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the respective ball-in ports among the game balls B that have been hit in the game area 5a.

Further, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B are detected and added to the out number counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

Then, the main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter. As a specific example, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a is calculated by adding up all of the entered ball number counters. can be calculated. Further, the total number of game balls B struck into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding all of the incoming ball number counter and the out number counter.

The calculation result described above is displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1 . However, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the number of game balls B entered into each ball entry hole and out hole 1008 is displayed as it is based on each ball entry counter and out number counter. It is also possible to output. Further, as the predetermined display device, an effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer managed outside by the hall side, and the like are exemplified. Also, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Of these, when information is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it can be grasped at a position where both the player and the hall side can visually recognize it, whereas the hall computer and the monitor of the main control board 1310 When information is displayed on (base monitor 1310h), it can be grasped at a position where only the hall side can visually recognize it.

In addition, as the information displayed on the predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 are displayed. In such a case, it can be determined from the ratio of them whether or not the degree of entry of the game ball B into the ball entry opening and the exit opening 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When the game is played normally, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a enter the entrance at a predetermined rate. If the total number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance is too large, it can be suspected that the balls are entered into the ball entrance through an illegal act. If the total number of game balls B entered into the out port 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that balls are entered into the out port 1008 through an illegal act.

In the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout counter, the number of game balls B paid out to the player can be grasped. Since the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, which is calculated from the total number of entered balls and the out number counter, is the total number of game balls B used by the player, By calculating the difference from the number of put-out game balls B, the net increase of the game balls B can be calculated, and the net increase of the game balls B can be displayed on a predetermined display device. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B entering the ball-in hole or the out-hole 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided in the main body frame 4 and exits the pachinko machine 1. A frame-side out-port sensor capable of detecting game balls B passing through the ball discharge port 629, which is discharged to the rear outside (island facility side of the game hall) (see FIG. 93), is provided. . When the frame-side out-port sensor detects a game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. FIG. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game ball B has entered the ball entry hole or the exit hole 1008 provided on the game board 5, when the merged game ball B is discharged outside the pachinko machine 1. Secondly, the frame-side out hole sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 also passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower full ball. After passing through the lower ball removal passage 610c of the path unit 610 and being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629. It is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall), and not only the game ball B hit into the game area 5a but also the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward. The frame-side out-port sensor can also detect the game ball B that has been played. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is It is desired to eliminate (invalidate) and perform various calculations. In response to this, in the configuration in which the frame side outlet sensor also detects the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the sensor is positioned upstream of the frame side outlet sensor and separately from this. A ball removal detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by this ball removal detection sensor. It is desirable to be configured so that the number of game balls B that have been hit is subtracted from the number-out counter. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball discharge detection sensor, is subtracted from the out number counter once, and is detected by the frame side out outlet sensor. It is added to the number-out counter, and substantially, the number of game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be prevented from being reflected in the number-out counter. In addition, such a form is applied when the game ball B is released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action). , there is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor can perform the detection itself, but when the pachinko machine 1 is energized, the game is played downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. When the ball B is discharged (when the ball is discharged from the payout device 580), or when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized, the game ball B is discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580. This solves the problem when the pachinko machine 1 is energized while the ball is being pulled out (the action of pulling out the ball from the payout device 580 is performed). In addition, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 do not join, but pass through separate passages behind the pachinko machine 1. It may be configured such that only the game ball B hit into the game area 5a can be detected by the frame-side outlet sensor so as to be discharged to the outside (island equipment side of the game hall). In such a configuration, it is not necessary to subtract the number of game balls B detected by the above-described ball-out detection sensor from the number-of-outs counter.

As described above, the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame-side out number counter. The total number of spheres B can be calculated. That is, in a state in which no game is played and no game ball B has been hit into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter matches the numerical value of the out number counter. On the other hand, in the state in which the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided in the ball entrance and the out entrance 1008, the frame side out which is separated by a predetermined distance is detected. Since the ball passes through the mouth sensor, the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number-of-entered-ball counter and the number-of-outs counter is slightly larger than that of the frame-side out-counter.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or the calculation is continued or stopped (stopped) depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 222(A), when a minor abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are continued without being interrupted (stopped). This minor abnormality includes a state in which game balls B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580 because the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B, and a game state in which game balls B should be hit in the area on the right side of the center member 2500. The state of not hitting to the right is mentioned. In these states, an effect of warning to guide the game ball B on the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 and an effect of warning to hit to the right are executed. Also, in these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2, and the ball entrance and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are not opened. This is a state in which the game ball B cannot be entered artificially. For this reason, in the event of a minor abnormality, the counter for the number of pitches entered or the counter for the number of outs will not increase due to fraudulent acts, and addition to the counter and calculation will continue without stopping (stopping). there is

On the other hand, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). A state in which the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be cited as a serious abnormality. In these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are released from the outer frame 2, and the ball entrance and the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are artificially opened. It is a state in which the game ball B can be entered. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped) so that the counter for the number of incoming balls and the counter for the number of outs do not increase due to illegal acts.

In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensor itself provided at the entrance and exit 1008 prevents the game ball B from passing. Detecting. In addition, when a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the number of incoming balls and the number of outs before the occurrence and the calculation results are held, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 After the serious abnormality is resolved, such as being closed to the In addition, when a serious error occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped (stopped), the addition or calculation to the counter can be stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from the speaker. An effect at the time of discontinuation that notifies that the program has been discontinued is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 222(B), the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out outlet left sensor 3032 and the out outlet right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter may cause a serious abnormality. From time until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, addition to the out count counter and calculation related to the out count counter continue without stopping (stopping), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out count counter Aborts (stops) addition to and calculations related to its out number counter. As a result, when a serious abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2 occurs, the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 can be grasped until the predetermined time elapses. .

For example, if the game ball B becomes grape-shaped in the game area 5a and clogging occurs, normal games cannot be played. However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will flow directly into the out port 1008 at the lower end. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is originally a game ball B with a high possibility of being discharged from the out port 1008 if it does not become a grape-shaped game ball. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, addition to the out number counter and calculation related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. is continued without stopping (stopping), the number of balls that the grape-shaped game ball B has flowed into the out port 1008 can be grasped, and the reliability of the information on the out port 1008 can be improved. It should be noted that after a predetermined period of time has passed, the possibility of the grape-shaped game ball B flowing into the out port 1008 is low, and it is suspected that the ball is entered into the out port 1008 by a fraudulent act. addition to and calculations related to its out number counter are suspended (stopped).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 222(C), the addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out outlet left sensor 3032 and the out outlet right sensor 3033 and the calculation related to the out number counter may cause a serious abnormality. Until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed since the time, addition to the number of outs counter and calculation related to the number of outs continue without stopping (stopping), but the predetermined time has passed Even before, when the out-port left sensor 3032 or the out-port right sensor 3033 detects a large amount of game balls B continuously in a short period of time, addition to the out number counter or the out number counter at that time Aborts (stops) the calculation related to . In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of balls expected to flow into the out port 1008 by removing the grape-shaped game balls B flowed into the out port 1008. Since it is highly suspected that the ball is being entered into the out hole 1008 by an illegal act, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

Also, as shown in FIG. 222(D), when the door frame 3 is opened among the cases where a serious abnormality occurs, the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out outlet left sensor 3032 and the out outlet right sensor 3033 is activated. Regarding the addition and calculations related to the number of outs counter, the addition to the number of outs counter and the calculation related to the number of outs counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is opened. On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that point. This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B in the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game area 5a This is because the body frame 4, which does not need to be opened, is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing a clogged ball on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so addition to the number-of-outs counter and computation related to the number-of-outs counter are stopped (stopped). I am planning to

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the game ball B enters the ball entry hole and the exit hole 1008 provided on the game board 5, the merged game ball B is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. 222(E), the frame-side out number counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out sensor detects the game ball B. As for the addition and the computation related to the frame-side out number counter, the addition to the frame-side out number counter and the computation related to the frame-side out number counter are stopped (stopped) when a serious abnormality occurs. For this reason, when a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, an out corresponding to the detection by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 is performed for a predetermined period of time. While addition to the number counter is performed, since addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to detection by the frame side out opening sensor is not performed, all of the entering ball number counter and the out number counter are not performed. From the difference between the added value and the value of the frame side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of entering grape-shaped game balls B removed when the door frame 3 is opened. It should be noted that the number of the grape-shaped game balls B entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1 .

Further, as described above, in a state where no game is played and no game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, the frame side out number counter is equal to all of the entering ball number counter and the out number counter. will match the value obtained by adding On the other hand, in the state in which the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided in the ball entrance and the out entrance 1008, the frame side out which is separated by a predetermined distance is detected. Since the ball passes through the mouth sensor, the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number-of-entered-ball counter and the number-of-outs counter is slightly larger than that of the frame-side out-counter. In this way, as long as the game is played normally, the value obtained by adding all of the number of entered balls counter and the number of outs counter may have a difference of a predetermined number or more compared to the number of outs counter on the frame side. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not a difference equal to or greater than the predetermined number has occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is being played normally.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number is generated in the numerical value obtained by adding all of the number of entered balls counter and the number of outs counter compared to the number of outs counter on the frame side, a special is determined to have occurred, and addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). In addition, when a special abnormality occurs and the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped, the addition or calculation to the counter is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting sound from the speaker. A stop-time production is being executed to notify that there is. Then, if a difference of a predetermined number or more occurs between the number obtained by adding all of the number of entered balls counter and the number of outs counter to the number of outs counter on the frame side, for example, the game board 5 may be charged with an illegal act. Objects other than the game ball B are allowed to pass only through the provided ball entrance and out port 1008, and after the game ball B passes through the detection sensor provided in the ball entrance and out port 1008, It is possible to suspect the possibility that ball clogging has occurred before passing the frame-side outlet sensor. As a result, it is possible to detect the occurrence of troubles such as fraudulent actions and jamming of balls at an early stage, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a severe abnormality, the state in which the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 is exemplified. Even if is not released from the outer frame 2, if it detects a situation where it is assumed that the game is progressing due to fraudulent acts, addition to various counters and calculations will be stopped (stopped) can be For example, when a magnetism level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that the game is not being played normally. As an example, addition to various counters and calculations are stopped (stopped). In addition, when the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are released from the outer frame 2, and when the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not released from the outer frame 2, the false magnetism and vibration are detected. In addition, addition to various counters and calculations are stopped (stopped), but only when illegal magnetism or vibration is detected in a state where the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2, it is considered illegal. A decision may be made to stop the progress of the game including the shooting of the game ball B immediately.

[16-1. Out port detection when multiple out ports are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, apart from the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the game ball B to be discharged is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225. FIG. FIG. 224 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second out port 1013 and a third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG. FIG. 225 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of computation when the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014 are provided separately from the out port 1008. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 224, between the entrance that is the upper end of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the entrance that is the upper end of the third ball passage portion 2522, game balls B can be discharged outside the game area 5a. A possible second out port 1013 is provided. With such a configuration, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and abut against the ball hitting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hitting), the second ball passage portion 2521 has a high probability. However, part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second ball passage portion 2521 . Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not enter the first ball passage portion 2506 and contact the ball hitting portion 1006 (strength somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), the third ball passage portion 2522 has a high probability. However, part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the third ball passage portion 2522 . In other words, a part of the game ball B hit so as to enter the first ball passage portion 2506 enters the second out port 1013 .

In addition, below the exits of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, the first opening portion 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided. 2430 is provided with a third out port 1014 different from the out port 1008, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the game area 5a. .

The second out port 1013 is provided around the entrances of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and the third out port 1014 is provided around the exits. Although the details of the effect of the second ball passage portion 2521 and the third ball passage portion 2522 are provided by providing the second out port 1013 and the third out port 1014, It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring inside.

In this embodiment, a second outlet sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013 and a game ball B discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014 are detected. A third out port sensor is provided that is capable of detecting that the When the second outlet sensor detects the game ball B entering the second outlet 1013, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, while the third outlet sensor detects the third outlet. When the game ball B entering the out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310 . Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is grasped by the second out number counter, while the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is grasped by the third out number counter. It is possible to grasp the number of balls entered.

It should be noted that the main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using not only the number-of-entered-balls counter and the number-of-outs counter, but also the second-out-number counter and the third-out-number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, out of the game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the third out number provided on the game board 5 It is possible to calculate the number of game balls B ejected to the outside without entering the ball entrance such as the first start hole 2002 and the second start hole 2004 . Further, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated by adding the number-of-entered-balls counter, the number-of-outs counter, the second-outs-number counter, and the third-outs-number counter.

In this embodiment, in the state where the game ball B is struck in the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 balls or more out of 100 balls that can be shot in one minute) are the second out. It is designed so that the ball will not enter the mouth 1013 . Therefore, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the second out number counter is used to check whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored, and if the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225(A), when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by voice output from the player and the speaker. This warning effect ends when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of game balls B that enter the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, an input located downstream of the second out port 1013 in the right region of the game area 5a Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball opening (ordinary winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006) are reduced, and the situation is disadvantageous to the player. becomes. In this regard, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is designed so that the game ball B can easily enter the second out port 1013. 5 may be illegally altered. As a result, it is possible to early discover that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. The number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013, and the number of entering balls and out ports (out port 1008, third out port 1014) on the downstream side of the second out port 1013 A ratio to the number of game balls B entering may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, when the ball entry rate of the game ball B entering the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Similarly, when the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more out of 100 balls that can be shot in one minute) It is designed so that it will not hit the ball. Therefore, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, the third out number counter is used to check whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored, and when the number exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225(B), when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game by voice output from the player and the speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, when the number of game balls B entered into the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, an input downstream of the third out port 1014 in the right region of the game area 5a Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball openings (regular winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005) are reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this respect, when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board is designed so that the game ball B can easily enter the third out port 1014. 5 may be illegally altered. As a result, it is possible to early discover that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In the above, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether or not the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. Ratio between the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B entering the entrance downstream of the third out port 1014 and the out port 1008 may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, when the ball entry rate of the game ball B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving state or the jackpot game state, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 becomes a predetermined number or more per unit time, Addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and calculation related to these out number counters are continued. Alternatively, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter or the third out number counter or the computation relating to these out number counters may be stopped. With such a configuration, even if the game ball B is entered into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by a fraudulent act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter do not increase. , the reliability of information on the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 can be enhanced.

Also, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be hit in the left area of the game area 5a, but if the game ball B is hit in the right area of the game area 5a, A game ball B may enter the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 . Therefore, in the normal state, when the second outlet sensor or the third outlet sensor detects the game ball B, the image displayed on the predetermined display device or the sound output from the speaker changes from right-handed to left-handed. It is executing an instruction production that instructs to change to .

[17. About light emission history after light emission effect using light guide plate]
In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 variably displays the decorative symbols. The light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area of is decorated with light emission a plurality of times, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise at the plurality of times, thereby emitting light that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the variable display. It is possible to perform production. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the back upper decoration body 3211 and the back left decoration of the back front effect unit 3200 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010). The body 3212 and the back-right decorative body 3213 are caused to emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. However, even after the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the light guide plate 3102's history of the color emitted from the light guide plate 3102 is displayed. It is possible to execute a history effect in which the upper back decorative body 3211 and the like are continuously illuminated with the immediately preceding emission color.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the main control board 1310 transmits a variation pattern command. Then, in the command analysis process of step S601, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received, based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 determine whether Further, when it is decided to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emission color pattern table is referred to based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, and the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is determined. One of a plurality of kinds of emission color patterns set over a plurality of times is determined.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102. By changing the emission color of the plurality of LEDs, the light guide plate 3102 has a first color of white, green, blue, or red. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3110 (see FIG. 172) with light emission. In the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is lighted three times with the light emission color set in the light emission color pattern, and each of the predetermined number of times. I'm trying to decorate it with light emission at the right time. In addition, the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second). The time spent is longer. Also, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only once, but the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission a plurality of times at each timing.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed among the variable display of the decorative pattern, but at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed For example, 1 to 3 out of 3 light emitting decorations on the light guide plate 3102 may be executed at the timing during the ready-to-win effect after forming the ready-to-win.

In addition, in the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 can emit light to decorate the first design 3110 with light emission. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be caused to emit light, and the second pattern 3120 can be decorated with light emission. , the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. This allows the player to clearly understand that the three light emission decorations of the first pattern 3110 in the light emission presentation are a series of presentations.

Next, an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set will be described with reference to FIG. The emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. FIG. 226 is an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

As described above, a plurality of types of emission color patterns are set in the emission color pattern table. How it changes is set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, the emission color pattern table sets emission patterns so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with emission colors.

Also, the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the luminescent color pattern is set to be decorated with one of the four colors of white, green, blue, and red. Then, when determining the luminescent color pattern from the luminescent color pattern table, as a result of changing the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 to the end, it is set so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases in the order of white→green→blue→red. It is In other words, when the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a big win, the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined with a high probability to be a luminescent color (for example, red) that is highly expected to be a big win, When the lottery result specified from the variation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is a light emission color pattern with a low expectation of a big hit (for example, white) with a high probability. I am going to decide. As a result, when the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a luminescent color with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the player's expectation for a big win is heightened.

In the luminescent color pattern, the luminescent colors of the light guide plate 3102 do not change in the reverse order of white→green→blue→red. is set so that the emitted light color is maintained, or the emitted light color is highly expected to win a big hit. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting colors with low expectations for big wins, there is still a possibility that the color will change to light colors with high expectations for big wins unless the three timings of the light emitting effect are completed. This allows the user to pay attention to the color of light emitted from the light guide plate 3102 with anticipation until the end of the light emission effect.

In addition, the luminescent color pattern does not necessarily have to change in the order of green→blue→red after the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with white light. It is also set to skip the above emission colors and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting colors with a low expectation of a big hit, it is not possible to predict which color the next light emitting color will change to, and the light guide plate will continue to operate until the end of the light emitting effect. The luminescent color of 3102 can be drawn with anticipation.

Next, the upper back decorative body 3211 and the like provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the back front effect unit 3200 surrounds the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. , back left decoration 3212 and back right decoration 3213 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 227, in the back-left decorations 3212 and the back-right decorations 3213 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, three radial decorations 3212b and three radiation decorations 3213b are used. , is divided into four. Here, these are collectively referred to as decoration 3210 and will be described. Therefore, on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, four decorative bodies 3210 are provided so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. In addition, behind these decorations 3210, there is provided a decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 can be decorated with white, green, blue, or red light similarly to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 .

When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decoration bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. In addition, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timings. 3210 emission is maintained. In this way, when executing the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 has a history of the color of the light emitted from the light guide plate 3102, and the light guide plate 3102 continuously emits light in the color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. Running.

Specifically, at the timing of the first or second time when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the next time. The luminescence of the plurality of decorations 3210 is maintained until the timing of luminescence decoration. Also, at the third timing of luminescence decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the luminous effect, the plurality of decorations 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is luminous decorated, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. The luminescence of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the light is emitted. As a result, although the time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light at one timing is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), the plurality of decorations 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining , even if the luminescent color is overlooked when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with luminescent light, the luminescent color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with luminescent light.

Also, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are provided in a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors that can decorate the light guide plate 3102 with luminous effects. In addition, the number of decoration bodies 3210 that emit light is made different depending on the light emission colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decoration bodies 3210. The number of the decorations 3210 that emit light is set to increase in order from the lower side of the decorations 3210 . Specifically, when the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 that is decorated with luminescence in the luminous effect is white, which is the luminescent color with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit, four lights on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Among the decoration bodies 3210, one decoration body 3210a on the lower side is set to emit white light. In addition, when the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. In addition, when the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. Further, when the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the emission color with the highest probability of winning a big hit, all the four decorations 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. Thus, even if the degree of expectation for a big win cannot be grasped from the light emitting colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorations 3210, the degree of expectation for a big win can be easily grasped from the number of the decorations 3210 emitting light.

In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 and are capable of emitting light forward. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the lighting effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. However, since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102 , the light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the first pattern 3110 but also by the plurality of decorations 3210 emitting light. As a result, the first pattern 3110 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is further emphasized, and the presentation using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal variation before the reach is formed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. During the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Another notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is not newly started. In other words, another advance notice effect using the effect display device 1600 is started at the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light. As a result, the light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not hinder the visual recognition of other notice effects, and the other notice effects are started. I can't miss it. In other words, it is possible for the player to grasp firmly the light emitting effect of decorating the light guide plate 3102 with light and the other notice effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 228, a specific example of the effect of the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 during execution of the light emission effect will be described. FIG. 228 shows a specific rendering example with the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 during execution of the lighting rendering. In FIG. 228, as the second pattern 3120, the eyes (pupils) of a predetermined character are shown as enlarged patterns.

FIG. 228 describes a case where a luminous color pattern is determined in which the luminous color for decorating the light guide plate 3102 in the luminous effect changes from white to green to red. First, as shown in FIG. 228(A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 228(B), when it comes to the first timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 with the luminous effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in white, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, one decoration body 3210a on the lower side emits light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, which is white. . Then, as shown in FIG. 228(C), the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is extinguished in a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second). Until the second timing, it maintains its white light emission.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 228(D), at the second timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the luminescence effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in green, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decoration bodies 3210a and 3210b are increased so as to emit light, and their emission colors are the same as those of the light guide plate 3102. It emits green light. Then, as shown in FIG. 228(E), the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210 already emits green light. 3210b maintains its green light emission until the third timing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 228(F), at the third timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 in the luminescence effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Of the four decorations 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area, all the four decorations 3210a to 3210d are increased so that they emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. It emits a certain red color. Then, as shown in FIG. 228(G), the luminous decorations of the light guide plate 3102 are turned off in a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second), but are already emitting red light. As for 3210d, as shown in FIG. 228(H), the light emission in red is maintained until the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In this embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emitting effect, the plurality of decorations 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. However, the light guide plate does not emit light at that time. A plurality of luminous bodies may emit light in the luminous color immediately before the light guide plate 3102 from the time when the luminous decoration 3102 is turned off. Even in such a case, the luminescent color can be grasped after the luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of decorations 3210 that emit light is different depending on the light guide plate 3102 and the color of the decorations 3210. The more the number of decorations 3210 that emit light, the higher the likelihood of a big win. However, the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has already been decorated with light emission out of the three timings at which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission may be indicated. For example, at the first timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, one of the four decoration bodies 3210 on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is made to emit light. Then, at the second timing, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b are made to emit light, and at the third timing, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c are made to emit light. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timings in the light emission effect. A pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first and second timings but not decorated with light emission at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not known how many times the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 will continue in the luminous effect, and it is possible to pay attention to how many chances the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 will change.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the variable display of the decorative symbols, as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the big hit with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbols, a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. Or light emission using the light guide plate 3102 over multiple fluctuations from the time when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 (the start condition is satisfied) until the variation display of the decorative pattern due to the entry is performed. You may make it perform production|presentation. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are established), the pre-determining command is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 sends the pre-determining command is received, based on the variation pattern specified from the advance determination command, whether or not to execute the light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, and if it is determined to execute the light emission effect, the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is determined. It may be configured to determine In addition, in the lighting effect using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission a plurality of times at predetermined timings among the plurality of variations. The configuration may be such that the emission of the plurality of light emitters continues with the emission color immediately before 3102 . In such a case, it is possible to draw attention to how the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes over a plurality of changes until the light emission effect is completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side thereof emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. However, when a plurality of LEDs do not emit light due to a failure or the like, the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission at the timing of light emission decoration, and the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the light emission color can be grasped. can't In this regard, since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102 after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be decorated with light emission, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light. The degree of expectation for a big hit can be grasped from the luminescent color of the decorative body 3210. - 特許庁

Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect is executed to notify that the abnormality has occurred, prior to other effects. For example, when a magnetism level that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (shock) to the game area 5a is detected, it is determined that the game is not being played normally. and execute the warning rendition. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing of executing the light emitting effect and light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, the warning effect is prioritized, and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the light emitting of the plurality of decorations 3210 are given priority. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the timing of luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 (before the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the plurality of decorations 3210 are made to start emitting light. there is In this way, even when the warning effect is executed with priority over the light emitting effect, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for a big hit from the luminescent colors of the plurality of decorations 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 in the light emitting effect and the history effect suggest the degree of expectation for the big hit. is executed, and the setting value may be suggested by the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 or the luminescent colors of the plurality of decorations 3210 . In such a configuration, for example, when the emission color pattern is determined from the emission color pattern table, as a result of changing the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 to the end, the set values are higher in the order of white→green→blue→red. It should be set to suggest that That is, among the setting suggestion effects, a light emission pattern in which the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red is executed as the high setting suggestion effect, and the final light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is executed as the low setting suggestion effect. What is necessary is just to execute the light emission pattern which becomes white. As a result, when the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 or the luminescent color of the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 is decorated with a luminescent color that suggests a high set value, the player's response to the high set value (set value 6) is reduced. You can raise your expectations.

[18. Regarding image production similar to light emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to decorating the light guide plate 3102 with a predetermined pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the By displaying a pattern that is a visual mode similar to the pattern decorated with light emission on the light plate 3102, it is possible to execute an imitation effect that makes it look as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, the pattern decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally one of the patterns is displayed. , The reach effect executed after that is different.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (the start condition is established), the main control board 1310 transmits a variation pattern command. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process of step S601, the variation pattern is specified from the variation pattern command, and the variation pattern for executing the first ready-to-win effect is specified. In this case, the pattern that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the production, the first ready-to-win production is performed after that. On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the second ready-to-win effect is specified, the pattern decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By finally executing the imitation effect of displaying the pattern in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second ready-to-win effect is subsequently performed.

Note that the above-described imitation effect is executed during the normal fluctuation before the ready-to-win state is formed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In addition, the first ready-to-win effect among the ready-to-win effects is set so that the degree of expectation for big hit is higher than the second ready-to-win effect. As a result, in the imitation production during the normal fluctuation, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with the pattern, the process proceeds to the first ready-to-win production with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the pattern is finally displayed on the light guide plate 3102. can be made to pay attention to whether or not to luminous decoration.

Next, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 229 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 229, as the second picture 3120, a picture consisting of characters "CHANCE!" is shown.

As shown in FIG. 229(A), on the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation effect, as the second pattern 3120, the characters "CHANCE!" . In the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 can emit light to decorate the first design 3110 with light emission. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side of the front view can be caused to emit light, and the second pattern 3120 can be decorated with light emission. , only the luminous decoration of the second pattern 3120 is used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 229(B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect, as the imitation pattern 1600a, the characters "LUCKY!" it's shown. A moving image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but a still image such as the above-described imitation pattern 1600a is displayed during execution of the imitation effect.

The light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the characters "CHANCE!" as the second pattern 3120, while the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the characters "LUCKY!" as the imitation pattern 1600a. However, the characters of the imitation picture 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as those of the characters of the second picture 3120. FIG. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the form of each character is the same, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the effect pattern as the second pattern 3120, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the effect pattern as the imitation pattern 1600a. The effect pattern which is a part is the same pattern as the effect pattern which is a part of the second pattern 3120 . In this way, in the imitation effect, since the common effect pattern is displayed as part of each pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

In addition, while the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in a single color by a plurality of LEDs, the display area of the effect display device 1600 similarly displays the imitation pattern 1600a in a single color. In addition, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light, the light and shade of the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3120 occur depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs. The pattern 1600a is displayed so as to have shading. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120, a black image that does not display any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the visual appearance of the pattern is the same as a whole, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The area 3102 in which the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission is substantially the same as the area in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. FIG. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the areas where the patterns are displayed are substantially the same, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

In the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. As for the time, they are all set to the same time. Further, during execution of the imitation effect, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker, or the light guide plate 3102 or the effect display device 1600 A complex performance is executed by operating the provided members in a predetermined operation mode (for example, lighting lamps provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, operating movable members, etc.). Even at the timing of displaying the pattern of , a common effect is executed as a composite effect. However, at the timing of displaying each of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are lit, but the luminous colors are different. may In this way, in the imitation effect, there is no effect difference between the case where the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 230, a specific example of effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed will be described. FIG. 230 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In FIG. 230, the second pattern 3120 is shown as a pattern consisting of characters "CHANCE!".

In FIG. 230, a variation pattern for executing either the chance ready-to-win effect as the first ready-to-win effect or the lucky reach effect to execute as the second ready-to-win effect is determined, and the imitation effect is executed before executing these ready-to-win effects. A case of execution will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 230(A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 230(B), when the imitation effect is started, the light guide plate 3102 displays the character "CHANCE!" for example, less than 1 second), it is decorated with red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 230(C), when the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a along with the characters "LUCKY!" An effect pattern is displayed in blue for a predetermined period of time (for example, less than 1 second). The display time during which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time during which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120. FIG.

As described above, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red, while the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a in blue. In this way, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are combined in the case where the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 and the case where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Although it is difficult to grasp which one is used, it is possible to grasp which of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a is being displayed from the display color.

In the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times). 230(D), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out to display a black image that does not display any information. there is As a result of the imitation effect, attention can be paid to which of the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops. can.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230(E), after the display area of the production display device 1600 is blacked out, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reached. is formed, as a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the second pattern 3120, a chance ready-to-reach effect (first ready-to-win effect) is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 230(F), after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. After forming a ready-to-win effect in , the process advances to a lucky ready-to-reach effect (second ready-to-win effect) as a ready-to-reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Also, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. (for example, 3 seconds).

In this embodiment, the characters and effect patterns are displayed by the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It suffices to display a pattern having a similar visual appearance so that the two elements match each other. For example, a pattern of a character having a similar style may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the second pattern 3120 that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, However, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second pattern 3120 nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed. A pattern that does not proceed to any of the ready-to-win effects may be set. In such a case, as a result of the imitation effect, more attention can be paid to what kind of result is notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of the imitation effect, of the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second pattern Although the display starts from the luminous decoration of 3120, a pattern starting from the display of the imitation pattern 1600a may be set. In the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in blue. For the color development of , a pattern to be executed in a color different from that may be set. In this way, when the imitation effect is executed with a display or color different from the normal one, the degree of expectation for the big hit for the variable display of the decorative pattern is set to be high, so that the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. Not only which one of the two patterns 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 will stop, but also the contents of the effect can be noticed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the imitation effect is executed, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, other than the imitation effect, the effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed. For example, as an effect other than the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the light guide plate 3102 is suddenly decorated with the second pattern 3120. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the imitation effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition to this pattern, there is a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in blue so as to reverse the color development, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in red. have set. In these patterns, the red color is used to indicate that the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the blue color. It is notified that the degree of expectation is high, and similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when it is displayed in blue. Thus, in the imitation effect, both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a can be displayed in blue and red. It can be difficult to grasp whether you are using

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By actually displaying one of the patterns, it suggests the reach effect that will be executed after that, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggesting effect described above and finally displaying one of the patterns , may be configured to suggest a set value. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect, an imitation effect is finally executed in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red light, and as a low setting suggestion effect, the final effect is performed. Basically, the imitation effect of displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be executed. As a result, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with the second pattern 3120 in red when the imitation effect is executed, the player's expectation for the high set value (set value 6) can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first design substrate 3103 arranged on the upper side of the light guide plate 3102 can be caused to emit light to decorate the first design 3110 with light emission. On the other hand, it is possible to illuminate the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 arranged on the left side in the front view to light-embellish the second pattern 3120, but the plurality of LEDs With respect to the brightness of , the player can change the setting by operating the pressing operation section 303 . That is, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be low, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be high. When set, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes a bright display mode. In the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. In this way, in the imitation effect, the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to either of the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a. It can be difficult to grasp whether you are using When adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the pressing operation unit 303, both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs for the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. good too.

[19. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some commands among various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. FIG. 231 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control boards, and FIGS. 232 and 233 show the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control boards in FIG. is a table.

[19-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 231 to 233, various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display , status display, and others.

[19-1-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named FIG. 1 synchronization production start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

Special figure 1 synchronization production start command (fluctuation pattern command) is intended to instruct the start of special figure synchronization production with the production pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, special design 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, It designates a non-specific jackpot, the special figure 1 synchronization production end command instructs the end of special figure 1 synchronization production, and the state specification command at the time of fluctuation instructs the game state. In addition, the game state consists of a time-saving state that indicates that it is a time-saving state, a probability-variable state that indicates that it is a probability-variable state, and a normal state that indicates that it is neither the time-saving state nor the probability-variable state. It is

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1 . Then, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the special figure 1 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 tuning effect end command, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM Select and send a command according to the stored setting value. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by differentiating the modes of the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command that have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 The setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. It's like

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[19-1-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named FIG. 2 synchronization production start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization production end. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

Special figure 2 synchronization production start command (variation pattern command) is intended to instruct the start of special figure synchronization production in the production pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, special design 2 designation command is off, specific jackpot, It designates a non-specific big hit, and the special figure 2 synchronization production end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

Also, similar to the special figure 1 synchronization production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronization production end command, the special figure 2 synchronization production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization production end command are pachinko machine 1 When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a special figure 2 tuning effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and a special figure 2 tuning effect end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM selects and transmits a command corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in . It should be noted that the special figure 2 tuning effect (fluctuation effect of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second start port 2004) is mainly executed in the probability variable state and the time saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by differentiating the mode of the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command which have been conventionally used, the peripheral control board 1510 The setting value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted on the peripheral control board 1510 side. setting value can be grasped.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[19-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 231, the section related to the jackpot includes jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open N-th display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot pattern display, and small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening. The command for closing the large winning prize 1 indicates the start of the closing of the large winning prize 1 between rounds (during or starting to close the large winning prize 2005 between rounds). The command to display the number of game balls B with a count of 0 to 10 (a game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403) B), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot pattern display command instructs the display of jackpot pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command instructs the start of opening the small hit (during or starting to open the prize winning opening 2006 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit middle big winning opening winning effect (when the game ball B entering the role winning opening 2006 during the small winning is detected by the role winning opening sensor 2513 The V passing command instructs the V winning mouth winning performance (the game ball B that has won the prize winning mouth 2006 during the small hit is the first V winning mouth 2007 or the second V winning mouth 2008 The effect in the case of detection by) is instructed, and the small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending. In addition, the V passing command corresponding to each of the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 (the first V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening 2007, the second A second V winning opening command when the game ball B is detected by the V winning opening 2008 may be provided.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win 1 open Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 15th rounds (of the big win 2005). When the Nth round is opened), the command to close the large winning slot 1 is transmitted when the large winning slot 1 is closed (start closing the large winning slot 2005), and the large winning slot 1 count display command is sent to the large Sent when the winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning opening 1 (when opening the big winning opening 2005 and when the game ball B entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403) The jackpot ending command is transmitted when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2005 is opened).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (when opening the prize winning opening 2006 at the time of the small winning), and displaying the small winning count. The command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium or large winning opening (when the game ball B entering the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small winning is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2513), and is a small winning ending command. is sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[19-1-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 232, the classification of power-on has the names of power-on state, main control return destination at power-on, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. command. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. Information instructing when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure) ), information indicating which state to return from among the above-described normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, the model code of the pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work is copyrighted, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation) When this happens, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs, the game that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It specifies whether the pachinko machine is a specification (so-called ST machine, etc.), and whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of setting values or only one setting value. In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes a , and a setting value code indicating whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or a plurality of setting values.

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information that instructs the drive state of the starter solenoid 2412 and information that instructs the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the award winning solenoid 2512.

The ON operation command of the setting key instructs to check the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal control RAM, and the OFF operation command of the setting key is the instruction to confirm the setting value stored in the specific area of the internal control RAM. This indicates that the confirmation of the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area has been completed.

The setting change command instructs that the changed setting value and the setting value have been changed. In this example, setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command. The setting value of the machine 1 can be grasped. The setting change command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at power-on regardless of whether the setting value is changed, or if the setting value has not been changed at power-on, the current setting value may be changed. may be transmitted. As a result, each time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the latest set values.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

These commands are transmitted at the time of turning on the power of the main control board (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). Specifically, when powering on the pachinko machine 1, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, transmission of the main control built-in RAM in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of powering on in step S50 in the main control side game control main process It is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[19-1-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. , general pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and state designation at the time of change. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern synchronous production start command (normal pattern fluctuation pattern command) instructs the start of the general pattern synchronous production with the production pattern (universal pattern fluctuation pattern) specified in the mode. It designates a big hit or a non-specific big hit, the general pattern synchronization production end command instructs the general pattern synchronization production end, and the state specification command at the time of fluctuation instructs the game state. It should be noted that, as described above, the game state includes the time saving state indicating that the time saving state is set, and the normal state indicating that the time saving state is not set.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern fluctuation, the general pattern specification command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern hit-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[19-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric role effect relates to the second starting door 2411 that is advanced and retracted by driving the starting solenoid 2412, and as shown in FIG. It is composed of a command named "Ending per figure" and "Ending per figure". These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern opening command instructs the general pattern opening start, and the general pattern opening display command indicates that the general pattern opening display command is to start during the general pattern opening (the second start door 2411 protrudes forward by driving the start port solenoid 2412 It is intended to indicate the state or when protruding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of the ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal per pattern opening command is transmitted at the start of per normal pattern opening, and the general power open display command is transmitted when the normal power is opened (the second start door 2411 drives the start port solenoid 2412 When protruding forward by), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[19-1-7. others]
As shown in FIG. 233, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type look-ahead, fluctuation pattern look-ahead 1, fluctuation pattern look-ahead 2, and fluctuation pattern. It consists of commands named look-ahead 3, look-ahead variation pattern 4, look-ahead variation pattern 5, look-ahead variation pattern 6, normal prize winning, and normal symbol memory. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting entrance winning command instructs the start of starting entrance winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002. , and the start of the effect when the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402, respectively. , to instruct the state transition from the variable reduction operating state to the variable reduction non-operating state, the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 reservation (game ball B enters the first start port 2002 Then, the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the special symbol 2 storage command is special symbol 2 reservation 0 ~ 4 pieces (the number of balls (number of reservations) that have not been used for the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004) The special design type look-ahead command is based on the special design 1 reservation by reading ahead before the special design 1 reservation is used for the variable display of the special design on the first special design display device of the function display unit 1400 Before the display result (loss pattern, jackpot pattern) by the first special pattern display device and the special pattern 2 reservation are used for the variable display of the special pattern in the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, read ahead. The display result (small hit design, big hit design) by the second special design display device based on the special design 2 reservation is designated respectively.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 1 to the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command 6 read ahead and read the special pattern before the special pattern 1 reservation is used for the fluctuation display of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400. Before the variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on 1 reservation and the special symbol 2 suspension are used for the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the special symbol The variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is specified respectively, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 1 is a command according to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 2 is a command corresponding to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern look-ahead command 3 is a command corresponding to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 4 is a command corresponding to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1 The variation pattern look-ahead command 5 is a command corresponding to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variation pattern look-ahead command 6 is a command corresponding to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, commands including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 synchronization production start command, special figure 1 synchronization production end command, special figure 2 synchronization production start command, special figure 2 synchronization production end command, setting change command ) is an example, and other commands may be provided for each set value.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is to instruct the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is to store 0 to 4 normal symbols (the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003). The normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is used to convey the number of balls (reserved number) that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball B enters the first opening opening 2002) When the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402), the top center speaker, top side speaker, and body frame speaker 622 notify that mainly by voice. The command for specifying the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the fluctuation reduction of the specified number of times has been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 When the number of pending balls in operation changes (when game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of pending balls increases, or from the number of holdings, the first special symbol display device is used to display the fluctuation of special symbols. When the number of reservations has decreased), the special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls changes (when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reservations increases, or , when the holding number is used for the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display device from the holding number and the holding number is reduced), the special symbol type look-ahead command is the special symbol 1, 2 operation holding ball number increase When (when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the number of reservations increases), the variation pattern look-ahead command is sent immediately after the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent. be. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

In addition, the normal winning opening winning command is transmitted when the game ball B is received into the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of normal symbol operation pending balls changes (when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003) When the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases when the number of reservations is decreased by using the normal symbol display for variable display of normal symbols from the number of reservations. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball B enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the second starting opening When the game ball B enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402), the top central speaker, the top side speaker, and the body frame speaker 622 mainly notify that effect by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start-up winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for giving voice notification from the top central speaker, top side speaker, and body frame speaker 622, but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start winning command, and the top central speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 do not announce it by voice.

[20. Setting information error notification]
Next, based on the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the process of informing when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal will be explained. FIG. 234 is a flow chart showing the procedure of setting information determination processing executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis processing (step S1022).

When starting the setting information determination process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a setting abnormality notification flag, which will be described later, is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting error notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that the setting value error is notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. is not notified, and the process advances to step S1501.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the received command is the setting change command (step S1501). The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of No. 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 set when the power is turned on are stored in the setting information storage area, and the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

Also, if the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, special figure 1 synchronization production start command, special figure 1 synchronization production end command, special figure 2 synchronization production start command, special figure 2 synchronization production end command, variation pattern If prefetch command 1 to fluctuation pattern prefetch command 6 are received), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. (step S1504), and if they do not match, it notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the set value information (step S1504), and sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormality in the set value information is being notified. It is set and the process ends (step S1505).

Further, when it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, when the abnormality notification of the setting value information is in progress, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command is set in step S1502. It is determined whether or not the set value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if not matched, the abnormality notification of the set value information is continued.

On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is terminated (step S1508). , the setting error notification flag is reset, and the process ends (step S1509).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by transmitting a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 are changed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310, specifically, normal processing (setting value change processing) has not been performed. In spite of this, when the setting value is changed, it is determined that an error or illegality has occurred, and a process of notifying that effect is executed. It should be noted that the game progresses even during the notification of an abnormality in the set value information, and the effect display device 1600 executes variable effects and the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the set value information is performed so as not to hinder the execution of the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 . Specifically, control to display "setting error!" etc. in an area that does not overlap with the variable performance being executed in the performance display device 1600, so that the variable performance being executed in the performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized Control for translucent display of "setting error!" etc. in the area overlapping with the variable effect, control for voice output of "setting error has occurred" from the top central speaker, top side speaker, and body frame speaker 622 , light emission control of lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the door frame 3 in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking in red), and the like, or the like, are executed in combination.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is not executed, or the abnormality notification of the setting value information is executed. In addition to this, the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 to be described later is not executed, and when the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this effect is stopped. can be That is, the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command changes to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 , the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area has changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise, etc., and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command sent from the main control board 1310 If there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, and if the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this effect increases. descend. Therefore, in such a case, the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is not executed, and if the effect is being executed, the effect may be stopped to suppress the decrease in reliability. .

Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information. can be For example, when the set value is changed in the set value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is stored in a reference area different from the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also stores the setting value after the change, and at any timing (such as the timing of sending the special figure 1 tuning effect start command and the special figure 2 tuning effect start command etc.) The setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area and for reference It is also possible to determine whether or not the set value stored in the area matches, and if it is determined that the set value does not match, the game may be stopped and the abnormality of the set value information may be notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after starting the abnormality notification of the setting value information, when the abnormality is resolved, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is automatically terminated without any operation by the game clerk. Therefore, if the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, the setting value information is stored in the setting information storage area. When the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state after starting the abnormality notification of the setting value information because it does not match the setting value information, the setting is immediately performed. Abnormal notification of value information can be terminated.

In the above example, when the setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value indicated by the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side. , and it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the set value information depending on whether or not it matches the stored set value. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, when a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 received last time It is also possible to determine whether or not the values match with each other, and to notify the abnormality of the set value information if they do not match. In this case, when a setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received based on the change of the setting value, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be performed.

In addition, in relation to the variable performance, a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted multiple times from the main control board 1310, and if at least a part of the command does not match, an abnormality of the setting value information is notified. You can do it. Specifically, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special figure 1 synchronization production start command and the special figure 2 synchronization production start command and the special figure 1 synchronization production end command and the special figure 2 synchronization production end command Shown by It may be determined whether or not the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if the setting value information does not match, an abnormality notification of the setting value information may be performed.

Also, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command are the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 However, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to be notified is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronization production start command, the special figure 1 synchronization production end command, the special figure 2 synchronization production start command, the special figure 2 synchronization production end command, and the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, and the main control Whenever any command is transmitted from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is transmitted, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may also be transmitted. For example, setting notification command 1 to setting notification command 6 for notifying the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 are provided, and the setting notification command (setting value 1 If so, then setting notification command 1, if setting value 2, setting notification command 2, if setting value 6, setting notification command 6) may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with a plurality of set values and one with only one set value), and design work can be saved.

Also, in this case, a command (for example, special figure 1 synchronization production start command, special figure 1 synchronization production end command, Not only at the time of transmission of special figure 2 synchronization production start command, special figure 2 synchronization production end command, and fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, etc.), command not involved in production executed by production display device 1600 (for example, normal winning mouth winning command etc. ), a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent, and the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality. With this configuration, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether or not the set value information stored in the set information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, thereby avoiding problems caused by noise or the like. can further improve the accuracy of

[21. Suspension notice effect]
Next, the suspension notice effect will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the entry of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a command (first reserved A number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600, and based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004 When the second reserved memory number changes, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) to instruct the second reserved memory number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 The number of second pending memories is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 2402. When the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command By changing the display mode of the first reserve memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special lottery result whose start of suggestion is withheld based on the special lottery result It is possible to execute a pending advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit at the time of execution of the suggestion.

In this example, the first reservation number specified by the first reservation number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second reservation number designated by the second reservation number storage command, the fluctuation pattern prefetch command and special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the advance determination information (losing, small hit, big hit, etc., and may be able to notify the type of big hit such as probability variable big hit or normal big hit) indicated by the symbol type look-ahead command has a holding notice determination table for determining the presence or absence of holding notice and the holding notice pattern type when executing the holding notice.

Then, when the decision to execute the pending notice is made and the type of pending notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed from normal. It is displayed in a display mode (a display color different from usual in this example). In this example, the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when executing the reservation notice, they are displayed in either blue, green, red, or ladybug pattern. do. Also, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of white→blue→green→red→ladybug pattern.

In addition, when the lottery result is specified as a big hit as the advance determination information, the final reservation display mode determines with a high probability a reservation notice pattern in which the degree of expectation for the big win is high (for example, red color or ladybug pattern). When the lottery result is determined to be a loss as the determination information, the final reservation display is determined by determining with a high probability a reservation notice pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low (for example, blue color) as the final reservation display mode. When a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win is displayed as a mode, the player's degree of expectation for the big win game state increases.

In addition, in the pending notice pattern, every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variable display of decorative patterns (variable display of special patterns)) is performed during the execution of the pending notice effect (every time the hold is digested), the effect display It is set how the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the device 1600 change. In addition, in the pending notice pattern, the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is reversed from the order of white→blue→green→red→ladybug pattern. It is set so that it does not change in order (that is, the expectation of a big hit does not decrease), and every time a suggestion of a special lottery result (variation display of decorative patterns (variation display of special patterns)) is performed (holding is digested Each time) the display mode of the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or it becomes a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. is set to Therefore, even if the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the suggestion of the special lottery result, which is the execution target of the reservation notice, starts. There is a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a big hit until the game is played, and the mode of the pending display can be paid attention to with expectation until the end.

Further, in the pending notice pattern, it is not necessary to display the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then change them in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. Starting from the display mode in the middle (for example, based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the game ball B entered the first starting opening 2002, the first reservation memory 1700c is displayed in red ), the display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the middle display mode (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result is set to change from white to ladybug pattern when the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c in response to the start of . For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) to change the display mode of the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a, the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1700a to 1700d can be It allows two reserved stores 1701a to be displayed. In addition, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next. It is possible to draw attention to the display mode of the reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a is different from the above-mentioned suspension notice, together with the suspension notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit, or independently. , it is possible to execute a setting value holding suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this example, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 executes presence/absence of the setting value holding suggestion effect and the setting value holding suggestion effect. A setting value holding suggestion determination table is provided for determining setting value holding suggestion pattern types in the case of setting value holding suggestion patterns. Then, when the decision to execute the setting value holding suggestion effect is made and the set value holding suggestion pattern type to be executed is determined, the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in an unusual display mode (in this example, an unusual shape).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 235(A), the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are usually displayed in circles, which are the basic shapes, and in the case of executing the setting value holding suggestion effect 235(B), a triangle indicated by 1700c in FIG. 235(C), or a star indicated by 1701a in FIG. 235(D). In addition, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a increase the degree of expectation for the set value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high set value) in the order of circle→square→triangle→star. is set to

Further, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the setting value holding becomes a high-expectation aspect (for example, a star) for the high setting value as the final holding display aspect. When the suggestive pattern is determined with a high probability and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the set value becomes a mode (for example, triangular) with a moderate degree of expectation for the high set value as the mode of the final pending display. When the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2 by determining the hold suggesting pattern with a high probability, the set value becomes the form (for example, square) with the lowest expectation for the high set value as the form of the final hold display. By determining the pending suggestion pattern with a high probability, when a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value is displayed as the final mode of the pending display, the player's degree of expectation for the high set value increases. there is

In addition, in the set value hold suggestion pattern, every time a special lottery result is suggested (decorative pattern fluctuation display (special pattern fluctuation display)) during the execution of the set value hold suggestion effect (every time the hold is digested ), how the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed are set. In addition, in the setting value reservation suggestion pattern, the display modes of the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are in the order opposite to the order of circle→square→triangle→star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and the suggestion of the special lottery result (variation display of decorative symbols (variation display of special symbols)) is performed (holding is digested each time) the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the degree of expectation for the high set value It is set to be a high aspect. Therefore, even if the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low degree of expectation for the high set value, the special effect that is the execution target of the set value suspension suggestion effect is displayed. Until the suggestion of the lottery results is started, there is a possibility that the mode of the pending display will change to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and it is possible to draw the attention of the mode of the pending display with expectation to the end. can.

Further, in the setting value reservation suggestion pattern, it is not always necessary to display the first reservation memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a in circles (basic shapes) and then change them in the order of square→triangle→star. Starting from the display mode (for example, based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002, and the first reservation memory 1700d is displayed as a square), The display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the middle display mode (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed in a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts It is also set to change from a square to a star when the first reserved memory 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700c according to . Therefore, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) for the display mode of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a to change, the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700a are displayed in the display mode with high expectations for the high set value. 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be displayed. Moreover, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low expectation for high setting values, it is impossible to predict which display mode will change next. , the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a can be watched with anticipation until the end.

In addition, since the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestive effect are determined separately, the second effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 is based on the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect. The display mode of the first suspension memory 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value retention suggestion pattern of the set value retention suggestion performance. When changing the display mode of the first suspension memory 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value, and the display on the effect display device 1600 based on the suspension notice pattern of the suspension notice effect While changing the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a to a mode with a high expectation for the high set value, based on the set value suspension suggestion pattern of the set value suspension suggestion performance, the effect display device 1600 When maintaining the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension storage 1701a displayed in the display device 1600 based on the suspension notice pattern of the suspension notice performance, the first suspension memory 1700a ~ While maintaining the display mode of 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a, the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the set value reservation suggestion pattern of the set value reservation suggestion performance is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for the high set value.

For example, first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and second When the second pending memory 1701a is moved, the display mode of the pending notice effect "white" is changed to "red", and the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect "circle" is changed to "square" (color and shape change). change both), the first suspension memory 1700a displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the suspension is terminated when the display mode of the suspension notice effect is "red" and the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect is "circle". When moving 1700d or the second suspension memory 1701a, the display mode "red" of the pending notice effect is maintained without changing, while the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect "circle" is changed to "square". (The color is maintained and the shape is changed.) When the display mode of the suspension notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value suspension suggestion effect is "triangle", the suspension is terminated and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a, the display mode of the suspension notice effect "white" is changed to "blue", while the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion effect "triangle" is changed. It may be maintained without change (change color and maintain shape).

That is, in this example, the processing for determining the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect and the processing for determining the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestive effect are performed separately, and based on the respective change patterns, the suggestion of the special lottery result ( Display of the first reservation memory 1700a to 1700d and the second reservation memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative design (variable display of the special design) is performed (every time the reservation is digested) Either the mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or the mode is changed to a mode with a high degree of expectation for high setting values.

The final display modes of the pending notice effect and set value pending suggestive effect are determined separately, and the change scenario of the display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a according to the determination result is shown. Any one of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

In addition, the start timing of the setting value holding suggestion effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a mode different from the usual) is the first start timing based on the acceptance of the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Not limited to the timing of displaying the reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a, the timing after that (the timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts accordingly, such as when first reserved stores 1700b-d are moved to first reserved stores 1700a-c. As a result, even if the setting value holding suggestion effect is not executed, the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a can be expected to be watched until the end.

Note that the execution frequency of the set value pending suggestion effect is set lower than that of the pending notice effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, and when the suggestion of the special lottery result based on the tobetsu lottery result based on the pending memory executing the pending notice effect is performed, the content of the pending notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the contents of the setting value holding suggestion effect continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the setting value holding suggestion effect is lower than that of the holding notice effect. This setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

Also, as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c in FIGS. 235(A) and 235(B) and the second suspension storage 1701a in FIG. In addition, there are cases where the set value suspension suggesting effect is executed alone as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c of FIG. 235(C). The holding notice pattern may include a change pattern of the display mode of setting value holding suggestion performance. In this case, a holding notice determination table may be provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 236, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a plurality of types of image data in which the display mode of the pending notice effect and the display mode of the set value pending hint effect are combined. The pending memory of the object is displayed based on the image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestive effect. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the pending advance notice effect of the target pending memory and the shape as the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect, a display mode combining these is generated, and this combined display mode is generated. is displayed as a pending memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 236(A), in which only the pending notice effect is executed and the set value pending suggestion effect is not executed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed as "synthetic pattern white 1 , and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 1". In addition, in the example of FIG. 236(B) in which the pending memory in which both the pending notice effect and the setting value pending suggesting effect are executed is displayed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are the image data of "composite pattern white 1". , and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 2". In addition, in the example of FIG. 236(C), in which the pending memory in which only the pending notice effect is executed and the pending memory in which only the set value pending suggestive effect is executed are displayed, the first pending memory 1700a is set to "composite pattern The first reserve memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 1", and the first reserve memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 3". are displayed.

Also, in the second pending memory 1701a, the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggesting effect are executed, and the pending memory in which both the pending notice effect and the set value pending suggesting effect are executed is displayed (D). In this example, the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern red 4".

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the display control of the first reserve memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserve memory 1701a in a manner different from the normal display is performed to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. A set value holding suggestion effect for suggesting a set value can be executed. Note that while the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, the set value pending suggestion effect is not based on the preliminary determination information. That is, the pending notice performance can be executed by obtaining the pending special lottery result in advance, while the set value pending suggestive effect can be executed without obtaining the pending special lottery result in advance. be.

The special lottery result of which the start of suggestion is pending is not limited to being displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d or the second pending memory 1701a. The pending memory corresponding to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as pending memory during execution. In this case, the final display mode of the pending notice effect and set value pending suggesting effect may be displayed in the pending memory during execution, and by configuring in this way, the special lottery result can be suggested. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the holding notice performance and the set value holding suggesting performance until it is executed, and to make the player expect for the big hit and the high set value, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In the above example, the display mode of the pending notice effect is changed in the display color of the pending memory, and the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect is changed to the shape of the pending memory. It is not limited to the above as long as it can be determined that it is being executed. For example, as the display mode of the pending notice effect, the display color of the pending notice effect is changed, and as the display mode of the setting value pending suggestive effect, the numerical value or the pending memory is suggested without changing the shape of the target pending memory. Additional information such as effect mode (shiny effect or flame effect) around the image may be displayed in association with the reserved storage.

Also, when the first holding memory 1700a ~ 1700d is displayed based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, or based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second When the reserved memory 1701a is displayed, when the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are updated and displayed based on the fact that the reservation is completed (the first reserved memories 1700b to 1700d are changed to the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700c, or when moving the first reservation memory 1700a or the second reservation memory 1701a to the execution reservation memory), the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested by outputting a sound effect. . For example, when suggesting that the set value is "1", a sound effect (for example, "beep") corresponding to the set value "1" among multiple types of sound effects is output, and the set value is "2". In the case of suggesting that the setting value is "5", output a sound effect (for example, "beep") corresponding to the setting value "2" among multiple types of sound effects, ... suggesting that the setting value is "5" In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the set value "5" (e.g., "beep beep beep") is output among multiple types of sound effects. Of the sounds, a sound effect corresponding to the set value "6" (for example, "Panpakapan") may be output.

Further, when the suspension notice performance or the set value suspension suggestion performance is executed, the big hit expectation level and the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation part 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In this case, after the operation instruction image for instructing the operation of the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300 is displayed on the production display device 1600 Alternatively, the expected degree of big hit or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested according to the operation of the contact operation section 302 or the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300 . In addition, the operation instruction image may be made common between the case of maintaining the expected degree of big win and the suggested set value and the case of further increasing the expected degree of big win and suggested set value, whereby the pending notice effect and the set value may be used. It becomes impossible to discriminate whether or not the degree of expectation for a big win or a suggested set value is increased by a performance (a performance of displaying an operation instruction image) that is a precursor to the execution of the pending suggestion performance, and the performance operation unit 300 touches the performance operation part 301.例文帳に追加It is possible to induce the user to actively operate the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 .

In addition, during the demonstration (demonstration effect that is performed while the player is waiting), it may be possible to select the presence or absence of the suspension notice effect or the presence or absence of the set value suspension suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to execute performances that match the tastes of the players, and execution of suspension notice performances and set value retention suggestion performances is performed even for players who do not want to be suggested the degree of expectation for big wins, the set values of the pachinko machine 1, etc. It is possible to suppress that the big hit expectation degree and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 are suggested.

In addition, an explanation of the mode suggested by the setting value holding suggestion effect (the mode of suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and not the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) It may be executed during the execution of the demonstration effect performed) or the execution of the suggestion of the special lottery result (during the variable display of the decorative pattern). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the expectation for the big win due to misidentification as the degree of expectation for the big win when the setting value holding suggestion performance is executed.

In addition, during the execution of the time saving state and the variable probability state, the pre-determination indicated by the variation pattern prefetch command and the special symbol type prefetch command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 Advance determination instructed by the variation pattern look-ahead command and the special symbol type look-ahead command sent from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 without executing the holding notice effect based on the information. It is also possible to make it possible to execute only the pending notice effect based on the information. In addition, even during the execution of the time saving state and the variable probability state, the set value is reserved in relation to the first reservation storage 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball B to the first start port 2002. A suggestion effect may be executed. As a result, even when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it is possible to make the player have expectations for the set value hold suggesting effect.

[22. Set value continuous suggestion effect]
Next, the setting value continuous suggestion effect will be described. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value continuous suggestion performance for suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols is not limited to the one that is executed once for one variable display of special symbols, and the one that is executed multiple times for one variable display of special symbols (so-called pseudo-continuous display). fluctuation).

In this example, according to the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command and the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests the setting value A set value continuous suggestion performance table for determining the presence or absence of performance and the set value continuous suggestion performance pattern type in the case of executing the set value continuous suggestion performance is provided. Then, when the determination to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect is made and the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern type to be executed is determined, the set value is set every time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the effect display device 1600 Any one of a plurality of setting suggesting characters 1702 having different display modes appears depending on the setting.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237(A), when the effect display device 1600 starts the variable display of decorative patterns, a setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the set value 1 is drawn with "1" on its head. The setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 237(C), when the effect display device 1600 starts the next variable display of the decorative pattern, "3" is drawn on the head as the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the set value 3. Then, as shown in FIG. 237(E), when the effect display device 1600 starts the next variable display of the decorative pattern, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the set value 4 is displayed. A setting suggesting character 1702 with "4" drawn on its head is made to appear.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronization performance start command and the special figure 2 synchronization performance start command, setting suggestion according to the setting value "6" as a final mode A setting value continuous suggesting performance pattern to be a character 1702 is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "1" is set as a final mode. By determining the continuous value suggesting production pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the high set value is displayed as the final mode of the setting suggesting character 1702, the player's expectations for the high set value are met. It's getting more intense.

In addition, in the set value continuous suggestion effect pattern, each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, how the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 will be displayed. It is set whether to change to In addition, in the setting value continuous suggesting effect pattern, the display mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1→2→3→4→5→6 ( That is, the degree of expectation for the high set value is not lowered), and the display mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started is maintained. (the display mode does not change) or it is set so as to be in a mode according to the high set value. Therefore, even if setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low set value, the mode of setting suggestion character 1702 remains at the high set value until the set value continuous suggestion effect ends. There is still a possibility that the mode will change according to the setting suggestion character 1702, and the mode of the setting suggesting character 1702 can be expected to be noticed until the end.

In addition, in the setting value continuous suggesting effect pattern, it is not always necessary to change the setting suggesting character 1702 in the order of 2→3→4→5→6 after displaying the setting suggesting character 1702 in a manner corresponding to the setting value “1”. (for example, the setting suggestion character 1702 is first displayed with the setting value "2" after starting the setting value continuous suggestion effect), and the display mode changes to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display mode. (For example, when the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to the set value "2" is displayed, the setting suggesting character 1702 corresponding to "4" is displayed according to the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also set to Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the low set value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 cannot be predicted. It is possible to draw attention with anticipation to the end.

Incidentally, the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than that of the suspension notice effect, similarly to the setting value suspension suggestion effect. That is, the pending notice effect is executed based on the preliminary determination information, and when the suggestion of the special lottery result based on the tobetsu lottery result based on the pending memory executing the pending notice effect is performed, the content of the pending notice effect is reset. On the other hand, since the content of the setting value continuous suggestion effect continues without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is lower than that of the pending notice effect. This setting prevents the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting character 1702 is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols, thereby executing the set value continuous suggesting performance suggesting the set value of the pachinko machine 1. It is designed to be obtained. Incidentally, since the set value continuous suggestion effect is not based on the prior determination information like the set value pending suggestion effect, it can be executed without obtaining the special lottery result in advance.

Note that the set value continuous suggestion effect for displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 can be executed exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved memories (the upper limit of the first reserved memory number is 4, and the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is 1). (eg, over 5 or more variations of decorative symbols). In addition, when the number of pending memories becomes 0 during execution of the setting value continuous suggestion performance, the decorative pattern changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the display is started, the setting suggesting character 1702 may be displayed by resuming the set value continuous suggesting effect. The effect display device 1600 may continue to display. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the setting value continuous suggestion performance is continuing and the game can be continued, and even if the player quits the game, the setting value continuous suggestion performance being continued can be given to a new player. It is possible to induce an interest in the player to play with the gaming machine.

Further, the setting value continuous suggestion effect may be executed in parallel with the setting value holding suggestion effect. Thus, it is possible to provide a new game in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is estimated from both the performance mode of the setting value holding suggestion performance and the performance mode of the setting value continuous suggestion performance. Also, a plurality of types of setting suggesting characters 1702 may be provided, and one of the setting suggesting characters 1702 may be displayed according to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

[23. Use of surplus settings other than jackpot probability and small hit probability]
In the present embodiment, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed by pressing the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b in a state in which setting values can be changed. There is, as a table (hit determination table, big hit design determination table, small hit design determination table, etc.) used in special lottery etc., a table corresponding to the fixed set value is used. In the above-described embodiment, the table corresponding to each setting value includes "big hit probability", "small hit probability", "small hit type", "normal pattern per probability", and "general pattern per type" The combination of "opening and closing patterns of the second starting port" is set to be different, but as another example, even though the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set value, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" Information other than "hit probability" may be set so that the fraud monitoring system is different.

As described above, in the fraud detection process of step S112, various frauds are monitored. Specifically, by bringing a magnet closer to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ), a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors fraudulent activity by magnets. ing. In addition, shaking or striking the pachinko machine 1 vibrates the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to change the path of the game balls B to the game board 5.例文帳に追加By providing a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraud such as entering a ball into various prize openings and gates provided, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraud based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. and monitors for fraudulent behavior due to vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010 and vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud is changed, and the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010 and vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud are changed. ) is determined to be fraudulent, or if it is determined to be fraudulent and shifts to an error state, it is possible to change the conditions for canceling the error state. there is

As shown in FIG. 238, in this example, the "big hit probability", "small hit probability", and "fraud monitoring system" are set to set values 1 to 3 and set values 1' to 3', respectively. are set accordingly.

Specifically, as the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table), set value 1 and set value 1' are set to "1/319", set value 2 and set value 2′ is set to “1/309”, and set value 3 and set value 3′ are set to “1/299”. In this example, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1' to 3' are set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit.

In addition, as a small hit probability (percentage of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table), in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, set values 1 to 3, set value 1 While "1/100" is set for each of '-3', in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, setting values 1-3 and setting values 1'-3' are set respectively. is set to "50/100". Incidentally, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 1' to 3' may be set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the small hit probability becomes.

In addition, as a fraud monitoring system, "fraud monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "fraud monitoring B" is set for setting values 1' to 3'. In this example, the monitoring system for "unauthorized monitoring A" is set to be stronger than that for "unauthorized monitoring B".

In this example, setting value 1 and setting value 1', setting value 2 and setting value 2', and setting value 3 and setting value 3' have the same set value for "big hit probability" and "small hit probability". However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "fraud monitoring A" or "fraud monitoring B". For example, in the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a, etc., if it is possible to set six setting values, and it is necessary to set only three types of "jackpot probability", three types In addition to the three set values corresponding to the "jackpot probability", three surplus set values are generated. In this way, when the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is also used in other gaming machines, redundant setting values may occur. By also using the value to change the fraud monitoring system, it is possible to make effective use of the surplus setting value and minimize changes in the program.

As for the display mode of the selected setting value when changing the setting, for settings 1 to 3, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display. In addition, while the 7-segment LED is displayed so as to blink normally, in settings 1' to 3', "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the 7 The segment LED is displayed so as to blink at high speed (blinking faster than settings 1 to 3). As a result, when the operator changes the setting values, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting values being changed are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'. However, when the setting value is determined after the setting value is changed, the 7-segment LED normally flashes or high-speed It stops blinking and is displayed in normal lighting. Therefore, when the operator determines the set values after changing the settings, it is unclear whether the set values are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'.

In addition, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected setting value at the time of operation related to setting change, in settings 1 to 3, the setting display 1310g configured by a single 7-segment LED display displays "1", "2 ' and '3' are displayed in settings 1' to 3'. You can also add a dot with In the case of such another example, even if all the 7-segment LEDs normally blink during change, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting values being changed are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'. be able to. In addition, when the setting value is determined after the setting value is changed, even if the 7-segment LED stops blinking normally and is displayed in normal lighting as the display mode of the setting value, the determined setting value is set to 1. ~3 or settings 1'-3' can be clearly distinguished.

Next, specific examples of the monitoring system for "unauthorized monitoring A" and "unauthorized monitoring B" include first to fifth specific examples. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as "fraud monitor A" and "fraud monitor B". First, as a first specific example, a case where the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraudulent activity are varied will be described below.

As a first specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", the detection sensitivity of detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud is increased, while in "fraud monitoring B", fraud is detected. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) is lowered. When the detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity detects excessively due to individual differences of the pachinko machine 1 or the installation location in the hall, the excessive detection is prevented by selecting "fraudulent monitoring B". be able to. On the other hand, when the detection sensor for detecting fraudulent activity is slow to detect, the slow detection can be prevented by selecting "fraud monitoring A". In addition, if it is desired to strengthen the countermeasures against the magnetic pole and the vibrating pole, by selecting "fraudulent act A", the monitoring of the fraudulent action by the magnetic pole and the vibrating pole can be strengthened.

In addition, in the "fraud monitoring A", when the detection signal is input from the detection sensor (the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraudulent activity, the time for which the detection signal is input is short, or the detection signal is judged to be fraudulent even if the number of inputs is small. It may be determined to be a fraudulent act when there are many. In such a case as well, the same effects as those obtained when the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors for detecting fraudulent actions are varied can be obtained.

Next, as a second specific example, a case where the detection sensors (the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent behavior change the parts (target regions) that are determined to be fraudulent behavior will be described below.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. Then, depending on the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. We monitor fraudulent activity, such as attempts to change or verify. On the other hand, depending on the game area magnetic sensor, it monitors whether or not the magnet has approached the area in front of the game area 5a, and changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a. We monitor fraudulent acts such as entering the ball into the winning opening and gate section (gate).

Similarly, as a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting cheating by vibration, a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used. A sensor and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation section vibration sensor, it is possible to monitor whether or not the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is vibrated, and a person other than the person who changes the setting of the setting value or performs confirmation display may Unauthorized acts such as changing settings or trying to display confirmation are monitored. On the other hand, depending on the game area part vibration sensor, it monitors whether or not vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, changes the course of the game ball B in the third distribution device 2550, and changes the second V winning opening 2008 It monitors illegal acts such as entering a game ball B into a ball.

As a second specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraud are used to increase the number of parts that are determined to be fraud. , "fraud monitoring B" uses only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the setting operation unit vibration sensor, which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010 and vibration sensor 3003) for detecting fraud, to detect fraud. Fewer parts to judge. In other words, in the “fraud monitor A”, not only the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is detected, but also the game area located on the front side of the game board 5 is detected. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibration in front of the game board 5a, in the "fraud monitoring B", the magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration and vibration. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the game area magnetic sensor or the game area vibration sensor, and such detection sensors frequently detect fraud even though no fraudulent activity is performed, "fraud monitoring B" is selected. A selection can prevent that frequent detection. In addition, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "fraud monitoring A", fraudulent acts in front of the game area 5a are also monitored, and fraudulent acts using magnetic and vibrating gotos are monitored. monitoring can be strengthened.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation section magnetic sensor and a game area section magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets. (Whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5) can be specified 1 One magnetic sensor 2010 may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors 3003, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent behavior due to vibration. 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5). One possible vibration sensor may be provided. Even in such a case, in the "illegal monitoring B", only when it is specified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, it is considered a fraudulent act. By judging that there is, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below in which the conditions for canceling the error state are changed when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the error state is shifted to.

As a third specific example, in the "fraud monitor A", when it is determined that there is fraudulent activity and shifts to an error state, it is possible to cancel the error state by turning on the power again. , "fraud monitoring B" makes it possible to automatically release the error state after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the state shifts to an error state. ing. That is, in the "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. The error state cannot be canceled unless the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. In addition, when the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, it shifts to an error state, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker Therefore, an abnormality occurrence effect is executed to notify that an abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, making it difficult to normally grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, when "fraud monitoring A" is selected, when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, an operation by the hall clerk is required, and the hall clerk will be able to ascertain the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced. In addition, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "fraud monitoring A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent acts by means of magnetic and vibrating gotos.

Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and it shifts to an error state, information about the error state is sent to the hall installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. A case in which whether or not to output to a computer is differentiated will be described below.

As a fourth specific example, in the "fraud monitor A", when it is determined that there is fraudulent activity and shifts to an error state, information about the error state is sent to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. In contrast to the output to the hall computer installed on the side, "fraud monitoring B" outputs information on the error state to the hall computer even if it is determined to be a fraudulent act and shifts to an error state. I try not to. In other words, in the "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent act without being present at the place. deterrence can be increased. Further, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "unauthorized monitoring A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent actions using magnetic and vibrating gotos.

Next, as a fifth specific example, whether or not to externally notify information about the error state by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker when it is determined to be a fraudulent act and shifts to the error state. A case of making the difference is described below.

As a fifth specific example, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, magnetism and vibration are generated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Information about the error state is notified externally by executing an abnormality occurrence effect that notifies that it is in an abnormal state. , the information about the error state is not notified to the outside. In other words, in "fraud monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the state shifts to an error state, the fraudulent person is warned by the external notification of information on the error state, thereby enhancing the deterrence against fraudulent activity. can do. In addition, if it is desired to strengthen countermeasures against magnetic and vibrating gotos, by selecting "fraud monitoring A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent acts by means of magnetic and vibrating gotos.

In this example, the set values 1 to 3 are set to "fraud monitor A" and the set values 1' to 3' are set to "fraud monitor B". By transmitting the value-related information as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side can determine which of "fraud monitor A" and "fraud monitor B" should stand by. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a transmits information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the misconduct has occurred and the error state is entered, the peripheral control board 1510 side: It can be determined whether or not to externally report information about the error state.

In addition, in "illegal monitoring B", when it is determined that an illegal act has occurred and an error state occurs, information regarding the error state is externally notified. may be executed in a more restrained (inconspicuous) manner than "unauthorized monitoring A". For example, in "improper monitoring B", when the information about the error state is notified to the outside, the output from the lamp or the speaker may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as described above, which is the case where it is determined whether or not to externally report the information on the error state.

In the above description, the setting change board 1311 capable of setting 6 setting values is used, and only 3 kinds of "jackpot probabilities" need to be set, and 3 surplus setting values are generated. In other words, in setting values 1' to 3', even though the setting values 1 to 3 have the same "big hit probability" and "small hit probability", the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A". For setting values 1 to 3, "fraud monitor B" is set, but it is not limited to this, and for example, setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of "jackpot probabilities" are set. If one surplus setting value occurs, the fraudulent behavior monitoring system may be changed for the one surplus setting value. For example, in setting value 1' which is one surplus setting value, even though setting value 1 and "big hit probability" or "small hit probability" among setting values 1 to 5 are the same setting value, fraud monitoring For the set values 1 to 5 for which the system is set to "fraud monitoring A", "fraud monitoring B" may be set. Even in such a case, the surplus set values can be effectively utilized.

In the above description, either one of “fraud monitoring A” and “fraud monitoring B” is set as the fraud monitoring system. ”, or “unauthorized monitoring C” may be set. The monitoring of fraudulent activity is strengthened in the order of "fraud monitoring C", "fraud monitoring B", and "fraud monitoring A". For example, setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "jackpot probabilities" are set, and four surplus setting values occur. For values 1 and 2, the set values 1' and 2' set in the 'unauthorized monitoring B' even though the 'big hit probability' and 'small hit probability' are the same set values, and the 'big hit probability' and 'small hit probability' The setting values 1'' and 2''' set in the "unauthorized monitoring C" may be set as surplus setting values even though the "probability" is the same setting value. Even in such a case, the surplus set values can be effectively utilized.

In the above, although the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same set value, the case where the fraud monitoring system is set to be different has been explained. As other information, all or part of a plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be set to have different operation systems. As a sixth specific example, a case where some of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are set to operate differently will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 239, in the sixth specific example, the operation system of a specific role (specific movable object) among a plurality of roles (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set. Values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific action", and set values 1' to 3' are set to "no specific action" is the first reason that "monitoring system for cheating" is set. This is different from the specific example to the fifth specific example. That is, in the sixth specific example, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set for each of the set value 1 and the set value 1', the set value 2 and the set value 2', and the set value 3 and the set value 3'. Although the set value is the same, the action system of the specific role product (specific movable object) is set to either "with specific role product action" or "without specific role product action". A plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. The accessory is composed of the effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 described above, and the effect operation unit 300 can move up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the effect operation unit 300 can be directly touched and operated by the player, it is more likely to cause a failure or malfunction than other accessories. In addition, in the case of "there is a specific accessory action", the specific accessory is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object production that accompanies the action of the specific role (the production operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of "no specific role product action", control is performed so that the specific role product does not move without executing the movable object production accompanying the action of the specific role product. For example, if there is a problem with the operation mechanism of the specific role and the specific role does not operate normally, by selecting "no specific role", the operation of the specific role will stop in the middle. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes difficult to continue the game due to the loss of the game.

In this example, when a variation pattern in which the execution of a movable object effect accompanied by the action of a specific role is set is determined among a plurality of variation patterns, "there is a specific role While the specific role is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object production accompanied by the action, in the case of "no specific role action", the movable object production accompanied by the action of the specific role is executed. It is controlled so that the specific role does not work. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific role action" and "without specific role action", for example, "with specific role action" , among a plurality of variation patterns, it is possible to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object production accompanied by the action of the specific role is set. It may be controlled so as not to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object presentation accompanied by the action of is set. Even in such a case, in the case of "no specific role action", the same effects as above can be obtained by controlling the specific role product so that it does not move without executing the movable object production that accompanies the action of the specific role product. can be obtained.

In addition, in this example, when the operation system of the specific role (specific movable object) is set to the setting value 1 to 3, which is "with specific role product operation", when the power is turned on (after setting change), the specific role While the initial action of the object is performed, if the setting values 1' to 3', which are "no specific role action", are set, the initial action of the specific role is performed when the power is turned on (after changing the setting) I am trying not to do it. As a result, it is possible to make the user recognize again that the specific role object (specific movable object) among the plurality of role objects (movable objects) is excluded from the action target. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting values intended by the operator are possible with respect to the operation of the specific role object (specific movable object), preventing situations in which the operator makes a mistake with the setting values not intended by the operator. be able to.

Different from the above, if priority is given to confirming whether or not there is a problem with the movement of a specific accessory (specific movable object), in order to accurately notify it, "with specific accessory action" and "without specific accessory action" In either case, when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed), the initial action of the specific role may be performed.

In addition, it can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g which of "with specific role product action" and "without specific role product action" is set, but other than the setting display device 1310g However, it may be notified. For example, at the completion of the setting change of the setting value, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker can be used to notify "set with specific role action / set without specific role action". Or, as a standby screen during the period when the game is not played, it is notified to that effect, and whether the specific role object (specific movable object) among the plurality of role objects (movable objects) is the target of the action can recognize what

In addition, in this example, by changing the setting value by the operator, it is possible to set either "with specific role product action" or "no specific role product action", but such an initial After setting, the initial setting may be changed to another setting by the player. For example, during the display of the standby screen during a period in which no game is played, it may be possible for the player to change to either "specific role product action" or "no specific role product action". That is, the setting values 1 to 3 are set to "with specific role product operation", and the setting values 1' to 3' are set to "no specific role product operation". By transmitting information about the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side will execute either setting as the initial setting, but if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the settings changed by the player are given priority over the initial settings.

Further, the specific accessory (specific movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) is not limited to the effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300, but is provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, It may operate from outside the front of the screen of the effect display device 1600 toward the front of the screen. Also, in this example, it is possible to change the operation system of a specific role (specific movable object) out of a plurality of roles (movable objects) by changing the setting of the set value, but it is not limited to the specific role, It is possible to change the action system of multiple roles (movable objects) or all the roles, and set the target role to either "with role action" or "without role action". You may do so. In addition, accessories (movable objects) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and it is possible to change the operation system of such accessories. It may be a target to do.

[24. fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent activity are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, and various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ), a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors fraudulent activity by magnets. ing. In addition, shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 vibrates the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to change the path of the game ball B to the game board 5.例文帳に追加By providing a vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraud such as entering a ball into various winning openings and gates provided, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraud based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. and monitors for fraudulent behavior due to vibration. As for the monitoring of these fraudulent acts, the mode of monitoring differs between the normal state and the state in which the setting value is changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

[24-1. Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activity during normal times will be described below. Here, the normal state is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed, and the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed. It refers to a state in which it is possible to play a game.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. A magnetic sensor and a game area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In normal times, the setting operation section magnetic sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . In other words, normally, the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section detects magnetism that should not be generated (magnetism due to unauthorized access) to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. ) has occurred (whether a magnet has approached), and illegal acts such as attempts by persons other than those who change the settings or display confirmation to change the settings or display confirmation are monitored. Examples of fraudulent acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using magnets include, for example, illegal metal implements and their A magnet for indirectly manipulating the illegal metal implement is installed, and the magnet and the illegal metal implement are driven through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening formed by partially destroying the pachinko machine 1. An act of illegally accessing the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is conceivable. It should be noted that, in the fraudulent act detection processing in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, an act of fraudulent activity using a magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. I believe it is done.

Similarly, during normal times, a game area magnetic sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 . That is, normally, the game area magnetic sensor monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated is generated (whether a magnet approaches) in the area in front of the game area 5a. , changing the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and allowing the ball to enter various prize winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5, and so on. It should be noted that, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the game area magnetic sensor is input, it is determined that fraud using a magnet is being performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. ing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010, a setting operation section magnetic sensor and a game area section magnetic sensor, are provided as the magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets. The part magnetic sensor and the game area part magnetic sensor may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, the two magnetic sensors 2010 are configured by a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and the first magnetic detection sensor 2010 has strong directivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is now possible to perform magnetic detection within the region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side, which is the opposite side. ing. It should be noted that "vertical sensitivity is high" means that sensitivity is higher in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The game area magnetic sensor is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, A wide range of the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball flow path. ) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation section magnetic sensor is configured so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body are spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and is arranged to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

An embodiment in which the two setting operation section magnetic sensors and the game area section magnetic sensors do not have the same performance is also possible. For example, instead of the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the game area section magnetic sensor, the place where magnetism is generated (the setting change board 1311 located on the rear side of the game board 5 or the setting key switch 1311a or the vicinity of the setting key switch 1311a) It may be possible to provide one magnetic sensor 2010 capable of specifying whether it is in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

Also, in this example, the vibration sensor 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity by vibration is configured to detect the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. An operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third distribution device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. In normal times, fraudulent actions are monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. In other words, normally, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations due to unauthorized access) are applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided. However, it monitors illegal actions such as attempts to change settings or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display. It should be noted that, in the fraudulent act detection processing in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit vibration sensor, an act of fraudulent act is performed by vibrating the area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that

On the other hand, only during the small winning game in the normal time, the game area vibration sensor is used to monitor cheating, and the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor cheating outside the small winning game. This is because, in the small winning game, in the third sorting device 2550, the game ball B sorted to the second V winning port 2008 side by the second sorting device 2540 is moved to either the second V winning port 2008 or the losing side. However, when vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed and the game ball enters the second V winning hole 2008. This is to prevent such an illegal act as it becomes possible for B to enter the ball. In other words, during the small winning game in the normal time, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether or not the third sorting device 2550 is subjected to vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not occur originally. However, it monitors cheating such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 and causing the game ball B to enter the second V winning hole 2008 . In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the game area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that the third sorting device 2550 is being fraudulent due to vibration.

In this example, two vibration sensors 3003, namely, a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area section vibration sensor, are provided as vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent activity by vibration. Specify (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center member 2500 provided on the game board 5) A single vibration sensor 3003 may be provided. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550. can.

Also, normally, in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to inform the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted. A game ball B can be shot when a handle 195 is operated.

Also, normally, when the game ball B wins a winning opening such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each is input by the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the pattern variation is not performed, and the game ball B While the payout is not performed, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the pattern variation is performed. It is possible for the game balls B to be paid out while being played.

In addition, normally, except for the period during which the effect using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is executed during the pattern change, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, the touch operation unit 302 is rotated to adjust the volume and the amount of light. It should be noted that during the period during which the effect using the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 is being executed during the pattern change, the operation of the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 is waited for the effect. Therefore, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume and the amount of light cannot be adjusted during the prohibited period.

[24-2. Regarding unauthorized monitoring during setting change]
Next, referring to FIG. 240, a description will be given of monitoring fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values. FIG. 240 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values.

When changing the settings of the set values, first, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off). After performing the operation (timing t1), the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the setting value can be changed (change permission state). In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) each time the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, and then the setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it 120 degrees toward the right direction and performing a second ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off (timing t4). In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value is changed. It becomes a state in which it is impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), a game can be played. Become.

In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175A and 176), but at timing t4, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. (It is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process) until the setting change process of step S37 is finished until The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 and the fraud detection of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing Processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, etc. are not executed, and a standby state is entered. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), but the monitoring of fraud is not executed, and the game ball B is not monitored. A special period is set in which the shooting is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins the winning hole. In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting change of the setting value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , the hall clerk can grasp that the setting is being changed.

Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent behavior using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and the overall monitoring of fraudulent behavior using the game area magnetic sensor is not running. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and the operator other than the authorized operator who changes the setting of the set value does not operate the magnet. This is because there is no room for cheating using In addition, even if the authorized operator who changes the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the obstruction of regular setting change work.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation section vibration sensor and overall monitoring of cheating using the game area section vibration sensor are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the change-permitted state, an authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b, and an unauthorized operator other than the authorized operator who changes the settings may cause an illicit operation due to vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings applies vibration when changing the setting values, it is possible to prevent detection of fraudulent actions due to vibrations, and to prevent unauthorized setting change work from being detected. Inhibition can be suppressed.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal that tells the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the firing of the game ball B is not set. , and the shooting of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if a regular operator who changes the settings of the set values touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being shot, and interference with the regular setting change work can be suppressed. In addition, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be shot.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there are winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and various gates (gates ), the main control MPU 1310a does not input the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be treated as invalid even though it is input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation, game ball B Even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the set value , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Also, although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings and gates (gates) in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude it from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is made impossible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member.

In addition, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change in-progress notification (setting change-related notification) is being executed to notify that the setting is being changed. As notification during setting change, a voice repeatedly saying "Setting is being changed", a message "Setting is being changed!" and This notification during setting change is a notification (effect) performed only in a change permission state, and is executed with priority over the body frame open notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2.例文帳に追加That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but when the change is permitted, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and setting change notification are executed in parallel, the setting change notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the setting change notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as the above-described setting change notification, in addition to the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, the function display unit 1400 notifies. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirmation displaying indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting changing indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the change-permitted state, the notification by the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game does not progress.

At timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 175A and 176) is terminated (the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process). It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177), and in the main control side timer interrupt processing, switch input processing in step S104, fraud detection processing in step S112, and firing permission signal setting in step S113. processing etc. will be performed. However, in this embodiment, until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), it is detected when the game ball B is permitted to be shot or when the game ball B wins the winning hole. A state in which no signal can be input and the game cannot be started is maintained. In other words, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, no detection signal is input and illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 will be closed against the outer frame 2, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and fraudulent behavior is detected using the game area magnetic sensor. Monitoring, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation section vibration sensor, and monitoring of cheating using the game area section vibration sensor are not executed and are in a standby state.

Also, from the timing t5 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be shot, and games such as pattern variation, big win games, and small win games can be played. In such a state, monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started according to the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times].

Also, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify that (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t5, after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a pattern variation, a big win game, or a small win game is started. An image (game start notification) is displayed to notify that the game has become possible.

In this example, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the game ball B is launched. Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, considering the inspection of the firing operation by the handle 195 in the change permission state, etc. During that period, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195 . However, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the permission is limited to the launch of the game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from unfairly progressing by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is entered into various prize winning openings or gates (gates). .

Further, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the game ball B is launched. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and from the timing t5 (may be timing t4), the game ball B is launched. However, when the handle 195 is operated (contacted with the handle 195) for the first time after the change permission state is ended and the shooting of the game ball B is permitted, the set value is changed in the change permission state. Notification after setting change is executed. As the notification after the setting change, a voice saying "The setting has been changed", a message "The setting has been changed" is displayed, and a lamp is emitted. In addition, even if a setting value is changed by an unauthorized person other than the authorized operator who changes the setting value, the handle 195 is operated for the first time after the setting value is changed. 195 is contacted). As a result, even though the authorized worker who changes the setting value does not change the setting value, if the notification is executed after changing the setting value, the setting value is changed due to fraudulent behavior. It is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts by making it known to the outside.

Further, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from the timing t3 to the timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4), the game ball B is launched. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit is not set, and from the timing t5 (may be timing t4), the game ball B is launched. However, if the handle 195 has been operated (contacted with the handle 195) before permission to shoot the game ball B, contact with the handle 195 is released once after permission to shoot the game ball B. The game ball B will not be shot unless the handle 195 is touched (operated) again (by turning off the contact detection). That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been ON before timing t5, unless the contact detection for the handle 195 turns ON from OFF after timing t5, the contact with the handle 195 continues. contact is invalidated to restrict the game ball B from being shot. As a result, even if a regular worker who changes the settings of the set values touches the handle 195 when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, A game ball B is not shot carelessly when it is closed, and it is possible to surely prevent the loss of the player.

Also, unlike the above, in consideration of expediting the game start based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the shooting permission of the game ball B, the handle 195 While the contact is continued, the continued contact with the handle 195 may be validated so that the game ball B can be shot from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be shot. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated before closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, and immediately after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 You can start playing.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be shot from the timing t5 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be performed. However, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game may be immediately started. In other words, from the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be shot, and the game such as the pattern variation, the big win game, and the small win game can be performed. Improper monitoring at times] may be used to monitor fraudulent behavior and the like. In such a configuration, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the pattern fluctuation, the big win game, the small game, etc. An image (game start notification) for notifying that a game such as a winning game can be started may be displayed.

As another example, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraudulent act detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113. It may be configured such that corresponding processing is performed first. With such a configuration, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value is changed (change permitted state), but fraud is not monitored, and the game ball is set. In addition to disallowing the launch of B, the input of the detection signal may not be validated when the game ball B wins the winning hole.

Further, in the above example, the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4 (may be a period including the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5) includes the magnetic sensor 2010 and the magnetic sensor 2010. The vibration sensor 3003 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. Also, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1, but from timing t3 to timing t4. (It may be a period including the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5.), which is the period of , even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by a magnet or vibration, the magnet The value of the goto counter or vibration goto counter may be configured so as not to be added. Even with such a configuration, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings brings a magnet close to the setting or applies vibration when changing the setting value, the magnet or the vibration may cause an illegal operation. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent monitoring from becoming an obstacle when changing setting values.

Note that various processing related to the change permission state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade, etc., and thus may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on, not in the change-permitted state but by operating the normal RAM clear switch 1310f, a state is generated in which the operator of the game hall can select which setting to use for various processing related to the change-permitted state. After that, when the change permission state is generated, various kinds of processing related to the change permission state are executed with the selected settings. As a result, in the game arcade A, it is set so that contact with the handle 195 is enabled while fraud monitoring is disabled in the change-permitted state, and in the game arcade B, fraud monitoring is enabled in the change-permitted state. It can be set to be non-monitoring and to invalidate contact with the handle 195, and the needs of the game hall, such as whether to check the shooting operation with the handle 195 in the change permission state, etc. will be able to match

[24-3. About unauthorized monitoring during setting value confirmation display]
In the above, it was explained that the monitoring of fraudulent activity during the setting value change is not monitored while the setting value is being changed. Either a state in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of the set value or a state in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored may be used. First, a case in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 241 . FIG. 241 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when no fraudulent activity is monitored during confirmation display of set values.

When confirming and displaying the set values currently set, first, confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and confirm that no pattern variation is being performed (no pending state). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the clock is operated in the same manner as when changing the setting. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees toward the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). do. Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON, and is turned OFF (timing t7). The state of displaying the setting value for 1310g is switched to the state of not displaying it. In other words, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which confirmation display of the setting value is performed (confirmation display state), and after timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, confirmation of the setting value is performed. It will be in a state where no display is performed (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), a game can be played. Become.

At timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless game balls B such as prize balls are being dispensed. ing. Also, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, the game ball B such as a prize ball is paid off. If the setting key switch 1311a has been put out, the setting key switch 1311a may not be turned ON (the setting key remains OFF), or the setting key switch 1311a may be set after the payout of game balls B such as prize balls is completed. is set key ON to display the current setting value on the setting display 1310g.

As another example, when the currently set value is displayed for confirmation, the same as when changing the setting value, the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off). In the cut-off state), the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. By turning the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). may Also, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting value can be changed (change permission state). On the other hand, if the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the configuration may be such that the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). In such a configuration, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the setting value is confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). However, the state (confirmation display state) in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which confirmation display of the setting value is performed (confirmation display state), but monitoring of fraud is not executed, and game ball B is not permitted, and the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins the winning hole. In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the confirmation display of the setting value is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , the hall clerk can grasp that the confirmation display is in progress.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the overall monitoring of fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor is not running. This is because, in the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values is illegally using a magnet. This is because there is no room for In addition, when confirming and displaying the setting value, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the regular confirmation display work.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation section vibration sensor and overall monitoring of cheating using the game area section vibration sensor are performed. I try not to. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display to commit fraudulent acts by vibration. because there is no In addition, even if the authorized operator who carries out the confirmation display of the setting value applies vibration when displaying the setting value, it is possible to prevent detection as a fraudulent act due to the vibration, thereby preventing the confirmation display work from being performed properly. Inhibition can be suppressed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted is not set. , and the shooting of the game ball B is prohibited. As a result, even if the authorized operator who performs confirmation display of the setting value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being shot, and hindrance to the confirmation display operation can be suppressed. Also, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be shot.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, there are winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, and various gates (gates ), even if the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is invalidated. It should be noted that the game ball B may not be detected by the detection sensor itself, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation, game ball B Even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value, it is no longer performed for any of the payouts. , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Also, although not shown, the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings and gates (gates) in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B ejected from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B ejected from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h is detected. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. It is made impossible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member.

In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Notification during confirmation display (confirmation display-related notification) for notifying that display is in progress is executed. As for notification during confirmation display, the voice repeatedly saying "Confirmation is being displayed", the message "Confirmation is being displayed!" there is This notification during confirmation display is notification (effect) performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over body frame open notification performed when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2.例文帳に追加That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is given the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the confirmation display completion notification. A form can also be illustrated.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, a notification from the function display unit 1400 is also sent as the notification during the confirmation display. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirmation displaying indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation is being displayed (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the confirmation display state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game will not progress.

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (the period may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, normal winning opening 2003, big winning opening 2005, and other winning openings, game ball B is detected even if main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from a corresponding detection sensor. is treated as invalid, when such a detection signal is input, the game ball B is not permitted to be shot due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. In spite of the period during which the game ball B does not enter the winning hole, the warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B has illegally entered the winning hole. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the in-confirmation display notification and the body frame open notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the confirmation display in progress notification or the main body frame open notification.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, it is not possible to permit the launch of game ball B or to input a detection signal when game ball B has won a prize in the prize winning opening. Although it is in a state in which it cannot be started, this state is maintained until the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t8). In other words, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input and illegal profit cannot be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 will be closed against the outer frame 2, fraudulent behavior is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, and fraudulent behavior is detected using the game area magnetic sensor. Monitoring, monitoring of cheating using the setting operation section vibration sensor, and monitoring of cheating using the game area section vibration sensor are not executed and are in a standby state.

In addition, from the timing t8 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be shot, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be played. In such a state, monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started according to the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times]. The game ball B can be shot even before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pattern variation and the big hit are possible. A game such as a game or a small winning game can be played, and monitoring of various fraudulent acts is started according to the contents described in [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times].

Also, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify that (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t8, after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a game such as a pattern variation, a big win game, or a small win game is started. is displayed (game start notification).

Also, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, normally, the setting key switch 1311a should not be turned on. , warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key is turned on illegally by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON state (timing t1) in a state where pattern variation is performed normally, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until (timing t2), the warning effect A is executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON state (timing t3) in a state where the symbol variation is not performed at all times, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key OFF. During (timing t4), the warning effect B is executed. Also, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects A and B are executed, the effects being executed are stopped and the warning effects A and B are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is performed. Note that the warning effects A and B are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period in which fraudulent activity using magnets or vibrations is monitored, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker will cause the magnetism or vibration to occur for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect is executed to notify that it is in an abnormal state due to the occurrence of In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect, the contents of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration occurrence is detected), and the part where the abnormality is detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 is the surrounding area), etc. In addition, the abnormal occurrence effect is executed with priority over the effect being executed. In other words, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is being performed, the effect being executed is stopped and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with the highest priority.

In this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the game ball B is launched. Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, considering the inspection of the firing operation by the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, etc. During that period, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set so that the game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 195 . However, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the permission is limited to the shooting of the game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from unfairly progressing by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B is entered into various prize winning openings or gates (gates). .

Further, in this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from the timing t6 to the timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7), the game ball B is launched. The game ball B is launched from the time point t8 (may be timing t7) without setting the logic of the launch permission signal that tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that it is permitted. However, if the handle 195 has been operated (contacted with the handle 195) before permission to shoot the game ball B, contact with the handle 195 is once allowed after permission to launch the game ball B. If the handle 195 is released (contact detection is turned off) and the handle 195 is not touched (operated) again, the game ball B will not be shot. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been ON before the timing t8, unless the contact detection for the handle 195 turns ON from the OFF after the timing t8, the continued contact with the handle 195 is detected. contact is invalidated to restrict the game ball B from being shot. As a result, even if an authorized worker who confirms and displays the set values touches the handle 195 when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, A game ball B is not shot carelessly when it is closed, and it is possible to reliably prevent the loss of the player.

Also, unlike the above, in consideration of expediting the start of the game based on the end of the confirmation display state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the game ball B is permitted to be shot, the handle 195 While continuing the contact, the continued contact with the handle 195 may be validated so that the game ball B can be launched from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be launched. In such a case, the handle 195 is operated before closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, and immediately after closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 You can start playing.

Further, in this example, the game ball B can be shot from the timing t8 when the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and games such as pattern variations, big win games, and small win games can be performed. However, at timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game may be immediately started. In other words, from the timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game ball B can be shot, and the game such as the pattern variation, the big win game, and the small win game can be performed. Improper monitoring at times] may be used to monitor fraudulent behavior and the like. In such a configuration, in the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the pattern variation, the big win game, the small game, etc. An image (game start notification) for notifying that a game such as a winning game can be started may be displayed.

Further, as another example, the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor are in the confirmation display state (a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) which is a period from timing t6 to timing t7. 3003 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state may not be notified. Also, normally, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by 1, but from timing t6 to timing t7. In the confirmation display state (a period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), which is the period of , the magnet The value of the goto counter or vibration goto counter may be configured so as not to be added. Even with such a configuration, even if the authorized operator who carries out the confirmation display brings the magnet close to the confirmation display or applies vibration when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, fraud due to the magnet or vibration may occur. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent monitoring from becoming an obstacle when confirming and displaying the set value.

Note that various processing related to the confirmation display state described above may have various needs depending on the environment of the game arcade, etc., and thus may be selectively set for each game arcade. For example, when the power is turned on not in the confirmation display state but in the usual operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a state is generated in which the operator of the game hall can select which setting to use for various processing related to the confirmation display state. After that, when the confirmation display state is generated, various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected settings. As a result, in the game arcade A, while fraud monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, contact with the handle 195 is enabled, and in the game arcade B, fraud monitoring is enabled in the confirmation display state. It can be set to be non-monitored and to invalidate contact with the handle 195, and the needs of the game hall, such as whether or not to check the shooting operation with the handle 195 in the confirmation display state. will be able to match

Next, referring to FIG. 242, a description will be given of a case in which unauthorized actions are partially monitored during confirmation display of setting values. FIG. 242 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when part of the fraudulent activity is monitored during confirmation display of setting values. Here, differences from the above-described case of not monitoring fraud during confirmation display of set values will be described below.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which confirmation display of the set value is being performed (confirmation display state), but shooting of the game ball B is not permitted, and a game ball is inserted into the winning opening. When B wins, the input of the detection signal is not validated during a special period, and among the fraudulent acts, only fraudulent acts in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored. there is

Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, while fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area magnetic sensor, to monitor for fraudulent activities. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized operator who confirms and displays the setting value may be illegally changed by bringing a magnet closer to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, no detection signal is input, and illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area magnetic sensor.

Note that the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period up to timing t8, in which the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section can be performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether it is in the confirmation display state.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent behavior using the game area section vibration sensor is not monitored, whereas fraudulent behavior using the setting operation section vibration sensor is not monitored. I am trying to monitor their behavior. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a may fraudulently apply vibration to the area provided with the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a, thereby illegally changing the setting value. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, no detection signal is input, and illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, but also during the period up to timing t8 when the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section vibration sensor is performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether it is in the confirmation display state.

In addition, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), fraudulent use of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor Actions are monitored and fraudulent actions are monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. An abnormality occurrence effect A is executed to notify an abnormal state due to the occurrence of In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration was detected) and the abnormality are detected depending on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the setting operation section vibration sensor detected the abnormality. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t7 (or at timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the The abnormal occurrence presentation A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a. It is not possible to eliminate the possibility that the magnet was unintentionally brought closer or the vibration was applied. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed using a magnet or vibration, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred. I am planning to end it.

As described above, during the period from timing t6 to timing t8 including the confirmation display state, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section vibration sensor are performed. However, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring fraud using the game area magnetic sensor, and using the setting operation unit vibration sensor We monitor fraudulent behavior and monitor fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will cause an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence presentation B is executed to notify that there is something. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. The performance is executed in a less conspicuous mode than the performance B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person who confirms and displays the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display is not intentional. This is because it is not possible to rule out the possibility that a magnet has been brought close or vibration has been applied. It should be noted that, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the content of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration occurrence is detected), and the part where the abnormality is detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the game area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 is the surrounding area), etc.

Further, as described above, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, the output from the image, the lamp, and the speaker of the effect display device 1600 causes the outer frame 2 The body frame open notification for notifying that the body frame 4 is opened is executed. In addition, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Notification during confirmation display (confirmation display-related notification) for notifying that display is in progress is executed. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to shift to the confirmation display state. In addition, in the confirmation display state, if the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the body frame open notification The abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed with priority over the notification during confirmation display.

[24-4. Modification of unauthorized monitoring during setting change]
In the above, it was explained that the monitoring of fraudulent activity during the setting change of the setting value is not monitored. good. A case in which fraudulent actions are partly monitored while setting values are being changed will be described with reference to FIG. 243 . FIG. 243 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when part of the fraudulent activity is monitored during the setting change of the setting value. Here, differences from the above-described case in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during the setting change of the set values will be described below.

In the above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on processing (see FIGS. 175A and 176), but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (in step S222 of the setting change process, it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the following steps The interrupt permission setting of S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. That is, the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 177) is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Processing, the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113, etc. are not executed, and a standby state is entered. On the other hand, after the power is turned on, before starting the setting change process of step S37, at least the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 are performed. The processing (same processing) may be configured to be performed first. With such a configuration, in this example, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value is changed (change permission state), but the shooting of the game ball B is not permitted. At the same time, when the game ball B wins in the winning hole, the input of the detection signal is set as a special period in which it is not valid. I try to monitor only fraudulent activity.

Before starting the setting change process in step S37, a process (same process) corresponding to the fraud detection process in step S112 is performed in advance. In the case of monitoring only fraudulent activity in the area in which 1311a is provided, in that process, similar to the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003 is input, It is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed, and the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are incremented by one. However, in the main control power-on process, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, and after the setting change process in step S37 is completed (it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process). After the determination), in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed in the change-permitted state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are added (incremented), By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and the vibration goto counter are set (initialized) to 0 (zero) as initial values. In this way, when the change-permitted state ends, the values of the magnet counter and the vibration counter are initialized. , and when changing the setting value, the possibility that the person who changes the setting unintentionally brought the magnet closer or applied vibration cannot be ruled out. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration has occurred, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred. We are planning to

Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the game area magnetic sensor. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In the change-permitted state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who changes the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b. However, a person other than the authorized operator who changes the setting values may illegally change the setting values by bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area magnetic sensor.

Note that the setting operation section magnetic sensor is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5, in which the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section can be performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted or not.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor is not monitored. I am trying to monitor their behavior. In the change-permitted state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who changes the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b. However, a person other than the authorized operator who changes the settings of the setting values may illegally change the setting values by vibrating the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction such as

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning opening by fraudulent act, the detection signal is not input, and an illegal profit cannot be obtained. Since it is a period in which it is not possible, there is no need to monitor cheating using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the setting operation unit vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5, in which the operation of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. to monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section vibration sensor is performed in a normal state or in a state in which the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. The area in which the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted or not.

In addition, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting changing effect is being executed to notify that the setting is being changed. Note that the change permission state (the period may include the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes the first start port 2002 and the second start port. 2004, normal winning opening 2003, big winning opening 2005, and other winning openings, game ball B is detected even if main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from a corresponding detection sensor. is treated as invalid, when such a detection signal is input, the game ball B is not permitted to be shot due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. In spite of the period during which the game ball B does not enter the winning hole, the warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B has illegally entered the winning hole. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting changing notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when the warning effect C is executed, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing the notification during setting change or the opening notification of the main body frame.

In addition, during a period including the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change-permitted state may be a period from timing t3 to timing t4), unauthorized use of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor Actions are monitored and fraudulent actions are monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. An abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed to notify an abnormal state due to the occurrence of. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect A, the content of the abnormality (whether the occurrence of magnetism or vibration was detected) and the abnormality are detected depending on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the setting operation section vibration sensor detected the abnormality. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is notified. Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t4 (or at timing t5) when the change permission state in which the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF is terminated, the The abnormal occurrence presentation A is forcibly terminated. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator who changes the settings of the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b. It cannot be ruled out that a regular worker unintentionally brought the magnet close to the magnet or applied vibration to it. For this reason, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed using a magnet or vibration, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred. I am planning to end it.

As described above, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, which includes the change permission state, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the setting operation section vibration sensor are performed. However, even during normal times other than that period, monitoring fraud using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, monitoring fraud using the game area magnetic sensor, and using the setting operation unit vibration sensor We monitor fraudulent behavior and monitor fraudulent behavior using the game area vibration sensor. In addition, when the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected in such a normal time, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will cause an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration for a predetermined period. An abnormality occurrence presentation B is executed to notify that there is something. Here, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used. The performance is executed in a less conspicuous mode than the performance B. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator who changes the settings of the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b. This is because the possibility cannot be ruled out that a regular worker unintentionally brought the magnet closer or applied vibration. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence effect B, the contents of the abnormality (either magnetic or vibration ), and the part where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or the area in front of the game area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 area), etc.

Further, as described above, after the power is turned on, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , the body frame open notification for notifying that the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 is executed. In addition, after the power is turned on, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker A setting change in-progress notification (setting change-related notification) for notifying that the setting value is being changed is being executed. Then, after performing the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON and the power is turned on to shift to the change permission state. The notification during setting change is executed with priority over the open notification, and when the setting operation unit magnetic sensor or setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main body frame The abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed with priority over the opening notification and setting change notification.

[25. Variation of setting change such as winning probability]
In the above example, control is performed to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the result of the special lottery, and the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning game state. 244, it is possible to change the setting of the winning probability, etc. for the transition control to the jackpot game state, but as shown in FIG. Alternatively, even if the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the small winning game state, setting changes such as winning probability etc. may be performed for those that are not controlled to shift to the big winning game state. good. Hereinafter, a modified example of changing settings such as winning probability in a pachinko machine in which the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment replaces the accessory winning opening 2006 (in which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are arranged) of the pachinko machine 1 of the above example, A second big winning opening 2006A (inside which the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008 are not arranged) is provided, and other configurations are the same.

[26-1. Game contents of the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. , “small hit”, “time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit”) will be drawn for special lottery results. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In this embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the second special lottery result according to the acceptance to the second start port 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived) do. In addition, the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 without preferentially suggesting (leading out) the special lottery result according to the acceptance to the second start port 2004 (priority change) The special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in the order of (sequential fluctuation), or the first special lottery result according to the acceptance to the first start port 2002 and the acceptance to the second start port 2004 The result of the second special lottery may be suggested (derived) at the same time (simultaneous variation).

In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "minor hit", "2R probability variable big hit", "15R probability variable big hit". ”, “15R normal jackpot”, and the like. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small hit", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small hit". In addition, while including the "small hit" in both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, the second special lottery result is more likely to win the "small hit" than the first special lottery result. A high probability may be set.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a "small hit", the second After a predetermined time (for example, 0.88 s) has passed after the two major winning openings 2006A are in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B, a "small hit" game in which the game ball B is not accepted is closed. executed. Since the second big winning hole 2006A is provided in the middle of the second ball passage portion 2521 on the right side of the center member 2500, when a "small hit" is drawn, the second ball is hit to the right. A game ball B is driven into the passage part 2521. - 特許庁In addition, in the small winning game of the second embodiment, the period in which the second large winning opening 2006A is opened is shorter than in the big winning game, but the game balls are continuously hit so as to flow down the second ball passage portion 2521. If so, at least one game ball B can enter the second big winning hole 2006A in one small winning game. In addition, during the small-hit game, the game state before the start of the small-hit game state (probability variable state, time-saving state, etc., which will be described later) is maintained, and after the small-hit game, the game state before the start of the small-hit game state continues. .

The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are "15R probability variable big hit" or "15R normal big hit". In this case, a predetermined time (eg, 29 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or a predetermined limit number (eg, 10 pieces) to the large winning opening 2005 ), the acceptance of the game ball B, or the acceptance of the game ball B, the open/close pattern (one open/close pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball B unreceivable in the closed state is repeated 15 times. A game is executed. If the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery are "15R normal jackpot", the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 after the end of the jackpot game. The fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery to the player is set to a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are combined) Until the number of times reaches 100 times), the time is shortened than usual, and the time until the next "win" is drawn is shortened to shift to a "time saving state". In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R probability variable big hit", after the "big hit" game ends, the game proceeds to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the next "big hit". Shorter than usual fluctuation time of special symbols to suggest the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B, and the first special lottery result and the second The special lottery result shifts to a ``variable probability state (high probability state)'' for improving the probability that the result will be ``hit''.

When the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are "2R probability variable big hit", the second big winning port 2006A , After a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 s) has passed after the game ball B is in an open state that can be accepted, an opening and closing pattern that makes the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening and closing pattern is one round) ) is repeated twice to execute a “jackpot” game. In addition, after the end of the "big hit" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the next "big win" In addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the result to the player, the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be "hit" is improved. )”.

Since the second big winning opening 2006A and the big winning opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center member 2500, the operation of hitting the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center member 2500 is played. can be made to When the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 when the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 are open, the payout device 580 is operated by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the upper tray 201 . Therefore, when the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 are capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the second large winning opening 2006A and the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, the number of the game balls B increases. can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

In the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center member 2500, the second ball passage portion 2521 side is easier to drive than the third ball passage portion 2522 side. Since the possibility of being accepted in the big winning opening 2005 is lower than that on the side of the part 2522, the player can select which passage the hitting operation is aimed at, and it is difficult for the player to get bored with various games. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by doing so. In addition, only the game ball B hit to the second ball passage portion 2521 side can be accepted into the second big winning hole 2006A.

In this embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without holding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 indicate the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. It should be noted that, hereinafter, the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time for suggesting the result of the first special lottery to the player is referred to as "fluctuation display of the first special symbol", and the flashing for suggesting the result of the second special lottery to the player. The flashing of the LEDs for a predetermined period of time may be referred to as "fluctuation display of the second special symbol", and the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs suggesting the result of the first special lottery to the player is referred to as the "stop symbol of the first special symbol". , and the LED lighting combination pattern that suggests the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as a "stop symbol of the second special symbol".

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation-type effect can be performed in which the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back By appropriately using the pre-rendering unit 3200, etc., it is possible to perform light-emitting performances, display performances, etc., and it is possible to amuse the player with various performances, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player-participation-type presentation in which the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. to notify the player to that effect.

Also, when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2003, the main control board 1310 performs a normal lottery result determination as to whether or not the second start opening door 2411 is to be opened in a predetermined pattern. Then, the ordinary lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as ordinary fluctuation time) on the ordinary pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 . In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal pattern for suggesting the player the result of the normal lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 is set to "6000 s" in the normal state, while in the probability variable state. And in the time saving state, it is set to "0.1 s".

In addition, the normal drawing probability (probability that the normal lottery result is "normal winning") is set to "10/11", and when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, in most cases "normal hit" and the second starting door 2411 is opened. In addition, when the normal lottery result is "normal hit", the period in which the second start door 2411 is opened is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, and "2" in the variable probability state and the time saving state. .0s”. Therefore, in the normal state, the second starting door 2411 is opened only at intervals of 6000 seconds at the shortest, and the opening period is extremely short. is considered difficult. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the variable probability state, not only is the second starting port door 2411 frequently opened, but also the open state is long, so that the game ball B is easily accepted into the second starting port 2004. . In addition, the probability per normal pattern may be different from the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and the time saving state (low probability time saving state) or the probability change state (high probability time saving state), for example, in the normal state The normal pattern per probability is set to "1/11", the normal pattern per probability is set to "10/11" at the time of the time saving state or the probability variable state, and the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 in the normal state is emergency. On the other hand, by facilitating the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 during the time saving state and the probability variable state, the game ball B to the second start port 2004 during the time saving state and the probability variable state. While making the acceptance occur frequently, it may be possible to suppress cheating aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. In addition, while preventing the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) from being elected as zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-working time state), the normal state probability is set to "10/11 ' or '11/11' to further suppress cheating aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

In this way, in the normal state, almost no game ball B is accepted into the second start port 2004, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based mainly on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 (first Variable display of special symbols) is performed. On the other hand, in the probability variable state and the time saving state, since the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center member 2500 is performed, the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 occurs frequently, mainly the second start Suggestion of the second special lottery result (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth 2004 is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is accepted into the ordinary winning opening 2003 during the period from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the result of the ordinary lottery due to the reception of the game ball B into the ordinary winning opening 2003, the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested. can not be started, the start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn ordinary lottery result is completed. The number of reservations of the ordinary lottery results to be held is set to four as the upper limit for the ordinary winning prize opening 2003, and for more than that, the ordinary lottery result is reserved even if the game ball B is accepted in the ordinary winning prize opening 2003. I'm trying to discard it. In place of this example, game ball B was accepted into normal winning opening 2003 during the period from the start of the normal lottery until the result of the normal lottery was suggested by the acceptance of game ball B into normal winning opening 2003. In some cases, the result of the ordinary lottery may be discarded without being reserved. As a result, it is possible to further prevent the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the normal prize winning opening 2003 and the second start opening 2004 in the normal state, and the second special lottery is performed in the normal state to obtain a small hit. It is possible to prevent it from occurring, and it is possible to further suppress cheating aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

In the same way as the special lottery result, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 indicate the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the ordinary winning hole 2003. - 特許庁The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the ordinary lottery. The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing an LED different from the LED suggesting the special lottery result, blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter, by the combination of the lit LEDs, the ordinary lottery is indicated. Suggest results.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B is hit toward the left side of the center member 2500 in the normal state, and the first special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 is performed. Suggestion of the result (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed. In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, after the jackpot game is finished, the shift control is performed to the time-saving state, and the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center member 2500 is hit. Suggestion of the second special lottery result (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is performed. When a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 times of suggestion, which is the sum of suggestions for the first special lottery and suggestions for the second special lottery) is reached without a big hit occurring in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is terminated and the normal state is reached. , the game ball B is hit again aiming at the left side of the center member 2500, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 (first special symbol fluctuation display) is performed.

In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is ``15R probability variable big win'' or ``2R probability variable big win'' in the normal state or the time-saving state, after the big win game is over, the shift control is performed to the probability variable state (high probability state), and the center member 2500. A game ball B is struck aiming at the right side of the second start port 2004, and a suggestion of a second special lottery result (fluctuation display of a second special symbol) based on the reception of the game ball B into the second start port 2004 is performed. The variable probability state is continuously executed until the next big win, and when the result of the second special lottery becomes ``15R normal big win'' in the variable probability state, control is shifted to the time saving state after the big win game is finished, and a big win occurs in the time saving state. When the number of times of change reaches a predetermined number of times (100 times of suggestion, which is the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery), the time-saving state is ended and shift control is performed to the normal state.

In addition, when the result of the second special lottery becomes ``15R probability variable big win'' or ``2R probability variable big win'' in the probability variable state, after the big win game is over, the control is shifted to the probability variable state (high probability state) again. In this way, the variable probability state continues until the "15R normal big win" is reached, and when the "15R normal big win" is reached, control is shifted to the time saving state after the big win game ends.

In addition, when only the first special lottery result is reserved without the second special lottery result being reserved, or when there is no second special lottery result being reserved, the game ball B is sent to the first start port 2002. If is accepted, the suggestion of the first special lottery result (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed even in the time saving state and the probability variable state. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes ``15R normal jackpot'' in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the shift control is performed to the time saving state after the big hit game is finished, and the first special lottery result is ``15R'' in the time saving state or the variable probability state. When the probability variable jackpot” or the “2R probability variable jackpot” is achieved, the transition to the probability variable state is controlled after the jackpot game is finished.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of a "minor win" as the result of the second special lottery (minor win probability) is set much higher than the big win probability (for example, the probability of a big win of 10 double). In addition, during the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 occurs frequently and the second special lottery is performed, so that the small hit occurs frequently and the second big prize is won. The port 2006A remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.88s).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits occur frequently in the second special lottery in the time-saving state or the variable-probability state, and even if the big hits do not occur, prize balls that exceed the amount of shots are acquired little by little. It is possible, and the longer the time-saving state and the variable state continue, the more prize balls you can win. Therefore, not only the number of game balls B does not decrease in the time-saving state or the variable-probability state, but also the number of balls possessed by the player can be increased by the prize balls obtained by the generated small hits. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game can be played in the normal state in which the consumption of the game balls B is large, and in addition to the game in which the consumption of the game balls B is small and the occurrence of a small hit does not result in a big win, the player's ball can be played. The game can be controlled in a state completely different from the game executed in the increasing time-saving state and probability-variable state.

[26-2. Setting changes such as winning probability in the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probabilities of big hits, small hits, etc., which are changed according to set values, will be described.

In the second embodiment, similarly to the example described above, a table corresponding to a set value is selected as a table (hit determination table, big hit design determination table, small hit design determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. A table used in a special lottery or the like is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

As shown in FIG. 245(A), in this embodiment, the "big hit probability" and the "small hit probability" are set corresponding to the set values 1 to 6, respectively.

In addition, a different value is set for each set value for the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won in the hit determination table), which is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery. The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state and the time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" at the setting value 1, "1/309" at the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is "1/299", set value 4 is "1/289", set value 5 is "1/279", and set value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the probability of hitting the jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the variable state (high probability state) is "1/30" with a setting value of 1, "1/40" with a setting value of 2, and a setting value of 3. is "1/50", set value 4 is "1/60", set value 5 is "1/70", and set value 6 is "1/80".

In this way, in the normal state and time-saving state (low probability state), the higher the set value, the higher the probability of hitting the jackpot, but in the variable probability state, the set value is higher in contrast to the normal state and time-saving state. The probability of hitting the jackpot becomes lower as you go. That is, in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot probability of the set value 6 is the highest, while in the variable probability state the jackpot probability of the set value 1 is the lowest. In addition, the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value, and for some, the jackpot probability set to a set value lower than the set value is better than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. You may make it set so that it may become high.

As shown in FIG. 245 (A), the small hit probability in the first special lottery (percentage of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit determination table) is "0" at all set values. It is said that it is difficult to acquire prize balls by small hits in the normal state and time saving state (no winning of small hits), while the probability of small hits in the second special lottery (small hits in the hit judgment table The percentage of the small hit judgment value that indicates that you have won the lottery) is a common "1/3" for all set values, which is a very high probability compared to the probability of a big hit. Hits occur frequently, making it easy to win prize balls.

In the variable probability state, the probability of the big hit is lowest at the set value 6, so the occurrence of the big hit is less likely than the low set value (delay). As a matter of fact, the number of small hits that occur until a big hit increases. That is, the higher the set value, the more prize balls can be obtained by the small hit, and the next big hit is promised, and the higher the set value, the higher the advantage. In other words, in the variable probability state, the next big hit is guaranteed regardless of the set value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big hit is made different for each set value, and the higher the set value, the greater the big hit. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained outside is increasing.

In addition, without setting the duration of the variable state to the next big hit, a predetermined number of fluctuations in the same way as the normal state and the time saving state (100 times of suggestions, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) The higher the set value, the higher the probability of the big hit, while increasing the frequency of occurrence of the big hit with the higher set value, thereby increasing the degree of advantage. It is also good (so-called number cut probability variable). In this case, although the next big win is not promised, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big win is set differently for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than the big win. Although the expected value is increased, it is possible to realize a game property that makes one expect that a big hit will occur before the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied, and to improve interest. In addition, in realizing such a game, the probability of winning the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state does not have a setting difference (uniform at 1/319), Only the big hit probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the state may be provided with a setting difference as described above.

In addition, in realizing the playability of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than a specific set value, while making the big hit probability in the variable probability state higher than the small hit probability in the second special lottery, In the case of a set value higher than a specific set value, the big win probability in the variable probability state may be made lower than the small win probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the probability of a big hit in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state) is set to “1/250” at the setting value 1, and “240” at the setting value 2. "1/230" at setting value 3, "1/180" at setting value 4, "1/170" at setting value 5, and "1/160" at setting value 6, The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the variable state (high probability state) is "1/25" at the setting value 1, "1/24" at the setting value 2, and "1/24" at the setting value 3. 1/23”, set value 4 “1/18”, set value 5 “1/17”, set value 6 “1/16”, while the second special lottery It can be exemplified that the hit probability (the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit determination table) is set to "1/20" in common for all set values.

In the case of such a configuration, with the set values 1 to 3, the probability of the small hit probability in the second special lottery is lower than the big hit probability in the variable probability state, so the prize ball that can be obtained by the small hit in the variable probability state. While the number is relatively small, at the set values 4 to 6, the probability of the small hit in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of the big hit in the variable probability state, so the prize that can be obtained by the small hit in the variable state. The number of balls will be relatively large. In particular, when the set value is 4 or more, the probability of a big hit is lower than the probability of a small hit in the variable probability state, making it difficult for the occurrence of a big hit, and the expectation that the variable probability state will continue for a long time. It is possible to create a game property that gives a sense of expectation that the ball can be acquired. In addition, the history information of the probability of the big hit occurring in the variable probability state after the power is turned on and the probability of the small hit occurring in the variable probability state is stored in a predetermined storage area (such as RAM) of the peripheral control unit 1511, and the By displaying various hit probability information based on the history information on the performance display device 1600, the player can be made to notice that the probability of the small win is higher than the probability of the big win in the variable probability state. It is possible to impart a sense of anticipation to the player that ``the set value may be 4 or more'', and to impart new enjoyment and amusement that have not existed in the past while the game is continued in the variable probability state. In addition, the player feels that the variable probability state continues for a long time and that many prize balls can be obtained by small hits in the variable probability state. It can also be recognized, and in this respect as well, it is possible to provide new enjoyment and interest that have not existed in the past. As described above, with a specific set value (set value 4 in this embodiment) as a boundary, at a set value higher than that, the game is transformed into a game property in which a large number of prize balls can be won by a small hit, thereby increasing the game interest. can be further improved.

In addition, as another embodiment, the higher the set value in the variable probability state, the higher the probability of a big hit in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, and the higher the set value, the second special lottery. You may make it so that the small-hit probability in may become high. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 245 (B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time saving state (low probability state), the small hit probability is the set value 1 "1/319", setting value 2 "1/309", setting value 3 "1/299", setting value 4 "1/289", setting value 5 "1/279" , setting value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the small hit probability of the variable state (high probability state) is "1/31.9" at the setting value 1, "1/30.9" at the setting value 2, and "29.9 minutes" at the setting value 3. 1”, set value 4 is “1/28.9”, set value 5 is “1/27.9”, and set value 6 is “1/26.9”. In this way, in the variable probability state, the probability of big hits for all set values is increased tenfold compared to the normal state and the time saving state.

In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is set value 1 "1/7", set value 2 "1/6", set value 3 "1/5", set value 4 " A set value of 5 is set to "1/3", and a set value of 6 is set to "1/2". Therefore, with a setting value of 1, one small win occurs every seven times the second special lottery is performed, whereas with a setting value of 6, one small win occurs every time the second special lottery is performed twice. It will occur once, and the frequency of small hits will increase. That is, with the set value 6, small hits occur more frequently than with the set value 1, making it easier to acquire prize balls by small hits, and the higher the set value, the more prizes that can be obtained in the variable probability state and the time saving state. The expected value of the number of balls is increasing.

In addition to changing the setting of the above-described big hit probability and small win probability, or without changing the setting of the big hit probability and small win probability, etc., the degree of advantage can be increased by making the determination ratio of the big hit type different for each set value. You may make it change. As described above, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small win can occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small win cannot occur. Therefore, the advantage degree changes according to the duration of the variable probability state and the time saving state.

Also, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state and the time saving state, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a small hit. Alternatively, a so-called falling lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state when the special lottery result is "lost" during the variable probability state. In this case, the fall probability (probability of ending the variable probability state) may be common without being different for each set value, or the fall probability may be made different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 245(C), the fall probability in the high-probability state may be "1/100" common to all set values. does not differ for each set value, but as shown in FIG. 245(B), the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, so the frequency and number of occurrences of the big hit are not changed for each set value. The degree of advantage is changed by changing the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage.

Also, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. A value of 6 may be "1/100".

In this case, with the set value 1, the probability of a big hit is ``1/31.9'', whereas the probability of a fall is ``1/80'', and the probability of a big hit is about 2.5 times higher than the probability of a fall. On the other hand, with the set value 6, the probability of a big hit is ``1/26.9'', whereas the probability of falling is ``1/100'', which means that the probability of a big hit is about 3.7 of the probability of falling. is doubled. That is, the higher the set value is, the higher the degree of advantage is by increasing the probability of winning the big win before obtaining the falling lottery result that terminates the variable probability state by improving the probability of winning the big hit as the set value increases. there is

In addition, when the falling lottery result that ends the probability state during the probability state is obtained, the probability of the jackpot is returned from the probability of the probability state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), while the second special lottery The control for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols for suggesting the result to the player may be continued. The control may be terminated and the control may be shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the total number of suggestions for the lottery and the suggestion for the second special lottery has reached 100 times. That is, when the falling lottery result for ending the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be ended and the shift control to the time saving state may be performed. In addition, when the fall lottery result that ends the variable state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game has already been a predetermined number of times (for example, the total number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is 100 times. ), it may be possible to control the transition to the normal state without controlling the transition to the time saving state after ending the variable probability state.

In addition, when the falling lottery result that ends the probability state is obtained during the probability state, the jackpot probability is returned from the probability of the probability state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result is The variation time of the special symbols for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal variation time. That is, when the falling lottery result for ending the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be ended and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the falling lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and when the falling lottery result for ending the time saving state is obtained during the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal state. You may make it control.

In the example shown in FIG. 245 (E), after the transition control to the variable probability state after the end of the big hit game, when the special lottery result becomes "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type that the variable probability state ends when By changing it, the degree of advantage is changed. Specifically, when the first special lottery result executed mainly in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) becomes "jackpot", the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type is the same at all set values, A ``15R variable probability big hit'' controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of the big win game and a ``2R variable probability big hit'' in which the number of prize balls acquired is smaller than that of the ``15R probability variable big hit'' although the transition is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of "big hit" is set to "40/100" respectively, and after the end of the big win game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestion of the second special lottery are summed up to 100 times). The occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to transition to the time saving state until reaching is "20/100".

On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery executed mainly in the probability variable state and the time saving state is "big hit", the occurrence ratio of the big hit type is different for each set value, and at the set value 1 The occurrence ratio of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``45/100'', and the number of prize balls acquired although the state is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of ``2R probability variable big hit'' which is less than ``15R probability variable big hit'' is set to ``15/100'', and control is shifted to a time saving state until reaching a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game. The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" is set to "40/100".

At the set value 2, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``46/100'', and the prize is controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' in which the number of acquired balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``19/100'', and after the jackpot game is completed, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "35/100".

At the set value 3, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``47/100'', and the prize for which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of winning balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``23/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" that is controlled to shift to the time saving state until the number of suggestions of the second special lottery is totaled (100 times) is set to "30/100".

At the set value 4, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``48/100'', and the prize for which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of acquired balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``27/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "25/100".

At the set value 5, the occurrence ratio of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is ``49/100'', and the prize for which the shift to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of acquired balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``31/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the total number of suggestions of the second special lottery (100 times) is set to "20/100".

At the set value 6, the rate of occurrence of the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' controlled to transition to the high probability state after the end of the big win game is set to ``50/100'', and the prize for which the transition to the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big win game. The occurrence ratio of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' where the number of winning balls is less than the ``15R probability variable jackpot'' is set to ``35/100'', and after the jackpot game is over, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching 100 times of suggestion (sum of suggestions of the second special lottery) is set to "15/100".

In this way, when the second special lottery result executed mainly in the variable probability state and the time saving state becomes a "jackpot", a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second The generation ratio of the ``15R normal big hit'' controlled to shift to the time-saving state until reaching 100 times of suggestions totaling the suggestions of the special lottery is changed for each set value, and the higher the set value, the more the ``15R normal big win'' occurs. By reducing the ratio, it becomes difficult to end the probability change state. As a result, the higher the set value is, the more difficult it is to end the variable probability state once it is controlled to shift to the variable probability state, so that the number of occurrences of big hits can be increased, and the number of prize balls based on the small hits generated during the variable probability state is increased. acquisition becomes possible. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the variable probability state.

In addition, the higher the set value, the lower the occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot", while the higher the occurrence ratio of "2R probability variable jackpot" than "15R probability variable jackpot" to suppress the number of winning balls. It is possible to suppress the situation from becoming excessively advantageous to

[26-3. Setting Suggestion Effect of Second Embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in the variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won are different for each set value. Specifically, in FIG. 245 (A), the big hit probability of the variable probability state of the set value 1 is set to "1/30", and the small hit probability is set to "1/3". The expected value of the number of small wins that can be won from the control to the variable probability state to the next big win is "9 times". In addition, since about one game ball B can enter the second big winning hole 2006A in one small winning game, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in one small winning game. becomes "15 balls". That is, in the case of the set value 1, the expected value of prize balls obtainable by a small hit in the variable probability state is "135 balls", which is "9 times x 15 balls". Similarly, when the set value is 2, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state is "195 balls" of "13 times x 15 balls", and when the set value is 3, the expected value is obtained by a small hit in the variable state. The expected value of possible prize balls is "240 balls" of "16 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state in the case of the setting value 4 is "19 times x 15 balls". "285 balls", the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state in the case of a set value of 5 is "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and a small hit in a variable state in the case of a set value of 6 The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by the above is "390 balls" of "26 times x 15 balls".

In addition, in FIG. 245 (B), the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variable state in the case of the setting value 1 is "60 balls" of "4 times × 15 balls", and in the case of the setting value 2, the probability variable state The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state is "5 times ``75 balls'' of ``× 15 balls'', the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state is ``105 balls'' of ``7 times x 15 balls'', and the setting value of 5 is The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable state is " "195 balls" of 13 times x 15 balls".

In this way, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in the variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won differ according to the set value (in FIG. 245 (B), they are partly the same. Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the big win game, it is possible to guess the set value according to the number of prize balls won in the small win game, the number of times the small win is won, etc. until the next big win. can. It should be noted that an effect (set value suggesting effect) of suggesting a set value may be executed according to the number of winning balls obtained in the small win game, the number of times the small win is won, or the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a gauge unit having six scales 1600d of 1 to 6 so as to correspond to six levels of setting values on the effect display device 1600 as a setting value suggesting effect, The scale of the gauge part is colored according to the number of prize balls won (number of payouts) by winning the second big prize hole 2006A, and the gauge part changes from the initial display mode to the stage as the number of prize balls won in small wins increases. It may be arranged such that the color is gradually colored (increase the color display between the graduations), and the high setting value is suggested by coloring all the graduations of the gauge section. Specifically, when controlling to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . In this initial display mode, on the premise that the number of winning balls is "0", only the leftmost one of the six scales is colored and displayed as a setting value corresponding to it. value is greater than or equal to 1", and a balloon 1600c displays "What is the set value...?" .

Then, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value 1 and is within the range of the expected value of the set value 2. , the second scale from the left of the six scales on the gauge is further colored (the first and second from the left are colored) to indicate that the set value is 2 or more. In addition to suggesting, "Maybe 2 or more?" is displayed in the balloon 1600c as the dialogue of the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (Fig. 246(B)).

Also, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value 2 and is within the range of the expected value of the set value 3. , Of the 6 scales on the gauge part, the 3rd scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 3rd scales from the left side are colored) to indicate that the "set value is 3 or more". In addition to suggesting, the character 1600b displays "3 or more?"

Also, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value 3 and is within the range of the expected value of the set value 4. , Of the 6 scales on the gauge part, the 4th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 4th scales from the left side are colored) to indicate that the "set value is 4 or more". In addition to suggesting, a balloon 1600c displays "4 or more!?"

In addition, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value at the set value 4 and falls within the range of the expected value at the set value 5 , of the 6 scales on the gauge part, the 5th scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the 1st to 5th scales from the left side are colored) to indicate that the "set value is 5 or more". In addition to suggesting the setting value, "Over 5?"

Also, when it is determined by the peripheral control unit 1511 that the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value at the set value 5 and falls within the range of the expected value at the set value 6. , the sixth scale from the left side of the six scales in the gauge portion is further colored (the state in which all the scales are colored) to suggest that the "set value is 6", and the character 1600b. As a dialogue, "You did it! It might be 6!!!" is displayed in the balloon 1600c to more clearly suggest that the set value is 6 (Fig. 246(F)).

After the state where the sixth scale from the left side of the six scales on the gauge part is colored and displayed (the state where all the scales are colored and displayed), the final stage of display has already been reached, so it is a big hit. Without changing the display of the gauge part according to the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the game, the next big winning game is started, or if there is an ending condition of the probability variable state, the ending condition is established. Until then, the state in which all scales are colored and displayed is continued.

In addition, in a state in which all the six scales in the gauge section are colored and displayed, a further setting suggestion may be made separately. When paying out prize balls in a later small winning game, based on the detection of the entering ball in the second big prize winning port 2006A, the highest setting determination is made to definitely inform the player that the highest setting (set value 6) is set. A special effect lottery for executing the effect may be performed. Specifically, in a state in which all six scales in the gauge section are displayed in different colors, each time a ball is detected in the second prize-winning opening 2006A, a special effect lottery for winning 1/1000 is performed. By winning, special mode voice output (setting 6 congratulations message voice), various lamp light emission of door frame 3 in special mode (lamp light emission in rainbow color using 7 colors), effect display device 1600 It can be exemplified that a maximum setting finalization effect consisting of a special display (message display of congratulations on setting 6!) is performed at the same time. In this way, by executing the highest setting finalization effect in a state where all the scales are displayed in colors, the player is given a sense of satisfaction by the effect related to the previously performed setting suggestion, and furthermore, the game is continued without boring the player. It is possible to provide the player with a greater sense of satisfaction, and to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if a big win is achieved before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge portion is cleared after the big win, so that a big win occurs and a big win game is played. In order to suggest the set value of the pachinko machine 1 by executing the set value suggestion performance every time the variable probability state is controlled later, the actual set value is estimated by statistically suggesting the set value suggested by the set value suggestion performance. be able to That is, if the variable probability state is executed only once, the number of prize balls acquired by the small hit during the variable probability state and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained according to the set value may differ from the set value. However, if the number of prize balls obtained by small hits is counted for each variable state between big hits, the ratio near the specific number of prize balls will increase, so the specific number of prize balls will be considered as the expected value. The comparison makes it possible to infer the set value. In this example, it can be inferred that the set value with the highest suggested ratio in the set value suggestion effect executed a plurality of times is the actual set value.

It should be noted that the display mode of the gauge part may be taken over until the variable probability state ends without clearing the display mode of the gauge part when the jackpot is won. In addition, in this case, the six scales on the gauge part are set to 1 as the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained in one probability state and the number of small hits that can occur in one probability state according to the set value. You may make it so that all the scales may not be colored in the probability variation state of times. As a result, the set value can be suggested based on the number of winning balls won in the variable probability state over a long period of time, the number of small hits, and the like, so that the reliability of the suggested set value can be improved.

In addition, the above-described various set value suggesting effects are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize balls obtained by the small winning game executed in the variable probability state during the period from the end of the big winning game to the start of the next big winning. Suggested settings may differ from actual settings, as they are based on numbers and not actual settings. It should be noted that the main control board 1310 may transmit information on the set value (set value information) to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, as the set value suggesting effect, the prize won in the small win game after the big win game. In addition to the number of balls, the setting value may be suggested based on the setting value information. Specifically, when the number of prize balls obtained in the small winning game after the big winning game exceeds the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the suggestion mode of the set value suggestion performance is not changed. Alternatively, when the number of winning balls obtained in the small winning game after the big winning game is less than the expected value of the set value indicated by the set value information, the set value or the set value information indicated by the set value information by lottery etc. It is also possible to change the setting value suggesting effect to a suggesting mode according to a set value equal to or less than the set value indicated by . By configuring in this way, the reliability of the set value suggestion effect can be increased, and the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect can be noticed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls put out in the small winning game after the big winning game, and the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value at each set value. When it is determined, the display of the gauge part is changed to suggest setting in the variable probability state, but the setting suggestion in the variable probability state is not limited to this form, and may be as follows.

For example, when there is a six-stage gauge section as described above, each time the peripheral control section 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out by a small hit has reached a certain value, one scale 1600d is colored. , the high setting may be suggested to the player by achieving the coloring of the scale 1600d in the final stage. In this case, it is preferable that the final stage scale 1600d be colored with the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small winning game after the winning game with the set value 6 as a guide. When the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the small winning game after the winning game is 6, the payout of ``195 balls + α balls (α < 195)'' is colored in the scale 1600d of the final stage. It can be exemplified to use the achievement timing.

In addition, not based on the prize balls paid out by the small hit, but based on the fact that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of times the result of the second special lottery resulted in a small hit has reached a certain value. By coloring the two scales 1600d and achieving the coloring of the final stage scale 1600d (for example, the number of times that the result of the second special lottery resulted in a small hit reaching 80 times, etc.) It may also suggest something to the player. In this case, the achievement difficulty will change depending on the relationship between the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the variable probability state at the set value that is actually set. And depending on the display status of the gauge (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached by coloring one more scale, etc.), the result of the second special lottery may be a small win rather than a big win, in anticipation of setting value suggestions. It is also possible to provide a new game property that pays attention to.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled to the variable probability state, a new game in which set values are estimated according to the number of winning balls won in the small winning game after the big winning game and the number of winning times of the small winning game. can provide sexuality.

[27. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The contact detection sensor main body 392 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the sensor main body of the present invention, and the contact detection body 393, the first contact detection body 393a, and the second contact detection body 393b in this embodiment are the main body of the sensor of the present invention. The switching unit 394 of the present embodiment is the switching means of the present invention, and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512 of the present embodiment are the detectors of the present invention. , respectively.

[28. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1 are provided at desired portions where it is desired to detect the approach or contact of the player. By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected, when the player approaches or touches the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion, the contact detection body 393 is electrostatically charged. As the capacitance changes, the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect the change in capacitance, so that the player's approach or contact with the desired part can be detected. Control means such as the main control board 1310 , the peripheral control board 1510 , the peripheral control section 1511 , and the effect display control section 1512 can execute predetermined control according to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching portion 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided at the other parts is prevented. is cut, even if the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 provided in the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact detection body 393 is Since the switching unit 394 has disconnected the connection, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at the desired portion can be reliably detected. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection. As described above, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions. It is possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means of (1), the number of channels involved in detection of the player's approach or contact can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for presentation can be relatively increased. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, the increase in production means allows the player to enjoy more diverse productions. It is possible to present the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, sufficiently entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at the desired parts by the switching unit 394 according to the game state. Connects to the contact detection sensor main body 392, detects the player's approach or contact with a desired part, and controls the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect display control unit 1512, etc. Since it is possible to leave a predetermined caution or alarm by the means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for production can be relatively reduced. The number can be increased, and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhancing the appeal to the player. can be enhanced.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 simply by connecting to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392 . can be connected, compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. can be reduced, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced, and the design of the conductive member for connecting with the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body can be eliminated. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

A switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact sensor main body 392, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching part 394. Therefore, for example, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 can be selected. When a player-participation type presentation is executed in which a plurality of distributed contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, a contact detection sensor main body 392 and a contact detection sensor main body 392 are switched by a switching unit 394 at the timing when the player touches them in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 to be connected, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detection bodies 393 in order. This can be realized by the detection sensor main body 392, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be provided.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the button body 351 in the effect operation section unit 350 that can be pressed by the player can be pressed by the player's finger or the like. approaches or touches the button body 351, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal of a metal plate covered with the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to 351 (the effect operation unit 350). In this way, when the player's approach or contact with the effect operation section unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section lifting and lowering are performed. A predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button main body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, so that the player is entertained by the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output. It can be made to function as a contact operation part. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is projected, the effect operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Since various performance operations such as operations can be performed, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine having an operation button that can only be operated by pressing, and can be used for other pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players by being differentiated from other machines.

In addition, according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, a predetermined effect is output to the player side. Since it differs depending on the distance between the player and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player to the button main body 351 (the production operation unit 350) to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production corresponding to each stage is output. By doing so, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection device having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a portion of the effect operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved to enhance the appeal to the player.

In addition, as described above, the operation unit can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. By doing so, it is possible to entertain a variety of performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to make the player enjoy the player-participation type performance, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358 is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate having a plurality of holes, the player can easily touch the button main body 351 through the plurality of holes. It is possible to reduce the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in a state of approach or non-contact, and to avoid erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358 . Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in the capacitance. It is possible to widen the range for detecting the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350). As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range. When the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the player can approach or touch the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) by executing the player participation type performance. When requested, the contact detection body 352 covered with the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, so that the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing in the player participation type performance can be made difficult to miss, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance. The effect can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as an effect means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 can be pressed. The light emitting effect from the LEDs 364a of the middle decoration board 364 can be output to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) that can be pressed is provided with the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352 can reinforce the effect operation unit 350, and even if the player strongly presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) when performing a pressing operation, the effect operation unit unit 350 can be made difficult to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the effect operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the effect operation part unit 350 without worrying, and the effect operation part unit 350 can be operated. It is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, and the plate thickness of the contact detection body 352 can be made thinner compared to the case where the contact detection body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate having the same thickness. Therefore, the space for providing the contact detection body 352 can be easily secured, the contact detection body 352 can be easily provided, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and the appeal to the player is higher. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily designed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. The button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily made into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed is covered by the button body 351. It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the contact detection body 352 formed with a plurality of holes, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the contact detection body 352 is formed with a plurality of holes. is used as an operation unit, the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the decline in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the performance.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button main body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352. Therefore, the cleaning work can be simplified, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean can be reduced.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. A predetermined effect can be output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect The performance output through (via) the operation section unit 350 can be surely enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the effect means such as the external button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the internal button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are arranged on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is provided, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation unit 350) and the effect means can be compactly put together. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being easily provided at a desired portion of the pachinko machine 1 with a performance operation section unit 350 and performance means etc. having such functions and effects, and capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. can be made easier.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 (button main body 351) which is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. As a result, since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the effect to the effect operation unit 350 Player proximity or contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it contacts (collides) with the player, and the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the effect operation section unit 350 protrudes in , the player can be presented with an effect by a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player by a performance not found in the conventional pachinko machine, to strongly attract the player's interest to the performance operation unit 350, and to the player. It is possible to reliably make the user notice the projection of the performance operation unit 350. - 特許庁

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction of the upper end of the lifting spring 365 (upward), the lifting spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lift spring 365 is moved in a direction (downward) away from the upper end portion side of the lift spring 365, the compression of the lift spring 365 is weakened and the bias force can be reduced. By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, it is possible to change the biasing force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 . In this way, since the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded with various projecting forces, it is possible to increase the variation of effects by physical force, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the effect operation. It is possible to entertain the performance by the protrusion of the part unit 350, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed in accordance with the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, the effect operation unit 350 is moved with a strong force. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, and the player can strongly feel that something good is happening (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous), and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by increasing the expectation for.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 is the pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 to perform the game. It is possible to make the player participate in the player-participation type presentation, and to enjoy the pressing operation of the presentation operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible to operate the effect operation unit 350 at any time. When the player participatory effect in which the effect operation part unit 350 is pressed is executed, the effect operation part unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, so that the player participatory effect is performed by effect images, sounds, etc. Even without guiding the execution start of the performance, the player can be made to quickly recognize the start of execution of the player participation type performance, and the motivation for the pressing operation of the performance operation part unit 350 can be increased to perform the player participation type performance. can entertain you even more.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, it is compared with the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using the drive motor. As a result, the effect operation section unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously, and the effects described above can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the effect operation unit 350 is detected, and the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is detected. Since the capacity varies according to the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of electrostatic capacity thresholds and project the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact in multiple stages. By projecting with a projecting power, it is possible to present a more diverse performance to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of it and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by the execution of the player-participation type effect, and the effect operation unit 350 is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. Furthermore, when the player approaches or touches, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352, the contact due to the approach or contact of the player is detected. Since the change in the capacitance of the detection body 352 can be captured, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected by the capacitance. A player can be detected. Then, the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the movement (pressing) of the production operation unit 350 by the player causes the production operation unit outer peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the production operation part lifting mechanism 360, and the inside button decoration board. 364, the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600 and other effect means execute a predetermined effect. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the effect operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed. can function as On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). For this reason, since it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, the player can enjoy various performance operations by executing a player participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type presentation, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided near the portion of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (under the upper surface portion 351a). , the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player. It is possible to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the distance (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present more diverse performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since a predetermined effect is executed by the detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the effect operation (non-contact operation, A sense of operation can be given to the contact operation), and the player can enjoy the performance operation more.

Furthermore, the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350. Therefore, in the player-participation type production, the player has an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350, an operation to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., and the various operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type performance and make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type performance. can be done. When the player participates in the player-participation type production, various operations using the production operation section unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from getting bored. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operating unit 350 to the locking part 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operating unit 350 is locked so as not to advance or retreat. Therefore, until the effect of moving the effect operation unit 350 forward and backward is executed, the effect operation unit 350 is prevented from advancing and retreating by the guide pin 354c and the elevation cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swinging of the performance operating unit 350, thereby making the performance by the performance operating unit 350 more enjoyable. can be made available.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 350, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is hard to be seen by a player, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, an output circuit, etc. are separated, Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be matched with the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. , and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the button main body 351 or the surface member covering the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration 395 When the player approaches or touches the button 396 with a finger or the like, the contact detector 352 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 395 is activated. Because the capacitance of the contact detection body 397 changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is emitted to the player side from the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, or the decorative body 395. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 by the light emitted to the player side, and the executed performance entertains the player. can be done. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 395 is detected by the button body 351 or the contact detection body 397. Since it is formed along the decorative portion provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is a part of the decoration portion. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting the player. In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be compared with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inside decoration substrate 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 395 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be bothered by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outside button decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 in a good state, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button outside covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is detected. Since the decoration board 355, the inside button decoration board 364, or the decorative body 395 is designed to irradiate the player with light, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 can be attached to the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and the player can be provided with a feeling of light operation. Therefore, for example, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's fingers or the like are made to approach or contact the button main body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 approaches or contacts the finger or the like. By detecting the contact, an effect is executed by the external button decoration board 355, the internal button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395, so that the player can participate in the player participation type effect, and the player can participate in the player participation. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger or the like are detected. Since it is possible to change the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration 395 according to the distance from the button outer decoration board 355, the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the performance by the decorative board 364 inside the button or the decorative body 395, so that the player can see a more colorful performance, and the colorful performance makes it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In addition, it is designed to detect a change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the external decoration board 355, the button interior decoration board 364, or the decoration body 395 changes, the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 is not affected by the game. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. When the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be thickened to have a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of the decoration. can be done. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 look like a part of decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detectors 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button main body 351 covering the upper surface side (surface side), The electrostatic capacity changes, and the change causes the effect presenting means such as the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact detection body 395 etc. for presenting a predetermined effect by design Since the contact detection body 395 itself is formed in a predetermined outer peripheral shape having flexibility, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 which has a good appearance and is highly appealing to players can be provided. can. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with a transparent button body 351, and an effect is presented according to the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. Since a predetermined effect is presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. As a result, the button main body 351 can be made to function as the effect operation section 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design property, the effect operation unit 301 looks like it has a design property, and a performance not found in conventional pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 having the operation part 301 can give a strong impact to a player and can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of being differentiated from other pachinko machines. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button main body 351) can strongly arouse interest in the player. It is possible to heighten expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to entertain the operation of the button body 351 when the player participatory performance for operating the button body 351 is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, since the decoration detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 is formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, the presentation of the effect may be difficult. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (the button main body 351) for presenting the effect by means. Therefore, when the player-participation-type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, the button body 351 is activated by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351. It is possible to make the player notice that it is the operation unit 301, and to give the player unexpectedness to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when the player participatory effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button main body 351 without knowing the effect operation unit 301, the contact detection body 359 or the like is stopped. Since the performance is presented by the performance presenting means by changing the electric capacity, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can amuse the player and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presenting means in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like to the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like is presented. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since an effect is presented in accordance with a change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the player's finger or the like approaches the button main body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like and touches the button body 351 . Since it is possible to detect the interval (distance) by dividing it into multiple stages, by presenting an effect according to each stage, it is possible to present a more colorful effect to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to get tired of.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh is used as the conductive contact detection body 395 or the like, Designability can be imparted to the contact detection body 395 and the like, deterioration in appearance due to the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the above effects can be achieved. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a device having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust, food and drink, etc., and cleaning is easy. can be More specifically, since the contact detection member 395 or the like is made of a material having unevenness such as punching metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it is troublesome to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the button main body 351, even if the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a punching metal having unevenness, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering, and to reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as it is easy to clean.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detection bodies 359 and the like, the contact detection bodies 395 and the like are made of a metal vapor deposition film or the like. When a material such as foil stamping that enhances the design is used, it is possible to prevent early wear due to touch by the player, and to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Further, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection body 395 and the like. Since it is possible to use an object that does not feel good to the touch or an object that gives discomfort to the player as the sensing element 395 or the like, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the material used for the contact sensing element 395 or the like, and to meet the needs. The contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed from suitable materials.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 are changed. Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the player brings his/her finger or the like closer to or touches the button body 351. can be intuitively recognized, and the player can enjoy the actions of fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player through the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc. , the button main body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like are executed, the effect presented to the player is executed. can be provided, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like. When the contact detection body 352 (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decoration substrate 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decoration substrate 364 emit light to detect the button. A light emitting effect in which the player is irradiated with light through the main body 351, a effect in which the player's finger or the like that is in contact with the button body 351 is vibrated through (through) the button body 351 by the vibration motor 356, and a button body 351 by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. The upward projection of the button body 351 causes the player to receive an impact, push-up, wind pressure, or the like through (via) the button body 351. Players can be entertained. Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised and amused by the effects. , and the willingness to operate the button body 351 can be enhanced. Then, when the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and moves the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation portion 303, so that the contact detection body The player can be entertained with a variety of performance operations by the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351, and the player is less likely to get bored and is interesting. can be suppressed.

Also, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 351. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a can be detected, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, so that the contact detection sensor body 358 can be arranged in an inconspicuous portion, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, and the effect operation section lifting mechanism 360 are provided, so that the player can receive light and light through the button body 351. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. can be easily imparted, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

[29-1. Main control unit (2)]
Another main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 247 to 269. FIG.
The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control section 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a substrate box 1320 that accommodates the main control section 1310 and is attached to the substrate holder 1200. .

[29-1-1. board box]
The board box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 as shown in FIG. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and molded from a transparent synthetic resin. A main control section 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space 1320s formed by overlapping the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302 . Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are transparently molded from a synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front side and the back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, (whether or not an IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the board box 1320 .
Further, the board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing parts 1320z corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. In order to open the box 1320, it is necessary to destroy one of the sealing portions 1320z, and the opening and closing of the substrate box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing that remain on the sealing portion 1320z, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the circuit board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized actions on the main control portion 1310 is enhanced.

[29-1-2. Main control part]
The main control unit 1310 includes a main control board 1310X (see FIGS. 252 and 269) that controls the progress of the game and the payout of the game balls B, etc., and the winning probability of the lottery, which will be described later, and the area that is advantageous to the player. A setting change board 1310Y (see FIG. 252 and FIG. 269) that can set a game setting related to a distribution rate or the like to one of a plurality of set values.

[29-1-2-1. Main control board]
A main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. In addition, the main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving opening sensor 2406, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening sensor. 3001, a first start sensor 3002, a magnetic sensor 3003, an outlet left sensor 1008a, and an outlet right sensor 1008b.

[29-1-2-2. Setting change board]
The setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 includes a setting switch 1311a that can switch and confirm the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b that can select and switch the setting value, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted is provided.
The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is connected by a harness. ). By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.
The right and left sides of the setting change board 1310Y have substantially the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X. A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310X and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1310Y are shorter than the distance dimension in the direction. match.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is on the center line. Along the left side of the control board 1310X, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line.
On the setting change board 1310Y, a setting switch 1311a having an operation part 1311j into which the setting key K1 is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. A setting switch button 1311b having 1311p is arranged, and is on the center line of the setting change board 1310Y and above the upper left of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting switch button 1311b). A change permission lamp 1311c is arranged.
Above the center line of the main control board 1310X and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN, a setting indicator 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED indicator with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a line from the center toward the right side is arranged below the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310X. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation portion similar to the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is arranged in the .

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the operating portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a (for example, the position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). , the setting switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the operation unit 1311j is at the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion port and the setting key K1 can be removed from the insertion port.

The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the operating portion 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal changes the setting. Input from the substrate 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control substrate 1310X. When the operating portion 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and is turned on for the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on to turn the determination key ON. It is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
Further, the operation unit 1311j is rotated counterclockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which turns the setting switch 1311a OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off. (That is, the setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operating portion 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the rotational position of the operating portion 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a). can. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, ON of the setting key and ON of the decision key, can be realized by the setting switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the operating portion 1311j is rotated. , the setting key ON and the decision key ON can be collectively performed.

The base front surface of the operating portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operating portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operating portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected to the corresponding openings 1301h formed in the cover 1301 of the board box 1320. Although they are exposed to the outside, they are exposed to the front surface of the base of the operating portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operating portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operating portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the corresponding opening 1301h. A portion of the cover body 1301 corresponding to the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a are arranged so that a foreign object such as a wire cannot enter through the formed "gap" and modify the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X. , the setting switching button 1311b, and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v (for example, fitting of cylinders 1301c shown in FIG. 264) for preventing foreign matter such as a wire from entering is formed. .
The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, but the cover body 1301 is molded transparently as described above. Therefore, through the cover body 1301, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a are used. and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1310Y (at a distance from each other). At the same time, connection to the connector SMCN terminals of the setting change board 1310Y (the connector MSCN terminals of the main control board 1310X) is also formed at a distance, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are also transmitted to the main control board 1310X. Wiring patterns (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal for turning ON the setting key of the setting switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal for turning ON the enter key of the setting switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a. pattern) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted. The wiring patterns are also formed so as not to come close to each other (spaced apart from each other).

[29-1-2-3. setting switch, setting switch button, setting indicator]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the set value of the game setting will be briefly described, and the case of performing confirmation display of the current set value will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key K1 is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting values, but also to confirm the current setting values that have been set, it can be operated by two or three people, including the manager of the game hall. Only a limited number of people have it.

When changing the settings of the set values, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the body frame is changed to the outer frame 2. 4 is opened, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion opening of the operating portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operating portion 1311j is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. It is necessary to establish a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned on.
In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value first opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a, and then presses the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operating portion 1311j, and the setting key K1 is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting switch 1311a ON. The pachinko machine 1 is powered on by the power switch 630a.

As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a selects the current set values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the operation section 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned ON). set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

Next, when the push operation part 1311p of the setting change button 1311b is pressed, the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the push operation portion of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the value is increased by 1 and reaches the maximum set value of 6, it returns to the initial set value of 1, increases again by 1, and controls to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

Next, to determine the setting value, the operation unit 1311j is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting switch 1311a is moved from the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned on to the original position. Turn the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return it to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder turning position for turning off the setting switch 1311a) to turn it off. is turned ON, the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

Next, the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting switch 1311a from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the enter key is turned on to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a is turned off by turning it to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting indicator 1310g to the non-display state and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

Next, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion opening of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the work of closing the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed to complete the work of changing the set value.

In addition, when performing confirmation display of the currently set setting value, when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1 or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the external The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation portion 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to open the first position. is turned ON, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a is turned ON.
In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the set values that are currently set must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that the power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power failure). Then, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and then the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operating portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. By operating the setting switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.
This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.

The main control MPU 1310a selects the current set values stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the operation section 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is first turned ON). set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state where the setting change permission lamp 1311c is turned off is maintained, and even if the person who checks the setting value presses the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is changed in response to this pressing operation. Nothing is changed, and the contents displayed on the setting display 1310g are also not changed.

When the confirmation of the currently set value is completed, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). Rotate it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it back and turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the setting value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

Finally, the setting key K1 is pulled out from the insertion port of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the work of closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2 is performed to complete the work of confirming and displaying the set values currently set. do.

It should be noted that, as described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs instantaneously), the outer frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operating portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and the operating portion 1311j is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by being turned on, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when a power failure (momentary power failure) After the power is restored after the momentary power failure occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the operation part 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, It is necessary that the operation unit 1311j is turned clockwise by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed to turn ON the setting key.
In this way, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the insertion port of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a is opened. There is a common requirement in that the setting key K1 is inserted and the operation portion 1311j is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. While the value change permission condition requires "at the time of power recovery", the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, when explaining the setting value of the game setting, the "setting value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit. It is possible to change the probability of lottery judgment when shifting to normal time (the above is also collectively referred to as "lottery winning probability"), the distribution rate to areas that are advantageous for players, etc. , and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that the player can obtain can be increased) is set in advance. In this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance as setting values in a plurality of stages. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects the game balls shot to the game area 5a through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls shot to the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is sent to the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710. FIG.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It's becoming

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j at which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. A setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range of up to is also possible. In this case, the setting switch 1311a′ is turned counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). By rotating the setting switch 1311a' by 60 degrees and turning it OFF, it is possible to turn the setting switch 1311a' ON. (the mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, although not shown, the setting change board 1310Y has a decision key button having a pressing operation part. may be provided. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed to the outside through the opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button. A foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v of the setting switching button 1311b is provided so that a foreign matter such as a wire cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the corresponding opening and modify the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X. A foreign matter intrusion prevention portion similar to that is provided.
When the press operation portion of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1310Y may be near the setting switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body 1301 of the circuit board box 1320, a sticker with the name of each button printed is affixed to the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b so as not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b ( Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation part of either the decision key button or the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation part) The cover needs to be opened at the same time.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the setting change board 1310Y is provided with the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, the wiring pattern for the entering key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switching button 1311b are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b should not be placed close to each other ( spaced apart from each other). Further, when the setting change board 1310Y is provided with an enter key button, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on. It may be a switch 1311a' (the mode of the decision key button (which may include the mode of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "the modification (2) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects and a detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball B by the will of the player, the payout control board 633 , and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182. When it is not touched, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON, and/or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the decision key is ON. On the other hand, when the launch of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Good.) may be described as “determination key modification (3)”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a launch timing control circuit provided in the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. A firing reference pulse is branched from the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. Based on these firing reference pulses, it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON. good too. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, and determines that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Provided on the game board 5, when the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board and relayed. It may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the board, and whether or not the decision key is ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The light emitted by the light emitting part of the distance measuring sensor passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light-receiving section, thereby detecting the action of the player. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor through the relay board, and determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no movement, it is possible to determine that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measurement sensor may be described as "determination key modification (5)"). .

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off, and the setting switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the setting switch 1311a and turning it off. The setting switch 1311a is provided with a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the information indicating the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. may Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided on the main control board 1310X or may be provided on the payout control board 633 instead. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a turns on the setting key, the enter key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. When the operating portion 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting switch 1311a), the switch 1311a is turned off. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off, and the setting switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operating portion 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a is provided with a pulse output circuit capable of outputting, as a pulse signal, information indicating the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF to the outside. good too. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided on the main control board 1310X or may be provided on the payout control board 633 instead. The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is set to have a pulse width of 1 ms in the case of information indicating that the setting key is ON, and set to a pulse width of 3 ms in the case of information indicating that the enter key is ON. If the information indicates OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a turns the set key ON, enter key ON, and OFF (the configuration of the setting switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "determination key modification (7)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the operation unit 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position to perform the first ON operation. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform a second ON operation. The switch 1311a can be turned on for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The operation unit 1311j is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and is turned off. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off, and the setting switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the decision key is turned on to the initial position, which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operating portion 1311j clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it to the main control board 1310X. The voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the decision key ON signal, and the OFF signal voltage level are input to the control MPU 1310a from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. between the substrates, use an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V in the range of 0V to 5V), provide a comparator circuit in the main control board 1310X, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is sent to the main control MPU 1310a Based on the input, the main control MPU 1310a may determine ON/OFF of the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF of the enter key ON signal, and ON/OFF of the OFF signal. As a result, it is possible to improve security with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a (the mode of the setting switch using the intermediate potential may be referred to as "determination key modification (8)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. good. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button. and a structure in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter from the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the payout control board 633. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

It should be noted that the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover of the payout control board 633, there are stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch 633d so as not to confuse the enter key button and the error release switch 633d. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover). In order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch 633d, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the enter key button or the error release switch 633d (for pressing the press operation portion) is provided. The cover must be opened when the cover is opened.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the error cancel switch 633d may be changed. A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. Further, when the payout control board 633 is provided with the enter key button and the error release switch 633d, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the error release switch 633d are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (spaced apart from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also formed at a distance. Also, in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch 633d should not be drawn close to each other (mutually spaced apart). Further, when the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. It may be a switch 1311a' (the form of the decision key button (which may include the form of the setting switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modification (9) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation part on the payout control board 633 may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it may be determined whether or not the Enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time-on processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed, and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error cancellation switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch 633d. Based on the signal, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the error canceling switch 633d is not operated. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the decision key is ON (the mode of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "the modification (10) of the decision key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, a signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation part on the payout control board 633 is monitored by the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command is created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. A command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch 633d is for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c. When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the time-on processing is completed and an interrupt processing is being performed, and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, in the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch 633d in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and notifies that effect. When the command to convey is received, it can be judged that the decision key is ON, while the payout control MPU 633aa judges that the pressing operation unit has not been operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch 633d, and the command to convey that effect. is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "variation (11) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is set to the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is turned on) from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned ON. The setting switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j to be turned off and turned off, and further rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. is provided on the payout control board 633, the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main through the payout control board 633. Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on an operation signal input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310X and input to the main control MPU 1310a. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. When the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the determination key ON On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. can be done. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be pressed. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed in the portion and the corresponding opening to modify the payout control board 633, a foreign matter entry prevention portion similar to the foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v is provided. part is formed.

In addition, the position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, the name of each button is printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch 633d so as not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch 633d. A sticker is attached (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch 633d, a button with a cover covering the push operation part of either one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch 633d It is necessary to open the cover to perform the operation.), the color of the pressing operation part may be different, and the outline shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch 633d may be adopted. Alternatively, a switch having a different shape of the pressing operation portion may be employed, or a switch of a different type that does not have a pressing operation portion may be employed as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Various switches can be mentioned. Also, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern to the error cancellation switch 633d are formed so as not to come close to each other on the payout control board 633 (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310X) is also spaced apart. Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error cancel switch 633d should not be brought close to each other. formed (spaced apart from each other). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operating portion 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. It may be a setting switch 1311a' (the form of the RAM clear switch 1310f (the form of the setting switch 1311a' may be included) may be described as "determination key modification (12)").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the setting switch 1311a is set to the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is turned on) from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting key is turned ON. The setting switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and is turned off. can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. is provided in the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and outputs the command. Created, transmitted to the main control board 1310X the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on processing to be described later, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310X that received this command determines whether the determination key is ON You may As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the decision key is ON. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on the operation signal of , and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is not ON. Thus, it is possible to improve the security with respect to whether or not the enter key is ON. ”).

In the above-described embodiment, the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and then rotates it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees. By performing a second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet right sensor 1008b are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and the main Based on detection signals from the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet right sensor 1008b to which the control MPU 1310a receives input, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. A game ball shot into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. A game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, as described above. Therefore, based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, the main control MPU 1310a detects when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 and when the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet door are opened. Based on the detection signal from any one of the right sensors 1008b, when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, it can be determined that the enter key is ON. When it is not open (that is, it is closed), and/or based on the detection signals of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, when the out port 1008 has not collected the game ball. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch mode ( may include the configuration switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (14)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the out port 1008 in order to turn the decision key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j when the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and then rotates it in the counterclockwise direction by 60 degrees. By performing a second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the logic of the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet right sensor 1008b is sent to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633. The command is created by monitoring in the input process, the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. A game ball shot into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. A game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either one of the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a, in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing to be described later, based on the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet right sensor 1008b, the game ball is collected by the outlet 1008 When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball is not collected by the out port 1008, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the decision key is ON when it receives a command to notify that effect. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be configured to be rotatable only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (out port switch mode 2). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the out port 1008 in order to turn the decision key ON.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 The detection signal from is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633, and these detection signals Based on this, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the enter key is ON or not, and the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 is used as the payout control board 633 payout The control MPU 633aa monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and transmits the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310X. , the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be rotatable only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the aspect of the payout unit (setting)). may include the aspect of the switch 1311a'.) may be described as "determination key modification (16)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while when the body frame 4 is kept open with respect to the outer frame 2, It can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (a form of the body frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 again by pressing it, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion opening of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 again.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, while when the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the body frame 4, it can be determined. It can be determined that the decision key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be configured as a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (a mode of the door frame opening switch). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (17)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key. Then, it is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the insertion opening of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a, and close the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. FIG.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is rotated from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j to turn OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position ) to be turned off, and further rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation to turn the setting switch 1311a into the decision key ON. Although the enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch may be described as "determination key modification (18)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y is rotated from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation of the operation unit 1311j to turn OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position ) to be turned off, and further rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation to turn the setting switch 1311a into the decision key ON. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the operation unit 1311j from the rotational position where the setting key is turned on to the initial position and turning it off. , the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and determines that the Enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. can be done. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be configured to be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (setting switch mode 2 ( may include the configuration switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (19)").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. good. In this case, the press operation portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 corresponding to the Enter key button. Between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation portion, a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the main control board 1310X. A foreign matter entry prevention portion similar to the foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 264) is formed. When the pressing operation portion of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation portion of the enter key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the enter key button. When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the board box 1320, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are attached to positions corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this seal, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for depressing the depressing operation part) The cover must be opened when the cover is open.), the color of the press operation part may be different, the outer shape of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or the press operation A switch with a different shape of the part may be adopted, or a switch of a different type that does not have a depressing operation part may be adopted as the enter key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Switches can be mentioned. In addition, when the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed in order to prevent unauthorized modification. are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other) on the main control board 1310X. Further, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on. It may be a switch 1311a' (Mode 2 of the Enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification (20) of the Enter key").

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning OFF the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. It is also possible to determine whether or not the decision key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is activated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to be described later), the main control MPU 1310a stores a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (RAM excluding specific areas) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be configured so that the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch embodiment 3). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a' may be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is applied to the payout control board 633, as will be described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU 633aa, the payout control board 633 does not need the error canceling switch 633d when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error canceling switch 633d, which will be described later.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Various sensors of the mouth (for example, the second starting mouth sensor 2402, the big winning mouth sensor 2403, the first receiving mouth sensor 2406, the general winning mouth sensor 3001, the first starting mouth sensor 3002), the out mouth left sensor 1008a of the out mouth 1008 and the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the outlet right sensor 1008b are inputted may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be configured to be rotatable only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (various types of sensors, etc.). may include the mode of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 to turn on the decision key, sends the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, or enters various prizes. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth or send the game ball B to the out mouth 1008 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. is controlled to control the operation of the movable body (accessory), and the original position and operating position of the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.) In the case of determination, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the Enter key is ON based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the optical accessory sensor The mode (which may include the mode of the setting switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the optical sensor detects the original position of the movable body (accessory) in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory) so as to detect the operating position, etc.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, detection from the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a The main control MPU 1310a to which the signal is input may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003. FIG. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the configuration of the magnetic sensor (setting)). may include the aspect of the switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1. to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to enter various winning openings and gates provided on the game board 5. Vibration for detecting fraudulent behavior When the sensor 3006 (see FIGS. 241, 242, and 245) is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of cheating based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006, and from the vibration sensor 3006 Whether or not the enter key is turned on may be determined based on the detection signal of . In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (mode of vibration sensor (setting)). may include the aspect of the switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn the decision key ON.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, radio waves are emitted to the pachinko machine 1 to generate various prizes provided on the game board 5. In the case where the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B by making the various sensors of the mouth or the various sensors provided in the payout device 580 malfunction, the main control MPU 1310a is provided. may determine the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting switch 1311a' may be configured so that the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (the mode of the radio wave sensor (setting)). may include the aspect of the switch 1311a') may be described as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the operating section 1311j where the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off, and then turning it by 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn the setting switch 1311a on. The ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. A detection signal from the detection sensor 381 and detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation button unit 360 are input to the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, it may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the operation unit 1311j where the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is turned on (a mode of the effect operation button unit). (The mode of the setting switch 1311a' may also be included.) may be described as "determination key modification (27)").

In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are accommodated in the internal space 1320s of the board box 1320 composed of the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. It may be housed in a separate setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the board box 1320 . In the circuit board box 1320, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw of the crimping portion 1303 or the like. The crimped portion 1303 is a sealing portion 1320z, and is provided in plurality. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped by the one-way screw or the like of the crimping part 1303 using one sealing part 1320z, so that the board box 1320 can be closed. It is necessary to destroy the sealing part 1320z. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing portion 1320z is destroyed. Such a structure of the board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the operation portion 1311j of the setting switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the corresponding openings formed in the cover of the circuit board box 1320. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed between the front surface of the operation portion 1311j of 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening, A foreign matter entry prevention portion similar to the foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 265) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation portion. Note that, unlike the structure of the board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. An open/close switch for the setting change board cover body that can detect the opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310X, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y. may be configured to be The condition that the cover body is released from the base body based on the detection signal from the setting change board cover open/close switch can be included in the above-described predetermined set value change permission conditions (setting change board box This aspect may be described as "determination key modification (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X are connected to each other. A wiring pattern to which an ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern to which a decision key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern to which an OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a signal from the setting switching button 1311b. are formed so as not to come close to each other on the setting change board 1310Y (separated from each other), and terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminals of the main control board 1310X). Also in the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting switch 1311a (that is, the setting key ON signal for the setting switch 1311a is transmitted). a wiring pattern for transmitting the ON signal of the decision key of the setting switch 1311a; were formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), but the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a and the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a are transmitted. One of the wiring patterns is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y. It may be connector-connected (inter-board connection) with another connector separately provided on the main control board 1310X, or another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y and another connector provided on the main control board 1310X. and may be electrically connected via a harness (the mode of routing of the wiring pattern may be described as “determination key modification (29)”).

In addition, it is also possible to employ a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the mode of selection and combination of the modification examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the decision key"). ”).

[29-2. Other forms of main control unit]
The above [29-1-2. Main control unit], the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated (hereinafter referred to as a “divided board structure”). It may be formed with a single substrate (hereinafter referred to as “single substrate structure”).
The main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 253 to 256 includes a main control section 1310 having a single board structure having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of a game, and a board holder 1200 housing the main control section 1310. and a substrate box 1320 as a container.
Elements such as parts and members provided in the main control unit 1310 having a single substrate structure are provided in the main control substrate 1310X and the setting change substrate 1310Y having a split substrate structure, except for structural features described below. are the same in terms of function and operating method. Therefore, the functions and operating methods of each element are mainly described in [29-1. Main control unit (2)] to [29-1-2-3. setting switch, setting switching button, setting display].
Conversely, the structural features of each element described below can also be applied to the main control unit 1310 having a split board structure composed of the previously described main control board 1310X and setting change board 1310Y.

[29-2-1. board box]
As shown in FIGS. 253 and 254, the board box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302, and an internal space 1320s formed by stacking the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302 contains the main space 1320s. A controller 1310 is housed therein.
The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded from a transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate). (whether or not an illegal IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the board box 1320 .

[29-2-2. Main control part]
The main control unit 1310 includes a main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game and the payout of the game ball B, etc., and game settings related to the winning probability of the lottery and the rate of distribution to regions that are advantageous to the player. can be set to one of a plurality of set values, for example, electronic components (main control MPU 1310a, setting display 1310g, resistor 1310r, etc.), setting switch 1311a , a setting switching button 1311b, etc. are appropriately arranged on a single substrate (hereinafter also referred to as a “printed substrate”) 1310t.
254, the main control unit 1310 is attached to the base body 1302 side of the board box 1320 for convenience of explanation. 1301n is screwed with a screw (not shown).

[29-2-2-1. Arrangement of Circuit Components]
Here, the arrangement of circuit components on the printed circuit board 1310t will be described.
As shown in FIG. 254, the printed circuit board 1310t has a substantially rectangular shape, and a main control MPU 1310a, which is an electronic component, is attached to the approximate center of the printed circuit board 1310t, and a setting switch 1311a is attached to the corner (details of the attachment of the setting switch 1311a are shown in FIG. 254). will be described later), and other electronic components such as an IC 1310i, a resistor 1310t, a capacitor, and other circuit components are arranged over the entire area. A setting switch 1311a attached to the printed circuit board 1310t has its top fitted in an opening 1301h formed in the cover body 1301, as will be described later, and faces the outside through the opening 1301a in this state.

As is well known, the main control MPU 1310a includes a plate-shaped resin package 1310ab and a plurality of pins 1310ap provided in rows on both front and rear sides of the lower edge of the package 1310ab (hereinafter referred to as a plurality of pins 1310ap arranged in a row). are collectively referred to as a “pin group”). The main control MPU 1310a is arranged substantially in the center of the printed circuit board 1310t in a state in which the rows of the pin groups are oriented substantially parallel to the longitudinal sides of the printed circuit board 1310t. soldered to.

It should be noted that [29-1-2-3. setting switch, setting switching button, setting display], the ON/OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a and the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b are input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a Control is performed to change the set value of the game setting inside. Therefore, by accessing a specific pin 1310aq connected to the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b in the group of pins of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to change the setting value of the game setting even from the outside. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component that can be hacked, and a specific pin 1310ap in the pin group is a specific pin 1310aq that can be hacked.

[29-2-3. setting switch]
As shown in FIGS. 254, 255, and 256, the setting switch 1311a has a substantially cubic mounting portion 1311d mounted on the substrate of the main control portion 1310, and a circle that can be inscribed in the square top portion of the mounting portion 1311d. and a cylindrical setting key cylinder 1311e having a smaller diameter and smaller than the height of the mounting portion 1311d. It is in a stacked form.

[29-2-3-1. Mounting part]
The mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is roughly composed of a resin body portion 1311f having an electrical function portion inside, and a mounting bracket 1311g covering the upper surface and side surfaces of the resin body portion 1311f. An insertion piece 1311h protruding from the bottom side of 1311g is inserted into the substrate of the main control unit 1310 and fixedly mounted on the circuit.
The mounting bracket 1311g is provided with a notch 1311i approximately in the center of the four sides of the top. Therefore, the top of the mounting portion 1311d is flat around the setting key cylinder 1311e and uneven at the center of each side due to the notch 1311i. It has become.

[29-2-3-2. setting key cylinder]
A setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a has an operation portion 1311j at the top, and an insertion port for inserting the setting key K1 is opened in the operation portion 1311j. By inserting the key body K10 of the appropriate setting key K1 into the insertion port of the operating portion 1311j and twisting the key knob K11 in a predetermined direction, the setting values can be changed and confirmed as described above.

[29-2-4. Board box cover and setting switch]
As shown in the sectional view of FIG. 255, the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 has an opening 1301h for exposing the operating portion 1311j of the setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a to the outside. A receiving tube portion 1301i protrudes toward the inner space 1320s so as to surround the opening 1301h.
The inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting portion 1311e (for example, about 7 to 8% of the design dimension), therefore, it fits loosely with the setting key cylinder 1311e with the clearance t1 shown in the enlarged view of FIG.
The setting switch 1311a is shaped so that the operation portion 1311j on the top is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body 1301 in the state shown in FIGS. , the operation portion 1311j and the opening portion 1301h of the cover body 1301 form a recess 1301k.

FIG. 259 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which a tapered surface 1301p inclined downward toward the center is formed in the recess 1301k. A portion around the setting switch 1311a is conspicuously visible due to the reflection of the interior lighting by the tapered surface 1301p of the recess 1301k, which makes it easier to intuitively understand. Therefore, the setting switch 1311a of the circuit board box 1320 can be placed on the hinge side of the door frame, which is hard to see and tends to be avoided. Crime-prevention performance can be enhanced by making fraud impossible. In this case, if the main control unit 1310 has a split board structure in which the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are divided, the setting change board 1310Y is arranged at a position advantageous for crime prevention, and the tapered surface of the recess 1301k is arranged. The effect of 1301p can also be exhibited to a greater extent.
The tapered surface 1301p may have any desired radial size and inclination angle, but in general, transparent synthetic resin moldings reduce the visibility of bent portions, making it difficult to detect tampering with the underlying circuit components. Therefore, for example, another circuit component (electronic component) itself or a part (part number It is conceivable to ensure the necessary visibility by making the tapered surface 1301p larger than the size of the display portion (such as the display portion). Further, the size of the tapered surface 1301p may be associated with the degree of the inclination angle, such as making the inclination angle gentler in order to increase the size of the tapered surface 1301p.
FIG. 260 shows another form of the recess 1301k, in which an inner flange piece 1301q is provided in the opening 1301h to further bend the entrance path of foreign matter. As a result, it is possible to significantly increase the difficulty of inserting a foreign object and the subsequent operation, so that the security performance against foreign objects can be further improved. Although the recess 1301k in FIG. 260 is formed with the tapered surface 1301p together with the inner flange piece 1301q, the recess 1301k without the tapered surface 1301p as shown in FIGS. good.

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the distance t2 between the cylindrical end portion 1301z of the receiving cylindrical portion 1301i of the cover body 1301 and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is the distance between the receiving cylindrical portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e. The length of the receiving tube portion 1301i is set so as to be equal to or less than the gap t1. Thus, the radial gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e and the axial gap t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are defined as t1≧t2. By doing so, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal insertion of a foreign object such as a wire through the gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e.
This is because the radial gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is normally set to a minimum width (clearance) necessary for the setting key cylinder 1311e to pass through the receiving tube portion 1301i. , Since the foreign matter that passes through here is limited to extremely fine ones, even if such a fine foreign matter passes through the gap t1, it will change its direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion, and in that state, will pass through the space t2, which is less than the gap t1. It is not easy to break through, and even if it were to break through, it would be extremely difficult to control the foreign object toward the target point (for example, the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, which is the above-described specific electronic component). is.

In particular, in this embodiment, the mounting portion 1311d as the lower stage is higher than the setting key cylinder 1311e as the upper stage in the internal space 1320s. The position of the axial distance t2 from the top of 1311d is relatively high within the internal space 1320s. Therefore, as shown by the imaginary lines in FIG. 258, the fraudulent person draws out the foreign object W that has broken through the narrow gaps t1 and t2 into the internal space 1320s, and causes the tip of the foreign object to contact the printed circuit board 1310t by bending due to its own weight. It is necessary to switch the direction of the tip in the abutment state to the desired direction. It is difficult to perform such operations.
In addition, foreign matter W hanging down from a high place on the side surface of the setting switch 1311a is less likely to go around the vicinity (foot) of the setting switch 1311a. A specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a (specific electronic component) may be arranged as shown. By setting the unauthorized entry warning port for the foreign object W at a high place in the internal space 1320s in this way, it is possible to arrange the important part of the main control MPU near the unauthorized entry warning port. can increase the degree of freedom of arrangement.

By the way, the main control unit 1310, which is a support base for the setting switch 1311a, is a plate-like printed circuit board, and can bend when the setting switch 1311a is pushed. Therefore, by strongly pushing the setting switch 1311a to bend the main control section 1310, the distance t2 between the end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is forcibly widened. In such a case, there is a risk that the linear foreign matter W will break through as indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. 258 .
Therefore, in this embodiment, by attaching the setting switch 1311a to the vicinity (corner portion) of the above-described screwed portion (joint portion) of the main control portion 1310, the bending of the main control portion 1310 is suppressed and the interval t2 is reduced. Fraud that forces expansion is not possible. Also, suppressing the bending of the main control unit 1310 when the setting switch 1311a is operated is also effective in preventing cracks or the like in the main control unit 1310 when used for a long period of time.

Further, as described above, the top of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a has unevenness due to the workmanship of the mounting metal fitting 1311g, and each side is uneven due to the notch 1311i. The cylindrical end portion 1301z of the portion 1301i is also uneven. is maintained.

As described above, the gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e and the gap t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a satisfy t1≧t2. Also, the configuration in which the interval t2 is positioned at a high place in the internal space 1320s, and the configuration in which the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h is provided with the tapered surface 1301p are part of the foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v for preventing foreign matter such as wires from entering. This corresponds to the embodiment, and therefore, this foreign matter entry prevention unit 1301v has a stepped portion, such as the setting changeover button 1311b and the RAM clear switch 1310f, in which the pressing operation portion 1311p, which is the upper portion, protrudes from the mounting portion, which is the lower portion. It can be applied to a push-button type switch member or a slide type switch member in a stacked form at a low cost without separately adding a cylinder 1301c such as the foreign matter entry prevention portion 1301v shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 255, the cylindrical end portion 1301z of the cylindrical receiving portion 1301i has a convex portion 1301m thinner than the receiving cylindrical portion 1301i so that the opposing convex portions 1301m are spaced apart from each other. It is formed so as to be larger than the inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i. Further, a taper 1301j is provided at the boundary between the inner surface of the convex portion 1301m and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving tube portion 1301i. , can be smoothly fitted into the receiving tube portion 1301i. As described above, the clearance between the setting key cylinder 1311e and the receptacle portion 1301i is set to the minimum necessary for crime prevention. is set wider than the inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i, workability can be significantly improved. Moreover, in the configuration in which the convex portion 1301m is used as an introduction guide for the setting key cylinder 1311e, the fit between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is reduced compared to the case where the inner circumference of the tube end of the receiving tube portion 1301i is chamfered in a tapered shape. Since the length can be increased, it is possible to improve security performance against insertion of a foreign object.
In the embodiment, the shape of the receiving tube portion 1301i is cylindrical to match the setting key cylinder 1311e, but it may be a square tube shape to match the top shape of the square mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. In that case, the inner dimension of the rectangular tube is made smaller than the contour shape of the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d, and a space t2 is formed between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. You should keep it.

[29-2-5. Back cover of main control unit and body frame]
The main control unit 1300 configured as described above is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 of the main body frame 4 as described above. The back cover 640 of the frame 4 is covered together with the game board 5. - 特許庁In the embodiment, by covering the opening 1301h of the main control unit 1300 with the back cover 640 of the main body 4, the setting key cylinder 1311e can be accessed by a duplicate key or the like without providing a security cover for the opening 1301h. is designed to prevent unauthorized access to Since this eliminates the need for an extra cover to protrude from the opening 1301h, it becomes easier to keep the depth dimension of the gaming machine within the regulation without pressing other elements.
Further, as shown in the enlarged view of the imaginary enclosure in FIG. 255, the inner surface of the back cover 640 may be provided with a bulging portion 640b that can be fitted (loosely fitted) into the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301. . By doing so, if the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 and the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 do not match, the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 interferes and does not close normally, so that unauthorized alterations can be discovered. , installation defects of the main control unit 1300 can be prevented.
In the embodiment, the center of rotation of the back cover 640 is provided on the side opposite to the center of rotation of the body frame 4 . may be provided on the same side as Then, the back cover 640 can be opened without rotating the body frame 4 largely, and the game setting values of the control unit 1300 can be changed in this state, so that the efficiency of the work of changing the game setting values can be improved. can be raised.

[29-3. Security structure]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention is provided with game settings related to the player's profit as set values in a plurality of stages, and the set values are set by the setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, the setting display 1310g, and the like. , and a crime prevention structure is provided to prevent unauthorized changes to the set values of the game settings. A specific example of the security structure will be described below.

[29-3-1. Security structure of main control unit (1)]
As described above, in the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the arrangement of the opening 1301h through which the setting switch 1311a passes and the main control MPU 1310a, which is the specific electronic component T, is arranged in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (the dashed line in FIG. 254). L2), the imaginary straight line L1 connecting the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h obliquely intersects.
Such a main control unit 1300 is not provided with a countermeasure against foreign matter, such as the foreign matter entry prevention section 1301v of the embodiment, between the opening 1301h and the setting switch 1311a, which is a circuit component. and the setting switch 1311a into the internal space 1320s of the board box 1320 and reach the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is difficult to apply the contact load necessary for connecting to the main control MPU 1310a, electrical access to the main control MPU 1310a cannot be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud due to a foreign object.
Also, if the opening 1301h is on an extension line in the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin 1310aq (see the dashed-dotted line L2 in FIG. 254), that is, the dashed-dotted line L2 connects the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h. When the straight line L1 overlaps, it is possible to protect the specific pin 1310aq by using the other pin 1310ap as a shield, thus preventing fraud due to foreign matter.
In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged substantially in the center of the rectangular printed circuit board 1310t so that the longitudinal sides of the substantially rectangular printed circuit board 1310t and the column direction of the pin group are substantially parallel as in the embodiment, and the opening 1301h, That is, by arranging the setting switch 1311a on the short side of the printed circuit board 1310t, preferably at the corner, the distance between the specific pin 1310aq and the opening 1301h is increased and the angle of the straight line L1 connecting the two is made acute. Fraud by foreign matter can be effectively prevented.
Also, the main control MPU 1310a may arrange a specific pin 1310aq on the opposite side of the opening 1301h across the package 1310ab. In this case, since the specific pin 1310aq is located behind the package 1310ab of the main control MPU 1310a when viewed from the opening 1310h, even if a foreign object is inserted through the gap between the opening 1301h and the circuit component, the foreign object can be identified. It is substantially difficult to make contact with the pin 1310aq, thus preventing tampering with foreign objects.

[29-3-2. Security structure of main control unit (2)]
In the main control unit 1300 of the embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is a specific electronic component T that can be the target of unauthorized manipulation. In that case, the electronic parts that make up this input circuit also correspond to the specific electronic parts T that can be the target of unauthorized work.
Therefore, in the embodiment, as the security structure (2) of the main control unit 1300, a setting switching button 1311b, a setting indicator 1310g, a resistor 1310r, etc. are specified between the circuit component corresponding to the opening 1301h and the specific electronic component T. Circuit components other than the electronic components are arranged in a barricade shape as an obstruction portion 1310s, thereby preventing foreign matter from reaching the specific electronic component T. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent use of a foreign object aimed at the specific electronic component T.
This crime prevention structure (2) can obtain a higher crime prevention effect by using it together with the crime prevention structure (1).
Specifically, circuit components are arranged like a barricade between the main control MPU 1310a and the opening 1301h of the crime prevention structure (1) to form an obstruction 1310s, thereby more effectively preventing fraud due to a foreign object. can be done.
For example, like the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a indicated by solid lines in FIG. Deploy. In this case, the connectors SMCN and MSCN can function as a fault section 1310s against a foreign object inserted from the setting switch 1311a toward the main control MPU 1310a. The combination of the instability of overcoming the part 1310s and the instability of oblique contact with the main control MPU 1310a makes cheating by a foreign object extremely difficult. Such an effect is the same when the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG.
Also, the setting switch 1311a is placed at the position indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. ), the main control MPU 1310a is arranged at the position of the imaginary line so that the setting display 1310g is sandwiched between the setting switch 1311a and the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the setting indicator 1310g can function as an obstacle 1310s against a foreign object inserted from the setting switch 1311a side of the imaginary line toward the main control MPU 1310a of the imaginary line. Even if it is broken through, the instability of overcoming the obstacle 1310s and the instability of oblique contact with the main control MPU 1310a are combined, making cheating by a foreign object extremely difficult.

The obstacle 1310s of the crime prevention structure (2) does not necessarily have to be a circuit component. A partition wall (a structure in which the partition wall 1302b in FIG. 266 is integrally formed on the cover body 1301 side) is provided inside the cover body 1301 to separate the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y, and the partition wall is used as the obstacle 1310s. good too. In this case, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y may be connected by the connectors SMCN and MSCN as described above. should be connected with a harness. Foreign matter moving along the printed circuit board 1310t cannot enter the connector having such a connection structure due to the difference in the traveling direction, so even if the connector is a specific electronic component connected to the specific pin 1310aq of the main control MPU 1310a, fraud cannot be performed. .

The crime prevention structures (1) and (2) of the main control unit 1300 have been described above. Of course, these crime prevention structures (1) and (2) also include the gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e described above. and a configuration in which the interval t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is t1≧t2, or a configuration in which the interval t2 is positioned at a high place within the internal space 1320s. Furthermore, by combining a configuration in which the recess 1301k of the opening 1301h is provided with the tapered surface 1301p, etc., a high crime prevention effect can be obtained.

[29-3-3. Security structure of change operation means (A)]
The first security structure (A) for preventing tampering with the change operation means is, as described above with respect to the embodiment of FIGS. The operating portion is composed of a setting switch 1311a (having a key inserting portion on the surface portion of the tip) which is turned on by the setting key K1. As a result, only a specific person including the store manager of the game hall having the setting key K1 can change the set value of the game setting by the change operation means.

The change operation means is for changing the setting value, and in the embodiment, it is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g. A specific operation unit provided in the control unit 1310 for controlling the start of setting change, and a separate operation unit provided with a setting switching button 1311b in the main control unit 1310 for setting operations other than the start of setting change. . For this separate operation unit, no crime prevention measures other than a foreign object intrusion prevention unit 1301v for preventing foreign objects such as wires from entering are taken. 1311p) can be performed by anyone other than a specific person, but the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation unit, is turned on by the setting key K1 is established. Since the input is invalid for control reasons, there is almost no problem in terms of crime prevention.

It should be noted that the setting switch 1311a, which is a specific operation section of the change operation means, has its axis directed in a direction perpendicular to the substrate surface of the main control section 1310 as shown in the figure, and in the forms of FIGS. The tip portion protrudes from the outer surface of the cover body 1301, but the protrusion may become an obstacle depending on the depth of the island equipment in the game hall, and may also become an obstacle during storage.

In such a case, as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. It can be exemplified by setting it in a direction substantially parallel to the surface and making the tip surface (key insertion surface) face the side surface of the board box 1320 . Specifically, the key insertion part is changed so as to protrude from the front view left end (hinge part side) of the board surface of the main control part 1310 (protruding from the board end). A semicircular notch formed in the base body 1302 of the board box 1320, which is a housing body, and the cover of the board box 1320 so as to be arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the setting switch 1311a and to fit the setting switch 1311a. It can be exemplified that the protruding portion of the change operation means is accommodated in a state in which the key insertion portion is exposed to the outside by both the cutout portion formed in the body 1301 and the cutout portion formed in the body 1301 . When the key insertion portion is projected from the front view left end of the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, the operation portion on which the key insertion portion is provided may be placed on substantially the same surface as the side surface of the substrate box 1320. Although the surface portion on which the portion is provided may protrude from the side surface portion of the board box 1320, it is preferable to form the recess 1301k as described above.

As a result, it is possible to substantially eliminate or reduce the projection of the changing operation means toward the rear side of the board box 1320 (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1). Further, when the board of the main control unit 1310 is arranged on the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, the key insertion part protruding from the end of the board is accommodated in the notch so that the main control part Positioning (positioning) of the board of 1310 can be facilitated, and the burden of assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[29-3-4. Security structure of change operation means (B)]
As shown in FIGS. 261 to 266, the second security structure (B) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means includes change restraint means 1312 covering at least a part of the change operation means; and a first state holding means (hereinafter also referred to as a lock section) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppression means 1312 .

The change operation means of this crime prevention structure (B) is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting changeover button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, similar to the crime prevention structure (A). The change operation means provided are a setting switch 1311a (hereinafter also referred to as "specific operation unit 1311a") and a setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter referred to as "different operation 1311b"), and a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values. In this crime prevention structure (B), both the setting switch 1311a as the specific operation section and the setting switching button 1311b as the separate operation section are small push button switches that can be turned ON/OFF by pressing the pressing operation section 1311p. It does not have a crime prevention structure other than the foreign matter entry prevention unit 1301v that prevents foreign matter such as wires from entering.

The change suppression means 1312 of the crime prevention structure (B) covers at least a part of the change operation means in order to make it difficult to change the game settings. and a second state in which the change operation means covered in the first state is exposed to enable the change operation of the game settings. obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that in the case where the change operation means consists of a plurality of elements, of course, it may be one element related to the change operation that is essential for the game setting among the plurality of elements. do. It also means that even if one element of the change operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gap if the change operation of game settings is difficult. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the above-mentioned numerical and qualitative ones.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (B) locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (holding), although the specific configuration will be described later. is released by the releasing operation of , and the change of the change suppressing means 1312 from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state are switched.

[29-3-4-1. Change suppression means and lock section (first state holding means)]
Specific change restraint means 1312 and lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 of security structure (B) will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. The specific operation portion 1311a (setting switch 1311a), the separate operation portion 1311b (setting switching button 1311b), and the RAM clear switch 1310f of the change operation means can be collectively covered. One end of the change suppressing means 1312 is pivotally attached to the bearing portion 1301a of the cover body 1301 so that the change suppressing means 1312 can rotate like a one-way open door. 1311a, etc., to make it difficult to change the game settings, and a second state that exposes the specific operation part 1311a, etc., to enable the change operation of the game settings, as indicated by the imaginary lines in FIG. can change (rotate) to

On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(D) in FIG. By engaging a locking member 1313c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313b with a lock receiving member 1301b projecting from the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320, the first state change suppressing means 1312(D) and the cover body 1301 are separated. Combine to lock the change inhibiting means 1312(D) in the first state.
The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(D) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a using the unlocking key K2, so that the lock receiving member 1301b of the cover body 1301 is released from the lock member. 1313c is removed, unlocking (retaining) the first state of the change suppressing means 1312(D) to enable the change to the second state, and further changing from the second state to the first state. The change suppressing means 1312(D) that has been changed can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the crime prevention structure (B) of the change suppression means 1312 (D) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) shown in FIG. Since the change can be made only by a specific person who has the unlocking key K2, even if the change operation means itself does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, there is almost no crime prevention problem like the crime prevention structure (A). .

Note that the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is made of synthetic resin having transparency (for example, transparent), so that even if it covers the changing operation means in the first state, it does not hinder the visibility of the changing operation means. Further, when the cover body 1301 and the change restraint means 1312(D) are in the first state and cover the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 and the change restraint means 1312(D) are placed in positions that do not overlap with each other. It has an information display section 1314 in which sentences are described. This makes it possible to easily discover the replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) (collection of parts in good condition) that is performed for the purpose of concealing fraud. This facilitates visual confirmation of tampering with 1311a.

In addition, although the change suppressing means 1312(D) has a size and shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301, for example, the change suppressing means 1312(D) has a size and a shape that can cover the main control unit 1300 as a whole. At the same time, the bearing portion 1301a and the lock receiving member 1301b of the locking portion (first state holding means) 1313(D) may be provided on a fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety of the main control unit 1300 as a whole can be enhanced.

In addition, the anti-theft performance of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is improved by providing the rotation center (bearing portion 1301a) on the free end side of the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. Even if the holding means 1313(D) is destroyed, further crime prevention is possible. In other words, as indicated by imaginary lines in the figure, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) becomes a screen in the open state, and the left side of the change operation means (specific operation section 1311a, separate operation section 1311b) is placed near the wall. The change restraint means 1312 (D) is configured to play a role of guarding the change control means 1312 (D) in an open state to prevent unauthorized change operation from the free end side of the body frame 4 to the change operation means. It can be blocked by itself. In other words, by providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the body frame 4 in this way, it is possible to protect the change operation means in the first state, and of course, to protect the change operation means in the second state. As a result, it is possible to interfere with unauthorized change operations on the change operation means. Also, in order to enjoy such effects to the maximum extent, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. 261 has a length (distance ) is larger than the length (distance) from the bearing portion 1301a to the location where the change operation means (specific operation portion 1311a, separate operation portion 1311b) is arranged, and the change suppression means 1312 ( D) is configured so that the change operation means (the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b) are located close to the right side of D). In addition, the position where the change operation means (specific operation part 1311a, separate operation part 1311b) is arranged is set to a position close to the center of the vertical length of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation part 1311a, separate operation In addition to making it difficult to access the portion 1311b) from above and below, the rotation of the change suppressing means 1312(D) is stopped (fixed) in a screen-like upright state. In addition, it is possible to improve the crime prevention performance by having a part of each of these configurations, but it is most preferable to satisfy all of them.

Conversely, the change suppressing means 1312(D) may be made smaller so that only the specific operation section 1311a is covered, and the separate operation section 1311b is not covered in either the first state or the second state. In this way, by narrowing down the protection target of the change operation means, which consists of multiple elements (specific operation unit and separate operation unit), to those with high security importance, those with low security importance can be released to the outside. By doing so, it is possible to improve the workability of changing the settings.

In addition, the axis line of the change operation means described in the security structure (A) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea of allowing the lock to be held can also be applied to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(D).

Next, the change suppressing means 1312(E) in FIG. 262 is substantially the same as the change suppressing means 1312(D) in FIG. 261, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(E) shown in FIG. A padlock 1313d is connected to the projecting holed lock receiving member 1316 with an inverted U-shaped lock member 1313c. The 1-state change suppressing means 1312(E) and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312(E) in the first state.
The lock section (first state holding means) 1313(E) uses the unlocking key K2 to change the lock member 1313c of the padlock 1313d in the unlocking direction, thereby opening the change restraint means 1312(E). By a specific release operation of removing the lock member 1313c from the lock receiving member 1315 and the perforated lock receiving member 1316 of the cover body 1301, the lock (holding) of the change suppressing means 1312(E) in the first state is released. The change suppression means 1312(E), which can be changed from the second state to the first state, can be locked (held) by the padlock 1313d.

Note that the lock section (first state holding means) 1313(E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d, and therefore is separated from both the change restraint means 1312(E) and the cover body 1301 in the unlocked state. . Therefore, the lock part (first state holding means) (E) is separated from the cover body 1301 (container) in the unlocked state by connecting it to the cover body 1301 with a wire-like or chain-like support part 1317, for example. It is designed not to. As a result, there is no fear that the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) will drop into the island facility in the unlocked state, and the unlocked lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) You don't waste time forgetting where you put the , then looking for it in the lock phase.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) shown in FIGS. 257 to 263 has a substantially lateral fan shape and is swingable by attaching a pivotal portion to the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320. , and can be changed into the first state in which the specific operation section 1311a of the change operation means is covered as shown in FIG. 263 and the second state in which the specific operation section 1311a is exposed to the outside as shown in FIG. Further, the change suppression means 1312(F) does not cover the separate operation section 1311b when the specific operation section 1311a is in the first state, and when the specific operation section 1311a is in the second state, the change suppression means 1312(F) does not cover the other operation section 1311b. It covers the operation part 1311b. By selectively covering the specific operation section 1311a and the separate operation section 1311b with the change suppression means 1312(F) in this way, an erroneous operation of simultaneously operating the specific operation section 1311a and the separate operation section 1311b is less likely to occur.

Note that the change suppressing means 1312 (F) is always urged in the direction of covering the separate operation part 1311b by a coil spring (not shown) provided at the swing center, and the lock part (first state holding means) 1313 ( When the lock (holding) of the first state by F) is released, it changes to the second state due to the elasticity of the coil spring. By urging the change suppressing means 1312(F) toward the second state in this way, there is no possibility that the change suppressing means 1312(F) will stop at an incomplete position, and the operability is improved. It should be noted that the urging direction of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) may be either the first state or the second state. When the lock (holding) of is released, the special operation unit 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so the procedure for the change operation is easy to understand.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) shown in FIGS. and a cam 1313e attached to the tip of the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a. 1312 is pushed down against the force of the winding spring to lock (hold) the first state covering the specific operation portion 1311a.
The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(F) uses the unlocking key K2 to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change in the peripheral shape of the cam 1313e caused by the rotation changes the change suppressing means. A specific unlocking operation of unlocking (holding) 1312 (F) unlocks (holds) the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (F) to enable a change to the second state (embodiment change suppressing means 1312 (F) is urged in the direction toward the second state by a coil spring (not shown). It automatically changes to the second state while being in contact with it.), and furthermore, the change suppressing means 1312(F) changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) by the unlocking key K2.

It should be noted that when the change suppression unit 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the separate operation unit 1311b in the setting value change operation, if it is necessary to operate the separate operation unit 1311b, the change suppression unit The operation projection 1312m protruding from 1312(F) may be manually pushed down to expose the separate operation portion 1311b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the change suppression means 1312 (F) and the security structure (B) of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) shown in FIGS. Since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person who has the unlocking key K2, even if the change operation means itself is not provided with a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, the same crime prevention structure (A) as the crime prevention structure (A) is possible. There are very few problems with the above.

Next, the change suppressing means 1312(I) in FIG. 266 is of a form in which the portion corresponding to the setting change board 1310X of the cover body 1301 of the board box 1320 is separated and made independent. By engaging the key-shaped hinge portion 1312b of itself with the key-shaped hinge portion 1302a formed on one side of the base member 1302, the specific operation portion provided on the setting change board 1310Y is rotatable with respect to the base body 1302. 1311a and the separate operation section 1311b are collectively covered, and the second state exposes the specific operation section 1311a and the separate operation section 1311b to enable change operation. A cover body 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to a partition wall 1302b raised from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313(I) in FIG. 266 is a dial lock 1313f provided on the edge of the change suppression means 1312(I) on the side of the cover body 1301, and the forward/backward lock shaft of the dial lock 1313f. By engaging the tip of 1313g with the lock shaft through 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312(I) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to form the change suppressing means 1312 ( I) is locked (held) in the first state.
Further, the lock section (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates the dials of the dial lock 1313f according to the unlocking numbers to retract the advance/retreat lock shaft 1313g, thereby retracting the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. A specific release operation of removing the advance/retreat lock shaft 1313g from the through 1301f unlocks (holds) the first state of the change suppressing means 1312(I) to enable the change to the second state. The dial lock 1313f can lock (hold) the change suppressing means 1312(I) changed from the first state to the first state.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the crime prevention structure (B) of the change suppression means 1312 (I) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) shown in FIG. Since the change can only be made by a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means itself does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, there is the same crime prevention problem as in the crime prevention structure (A). almost none. The first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the crime prevention structure (B) employs a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, a combination lock 1313f, or the like having relatively high crime prevention performance. Any configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration capable of releasing the change suppressing means 1312 held in the first state by a specific release operation.
266 is independent of the cover body 1301, the change suppression means 1312(I) can be reused as it is even if the cover body 1301 needs to be replaced. be. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312(I) is connected to the hinge portion side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the change suppressing means 1312(I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person destroys the sealing portion 1320z of the cover body 1301, the unauthorized operation cannot be performed unless the specific operation of the change suppression means 1312(I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the fraud prevention function of the cover body 1301 can be improved by the change suppressing means 1312(I).

[29-3-5. Security structure of change operation means (C)]
A third crime prevention structure (C) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is that the crime prevention structure (B) sets the change restraint means 1312 to the second state to expose the change operation means to the outside. , the change control means 1312 is provided at a position covering the change operation means on the container (substrate box 1320) side to make the change operation of the change operation means difficult by itself. On the other hand, the change suppression means 1312 is made to perform the operation of the change operation means.
That is, as shown in FIG. 267, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) of the security structure (C) is located on the side of the cover body 1301, which is the containing body, and the specific operation section 1311a (or the separate operation section 1311b may be used). A cylinder lock 1313a is fixedly provided at a covering position, i.e., a position in the first state covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation part 1311a, and direct external access to the specific operation part 1311a is provided. Make change operations difficult.
In addition, the change suppressing means 1312(J) controls the rotation of the end surface cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a so that the switch input can be mediated by a specific operation from the outside. It has a motion conversion mechanism that converts the mover 1313h into a linear motion, that is, a motion that enables switch input operation.
Then, when the unlocking key K2 is inserted into the change suppressing means 1312(J) and a specific operation is performed to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, the specific operation portion 1311a is operated by the action of the motion conversion mechanism. A direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation section 1311a is substituted by the pressing operation slider 1313h of the change suppression means 1312 (J). 1312(J) via push operation slider 1313h.

According to this change suppressing means 1312 (J), the change operation of the game setting from the outside by the change operating means is performed by the change suppressing means fixedly provided at the position covering the change operating means with respect to the cover body 1301 side. Since it is in a difficult state, there is almost no possibility that the game settings will be changed illegally.
On the other hand, when the game setting is normally changed by the change operation means, an action of inserting and twisting the unlocking key K2 from the outside is performed as a specific operation to the change suppression means 1312 (J) from the outside. Then, the direct change operation to the change operation means is performed by proxy (intermediation execution) by the operation to the change suppression means 1312 (J), and the game settings can be changed.
After completing the change of the game setting, by ending the specific operation on the change suppression means 1312(J), it is possible to restore the state in which the direct change operation from the outside to the change operation means is difficult.

In addition to the case where the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is rotated by the unlocking key K2, the change restraint means 1312(J) can, for example, rotate the dial lock 1313f of the change restraint means 1312(I) to the advance/retreat lock shaft 1313g. and the axis of the pressing operation portion 1311p of the specific operation portion 1311a are aligned with each other. The pressing operation part 1311p may be made to be able to be pressed.
268, the end cam 1313i of the change suppressing means 1312(J) is integrally provided with a shutter plate 1319 that covers the separate operating portion 1311b, and the end cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose the separate operation section 1311b. As a result, unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b can be prevented, and dust can be prevented from entering the internal space 1320s of the substrate box 1320. FIG.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the crime prevention structure (C) of the change suppression means 1312 (J) shown in FIGS. Alternatively, since it can only be done by a specific person who knows the unlocking number, even if the change operation means itself does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game settings, there is no crime prevention problem like the crime prevention structure (A). Not much.

In addition, the axis line of the change operation means described in the security structure (A) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea of making it possible to make it possible to apply it to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change suppressing means 1312(J).

[29-4. Regarding technical ideas]
As is clear from the explanation so far, the above [29-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [29-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 equipped with the main control unit 1300 described in [Main control unit security structure (2)] corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
"A gaming machine in which a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is met and a predetermined profit is awarded to a player when the lottery results in a win,
a main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game;
a board box that houses the main control unit;
a setting switch provided in the board box and capable of changing a game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to one of a plurality of stages;
The board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body covering the base body, and accommodates the main control section in an internal space between the cover body and the base body,
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that an operating portion of the setting key cylinder faces outside from an opening formed in the cover body,
Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch is so arranged that the operating portion is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body, and a recess is formed by the operating portion and the opening. ,
Furthermore, the game machine characterized in that the recess has a tapered surface that slopes downward toward the center.
According to such a gaming machine, since only a specific person who has the setting key can change the set value of the game setting, it is difficult for unauthorized operations to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing setting values with the setting keys, it is necessary to open the front door frame, etc., and work quickly. It takes some time. Also, if you rush to work and fail to insert the setting key, the setting key may slip on the operation part and protrude into the resin part of the cover. There is a risk of injury.
On the other hand, the circuit board box of the game machine based on the above technical idea has a recess formed by the operating portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, and furthermore, has a tapered surface that slopes down toward the center of the recess. First, the part around the setting switch is conspicuously visible due to the reflection of the interior lighting by the tapered surface of the recess, so it is intuitively easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to place the setting switch of the circuit board box on the hinge side of the door frame, etc., which is hard to see and tends to be avoided in common sense. It is possible to improve the crime prevention performance by making it impossible to perform the operation.
Also, even if the setting key is not inserted, the setting key hits the tapered surface of the recess of the opening and does not protrude from the surface of the cover, or jumps up along the tapered surface so as not to rub against the surface of the cover. Therefore, there is no possibility that the surface of the cover will be damaged by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparent state of the cover can be maintained for a long period of time (see, for example, paragraphs 2557 to 2579, FIGS. 259, 260, etc.). ).
In addition, the tapered surface of the recess can be a factor that reduces visibility due to light refraction. The necessary visibility can be achieved by making the size larger than the size (display part such as the product number) or by setting the gradation of the inclination angle (for example, the inclination angle can be made gentle to widen the taper surface). can be secured.

In addition, the above [29-2. Other forms of main control unit] to [29-3-2. The pachinko machine 1 equipped with the main control unit 1300 described in [Security structure of the main control unit (2)] includes the following technical ideas. It should be noted that the control unit of the following technical concept includes not only the main control unit 1300 but also the peripheral control unit 1500 and the payout control unit 620d.
The specific electronic component T includes a main control MPU 1310a having two rows of pins on both front and rear sides of a plate-like package 1310ab, and a square package having four rows of pins on four sides, for example. is also included.
[Claim A1]
A gaming machine comprising a control unit in which a game control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board is
a printed circuit board;
a circuit component including an electronic component attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board;
The control board box is
a base body;
a cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between itself and the base body, and has an opening that is opened to expose a part of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
When a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is defined as a specific electronic component, and a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is defined as a specific pin, the opening and the specific electronic component are separated from each other. The game machine is arranged such that a straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening can substantially overlap or obliquely intersect with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin.
According to such a game machine, even if a fraudulent person inserts a foreign object into the internal space of the control board box through the gap between the opening and the circuit component and aims at the specific pin of the specific electronic component from there, When the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening (see L1 in FIG. 254) overlaps with the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin (see L2 in FIG. 254), the specific pin is shielded by other pins. In addition, if the straight line obliquely intersects the pin group, a sufficient contact load cannot be obtained even if a foreign object touches the specific pin. Electrical access to components becomes difficult. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud due to a foreign object.

[Claim A2]
A gaming machine comprising a control unit in which a game control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board is
a printed circuit board;
a circuit component including an electronic component attached by connecting a plurality of pins arranged in a row to the printed circuit board;
The control board box is
a base body;
a cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between itself and the base body, and has an opening that is opened to expose a part of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
When a specific one of the electronic components having a plurality of pins arranged in a row is defined as a specific electronic component, and a specific one of the pins of the specific electronic component is defined as a specific pin, the package of the specific electronic component is sandwiched. A gaming machine, wherein the specific pin is arranged on the opposite side of the opening.
According to such a game machine, since the specific pin is positioned behind the package of the specific electronic component when viewed from the opening, even if a foreign object is inserted through the gap between the opening and the circuit component, the foreign object can be identified. It is substantially difficult to contact the pin, thus preventing tampering by foreign objects.

[Claim A3]
The printed board of the control board box is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, the row of the pin group of the specific electronic component is arranged substantially parallel to the long side of the printed board, and the opening is formed on the short side of the printed board. The game machine according to claim A1, characterized in that it is arranged in the .
Such a game machine can increase the degree to which the straight line connecting the specific pin and the opening obliquely intersects the row direction of the pin group including the specific pin, and increases the distance from the opening to the specific pin. This makes it more difficult to control the foreign matter inside the interior space.

[Claim A4]
A gaming machine comprising a control unit in which a game control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board comprises circuit components including electronic components,
The control board box is
a base body;
a cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between itself and the base body, and has an opening that is opened to expose a part of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
Provided is a game machine in which, when a specific one of the electronic components is a specific electronic component, the circuit components other than the specific electronic component are arranged between the specific electronic component and the opening. Examples of the specific electronic components include electronic components that can be targeted for unauthorized manipulation.
According to such a game machine (pachinko machine 1), since the circuit components excluding the specific electronic components are arranged in a barricade shape between the opening and the specific electronic components, it is inserted through the opening into the specific electronic components. A directed foreign object strikes an intervening circuit component. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from reaching the specific electronic component, thereby preventing the fraudulent use of the foreign matter aimed at the specific electronic component.

The main control unit 1300 also includes the following technical ideas.
[Claim B1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met and provides a player with a predetermined profit when the result of the lottery is a win,
a main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game;
a board box that houses the main control unit;
a setting switch provided in the board box and capable of changing a game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to one of a plurality of stages;
The board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body covering the base body, and accommodates the main control section in an internal space between the cover body and the base body,
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed so that an operating portion of the setting key cylinder faces outside from an opening formed in the cover body,
Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch is so arranged that the operating portion is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body so that a recess is formed by the operating portion and the opening. A game machine characterized by
According to such a gaming machine, since only a specific person who has the setting key can change the set value of the game setting, it is difficult for unauthorized operations to be performed.
On the other hand, when setting values are changed using setting keys, there is a possibility that setting keys that have been pushed too quickly may slide on the operation part and protrude into the resin part of the cover body. may cause streaky scratches on the surface of the
On the other hand, in the circuit board box of the game machine of the present invention, a concave recess is formed by the operating portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body. , the setting key hits the edge of the opening and does not protrude on the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no possibility that the surface of the cover body will be damaged by the tip of the setting key, and the beautiful transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long period of time.
[Claim B2]
The gaming machine according to claim B1,
An openable and closable back cover and the board box are attached to the rear side of the body frame having the game board, and the board box is not provided with a cover for the opening, and the opening is covered by the back cover of the body frame. It is characterized by being made possible.
In such a game machine, the security performance of the setting key cylinder (prevention of unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder by duplicate keys, etc.) can be enhanced by the back cover of the body frame without providing a security cover for the opening of the board box. Furthermore, since there is no protrusion of the setting key cylinder from the opening of the board box or extra protrusion of the cover, the depth dimension of the game machine can be kept within the regulation without pressing other elements.
[Claim B3]
3. A game machine according to claim B2, wherein the inner surface of the back cover is provided with a bulging portion that can be fitted (loosely fitted) into the recess of the cover body.
In such a game machine, if the dent in the cover body and the bulging part of the back cover do not match, the bulging part of the back cover interferes and does not close normally, so it is difficult to find illegally modified products and install the main control unit. The above deficiencies can be prevented.

[Claim C1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met and provides a player with a predetermined profit when the result of the lottery is a win,
a main control unit having a main control MPU that controls the progress of the game;
a board box that houses the main control unit;
a setting switch provided in the board box and capable of changing a game setting regarding the winning probability of the lottery to one of a plurality of stages;
The board box includes a base body and a cover body covering the base body, and accommodates the main control section in an internal space between the cover body and the base body,
The setting switch has an attachment portion attached to the main control portion, and a setting key cylinder having a cylindrical shape having a smaller diameter than the shape of the top portion of the attachment portion and being rotatably operated by a setting key. the top of the setting key cylinder is formed to face the outside from the opening,
Further, the setting key cylinder is fitted into a receiving tube portion projecting toward the internal space of the cover body,
On the other hand, by bringing the cylindrical end of the receiving cylinder portion on the side opposite to the opening side close to the top portion of the mounting portion protruding outside the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, a gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder is achieved. A game machine characterized in that passage of a foreign object inserted into a gap into the internal space can be inhibited.
According to such a game machine, even if a wire-like foreign object is inserted from the opening of the cover body into the gap between the receiving tube and the setting key cylinder, the foreign object hits the top of the mounting portion ahead in the traveling direction and stops. Fortunately, even if the direction of the tip of the foreign matter can be changed there, the narrow gap between the end of the receiving tube and the top of the mounting portion prevents the foreign matter from advancing, making it difficult for the foreign matter to pass through. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts caused by a wire-like foreign matter aiming at the gap between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder from the opening of the cover body.
Moreover, since such a fraud prevention effect can be achieved by utilizing the stepped shape of the setting switch itself, there is almost no special cost.

[Claim C2]
The game machine according to claim C1, wherein the distance between the cylindrical end of the receiving cylinder portion and the top portion of the mounting portion of the setting switch is equal to or less than the dimension of the gap between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder. A game machine characterized in that it is formed in a
The gap t1 between the receiving cylinder portion and the setting key cylinder is usually set to the minimum width (clearance) necessary for the setting key cylinder to pass through the receiving cylinder portion, and foreign matter passing through this gap is extremely thin. Even if such a thin foreign object passes through the gap t1, it is not easy for it to change its direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and break through the portion of the gap t2 below the gap t1 in that state. Also, even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign object toward the target point after that.

[Claim C3]
3. A gaming machine according to claim C1 or C2, wherein said setting switch is mounted on the surface of said main control section in the vicinity of a joint with said board box.
Even if the main control section is pressed in the plane direction, the vicinity of the junction between the main control section and the board box is less likely to bend due to the rigidity of the board box. Therefore, by providing a setting switch at that part, it becomes difficult to sink even if it is pressed from the outside. It becomes difficult to understand. Further, suppressing the bending of the main control section when operating the setting switch is also effective in preventing cracks or the like in the main control section when used for a long period of time.

[Claim D]
A gaming machine comprising a control unit in which a game control board is housed in a control board box,
The control board is
a printed circuit board;
a plurality of circuit components attached to the printed circuit board;
The control board box is
a base body;
a cover body that is fitted to the base body to form an internal space between itself and the base body, and has an opening that is opened to expose a part of the circuit components from the internal space to the outside. ,
At least one of the circuit components includes a lower part attached to the printed circuit board, and an upper part having a bottom shape smaller than the top shape of the lower part and having a height to the opening smaller than the height of the lower part. , and the upper part is formed so as to face the outside from an opening formed in the cover body,
The opening of the cover body has a receptacle part that protrudes toward the internal space of the cover body and surrounds the upper part of the circuit component,
A gaming machine characterized in that a tube end portion of the receiving tube portion on the side opposite to the opening portion and a top portion of the lower stage portion of the circuit component are brought close to each other.
Here, the bottom of the upper section does not mean the absolute bottom of the upper section. Refers to the apparent part that intersects.
According to such a game machine, even if a linear foreign object is inserted into the gap between the receiving tube and the upper part of the circuit component from the opening of the cover body, the top of the lower part ahead of the moving direction of the foreign object hit and stop. From here, even if the direction of the tip of the foreign object is changed to the side and the narrow gap between the tube end of the receiving tube and the top of the lower part is forcibly widened and broken through, the place will be high in the internal space. For example, a fraudulent acter will feed a foreign object that has broken through a narrow space into the internal space, cause the tip to contact the printed circuit board by bending due to its own weight, and aim at the direction of the tip in the contact state. It is necessary to perform an operation to switch the direction, but it is difficult to perform such an operation with a foreign object that is bent and hangs down due to its own weight and does not transmit force well to the tip.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act caused by a linear foreign matter aiming at the gap between the receiving tube portion and the upper portion of the circuit component from the opening of the cover body.
The circuit components include a setting switch consisting of a lower mounting portion and an upper setting key cylinder, a setting switch button consisting of a lower mounting portion and an upper pressing operation portion, and a RAM clear switch 1310f. etc.

[29-5. New injustice to the control unit]
As is clear from the above description, the control units such as the main control unit 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 in the control unit mount a large number of circuit components (electronic components such as the main control MPU 1310a) on the component mounting surface of the board 1310t. For example, as shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the pachinko machine 1, the surface located at the forefront as viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is defined as a front surface portion 1320a. It is accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin substrate box 1320 surrounded by a portion 1320a, a rear surface portion 1320b, an upper surface portion 1320c, a lower surface portion 1320d, and left and right sides 1320e and 1320f. The board box 1320 is formed by covering the base body 1302 with the cover body 1301, and is sealed with the above-described sealing portion 1320z so that the trace of opening the cover body 1301 remains.
251 and 252, a vertical surface portion 1320g along the substrate 1310t is formed on the edge of the top surface portion 1320c on the side of the substrate 1310t. A plurality of connector members C1 provided on the substrate 1310t are projected.

In the circuit board box 1320, the upper surface portion 1320c and the side surface of the connector member C1 are substantially parallel to each other, and the connector member C1 rises very close to the upper surface portion 1320c, leaving only a narrow gap. Even if an illegal hole is made in the portion 1320c, it is hidden behind the connector member C1, the connector plug C2 connected to the connector member C1, and the harness C3 attached thereto and is difficult to see. Therefore, a fraudulent person aims at such a hard-to-see part with a drill or the like, inserts a foreign object through the hole, and performs fraudulent work on the control unit (main control unit 1310) inside. Fraud that cannot be covered by the security structure that has been implemented is possible.

[29-5-1. Security structure of control unit (a)]
The control unit (main control unit) shown in FIGS. 270 to 277 is designed to be able to counter the above-described fraudulent perforation. and the lower surface portion 1320d and the vertical surface portion 1320g of the left side portion 1320e or the right side portion 1320f. Thus, the upper surface portion 1320c has an inclined surface portion 1320i that slopes downward toward the front surface portion 1320a, and the lower surface portion 1320d has an undercut inclined surface portion 1320i that slopes toward the front surface portion 1320a. Of course, the inclined surface portion 1320i is provided on the left side surface portion 1320e and the right side surface portion 1320f so as to be inclined toward the inside of the front surface portion 1320a (toward a direction that constitutes one surface of the pyramid surface). may In FIG. 274, the inclined surface portions 1320i provided on both the upper surface portion 1320c and the lower surface portion 1320d are depicted vertically symmetrically. There may be.
The slanted surface portion 1320i improves the visibility of the top surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320 and the like, making it difficult to hide the hole. It is possible to prevent an act of tampering with parts. In addition, even in the unlikely event that fraudulent use of punching occurs, the hole can be found relatively easily, so it is possible to minimize the spread of damage.

Note that the lower surface portion 1320d of the board box 1320 may be provided with the inclined surface portion 1320i regardless of the presence or absence of the vertical surface portion 1320g, and thus regardless of the presence or absence of the connector member C1. This is because when the upper surface portion 1320c or the like of the board box 1320 is pierced by a drill or the like, foreign matter such as shavings at that time falls on the inclined surface portion 1320i of the lower surface portion 1320d, and they fall on the lower side of the inclined surface portion 1320i. This is because it becomes easier to gather and the traces of fraudulent work become clearer.

As shown in FIGS. 270 to 272, the inclined surface portion 1320i is chamfered from the middle of the upper surface portion 1320c in the front-rear direction, or as shown in FIG. Form all over. In this case, the slanted surface portion 1320i is positioned on the board 1310t side as the starting end of the slant, and the position of the slant starting end is at the same position as the end of the connector member C1 on the side opposite to the board (insertion port side) or is recessed toward the board 1310t side. It is better to let This is because it is necessary to avoid the connector member C1 in order to make a hole with a drill, which inevitably causes the inclined surface portion 1320i to be drilled and conspicuous.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, the inclined surface portion 1320i is formed on the left half of the upper surface portion 1320c in the left-right direction so as to communicate with the left side surface portion 1320e. The control unit of the embodiment includes a door frame 3 (more specifically, a game board 5 attached to the door frame 3) attached to the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be rotatable like a door. Since it is arranged on the rear surface side, the inclined surface portion 1320i that communicates with the outside of the left side surface portion 1320e like the embodiment communicates with the edge side of the door frame 3 on the anti-rotation center side. do. Therefore, when opening the door frame 3 and looking at the rear side, the entire gap between the upper surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320 and the connector member C1 can be seen from the portion communicating with the outside of the left side surface portion 1320e of the inclined surface portion 1320i. can be seen through, it is easy to detect fraud such as using the connector member C1 as a cover.
As shown in FIG. 275, the inclined surface portion 1320i communicates with both the left and right side surface portions 1320e and 1320f in a straight line to provide the best visibility from the side. As shown in FIG. 2, visibility can be improved as a whole by forming the upper surface portion 1320c over the entire area in the front-rear direction.

[29-5-2. Security structure of control unit (b)]
The control unit of FIG. 277 comprises an openable/closable cover portion 1321 that covers the connector member C1 from the front face portion 1320a side of the board box 1320 in a state orthogonal to the insertion direction of the connector member C1. The cover portion 1321 covers the connector member C1 from the front surface portion 1320a side of the board box 1320, thereby blocking foreign matter from being inserted from the direction of insertion of the connector member C1. can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 277, the cover portion 1321 is rotatably attached to a bearing portion 1302c protruding from the side surface of the base body 1302 of the board box 1320, and the front portion is secured by a screw 1302d passing through the free end side. 1320a.
The cover portion 1321 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate), and covers the connector member C1 from the front surface portion 1320a side. can be supported (abutted and pressed) while the substrate box 1320 is bent to the side opposite to the inclined surface portion 1320i. By bending and supporting the harness C3 connected to the connector member C1 to the side opposite to the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320 by the cover portion 1321 in this way, the colorless and transparent cover portion 1321 can be seen from the colorless and transparent inclined surface portion 1320i. It is possible to check whether there are any traces of tampering inside the board box 1320 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 277, the cover portion 1321 is provided with a large number of ventilation holes 1321a for heat dissipation corresponding to a heat dissipation structure to be described later. The entire surface of the corresponding portion (for example, the portion that includes the entire inclined surface portion 1320i when viewed straight from the front surface portion 1320a) is a non-porous and smooth surface. By doing so, the inside of the board box 1320 can be easily visually checked through the cover portion 1321 and the inclined surface portion 1320i.

It should be noted that the cover portion 1321 is not limited to the configuration in which it is attached to the board box 1320 as shown in FIG. 5, and specifically, the back cover 640 described above can be used as the cover portion 1321. As shown in FIG. By doing so, since the cover part 1321 and the board box 1320 are separated from each other, it is possible to replace only the control unit.
Furthermore, when the cover part 1321 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, the board box 1320, other devices connected to the control part in the board box 1320 by the harness C3, and the cover part 1321 are combined. Since they are attached, the game board 5 can be quickly attached and detached while maintaining their relationship.

[29-6. Control unit heat dissipation structure]
The configurations of the control unit crime prevention structures (a) and (b) described above are also useful as a heat dissipation structure for the control unit.
That is, the upper surface portion 1320c of the substrate box 1320 is provided with the inclined surface portion 1320i described in the crime prevention structures (a) and (b), and among the circuit components mounted on the substrate 1310t of the control unit, the amount of heat generated is Many high-heat-generating components 1322 are arranged above the board 1310t and below the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320 without placing other circuit components therebetween. Incidentally, the high heat generation component 1322 referred to here corresponds to, for example, a PMOSFET or a driver IC for driving a drive source such as the starter solenoid 2404 or the attacker solenoid 2405 in FIG.
Of course, the heat generated by the circuit components, especially the high heat generating components 1322 , rises within the board box 1320 . Then, the heat is radiated to the outside mainly using the upper surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320 as a heat radiation surface. At this time, in the substrate box 1320 of the embodiment, since the temperature is higher above the inclined surface portion 1320i provided on the upper surface portion 1320c and lower than that below the inclined surface portion 1320i, the temperature difference between the upper and lower portions causes an air flow along the inclination of the outer surface of the inclined surface portion 1320i. can occur. Therefore, heat dissipation performance can be improved.
In addition, by arranging the high heat generating component 1322 above and between the substrate 1310t without arranging other circuit components, the heat is quickly dissipated from the upper surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320, so that the other circuit components become hot. can also reduce the risk of exposure to

The configuration of the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320 is the same as that described in the crime prevention structures (a) and (b). It is good to form it in the whole area. By doing so, it is possible to maximize the effective length of the inclined surface portion 1320i, which is advantageous for improving the heat dissipation performance.

In addition, the inclined surface portion 1320i of the substrate box 1320 is preferably formed with a vertical surface portion 1320g on the edge of the substrate 1310t side as shown in FIG. By doing so, the heat collected on the upper surface portion 1320c and the inclined surface portion 1320i is radiated to the outside through the vertical surface portion 1320g, so that the temperature rise in the substrate box 1320 can be suppressed more effectively.
In addition, the heat transmitted to the vertical surface portion 1320g is transmitted from the substrate 1310t to the connector member C1 and radiated to the outside through the connector opening 1320h, so that the risk of being exposed to high temperatures can be further reduced.
The connector member C1 is preferably arranged on the solid pattern of the substrate 1310t. This is because the solid pattern of the substrate 1310t has better heat transfer properties than the surrounding insulating portion, so more heat is dissipated through the connector member C1.
Moreover, it is preferable that the connector members C1 are provided in a plurality, and the respective connector members C1 are arranged at predetermined intervals. This is because the use of a plurality of connector members C1 makes it possible to dissipate more heat, and by providing a predetermined gap between the connector members C1 to ensure air permeability, the heat dissipation performance can be further enhanced. Because we can.
Furthermore, the connector member C1 is preferably mounted so as to overlap with the high heat generation component 1322 in plan view (when viewed from the upper surface portion 1320c side). By mounting the high heat generating component 1322 and the connector member C1 so as to overlap in the vertical direction in this manner, the heat generated from the high heat generating component 1322 can be efficiently transferred to the connector member C1 in the shortest distance.

270 and 271, the high heat generation component 1322 of the control unit is divided into a plurality of parts for each circuit and formed in the same shape as shown in FIG. and space them apart.
In this way, by dividing the high-heat-generating components 1322 into a plurality (four circuits in this embodiment) for each circuit and arranging them with a gap between them, the sources of heat generation are dispersed and the substrate box 1320 is tilted. The heat dissipation effect of the surface portion 1320i can be effectively utilized.
In addition, the individual high-heat-generating components 1322 divided for each circuit should be arranged in such a direction that the maximum length in the vertical direction is greater than the maximum length in the horizontal direction. For example, each high-heat-generating component 1322 shown in FIG. 275 has a half-cylindrical shape (a so-called semicylindrical shape), the maximum length in the vertical direction is approximately the diameter of a circle, and the maximum length in the horizontal direction is approximately the diameter of a circle. The radius of a circle, and so on. By doing so, it is possible to arrange more high-heat-generating components 1322 corresponding to the inclined surface portion 1320i of the board box 1320, or to set a wider interval between adjacent components in a limited space. be able to.

Furthermore, as in the crime prevention structure (b) described above, when the cover portion 1321 that can be opened and closed covers the connector member C1 from the front face portion 1320a side of the board box 1320 in a state orthogonal to the insertion direction of the connector member C1. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 277, the cover portion 1321 may be provided with a large number of ventilation holes 1321a for heat dissipation. The ventilation hole 1321a provided in the cover portion 1321 is provided at a position higher than the connector member C1 when the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, heat radiated from the high-heat-generating component 1332 through the inclined surface portion 1320i and the connector member C1 can be effectively released to the outside through the ventilation holes 1321a of the cover portion 1321. FIG. In addition, the cover portion 1321 blocks insertion of a foreign object from the insertion direction of the connector member C1, thereby improving deterrence against fraud. Note that the cover portion 1321 is not limited to being attached to the circuit board box 1320 as described in the crime prevention structure (b), and can be detachably mounted on the rear surface of the body frame 4 or on the body frame 4, for example. It may be attached to the rear surface of the mounted game board 5 , and specifically, the back cover 640 described above may be used as the cover portion 1321 .

Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of control units, and as shown in FIG. In such a case, the upper peripheral control unit 1400 may be affected by the heat released from the lower main control unit 1300 by the heat dissipation structure described above. A heat dissipation structure similar to that on the upper surface portion 1320c side may be adopted on the portion 1320d side.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276, the upper control unit (main control unit 1300) employs the heat dissipation structure described above for the upper surface portion 1320c of the board box 1320, and the upper control unit (peripheral control unit 1400) (in order to distinguish the board box 1320 of the control unit located above from the board box 1320 of the control unit located below, the board box 1320 of the control unit located above will be referred to as the board box 1320 of the control unit below for convenience of explanation). An undercut inclined surface portion 1320i that inclines upward toward the front surface portion 1320a may be provided on the lower surface portion 1320d of the second substrate box. By doing so, the heat rising from the substrate box 1320 located below is diffused outward toward the front surface portion 1320a along the inclined surface portion 1320i provided on the lower surface portion 1320d of the second substrate box 1320. Heat is less likely to be trapped between the box 1320 and the second board box 1320 .
Furthermore, a lower vertical surface portion 1320j is formed along the substrate 1310t by bending the substrate 1310t side vertically downward on the lower surface portion 1320d of the second substrate box 1320, and a connector opening 1320h is formed in the lower vertical surface portion 1320j. A connector member C1 provided on the substrate 1310t may be protruded. By doing so, part of the heat from the board box 1320 located below is blocked by the connector member C1 of the second board box 1320 and diffuses outward, and the rest of the heat is also transferred to the bottom surface of the second board box 1320. Since the heat is diffused outward along the inclined surface portion 1320i provided in the portion 1320d, it becomes more difficult for the heat to remain between the board box 1320 and the second board box 1320. FIG.

[29-7. Regarding technical ideas]
As is clear from the explanation so far, the above pachinko machine 1, especially the above [29-5-1. Security structure of control unit (a)] to [29-6. Heat Dissipation Structure of Control Unit] corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea. It should be noted that all of the above explanations of the pachinko machine 1 are the same as those described in [29-5-1. Security structure of control unit (a)] to [29-6. heat dissipation structure of control unit].

[29-7-S1. Technical means S1]
a transparent synthetic resin substrate box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, an upper surface, a lower surface, and left and right side surfaces;
a control unit that is housed in the board box and has a component mounting surface of a board having a large number of circuit components facing the front surface of the board box so as to be visible from the outside. ,
The substrate box is provided with an inclined surface portion that inclines downward toward the front surface portion on the upper surface portion with reference to the direction in which the front surface portion is vertical when installed in the game machine,
The control unit places high-heat-generating components, which generate a large amount of heat, among the circuit components mounted on the substrate, above the substrate and below the inclined surface portion of the substrate box, and places another circuit therebetween. A game machine characterized by arranging components in a state where they are not arranged.
The heat generated by circuit components, particularly high-heat-generating components, rises in the board box and is radiated to the outside mainly using the upper surface as a heat-dissipating surface. In this board box, the temperature is higher above the inclined surface provided on the upper surface and lower than that below, so that the temperature difference between the upper and lower surfaces can cause an air flow along the inclination of the outer surface of the inclined surface. Therefore, heat dissipation performance can be improved.
In addition, by arranging high-heat-generating components above the board without placing other circuit components between them, the heat is quickly dissipated from the upper surface of the board box, and there is a risk that other circuit components will be exposed to high temperatures. can also be reduced.

[29-7-S2. Technical means S2]
The game machine according to technical means S1, wherein the inclined surface portion of the board box is formed over the entire front-rear direction of the upper surface portion.
By forming the entire area of the top surface of the board box in the front-rear direction as the inclined surface portion, the effective length of the inclined surface portion, which is advantageous for improving the heat dissipation performance, can be maximized.

[29-7-S3. Technical means S3]
The game machine according to technical means S1 or S2, wherein the upper surface portion of the substrate box is formed by bending an end on the substrate side vertically upward to form a vertical surface portion along the substrate. .
Since the heat collected on the upper surface portion and the inclined surface portion is also radiated from the vertical surface portion, it is possible to more effectively suppress the temperature rise inside the board box.

[29-7-S4. Technical means S4]
Any one of technical means S1 to S3, wherein the high heat generating components are provided with a plurality of components having the same shape but different circuits, and are arranged at predetermined intervals. or the game machine according to one.
By dividing the high-heat-generating components into multiple parts for each circuit and arranging them with a gap between them, the heat-generating sources can be dispersed and the heat-dissipating effect of the slanted surface of the board box can be effectively utilized. .

[29-7-S5. Technical means S5]
The game machine according to technical means S4, wherein the high-heat-generating components are arranged in a direction in which the maximum length in the vertical direction is larger than the maximum length in the horizontal direction when installed in the game machine.
By arranging the high-heat-generating components so that the maximum length in the vertical direction is larger than the maximum length in the horizontal direction, it is possible to arrange more components corresponding to the inclined surface portion of the board box, or in a limited space. , the distance between neighbors can be set wider.

[29-7-S6. Technical means S6]
Like the substrate box, it is surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces, and is made of transparent synthetic resin and contains a control unit different from the control unit. comprising a second substrate box,
The second board box is installed above the board box, and the lower surface of the second board box facing the upper surface of the board box is provided with an inclined surface part inclined upward toward the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of technical means S1 to S5, characterized in that:
According to such a game machine, the heat generated from the board box positioned below is diffused outward along the inclined surface provided on the lower surface of the second board box toward the outside of the front side. Heat is less likely to be trapped between the box and the second substrate box.

[29-7-S7. Technical means S7]
The lower surface portion of the second substrate box is formed by bending the substrate side vertically downward to form a lower vertical surface portion along the substrate. A game machine according to technical means S6, characterized in that the connector member protrudes.
According to such a game machine, part of the heat from the board box located below is blocked by the connector member and diffuses outward, and the other heat is also transferred to the inclined surface provided on the lower surface of the second board box. , the heat is less likely to be trapped between the substrate box and the second substrate box.

[29-7-T1. technical means T1]
a transparent synthetic resin substrate box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, an upper surface, a lower surface, and left and right side surfaces;
a control unit that is housed in the board box and has a component mounting surface of a board having a large number of circuit components opposed to the front part of the board box so that it can be viewed from the outside. ,
The substrate box has a vertical surface portion along the substrate by bending an end of the upper surface portion on the substrate side vertically upward with reference to the direction in which the front surface portion is vertical when installed in the game machine. A connector opening is provided through the vertical surface,
The control unit arranges high-heat-generating components that generate a large amount of heat among the circuit components mounted on the board above the board and below the top surface of the board box, and A gaming machine characterized in that a connector member for connecting with an external device is provided further above the vertical surface portion, and the connector member protrudes outside from the connector opening of the vertical surface portion.
Heat emitted from circuit components, particularly high-heat-generating components, rises in the board box and is radiated to the outside mainly using the upper surface as a heat radiation surface. According to the present invention, by arranging high-heat-generating components above the substrate and quickly dissipating the heat in the board box from the upper surface, it is possible to reduce the risk of exposing other circuit components to high temperatures. Moreover, the heat is transmitted from the substrate to the connector member and radiated to the outside through the connector opening, so that the risk of exposure to high temperatures can be further reduced.

[29-7-T2. technical means T2]
A gaming machine according to technical means T1, wherein an inclined surface portion inclined downward toward the front surface portion is provided on the upper surface portion of the board box located above the high heat generating components of the control portion.
Since the substrate box has a high temperature above the inclined surface provided on the upper surface and a lower temperature below it, the temperature difference between the upper and lower surfaces tends to generate an air flow along the inclination along the outer surface of the inclined surface. Therefore, heat dissipation performance can be improved.

[29-7-T3. technical means T3]
The game machine according to technical means T1 or T2, wherein the connector member is arranged on a solid pattern of the board.
Since the solid pattern of the substrate has better heat conductivity than the surrounding insulating portion, more heat is dissipated through the connector member.

[29-7-T4. technical means T4]
A game machine according to any one of technical means T1 to T3, wherein a plurality of connector members are provided, and the respective connector members are arranged at predetermined intervals.
By providing a plurality of connector members, it becomes possible to dissipate more heat, and furthermore, by providing a predetermined gap between the connector members to ensure ventilation, it is possible to further improve the heat dissipation performance.

[29-7-T5. technical means T5]
The game machine according to any one of technical means T1 to T4, wherein the high-heat-generating component is mounted so as to overlap the connector member in plan view.
By vertically overlapping the high heat generation component and the connector member, the heat generated from the high heat generation component is efficiently transmitted to the connector member in the shortest distance, so that more heat is released to the outside from there.

[29-7-U1. technical means U1]
a transparent synthetic resin substrate box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, an upper surface, a lower surface, and left and right side surfaces;
a control unit that is housed in the board box and has a component mounting surface of a board having a large number of circuit components opposed to the front part of the board box so that it can be viewed from the outside. ,
The substrate box has a vertical surface portion along the substrate by bending an end of the upper surface portion on the substrate side vertically upward with reference to the direction in which the front surface portion is vertical when installed in the game machine. A connector opening is provided through the vertical surface,
The control unit arranges high-heat-generating components that generate a large amount of heat among the circuit components mounted on the board above the board and below the top surface of the board box, and further above the connector member for connecting with an external device through the connector opening,
The game machine further comprises an openable/closable cover portion which has a large number of ventilation holes and which covers the connector member from the front side of the board box in a state perpendicular to the insertion direction of the connector member.
Heat emitted from circuit components, particularly high-heat-generating components, rises in the board box and is radiated to the outside mainly using the upper surface as a heat radiation surface. According to the present invention, by arranging high-heat-generating components above the substrate and quickly dissipating the heat in the board box from the upper surface, it is possible to reduce the risk of exposing other circuit components to high temperatures. Moreover, the heat is transferred from the board to the connector member, and the heat emitted from the connector member can be released to the outside through a large number of ventilation holes provided in the cover portion.
In addition, since the connector member is covered from the front side of the board box by the cover portion, insertion of foreign matter from the insertion direction of the connector member is blocked. Therefore, the deterrence against fraud targeting the connector member is improved.

[29-7-U2. technical means U2]
A gaming machine according to technical means U1, wherein an inclined surface portion inclined downward toward the front surface portion is provided on the upper surface portion of the board box located above the high heat generating components of the control portion.
Since the substrate box has a high temperature above the inclined surface provided on the upper surface and a lower temperature below it, an air flow is likely to occur along the inclination of the inclined surface due to the temperature difference between the upper and lower surfaces. Therefore, heat dissipation performance can be improved.

[29-7-U3. technical means U3]
The game machine according to technical means U1 or U2, wherein the connector member is arranged on a solid pattern of the board.
Since the solid pattern of the substrate has better heat conductivity than the surrounding insulating portion, more heat is dissipated through the connector member.

[29-7-U4. technical means U4]
The game machine according to any one of technical means U1 to U3, wherein a plurality of connector members are provided, and the connector members are arranged at predetermined intervals.
By providing a plurality of connector members, it is possible to dissipate more heat, and by providing a predetermined gap between the connector members to ensure air permeability, the heat dissipation performance can be further enhanced.

[29-7-U5. technical means U5]
The game machine according to any one of technical means U1 to U4, wherein the high heat generating component is mounted so as to overlap with the connector member in plan view.
By overlapping the high heat generation component and the connector member in the vertical direction, the heat generated from the high heat generation component is efficiently transmitted to the connector member in the shortest distance, so that more heat is released to the outside from there.

[29-7-U6. technical means U6]
The gaming machine according to any one of technical means U1 to U5, wherein the ventilation hole provided in the cover portion is provided at a position above the connector opening.
In such a game machine, the heat that is radiated from the high-heat-generating component through the inclined surface portion and the connector member and rises can be effectively released to the outside through the ventilation holes of the cover portion.

[29-7-U7. technical means U7]
Technical means U1 to technical means characterized in that the cover part has a size capable of covering substantially the entire back side of the game board and is attached to the game board or a main body frame having the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of U6.
By covering substantially the entire back side of the game board with the cover portion, it becomes possible to guard the connector member more firmly.

The technical means S1 to U7 described above correspond to the following [background art], [problems to be solved], and [objects and effects of the invention].
[Background technology]
A gaming machine is provided with a control section (also called a "main control section" or a "control device") for controlling a game, for example. This control unit is made up of a large number of circuit components (electronic components) mounted on the component mounting surface of the board. ) is enclosed in a transparent synthetic resin substrate box (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-24146).
[Problems to be solved]
The circuit components of the control unit include those that generate high heat, such as electronic components (PMOSFETs and driver ICs) that drive driving sources (e.g., solenoids) of production devices that have movable parts (hereinafter referred to as "high heat generation configuration (Also referred to as “parts”).
Therefore, when the game machine is in operation, the inside of the board box may become hot due to the heat emitted from the high-heat-generating components, causing the inside of the board box to overheat and the moving parts of the production device to malfunction. there was a risk of
As a countermeasure against overheating in such a board box, many techniques have been developed including Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-24146, but the structure is complicated and extra cost is required. It was something.
[Purpose and effect of the invention]
To provide a game machine capable of taking measures against overheating in a board box at a low cost.

[29-7-V1. Technical means V1]
a transparent synthetic resin substrate box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces and having a sealing portion;
The component mounting surface of a board which is housed in the board box in a sealed state with the sealing part and has a large number of circuit components faces the front part of the board box so that it can be visually recognized from the outside. A gaming machine comprising a control unit,
The substrate box is
At least one of the upper surface portion, the lower surface portion, the left side surface portion, and the right side surface portion of the board box is provided with the above-mentioned A vertical surface portion along the substrate is formed by bending the edge of the substrate side opposite to the front surface portion vertically, and a connector member provided on the substrate is protruded from a connector opening opened in the vertical surface portion,
On the other hand, the gaming machine is characterized in that an inclined surface portion inclined inwardly of the front surface portion is provided on one of the upper surface portion, the lower surface portion, and the left or right side surface portion which has the vertical surface portion. .
The slanted surface makes it easier to see through the bottom of the top surface of the circuit board box, making it difficult to hide the hole. can do. Also, even if fraud is committed, the existence of holes can be found relatively easily, so it is possible to minimize damage.

[29-7-V2. Technical means V2]
The game machine according to technical means V1, wherein the lower surface portion of the board box is provided with an inclined surface portion that inclines inwardly of the front surface portion regardless of the presence or absence of the vertical surface portion.
Even if a hole for unauthorized work is made in the upper surface of the board box or the like, foreign matter such as shavings at that time tends to collect at the lower part of the inclined surface of the lower surface, so that traces of unauthorized work can be easily found.

[29-7-V3. Technical means V3]
technical means V1 or A gaming machine according to technical means V2.
It is necessary to avoid the connector member in order to make a hole in the top surface or the like with a drill, and in that case the hole is inevitably made on the inclined surface and is conspicuous.

[29-7-W1. Technical means W1]
a transparent synthetic resin substrate box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces and having a sealing portion;
The component mounting surface of a board which is housed in the board box in a sealed state with the sealing part and has a large number of circuit components faces the front part of the board box so that it can be visually recognized from the outside. A gaming machine comprising a control unit,
The substrate box is
Based on the direction in which the front surface is vertical when installed in the game machine, the edge of the substrate side opposite to the front surface is bent vertically to the upper surface portion and/or the lower surface portion of the substrate box. forming a vertical surface portion along the substrate, and protruding a connector member provided on the substrate from a connector opening opened in the vertical surface portion;
On the other hand, the upper surface portion and/or the lower surface portion having the vertical surface portion is provided with an inclined surface portion that inclines toward the inside of the front surface portion,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is characterized in that the inclined surface portion is formed so as to communicate with the outside of the side surface portion.
Since the depth in the front-to-rear direction of the upper or lower surface of the board box can be easily seen through the inclined surface, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the connector member as a cover by opening a hole in the upper or lower surface for tampering. can do. Moreover, by forming the inclined surface portion so as to communicate with the outside of the side surface portion, visibility from the lateral direction of the board box is improved, so that the fraud prevention effect described above can be further enhanced.

[29-7-W2. Technical means W2]
The circuit board box is disposed on the rear side of a door frame attached to the front side of the game machine in a door-like rotatable state,
On the other hand, the inclined surface portion of the board box communicates with at least the edge side of the door frame on the counter-rotational center side of the left and right side portions. A gaming machine according to technical means W1.
By forming the inclined surface portion of the substrate box so as to communicate with the outside of the side surface portion on the edge side of the counter-rotation center side of the door frame, when the door frame is opened and the rear surface side is viewed, the side surface of the inclined surface portion can be Since the entire gap between the upper or lower surface part of the board box and the connector member can be easily seen from the part that communicates with the outside of the board box, it is easy to detect fraud such as using the connector member as a cover.

[29-7-W3. Technical means W3]
The inclined surface portion of the board box is formed so that the entire front-rear direction of the upper surface portion or the lower surface portion is inclined, and both the left and right side surface portions are communicated with the outside. The gaming machine according to technical means W1 or technical means W2.
By forming the inclined surface portion of the board box over the entire front-rear direction of the upper surface portion or the lower surface portion and communicating with the outside of both the left and right side surface portions, the upper surface portion or the lower surface portion of the board box and the connector member are connected. Since the whole gap can be easily seen through, it is possible to obtain a high anti-fraud effect.

[29-7-X1. Technical means X1]
a transparent synthetic resin substrate box surrounded by a front surface, a rear surface, a top surface, a bottom surface, and left and right side surfaces and having a sealing portion;
The component mounting surface of a board which is housed in the board box in a sealed state with the sealing part and has a large number of circuit components faces the front part of the board box so that it can be visually recognized from the outside. A gaming machine comprising a control unit,
The substrate box is arranged on at least one of the upper surface portion, the lower surface portion, and the left or right side surface portion of the substrate box with reference to the orientation in which the front portion is vertical when installed in the game machine. a vertical surface portion along the substrate is formed by vertically bending an edge of the substrate opposite to the front surface portion, and a connector member provided on the substrate is protruded from a connector opening formed in the vertical surface portion; , wherein one of the upper surface portion, the lower surface portion, and the left or right side surface portion having the vertical surface portion is provided with an inclined surface portion inclined inwardly of the front surface portion,
The game machine further comprises an openable/closable cover portion covering the connector member from the front side of the board box in a state orthogonal to the insertion direction of the connector member.
Since the connector member is covered from the front side of the board box by the cover part, and foreign matter is blocked from being inserted in the connector member insertion direction, deterrence against fraud targeting the connector member is improved.

[29-7-X2. Technical means X2]
The cover portion is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and covers the connector member from the front surface portion side of the board box, and the harness connected to the connector member A game machine according to technical means X1, characterized in that it can be supported in a bent state.
By bending and supporting the harness connected to the connector member to the opposite side of the inclined surface of the board box by the cover part, the inside of the board box can be seen from the inclined surface part through the colorless and transparent cover part. becomes easier.

[29-7-X3. Technical means X3]
The game machine according to technical means X2, wherein at least a portion of the cover portion corresponding to the inclined surface portion of the board box has no holes and a smooth surface.
By making the portion of the cover corresponding to the inclined surface of the board box smooth and non-porous, the inside of the board box can be easily visually checked through the cover and the inclined surface.

[29-7-X4. Technical means X4]
The game machine according to any one of technical means X1 to X3, wherein the cover portion is attached to a rear surface of a game board detachably attached to the body frame.
Since the cover part and the board box are separated from each other, only the board box can be replaced, so there is no possibility that the undamaged cover part will be wasted.
In addition, since the circuit board box, another device connected to the control unit in the circuit board box by a harness, and the cover part are all attached to the rear surface of the game board, the game board can maintain the relationship between them. can be attached and detached quickly.

The technical means V1 to X4 described above correspond to the following [background art], [problems to be solved], and [purposes and effects of the invention].
[Background technology]
A gaming machine is provided with, for example, a control unit (also referred to as a “main control unit” or a “control device”) for controlling a game. This control unit is made up of a large number of circuit components (electronic components) mounted on the component mounting surface of the board. ) are housed in a sealed state in a transparent substrate box made of synthetic resin (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-301407).
In such a conventional board box, the edge of the board side opposite to the front part is vertically bent to one side part of the board box, with the front part being vertical when installed in the game machine. A vertical surface portion is formed along the substrate, and a connector member provided on the substrate projects from a connector opening formed in the vertical surface portion.
[Problems to be solved]
In the board box of the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the side surface of the connector member is almost parallel to the surface such as the upper surface and is positioned very close to them. It is hard to see because it is hidden behind the parts. Therefore, there is a possibility that a fraudulent person may target and perforate such a site and insert a foreign object therethrough to fraudulently manipulate the control unit. Also, there is a possibility that the discovery will be delayed due to being obstructed by the connector member.
[Purpose and effect of the invention]
To provide a game machine in which illegal work on a board box is hardly performed.

[30. Improvement of workability]
In recent years, society as a whole is aging, and therefore, specifications of the pachinko machine 1 that are easy to work for workers of a wide range of age groups are required.
From this point of view, the embodiment of FIGS. 278 to 280 is devised to improve workability for workers of a wide age range.

[30-1. back cover]
First, the rear surface of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 is covered with the back cover 640 as already described with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the game board 5 is also substantially covered with the back cover 640 including the setting switches 1311a and setting change switches 1311b as shown in FIG. The back cover 640 is rotatably pivoted on the rear surface of the main body frame 4 at the vertical side located on the hinge portion side of the door frame 3 or the like. In this case, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 like a one-sided door to expose the main control unit 1300, and to operate the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b sequentially. Needless to say, covering the main control unit 1300 with the back cover 640 is effective for crime prevention. However, in order to open the back cover 640, the heavy door frame 3 and the body frame 4 must be opened almost completely. In view of the actual situation at the site where setting changes of a large number of pachinko machines 1 must be efficiently performed in a short period of time before the opening of the store, it is a heavy burden for those who are inferior in physical strength, such as women and the elderly.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 278, the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 are arranged at a low position, and the height of the back cover 640 is set with the setting switch 1311a. By shortening the length so as not to overlap the change switch 1311b, the back cover 640 does not cover the portion corresponding to the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300. FIG. As a result, the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 can be operated with the back cover 640 closed only by opening the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 to the necessary minimum. Changing the value can be done easily even by women and elderly people who are inferior in terms of physical strength. A similar effect can be achieved by shortening the length of the back cover 640, or by providing the back cover 640 with window holes having sizes and shapes corresponding to the setting switches 1311a and the setting change switches 1311b.

If there is a concern that the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 are out of the protection of the back cover 640 and the crime prevention performance is lowered, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, an openable/closable switch cover 640sw limited to the setting change switch 1311b may be provided. This switch cover 640sw is rotatably pivoted on a bearing 642sw projecting from the board box 1320 as shown in FIG. It may be pivoted if possible.
The switch cover 640sw here is not limited to one that covers both the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b, and may have a size and form that covers only one of them. This is because both the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b must be operated to change the setting value, and if one of them is covered, the necessary crime prevention effect can be obtained.

In order to operate the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b of the main control unit 1300 in the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to open the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and then open the switch cover 640sw. Since 640sw is sufficiently smaller than the back cover 640, there is almost no increase in the burden of labor for opening and closing. There is little increase in overall effort required. On the other hand, since the setting switch 1311a and/or the setting change switch 1311b are protected by the switch cover 640sw, crime prevention performance is surely improved.

[30-2. Arrangement of setting indicator, setting switch, and setting change switch]
As described above, the control unit (for example, the main control unit 1300) includes a setting switch 1311a for setting a set value related to the winning probability of a lottery that gives a player a predetermined profit, and a setting change switch 1311b for changing the set value. , a setting display 1310g that luminesces and displays a setting value in a visible manner, and a power switch 630a, and the setting switch 1311a, the setting change switch 1311b, and the power switch 630a can be operated from the rear side of the body frame 4. 278, the setting display 1310g (this embodiment) is arranged so as to be visible from the rear surface side of the body frame 4. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Then, use the one digit on the right end of the 7-segment display that constitutes the base monitor 1310h.) is the vertical center line of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 The line is almost the same) and placed closer to the hinge side.

An operation for changing the set values of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility involves opening the main body frame 4 together with the door frame 3 into a single-opening door shape, and placing the rear surface of the main body frame 4 on the indoor side of the game hall. In the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 1310h for displaying the setting value is provided at a position closer to the hinge portion than the vertical center line of the body frame 4, so that the body frame An appropriate distance can be provided from the eye position of a worker who works standing on the open side of 4. Therefore, it is possible to make the set values easily visible to workers in a wide range of age groups, especially older workers. Moreover, since the setting display 1310h is provided closer to the hinge part side of the main body frame 4, it is less likely to be affected by the lighting in the game hall and the dramatic lighting of other pachinko machines 1, so that misreading can occur. Erroneous input of setting values can be reduced.
In addition, even if it is necessary to check the setting value of the setting display 1310g during business hours, the setting display 1310g is positioned closer to the hinge portion of the main body frame 4 so that it cannot be seen by the player. It also makes it easier to hide in

Also, as shown in FIG. 278, the setting change switch 1311b is arranged at a position closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.
In general, to change the setting value, hold the opened body frame 4 with one hand (for example, the left hand) and operate the setting switch 1311a with the other hand (for example, the right hand). In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the setting change switch 1311b is provided closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the body frame 4, so that the body frame Setting change operation can be performed in the vicinity of the center of the body in a posture in which 4 is open.
Therefore, since the movement of the hand is stabilized, the work of changing settings can be carried out efficiently, and since the range of movement of the operating hand is also reduced, the burden (fatigue) on the operator's arm can be reduced. can.

Also, as shown in FIG. 278, a setting switch 1311a is arranged between the vertical center line of the body frame 4 and the setting change switch 1311b.
Therefore, since the setting switch 1311a and the setting change switch 1311b are arranged close to the opening side of the main body frame 4, the setting switch 1311a is operated immediately after opening the main body frame 4, and then the setting change switch 1311b is immediately operated. can be operated by moving the Since the range of movement of the operating hand can be kept near the center of the body, the burden on the operator's arm during the setting change operation can be reduced. Therefore, combined with the ease of recognition of the setting display 1310g, it is possible to change the settings of a large number of pachinko machines 1 with little effort, in a short time and accurately.

[30-3. Technical thought β]
The above embodiment includes a technical idea β for the following problems.

[30-3-1. Task]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, society as a whole is aging, and therefore, there is a demand for game machines with specifications that can accommodate workers of a wide age range.
When the conventional game machines were reviewed from this point of view, it was found that there was a configuration that was particularly disadvantageous for elderly and female workers.
For example, in a conventional gaming machine capable of changing a set value related to the winning probability of a lottery that gives a predetermined profit to a player, a setting indicator that emits light to display the set value is provided near the edge on the open side of the body frame. However, as it is, it is difficult for older workers to see it, and there is a risk that they may misunderstand the display of the set value. This is because the setting display of the game machine is often provided below the main body frame, lower than the line of sight of the worker, due to the arrangement of other parts. This is because it is difficult to focus. Furthermore, since the open side of the main body frame is positionally susceptible to the indoor lighting of the game hall and the dramatic lighting of other game machines, the lighting is reflected on the surface of the setting display. The display itself may become difficult to see.

The technical idea β has been made in view of the above, and its purpose is to provide a game machine in which work such as maintenance can be easily performed.

[30-3-2-β1. Technical thought β1]
an outer frame;
a body frame supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable like a single door;
a game board detachably attached to the body frame;
a control unit that controls the game;
a power switch for supplying power to at least the control unit;
The control unit is
a setting switch for setting a set value relating to a winning probability of a lottery that gives a predetermined profit to a player;
a setting change switch for changing the setting value;
A gaming machine having a setting indicator that visibly emits and displays the setting value,
The setting switch, the setting change switch, and the power switch are arranged so as to be operable from the rear side of the body frame, and the setting indicator is provided so as to be visible from the rear side of the body frame. ,
A gaming machine, wherein the setting display is arranged at a position closer to the hinge portion than the vertical center line of the body frame.
The operation of changing the setting values of the game machines installed in the island facilities is performed with the body frame opened like a one-sided door and the rear surface of the body frame facing the indoor side of the game hall. In the game machine, the setting display for displaying the setting value is provided at a position closer to the hinge part than the vertical center line of the main body frame, so that it is easy for the worker standing on the open side of the main body frame to work. A reasonable distance from the location can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make the set values easily visible to workers in a wide range of age groups, especially older workers. In addition, since the setting display is located closer to the hinge part of the main body frame, it is less susceptible to the lighting in the game hall and the dramatic lighting of other game machines, so it is possible to change the setting value due to misreading. Erroneous input can be reduced.
In addition, even if it is necessary to check the setting value of the setting display during business hours, the setting display can be hidden from the player by locating it near the hinge part of the body frame. It also has the effect of facilitating

[30-3-2-β2. Technical thought β2]
A game machine according to technical concept β1, wherein the setting change switch is arranged at a position closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the body frame.
In general, to change the setting value, hold the open body frame with one hand (for example, the left hand), operate the setting switch with the other hand (for example, the right hand), and then move that hand to the setting change switch side. However, in this game machine, the setting change switch is located closer to the open side than the vertical center line of the body frame, so when the body frame is open, the switch can be operated near the center of the body. can be used to change settings.
Therefore, since the movement of the hand is stabilized, the work of changing settings can be carried out efficiently, and since the range of movement of the operating hand is also reduced, the burden (fatigue) on the operator's arm can be reduced. can.

[30-3-2-β3. Technical thought β3]
A gaming machine according to technical idea β2, wherein the setting switch is arranged between the vertical center line of the body frame and the setting change switch.
In such a game machine, since the setting switch and the setting change switch are arranged close to the open side of the main frame, the setting switch is operated immediately after opening the main frame, and then the hand is moved to the setting change switch immediately. can be manipulated. Therefore, since the range of movement of the operating hand can be kept near the center of the body, the burden on the operator's arm during the setting change operation can be reduced. Therefore, combined with the ease of recognition of the setting display, it is possible to change the settings of a large number of game machines with little effort, in a short time and accurately.

[30-3-2-β4. Technical thought β4]
The game machine according to any one of technical ideas β1 to β3, wherein the setting switch and the setting change switch are provided on one board box.
By housing the setting switch and the setting change switch in one board box, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access from the outside targeting the connecting portion of the setting switch and the setting change switch.

[30-3-2-β5. Technical thought β5]
The gaming machine according to technical idea β4, wherein the setting switch and the setting change switch are mounted on one substrate.
In such a game machine, since the setting switch and the setting change switch are connected via one board inside one board box, it is less likely to be illegally operated from the outside compared to the case where a harness is interposed between the two switches. Access can be made more difficult.

As described above, the present invention has been described with preferred embodiments and other forms, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments and the like, and as shown below, within the scope of the present invention, , various modifications and design variations are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment and the like, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4000 substrate 4400 substrate 4001 electronic component 4001x joining member 4001x (S) joining member 4004 resin body 4005 side surface 4006 terminal piece

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising a board box for holding a board controlling the lottery, wherein a lottery is held based on the establishment of a starting condition, a profit is awarded based on the result of the lottery, and a board for controlling the lottery is housed,
The substrate box has a vertical surface portion formed by bending an end of the upper surface portion vertically upward when installed in the game machine, and a connector opening is provided through the vertical surface portion,
The circuit board accommodated in the circuit board box is configured so that components that generate a large amount of heat are arranged above the circuit board and below the upper surface of the circuit board box, and are connected to an external device further above the circuit board. A gaming machine characterized in that a connector member is provided, and the connector member protrudes outside from the connector opening of the vertical surface portion.

Images